Tekla Structure System - Tutorial

Tekla Structures
System Manual
Product version 14.0

April 2008
© 2008 Tekla Corporation
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
© 2008 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this
Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain
warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted
uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. Please refer to the License
Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and
criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product and
company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-
party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and
disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd.
EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.
XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.
DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights
reserved.
FLEXnet Copyright © 2006 Macrovision Corporation and/or Macrovision Europe Ltd. All Rights Reserved. This
product contains proprietary and confidential technology provided by and owned by Macrovision Europe Ltd., UK, and
Macrovision Corporation of Santa Clara, California, U.S.A. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display,
modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior
express written permission of Macrovision Europe Ltd. and Macrovision Corporation is strictly prohibited. Except
where expressly provided by Macrovision Europe Ltd. and Macrovision Corporation in writing, possession of this
technology shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any of Macrovision Europe Ltd. and
Macrovision Corporation’s intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
Elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European
Union and/or other countries.
Contents
Preface .............................................................................................................37
Audience ........................................................................................................................................................... 37
Additional help resources .................................................................................................................................. 37
Conventions used in this guide ......................................................................................................................... 38
Related guides .................................................................................................................................................. 39
1 Using Tekla Structures effectively......................................................... 41

1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................. 41
Firm and project folders ................................................................................................................... 42
Numbering series ............................................................................................................................. 42
Phases ............................................................................................................................................. 42
Catalogs ........................................................................................................................................... 42
Preferences...................................................................................................................................... 43
Profile names ............................................................................................................................ 43
Connections .............................................................................................................................. 43
Edge distance ............................................................................................................................ 43
Recording and running macros ........................................................................................................ 44
Warning messages .......................................................................................................................... 45
1.2 Modeling ............................................................................................................................................... 45
Automating the detailing process ..................................................................................................... 45
Predefining part properties............................................................................................................... 46
Using predefined properties ...................................................................................................... 46
Modeling tools.................................................................................................................................. 46
AutoDefaults..................................................................................................................................... 47
AutoConnection................................................................................................................................ 47
1.3 Drawings and printers........................................................................................................................... 47
Drawing properties ........................................................................................................................... 48
Layouts and templates ..................................................................................................................... 48
Reports and symbols ....................................................................................................................... 48
Selection filters................................................................................................................................. 48
Wizards ............................................................................................................................................ 48
Defining print devices....................................................................................................................... 48
1.4 Autosave............................................................................................................................................... 48
Setting Autosave interval ................................................................................................................. 49
TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 3

Autosave file location ....................................................................................................................... 49
Keeping Autosave files..................................................................................................................... 50
Usernames ....................................................................................................................................... 50
Application error ............................................................................................................................... 50
Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read. ................................................................................... 50
1.5 Customizing the interface...................................................................................................................... 51
Toolbars ........................................................................................................................................... 51
Managing toolbars ..................................................................................................................... 51
Icons .......................................................................................................................................... 52
Creating a user-defined toolbar........................................................................................................ 52
Creating a user-defined menu.......................................................................................................... 53
Defining shortcuts............................................................................................................................. 53
1.6 Optimizing system performance............................................................................................................ 54
Virtual memory ................................................................................................................................. 54
Display adaptor ................................................................................................................................ 54
Solid buffer size................................................................................................................................ 55
How Tekla Structures handles solids ............................................................................................... 55
2 Multi-user mode....................................................................................... 57
2.1 Multi-user mode .................................................................................................................................... 57
When to use multi-user mode .......................................................................................................... 58
Switching between single-user and multi-user modes ............................................................... 58
Overview of the multi-user system ................................................................................................... 59
The Tekla Structures server ..................................................................................................... 59
How multi-user works ....................................................................................................................... 60
Locking ...................................................................................................................................... 60
Setting up the multi-user system ...................................................................................................... 61
Saving in multi-user mode................................................................................................................ 62
Save ........................................................................................................................................... 62
Autosave .................................................................................................................................... 62
Saving model revision comments..................................................................................................... 63
Shutting down the model.................................................................................................................. 64
Copying multi-user models............................................................................................................... 64
Displaying active multi-users............................................................................................................ 64
Clearing locks................................................................................................................................... 65
Error messages ................................................................................................................................ 65
Recommendations ........................................................................................................................... 66
Server computer ........................................................................................................................ 66
Client computer .......................................................................................................................... 66
Network ...................................................................................................................................... 67
Model dump ............................................................................................................................... 67
2.2 Modeling in multi-user mode ................................................................................................................. 67
4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

Working with a master model........................................................................................................... 67
Numbering setup.............................................................................................................................. 71
Numbering – specific cases ............................................................................................................. 72
2.3 Drawings in multi-user mode ................................................................................................................ 73
About drawing files........................................................................................................................... 73
Guidelines for multi-user drawings................................................................................................... 73
Locks for drawings ........................................................................................................................... 74
2.4 Maintenance procedures ...................................................................................................................... 74
Checking multi-user databases........................................................................................................ 75
Deleting unnecessary dg files .......................................................................................................... 75
2.5 Access rights ........................................................................................................................................ 75
Locking objects ................................................................................................................................ 76
Controlling access to attributes ........................................................................................................ 76
Restricting access to model ............................................................................................................. 77
Controlling access to numbering setup ............................................................................................ 78
3 Files and Folders ..................................................................................... 79

3.1 Initialization files.................................................................................................................................... 79
About variables ................................................................................................................................ 80
Setting variables ........................................................................................................................ 80
Using the Advanced Options dialog box ................................................................................... 80
Editing the user.ini file ............................................................................................................... 80
Disabling variables in an initialization file .................................................................................. 81
Structure........................................................................................................................................... 81
Initialization file reading order .................................................................................................... 82
Creating customized initialization files ....................................................................................... 83
Including other initialization files ................................................................................................ 83
Creating shortcuts ............................................................................................................................ 83
3.2 File types and function.......................................................................................................................... 85
Input files.......................................................................................................................................... 85
Component description files ...................................................................................................... 86
Data files .......................................................................................................................................... 86
Data files and modeling tools .................................................................................................... 87
DSTV connection properties ............................................................................................................ 89
Messages......................................................................................................................................... 89
Profiles ............................................................................................................................................. 90
inp (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................. 90
cnv (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................ 90
lis (ASCII) .................................................................................................................................. 90
Binary files ................................................................................................................................. 90
Bin .................................................................................................................................................... 91

Fonts ................................................................................................................................................ 91
Symbols............................................................................................................................................ 91
System ............................................................................................................................................. 92
rpt ............................................................................................................................................... 92
tpl ............................................................................................................................................... 92
lay .............................................................................................................................................. 92
plotdev.bin ................................................................................................................................. 92
Wizard files (dproc) .................................................................................................................... 92
3.3 Folders .................................................................................................................................................. 92
Folder structure ................................................................................................................................ 93
Folder search order .......................................................................................................................... 94
Model folder...................................................................................................................................... 95
Saved attributes ......................................................................................................................... 95
System folder ................................................................................................................................... 96
Project and firm folders .................................................................................................................... 96
Project folder .............................................................................................................................. 97
Firm folder .................................................................................................................................. 97
Template folder ................................................................................................................................ 97
3.4 Customizing Tekla Structures ............................................................................................................... 98
Adding properties ............................................................................................................................. 98
Changing user-defined fields ..................................................................................................... 99
User-defined fields in templates .............................................................................................. 100
Effect on numbering ................................................................................................................. 101
Interpreting objects.inp ................................................................................................................... 101
Fields in objects.inp ................................................................................................................. 102
Customizing message files............................................................................................................. 102
Changing the language of the user interface ................................................................................. 103
Customizing parametric profiles ..................................................................................................... 104
Interpreting profitab.inp ............................................................................................................ 104
Save defaults.................................................................................................................................. 105
Creating standard files ............................................................................................................. 106
Customizing other files ............................................................................................................ 106
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files................................................................................................ 106
Unfolding parameters ..................................................................................................................... 107
Using flat bars ................................................................................................................................ 108
Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp .................................................................................... 109
Using market sizes ......................................................................................................................... 109
Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat ............................................................................... 110
Example ................................................................................................................................... 110
3.5 Log files............................................................................................................................................... 110
Tekla Structures log files ................................................................................................................ 110
Numbering history log .................................................................................................................... 111

Interpreting numbering.history ................................................................................................. 112
Overlapping part/assembly series ........................................................................................... 113
Drawing history log......................................................................................................................... 113
AutoDrawings Wizard log............................................................................................................... 113
Viewing log files ............................................................................................................................. 114
Direct access to parts from log files ............................................................................................... 114
Access part pop-up menu ....................................................................................................... 114
4 Catalogs ................................................................................................. 115

4.1 Things you should know ..................................................................................................................... 115
Open a model first.......................................................................................................................... 116
The filter ......................................................................................................................................... 116
Saving a modified catalog .............................................................................................................. 116
What is the difference between Update and OK? .......................................................................... 117
4.2 The profile catalog .............................................................................................................................. 117
Working with rules.......................................................................................................................... 118
Defining the material of profiles ............................................................................................... 119
Adding a rule ........................................................................................................................... 121
Adding a next level rule ........................................................................................................... 121
Editing a rule ........................................................................................................................... 121
Organizing rules ...................................................................................................................... 121
Deleting a rule ......................................................................................................................... 121
Viewing or modifying the profile catalog......................................................................................... 122
Adding a profile .............................................................................................................................. 122
Copy an existing profile ........................................................................................................... 122
Creating a new standard profile .............................................................................................. 123
Creating a cross section................................................................................................................. 123
Cross section with no inner contours ....................................................................................... 123
Cross section with inner contours ............................................................................................ 123
Modifying a cross section............................................................................................................... 124
Different types of chamfer ....................................................................................................... 124
Deleting a cross section ................................................................................................................. 125
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile ............................................................................... 125
Adding user-defined attributes to a profile ..................................................................................... 127
Merging profile catalogs ................................................................................................................. 128
Exporting the profile catalog........................................................................................................... 128
Exporting elements from the profile catalog................................................................................... 128
Importing from previous versions ................................................................................................... 129
Importing the profile catalog........................................................................................................... 129
What happens to existing profiles? ......................................................................................... 129
User-defined fixed cross section definitions ............................................................................ 130
User-defined attributes ............................................................................................................ 130

4.3 The material catalog............................................................................................................................ 130
Viewing or modifying the material catalog...................................................................................... 130
Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade ....................................................................... 131
Units of measure ...................................................................................................................... 132
Adding a material type.................................................................................................................... 132
Adding a new material grade.......................................................................................................... 132
Deleting a material grade ............................................................................................................... 133
Defining your own symbols for materials........................................................................................ 133
Export and import ........................................................................................................................... 134
4.4 The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs................................................................................................... 134
Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog............................................................................................. 135
Saving a modified bolt catalog ....................................................................................................... 137
Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies ............................................................................................ 137
Creating studs ................................................................................................................................ 139
Merging bolt catalogs ..................................................................................................................... 141
Exporting the bolt catalog............................................................................................................... 141
Importing the bolt catalog ............................................................................................................... 141
Upgrading to a new version ..................................................................................................... 141
4.5 The reinforcing bar catalog ................................................................................................................. 142
4.6 For the advanced user ........................................................................................................................ 143
A closer look at the export file ........................................................................................................ 143
Do’s & don’ts of editing the export file ............................................................................................ 144
Importing part of the bolt catalog.................................................................................................... 144
Units used in export and import...................................................................................................... 145
Bolt length calculation .................................................................................................................... 146
5 AutoConnection .................................................................................... 151

5.1 AutoConnection setup......................................................................................................................... 151
AutoConnection setup .................................................................................................................... 152
AutoConnection rule groups........................................................................................................... 153
AutoConnection rule sets ............................................................................................................... 153
Rules.zxt ........................................................................................................................................ 155
Changing a connection................................................................................................................... 155
5.2 AutoDefaults setup.............................................................................................................................. 155
AutoDefaults setup ......................................................................................................................... 156
Connection properties files............................................................................................................. 157
Saving connection properties .................................................................................................. 157
Access to properties files ......................................................................................................... 157
Defaults.zxt..................................................................................................................................... 158
Priority of rule sets.......................................................................................................................... 158
Editing connection properties ......................................................................................................... 158

5.3 AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules............................................................................................. 159
Combining and iterating properties ................................................................................................ 161
Limitations ............................................................................................................................... 162
Combining properties ..................................................................................................................... 162
Iteration with connection check ...................................................................................................... 163
Reaction forces and UDL ............................................................................................................... 165
6 CNC......................................................................................................... 167
6.1 NC files ............................................................................................................................................... 167
Setting up NC files ......................................................................................................................... 168
Defining destination machines for parts ......................................................................................... 170
Defining selection criteria ............................................................................................................... 170
Maximum size ......................................................................................................................... 171
Profile type .............................................................................................................................. 171
Maximum size of holes ............................................................................................................ 172
Defining hole properties ................................................................................................................. 172
Creating NC files ............................................................................................................................ 172
Defining the output format and folder............................................................................................. 173
6.2 DSTV .................................................................................................................................................. 174
Fittings affect NC data.................................................................................................................... 174
6.3 DXF..................................................................................................................................................... 175
Converting DSTV files to DXF ....................................................................................................... 176
6.4 Peddimat............................................................................................................................................. 176
Creating NC files in Peddimat format............................................................................................. 176
Output formats for Peddimat .......................................................................................................... 177
Defining Peddimat standard tooling ............................................................................................... 177
6.5 Pop-marks ......................................................................................................................................... 178
Creating pop-marks........................................................................................................................ 178
Pop-mark settings .......................................................................................................................... 179
Pop-marking options ............................................................................................................... 180
6.6 Hard stamps ....................................................................................................................................... 181
Creating hard stamps..................................................................................................................... 181
Hard stamp properties.................................................................................................................... 181
Information contained in hard stamps ..................................................................................... 182
Position of hard stamps ........................................................................................................... 182
Hard stamps for secondary parts ............................................................................................ 182
6.7 Plate nesting ....................................................................................................................................... 183
Creating nesting tasks.................................................................................................................... 183
Editing nesting tasks ...................................................................................................................... 183
Task properties ........................................................................................................................ 184

Defining stocks ............................................................................................................................... 184
Stock properties ....................................................................................................................... 185
Nesting tasks.................................................................................................................................. 185
Viewing nesting results................................................................................................................... 186
7 Import and export.................................................................................. 187

7.1 Import and export basics..................................................................................................................... 187
Using import and export ................................................................................................................. 188
Available formats............................................................................................................................ 188
Importing into Tekla Structures ................................................................................................ 188
Exporting from Tekla Structures .............................................................................................. 190
7.2 Conversion files................................................................................................................................... 192
Converting twin profiles .................................................................................................................. 192
Creating conversion files ................................................................................................................ 192
Locating conversion files ................................................................................................................ 193
Sample conversion files ................................................................................................................. 193
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................. 193
7.3 Importing models................................................................................................................................. 194
Import tools..................................................................................................................................... 194
Overview of importing models ........................................................................................................ 195
Finishing the import ................................................................................................................. 195
Re-importing a model ..................................................................................................................... 197
Revision control options ........................................................................................................... 197
Creating reports of import............................................................................................................... 198
Importing DWG/DXF files ............................................................................................................... 199
CIS import ...................................................................................................................................... 199
CAD import..................................................................................................................................... 200
CAD specific information ......................................................................................................... 200
Creating log files ...................................................................................................................... 200
CAD import file types...................................................................................................................... 200
SDNF specific options ............................................................................................................. 201
FEM import..................................................................................................................................... 202
FEM specific information ......................................................................................................... 202
FEM import file types ............................................................................................................... 202
DSTV files ...................................................................................................................................... 203
About DSTV ............................................................................................................................. 203
STAAD files .................................................................................................................................... 204
Stan 3d files.................................................................................................................................... 204
Bus import ...................................................................................................................................... 205
Yield stress in FEM import ............................................................................................................. 205
Model dump import......................................................................................................................... 206
ASCII import ................................................................................................................................... 206

ASCII format description ................................................................................................................ 206
Attribute import............................................................................................................................... 211
About input files ....................................................................................................................... 212
Example input file for drawings ............................................................................................... 213
Example input file for parts ...................................................................................................... 214
Data types file .......................................................................................................................... 214
Steelfab import............................................................................................................................... 215
Steelfab specific information ................................................................................................... 215
Fabtrol XML import......................................................................................................................... 215
S-Frame import .............................................................................................................................. 216
About S-Frame imports ........................................................................................................... 216
MicasPlus import............................................................................................................................ 216
MicasPlus specific information ................................................................................................ 216
Eureka LPM import ........................................................................................................................ 216
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export........................................................................................ 216
Import ELiPLAN status data .................................................................................................... 217
7.4 Exporting files ..................................................................................................................................... 219
Exporting 3D DWG/DXF ............................................................................................................... 219
Export as ................................................................................................................................. 220
Exporting 3D DGN ......................................................................................................................... 221
Exporting FEM ............................................................................................................................... 222
Combine segments (MicroSAS) .............................................................................................. 222
STAAD .................................................................................................................................... 222
DSTV ....................................................................................................................................... 223
Exporting CIMsteel......................................................................................................................... 224
Analysis model ........................................................................................................................ 224
Manufacturing model ............................................................................................................... 226
More CIMsteel information ...................................................................................................... 227
Exporting CAD ............................................................................................................................... 229
PML ......................................................................................................................................... 230
SDNF ....................................................................................................................................... 230
XML ......................................................................................................................................... 232
PDMS ...................................................................................................................................... 232
Exporting MIS................................................................................................................................. 233
MIS types ................................................................................................................................ 233
MIS list file ............................................................................................................................... 234
Exporting ASCII.............................................................................................................................. 234
Exporting IFC ................................................................................................................................. 234
Exporting a model dump ................................................................................................................ 237
Exporting BVBS ............................................................................................................................. 238
Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format ................................................................................. 240
Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box ......................................................................................... 240
BVBS (78) specification ........................................................................................................... 242

Exporting Unitechnik ...................................................................................................................... 243
Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format ................................................................................ 244
Unitechnik export reference ..................................................................................................... 247
Main ......................................................................................................................................... 248
Unitechnik configuration .......................................................................................................... 253
TS configuration ....................................................................................................................... 257
Reinforcement ......................................................................................................................... 259
Data specification .................................................................................................................... 263
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export........................................................................................ 263
Exporting ELiPLAN .................................................................................................................. 264
7.5 Exporting drawings.............................................................................................................................. 266
Layers............................................................................................................................................. 266
Advanced line type and layer conversion ................................................................................ 268
7.6 Reference models............................................................................................................................... 271
Using a reference model ................................................................................................................ 271
Using several reference models..................................................................................................... 272
Updating reference models ............................................................................................................ 273
Handling large reference models ................................................................................................... 273
Detecting changes in reference models ......................................................................................... 273
Reference model objects................................................................................................................ 276
Selecting reference models and reference model objects ....................................................... 276
Listing reference models and reference model objects in reports ........................................... 277
Supported DGN objects ................................................................................................................. 277
7.7 Tekla WebViewer................................................................................................................................ 278
Publishing a model as a web page................................................................................................. 278
Web templates ............................................................................................................................... 279
Emailing WebViewer models.......................................................................................................... 279
Receiving WebViewer models........................................................................................................ 279
Sending WebViewer links............................................................................................................... 280
Handling named views ................................................................................................................... 280
Handling clip planes ....................................................................................................................... 281
Hiding and showing objects............................................................................................................ 282
Full content rendering..................................................................................................................... 282
How to move and zoom?................................................................................................................ 282
8 Variables ................................................................................................ 285

8.1 List of variables ................................................................................................................................... 285
Categories in the Advanced Options dialog box ............................................................................ 285
User variables ................................................................................................................................ 286
8.2 A......................................................................................................................................................... 289
XS_AD_CURVED_BEAM_SPLIT_ACCURACY_MM .................................................................... 289

XS_AD_CURVED_BEAMS_BY_STRAIGHT_SEGMENTS .......................................................... 289
XS_AD_DISABLE_EDITING_BY_UDA ......................................................................................... 289
XS_AD_ELEMENT_ANGLE_CHECK_ANGLE_DIFF_LIMIT ........................................................ 289
XS_AD_ENABLE_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL.................................................................. 289
XS_AD_MEMBER_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION ........................................................................... 290
XS_AD_MEMBER_TYPE_VISUALIZATION ................................................................................. 290
XS_AD_NODE_COLLISION_CHECK_DISTANCE ....................................................................... 290
XS_AD_NODE_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION ................................................................................ 291
XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_DISABLED............................................................................................ 291
XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_RECURSE_CATALOG......................................................................... 291
XS_AD_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL_LIMIT_MM............................................................... 291
XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_DISTANCE_LIMIT.................................................................... 291
XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_PART_ID.................................................................................. 292
XS_AD_RESULT_DATABASE_ENABLED ................................................................................... 292
XS_AD_SOLID_AXIAL_EXPAND_MM.......................................................................................... 292
XS_AD_SUPPORT_VISUALIZATION ........................................................................................... 292
XS_AD_TWIN_PROFILES_ENABLED.......................................................................................... 292
XS_ADJUST_GRID_LABELS........................................................................................................ 292
XS_AISC_WELD_MARK ............................................................................................................... 293
XS_ALIGN_CUT_SYMBOL_BY_VERTICAL_LINE....................................................................... 293
XS_ALLOW_DRAWING_TO_MANY_MULTI_DRAWINGS .......................................................... 293
XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_DIMENSIONS .............................................................................. 294
XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_WELD_SYMBOLS ....................................................................... 294
XS_ALLOW_SHEAR_PLATE_CLASH_FLANGE.......................................................................... 294
XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_CLOSING_DRAWING ................................................ 294
XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_EXIT ............................................................................ 294
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER ...................................................... 295
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER..................................................................... 295
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER ................................................................................ 295
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER .......................................................................... 295
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE............................................................... 295
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS ................. 295
XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR .................................................................. 296
XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING ................................... 296
XS_APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................................................... 296
XS_ARC_WIDTH_OF_CLOUD ..................................................................................................... 296
XS_ASCII_IMPORT_CREATES_CONSTRUCTION_LINES......................................................... 297
ASCII_LEGEND_PATH ................................................................................................................. 297
XS_ASSEMBLY_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE................................................................................... 297
XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING ........................................ 297
XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING.............................................................. 298
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_3D....................................................................................... 299
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_TOLERANCE ..................................................................... 299

XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING........................................................ 299
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE........................................................................ 299
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL................................................................. 300
XS_ATTRIBUTE_FILE_EXCLUDE_LIST ..................................................................................... 300
XS_AUTOCONNECTION_TOLERANCE ...................................................................................... 300
XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL............................................................................................ 300
XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT.......................................................................................... 300
XS_AUTOMATIC_NEW_MODEL_NAME...................................................................................... 300
XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SAVING_INTERVAL....................................................... 301
XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SENDING_INTERVAL .................................................... 301
XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY...................................................................................................... 301
8.3 B.......................................................................................................................................................... 301
XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1 ...................................................................................................... 301
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH ............................................................................................................... 302
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH_AFFECTS_SCREEN............................................................................ 303
XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT ............................................................................................................. 303
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X ..................................................................................................... 303
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_Y ..................................................................................................... 303
XS_BASICVIEW_WIDTH............................................................................................................... 303
XS_BEVEL_DIMENSIONS_FOR_PROFILES_ONLY ................................................................... 304
XSBIN............................................................................................................................................. 304
XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND...................................................................................... 304
XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON ..................................................................................................... 304
XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX ....................................................................................... 304
XS_BOLT_MARK_IS_ALWAYS_VISIBLE_IN_GA ........................................................................ 305
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE........................................................................................ 305
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA........................................................................... 305
XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT .................................................................... 305
XS_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_PLANE_IN_NC ....................................................... 305
8.4 C.......................................................................................................................................................... 306
XS_CALC_REFOBJ_PROTECT.................................................................................................... 306
XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE .................................... 306
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING ........................................... 306
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING ........................................ 307
XS_CHAMFER_ACCURACY_FACTOR........................................................................................ 307
XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR ............................................................................ 307
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED................................................................. 307
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED........................................................................... 307
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED ........................................................................... 307

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED............................................................................ 308
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED............................................................................ 308
XS_CHANGE_MARK_ASTERISK_TO.......................................................................................... 308
XS_CHANGE_WORKAREA_WHEN_MODIFYING_VIEW_DEPTH ............................................. 308
XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO............................................................................................. 308
XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE........................................................................................... 308
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS .................................................. 309
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS................................................................ 309
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT............................................................. 310
XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_NAME ............................................................................................. 310
XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PASSW........................................................................................... 310
XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PATH .............................................................................................. 310
XS_CIS_DEP1_EXPRESS_FILE .................................................................................................. 310
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES ....................................................................... 310
XS_CLASH_CHECK_COLOR ....................................................................................................... 311
XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY.................................................................................................... 311
XS_CNC_HOLE_DIAMETER_ROUNDING................................................................................... 311
XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY ............................................................................................... 311
XS_COMBINED_BOLT_DIM_CHARACTER................................................................................. 312
XS_COMPLEX_PART_MEMBERS_DO_NOT_HAVE_TO_BE_MAIN_PARTS ........................... 312
XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_COLLECTION_NAME_LENGTH................................................ 312
XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_THUMBNAIL_SIZE ..................................................................... 312
XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_PREFIX.......................................................................... 313
XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_START_NUMBER ......................................................... 313
XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL ................................................................................ 313
XS_CONNECT_PLATE_PROFILES_IN_AUTOCONNECTION.................................................... 313
XS_CONSIDER_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS_IN_HIDDEN .................................................................. 313
XS_CONSIDER_REBAR_NAME_IN_NUMBERING ..................................................................... 313
XS_CONVERT_OLD_FORCE_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM ................................................................. 313
XS_CONVERT_OLD_MOMENT_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM.............................................................. 313
XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK............................................... 314
XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK ................................................................ 314
XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING................................................. 314
XS_CREATE_ROUND_HOLE_DIMENSIONS .............................................................................. 314
XS_CREATE_CONNECTION_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS ....................................... 314
XS_CREATE_VIEW_FROM_MODEL_OLD_WAY........................................................................ 314
XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE ........................................................................................... 315
XS_CURVED_AXIS_PLACE ......................................................................................................... 315
XS_CUT_SYMBOL_FONT ............................................................................................................ 315
XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_MAX_LOOPS .......................................................................................... 315
XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_USE_ATTRIBUTE_LOOPS..................................................................... 315
8.5 D ......................................................................................................................................................... 315
DAK_BMPPATH ............................................................................................................................ 315

XS_DEFAULT_FONT .................................................................................................................... 316
XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE .......................................................................................................... 316
XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DRAWINGS ............................................................................... 316
XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS .............................................................................................. 316
XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE........................................................................................... 316
XS_DETAIL_VIEW_REFERENCE................................................................................................. 317
XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS ..................................................................................................... 317
XS_DGN_EXPORT_USE_LOCAL_ID ........................................................................................... 317
XS_DIMENSION_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY ............................................................. 317
XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR .................................................................................. 317
XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER................................................................... 318
XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT ............................................................................ 318
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR .............................................................. 319
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_ORIGIN_OFFSET............................................................. 319
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR......................................................... 319
XS_DIMENSION_FONT ................................................................................................................ 319
XS_DIMENSION_LINE_TEXT_EPS.............................................................................................. 319
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY...................................................... 319
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE ............................................................ 320
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER ...................................................... 320
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT ............................................................ 320
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT.......................................................... 321
XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_COLOR ................................................................................. 321
XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_INNER_RADIUS ................................................................... 321
XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_OUTER_RADIUS.................................................................. 321
XS_DIMENSION_SKEWED_BOLTS_IN_PART_PLANE_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ................... 321
XS_DIR .......................................................................................................................................... 321
XS_DISABLE_ADVANCED_OPTIONS ......................................................................................... 321
XS_DISABLE_CANCEL_DIALOG_FOR_SAVE_NUMBERING_SAVE......................................... 322
XS_DISABLE_CIS2 ....................................................................................................................... 322
XS_DISABLE_CLASSIFIER_FOR_MODIFIED_PARTS ............................................................... 322
XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE ....................................................................................... 322
XS_DISABLE_PARTIAL_REFRESH ............................................................................................. 322
XS_DISABLE_TEMPLATE_DOUBLE_CLICK ............................................................................... 322
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_ASSEMBLY.......................................................................... 323
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_GA........................................................................................ 323
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_MULTI .................................................................................. 323
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_SINGLE................................................................................ 323
XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID ............................................................................................ 323
XS_DISPLAY_ZERO_INCHES...................................................................................................... 323
XS_DISTANT_OBJECT_FINDER_TOLERANCE.......................................................................... 323
XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS ............................................................................. 324
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS_FOR_CONCRETE_PARTS ........................ 324

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PROFILE_DIMENSIONS_FOR_CONCRETE....................................... 324
XS_DO_NOT_DISPLAY_CHAMFERS .......................................................................................... 324
XS_DO_NOT_DRAW_COLUMN_MARKS_AT_45_DEGREES_IN_GA_DRAWING.................... 324
XS_DO_NOT_EXTEND_DIMENSION_LINES_THROUGH_ALL_HOLES ................................... 324
XS_DO_NOT_PLOT_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLES ................................................................. 325
XS_DO_NOT_REMOVE_END_ABSOLUTE_DIMENSIONS ........................................................ 325
XS_DO_NOT_USE_DMPAPER_USER ........................................................................................ 325
XS_DO_NOT_USE_FOLDED_GUSSET_PLATE ......................................................................... 325
XS_DO_NOT_USE_GLOBAL_PLATE_SIDE................................................................................ 325
XS_DONT_SHOW_POLYBEAM_MID_EDGES ............................................................................ 325
XS_DRAW_ALL_SECTION_EDGES_IN_DRAWINGS ................................................................. 325
XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO_IN_UNFOLDING....................................................... 325
XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONS_IN_UNFOLDING ................................................... 326
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES.............................................................................................. 326
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS ............................................. 326
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS ........................................................... 326
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ................................................... 326
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES ................................................................................... 326
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS .................................. 327
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS ................................................ 327
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ........................................ 327
XS_DRAW_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS.......................... 327
XS_DRAW_BOLTS_THROUGH_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS.............................................................. 327
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES ........................................................................... 327
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES ............................................................................... 327
XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES ............................................................................................ 327
XS_DRAW_CROSS_AXIS ............................................................................................................ 328
XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA.......................................................................... 328
XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA ......................................................................... 328
XS_DRAWING_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_COLOR ......................................................................... 328
XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA ........................................................................................ 329
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FIXED_WIDTH ............................................................................ 329
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR................................................ 330
XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE ........................................................................................ 330
XS_DRAWING_IGNORE_ZERO_LEVELS_IN_PART_MARKS ................................................... 330
XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE...................................................................... 330
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY................................................................................... 331
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME.............................................................................................. 331
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A ......................................................................................... 332
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W ........................................................................................ 332
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G......................................................................................... 332
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M......................................................................................... 332
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C ......................................................................................... 332

XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE .................................................................................................... 332
XS_DRAWING_SCALE_SEPARATOR_CHAR ............................................................................. 332
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT.................................................................................................. 333
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X.......................................................................................... 333
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y.......................................................................................... 333
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH ................................................................................................... 333
XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA..................................................................... 333
XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY ...................................................................................... 333
XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES.......................................................... 333
XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING.................................................................................. 334
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT................................................... 334
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP........................................................ 334
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK ..................................................... 335
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM................................................ 335
XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOLDING............................................................................. 335
XS_DRAW_LONG_HOLE_DIMENSIONS..................................................................................... 335
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS......................................................... 335
XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS ........................................................................................... 335
XS_DRIVER ................................................................................................................................... 335
XS_DSTV_CREATE_AK_BLOCK_FOR_ALL_PLATES................................................................ 335
XS_DSTV_LIST_SEPARATOR ..................................................................................................... 336
XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH ............................................................................................................. 336
XS_DSTV_NO_SAWING_ANGLES_FOR_PLATES_NEEDED .................................................... 336
XS_DSTV_NUMBER_OF_PARTS_BY_SELECTION ................................................................... 336
XS_DSTV_PLATE_PROFILE_WITH_WIDTH ............................................................................... 336
XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH........................................................................ 336
XS_DSTV_USE_ONE_VERTEX_SHARP_INNER_CORNER ...................................................... 337
XS_DSTV_WRITE_BEHIND_FACE_FOR_PLATE ....................................................................... 337
XS_DUPLICATE_CHECK_LIMIT_FOR_COPY_AND_MOVE....................................................... 337
XS_DWG_IMPORT_IGNORE_UNITS........................................................................................... 338
XS_DXF_FONT_NAME ................................................................................................................. 338
XS_DXF_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR.............................................................................................. 338
XS_DXF_TEXT_WIDTH_FACTOR................................................................................................ 338
DXK_FONTPATH........................................................................................................................... 338
DXK_SYMBOLPATH ..................................................................................................................... 338
8.6 E.......................................................................................................................................................... 338
EDM_LIC13_3_5............................................................................................................................ 338
XS_ENABLE_INNER_CONTOURS_IN_CUT_PARTS.................................................................. 339
XS_ENABLE_MIDDLE_BUTTON_DOUBLE_CLICK_ZOOM_ORIGINAL..................................... 339
XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION ......................... 339
XS_EQUAL_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS_TO_BOTH_ENDS_LIMIT ................................................... 339
XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE ................................................................................ 340
XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME.................................................................................................... 340

XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS .......................................................................................... 340
XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR .................................................................... 340
XS_EXPORT_DGN_ROUND_SEGMENTS .................................................................................. 340
XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_CLASS_AS_COLOR........................................................................... 340
XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_VOLUMETRIC..................................................................................... 340
XS_EXPORT_STEEL2000_PRIMARY_IDS.................................................................................. 341
XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH .................................................................................... 341
8.7 F.......................................................................................................................................................... 341
XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR................................................................................................ 341
XS_FIRM........................................................................................................................................ 341
XS_FLAT_PREFIX......................................................................................................................... 341
XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE ......................................................................................... 342
XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE................................................................................................................ 342
XS_FRACTION_HEIGHT_FACTOR.............................................................................................. 342
XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK ....................................................................... 342
8.8 G ......................................................................................................................................................... 342
XS_GA_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE................................................................................................. 342
XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING .......................................................................... 342
XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ............................................................................... 343
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE .................................................................................................. 343
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ............................................................................................... 343
XS_GA_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE ......................................................................................... 343
XS_GRID_DIMENSION_OVERALL_LENGTH.............................................................................. 343
XS_GRID_COLOR......................................................................................................................... 343
XS_GRID_PLANES_VISIBLE_WITH_USERPLANES .................................................................. 344
XS_GRID_TEXT_FONT ................................................................................................................ 344
8.9 H ......................................................................................................................................................... 344
XS_HANDLE_SCALE .................................................................................................................... 344
XS_HARD_STAMP_BY_ORIENTATION_MARK .......................................................................... 345
XS_HATCH_SEGMENT_BUFFER_SIZE...................................................................................... 345
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R ............................................................................................... 345
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G ............................................................................................... 345
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B................................................................................................ 345
XS_HIDDEN_LINES_CHECK_TOLERANCE................................................................................ 346
XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ...................................................................................... 346
XS_HIDDEN_REMOVE_DOUBLE_LINES.................................................................................... 346
XS_HIDDEN_USE_BOLT_PLANES.............................................................................................. 346
XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES......................................................... 346
XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES ......................................................................... 346
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ....................................................................................... 347
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA .......................................................................... 347
8.10 I........................................................................................................................................................... 347

XS_IGNORE_SUBASSEMBLY_HIERARCHY_IN_DIMENSIONING ............................................ 347
XS_IMPERIAL................................................................................................................................ 347
XS_IMPERIAL_BOLT_MARK ........................................................................................................ 348
XS_IMPERIAL_DATE .................................................................................................................... 348
XS_IMPERIAL_HOLE_MARK........................................................................................................ 348
XS_IMPERIAL_INPUT ................................................................................................................... 348
XS_IMPERIAL_TIME ..................................................................................................................... 348
XS_IMPERIAL_TRIANGLES ......................................................................................................... 348
XS_IMPORT_MODEL_LOG .......................................................................................................... 349
XS_INCH_SIGN_ALWAYS ............................................................................................................ 349
XS_INP........................................................................................................................................... 349
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS ................................................. 349
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS_IN_GA .................................... 349
XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PART_COUNT .................................................................................. 349
XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PLANE_COUNT ................................................................................ 349
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED .................................................................................. 350
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED_IN_GA...................................................................... 350
XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ALLOWED ................................................................................... 350
XS_INTELLIGENT_MESSAGES_ALLOWED................................................................................ 351
XS_I_PROFILE_CENTER ............................................................................................................. 351
8.11 J .......................................................................................................................................................... 351
XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT ................................................................................................... 351
XS_JOINTS_USE_NOTCH1.......................................................................................................... 351
8.12 K.......................................................................................................................................................... 352
XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING.............................................. 352
XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX.................................................................................................. 352
XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE....................................................................................................... 352
XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX ................................................................................................... 352
8.13 L .......................................................................................................................................................... 353
LEGEND_MODEL_PATH .............................................................................................................. 353
XS_LINE_WIDTH........................................................................................................................... 353
XS_LOG_FILE_NAME ................................................................................................................... 353
XS_LOGPATH ............................................................................................................................... 353
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ............................................................................. 353
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ................................................................ 353
8.14 M ......................................................................................................................................................... 354
XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY ............................................................................................................ 354
XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP ............................................................................................ 354
XS_MACRO_REFERENCES......................................................................................................... 354
XS_MACRO_LOG.......................................................................................................................... 354
XS_MAGNETIC_PLANE_OFFSET................................................................................................ 355
XS_MARK_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY ....................................................................... 355

XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR .................................................................................... 355
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_HEIGHT ............................................................................ 355
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_LENGTH ........................................................................... 355
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH .................................................................... 355
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME ............................................. 355
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME........................ 356
XS_MARK_LINE_SPACE_FACTOR ............................................................................................. 357
XS_MARK_TEXT_FRAME_BOX_HEIGHT_FACTOR .................................................................. 357
XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE................................................................. 357
XS_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_SKEWED_END_PLATE_AND_BEAM_END............................... 358
XS_MAX_ANGLE_TOLERANCE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_MAIN_PARTS .................................. 358
XS_MAX_AUTOMATIC_RADIUS_DIMENSION ........................................................................... 358
XS_MAX_DECIMALS_IN_PROFILE_NAME................................................................................. 358
XS_MAX_FRACTIONS_IN_MODEL_DIMENSION ....................................................................... 359
XS_MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_PLANES_TO_NAME................................................................... 359
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL ...................................................................... 359
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL ............................................................................ 359
XS_MAX_SPACE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_ASSEMBLY_PARALLEL_PARTS ........................... 359
XS_MESSAGES ............................................................................................................................ 359
XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT ....................................................................................................... 359
XS_MDIVIEWPARENT .................................................................................................................. 360
XS_MDIZOOMPARENT ................................................................................................................ 360
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT ................................................................................................ 360
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS .................................................... 360
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS .............................................................. 360
XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY ......................................................................................................... 360
XS_MIS_SEQUENCE.................................................................................................................... 361
XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR ............................................. 361
XS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY ....................................................................................... 361
XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP................................................................. 361
XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_PLACING_TRIAL_NUMBER ....................................................... 361
XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE ........................................................................................... 362
XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK................................................ 362
8.15 N ......................................................................................................................................................... 362
XS_NC_DISABLE_PIECE_IDENTIFICATION_FIX ....................................................................... 362
XS_NEIGHBOUR_PART_SKEW_LIMIT ....................................................................................... 362
XSNEST......................................................................................................................................... 362
XS_NO_AUTO_DISPLAY_VIEWS ................................................................................................ 363
XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS......................................................................................... 363
XS_NO_CHAMFERS_IN_EXACT_MODE .................................................................................... 363
XS_NO_CSK_MARK ..................................................................................................................... 363
XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS ................................................... 363
XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS................................................................................. 363

XS_NO_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_FOR ................................................................................. 363
XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE.......................................................................................................... 364
XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL ...................................................................................................... 364
XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK .................................................................. 364
XS_NSFS_TEXT_POSITION_IN_PART_MARK ........................................................................... 364
XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK....................................................................... 364
XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME............................................................. 364
8.16 O ......................................................................................................................................................... 365
XS_OBJECT_SELECTION_CONFIRMATION .............................................................................. 365
XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS.................................................. 365
XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_PARTS_OUT_OF_VIEW_PLANE_LIMIT_ANGLE................................. 365
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE .................................................................................... 365
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE.......................................................................................................... 365
XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE ................................................................................................ 366
XS_OMITTED_PART_NAME_IN_AUTOCONNECTION............................................................... 366
XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE......................................................................................................... 366
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION...................................................................................... 366
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS............................................................. 366
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS_IN_GA................................................ 366
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS ....................................................... 367
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS_IN_GA........................................... 367
8.17 P.......................................................................................................................................................... 367
XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR ............................................................................... 367
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE ................................................................................... 367
XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE.......................................................................................... 368
XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING........................................................................ 368
XS_PART_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING.................................................................. 368
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR............................................... 369
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE............................................................................... 369
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO.......................................... 369
XS_PEDDIMAT_FLANGE_CLEARANCE...................................................................................... 369
XS_PIXEL_TOLERANCE .............................................................................................................. 370
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X ....................................................................................................... 370
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y ....................................................................................................... 370
PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE............................................................................................. 370
PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE ...................................................................................... 371
XS_PML_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID................................................................................. 371
XS_PML_EXPORT_USE_ADDITIONAL_CUT_DIST.................................................................... 371
XS_POLYGON_CUT_EXTRA_THICKNESS................................................................................. 371
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR....................................... 371
XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR................................................. 371
XS_POP_MARK_COLOR.............................................................................................................. 372

XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT............................................................................................................. 372
XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL ........................................................................................................... 372
XS_POSITION_DIMENSIONS_FOR_HOLES_IN_SINGLE_SECONDARY_PARTS_IN_ASSEMBLY
_DRAWING.................................................................................................................................... 372
XS_PRIMARY_PART_FIRST ........................................................................................................ 373
XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER ........................................................................................... 373
XS_PRINT_REPORT_FONT......................................................................................................... 373
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE ..................................................................... 373
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT......................................................................... 373
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE ................................................................. 373
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT..................................................................... 374
XS_PROFDB ................................................................................................................................. 374
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL ...................................................................................... 374
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT .......................................................................... 374
XS_PROFILE_DISPLAY_INCH_MARK_AFTER_FRACTIONS_IN_REPORTS ........................... 374
XS_PROJECT................................................................................................................................ 375
XS_PROTECT_SYMBOLS............................................................................................................ 375
8.18 R ......................................................................................................................................................... 375
XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING.................................. 375
XSR_BOLT_LENGTH_USE_ONLY_INCHES ............................................................................... 375
XSR_DIAMETER_USE_ONLY_INCHES ...................................................................................... 375
XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE ........................................................................ 375
XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_MARK_MANUAL_CLOSE_TO_GEOMETRY .................................... 375
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE....................................................................................... 376
XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_LENGTH........................ 376
XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_TOLERANCE............................ 376
XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_FRAME ......................................................................... 376
XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION.......................................................... 376
XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS.................................................................................... 376
XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS .............................................................................. 376
XS_REFERENCE_CACHE............................................................................................................ 377
XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_COLORS ................................................................................... 377
XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_LINES........................................................................................ 377
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE ...................................................................... 377
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF .......................................................... 378
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS ............... 378
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES ...................................................................... 378
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS .......................................................... 378
XS_REFERENCE_ROUND_SEGMENTS..................................................................................... 378
XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING........................................................................ 378
XS_RENDERED_CURSOR_LINE_WIDTH................................................................................... 378
XS_RENDERED_FOG_END_VALUE ........................................................................................... 379
XS_RENDERED_FOG_START_VALUE....................................................................................... 379

XS_RENDERED_PIXEL_TOLERANCE_SCALE .......................................................................... 380
XS_REPORT_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY.......................................................................................... 380
XS_ROTATE_CUT_VIEWS ........................................................................................................... 380
XS_RUNPATH ............................................................................................................................... 381
XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SEPARATOR............................................................................................ 381
XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL ................................................................................................... 381
XSR_USE_NO_INCH_SYMBOL ................................................................................................... 381
XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE.................................................................................................. 382
XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_FOR_FRACTIONS................................................................................ 382
XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_VALUE .................................................................................................. 382
8.19 S.......................................................................................................................................................... 382
XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT ....................................................................................................... 382
XS_SCALE_COPIED_OR_MOVED_OBJECTS_IN_DRAWINGS................................................. 382
XS_SCALE_MARKS_TO_FIT_LIMIT ............................................................................................ 382
XS_SCREW_DIAMOND_WITHOUT_PHI...................................................................................... 383
XS_SDNF_CONVERT_PL_PROFILE_TO_PLATE ....................................................................... 383
XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID .............................................................................. 383
XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER ..................................................................... 383
XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP...................................................................................... 383
XS_SECTION_LINE_COLOR........................................................................................................ 384
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL .................................................................... 384
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE ....................................................................................... 384
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL.................................................................. 385
XS_SECTION_VIEW_REFERENCE ............................................................................................. 385
XS_SEMI_ORTHO_ANGLE........................................................................................................... 385
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ........................................................................... 385
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA............................................................... 385
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ........................................................................... 386
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA .............................................................. 386
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE................................................................. 386
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA .................................................... 386
XS_SHOW_PERFORM_NUMBERING_MESSAGE...................................................................... 386
XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES .................................................................. 387
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST.................................................................. 387
XS_SHOW_SITE_STUDS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS............................................................. 387
XS_SHOW_STUDS_IN_WORKSHOP_DRAWINGS..................................................................... 387
XS_SHOW_TEMPLATE_LOG_MESSAGES................................................................................. 387
XS_SINGLE_CENTERED_SCREW .............................................................................................. 387
XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................ 387
XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_SHORT_DIMENSIONS.............................................................................. 388
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_DISTANCE ............................................................................................ 388
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_MIN_DISTANCE.................................................................................... 388
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_WAY ...................................................................................................... 388

XS_SINGLE_DIMENSION_TYPE ................................................................................................. 388
XS_SINGLE_DRAW_PART_AS.................................................................................................... 388
XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE ................................................................................................................ 389
XS_SINGLE_FORWARD_OFFSET .............................................................................................. 389
XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS ................................................................. 389
XS_SINGLE_NO_SHORTEN ........................................................................................................ 389
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK ............................................................................................ 389
XS_SINGLE_PART_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE ............................................................................. 390
XS_SINGLE_PART_EXTREMA .................................................................................................... 390
XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE ......................................................................................................... 390
XS_SINGLE_SCALE ..................................................................................................................... 390
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_INTERNAL ................................................................................................ 390
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_POSITIONS .............................................................................................. 391
XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS....................................................................................... 391
XS_SINGLE_X_DIMENSION_TYPE ............................................................................................. 391
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ............................................................................. 391
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA................................................................ 391
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE ............................................................................. 391
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ................................................................ 391
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE................................................................... 392
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA ...................................................... 392
XS_SNAPSHOT_DIRECTORY ..................................................................................................... 392
XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE ........................................................................................................... 392
XS_SOLID_USE_HIGHER_ACCURACY ...................................................................................... 393
XS_STACKED_FRACTION_TYPE................................................................................................ 393
XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE ...................................................................... 393
XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE................................................................. 394
XS_STD_PART_MODEL............................................................................................................... 394
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_HEIGHT_FACTOR ...................................................................................... 394
XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR........................................................................................ 395
XS_SWITCH_POS_NUMBERS_FOR ........................................................................................... 395
SYMEDHOME................................................................................................................................ 395
XS_SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................. 395
8.20 T.......................................................................................................................................................... 396
TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE..................................................................................... 396
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY ...................................................................................................... 396
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 396
XS_TEXT_FONT ........................................................................................................................... 396
XS_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR....................................................................................................... 396
XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON ........................................................................................... 396
TEXT_X_SIZE................................................................................................................................ 397
TEXT_Y_SIZE................................................................................................................................ 397
XS_THUMBNAIL_FONT................................................................................................................ 397

XS_TPLED_INI .............................................................................................................................. 397
XS_TRY_TO_KEEP_LOCATION_IN_FREEPLACING ................................................................. 397
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS ................................................................................... 398
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS ................................................................................ 398
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC..................................................... 398
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES .................................................................................. 398
8.21 U.......................................................................................................................................................... 399
XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER ......................................................................................................... 399
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT ................................................................................... 399
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECISION............................................................................... 400
XS_UNFOLDING_DONT_USE_NEUTRAL_AXIS_FOR_RADIUS................................................ 400
XS_UNFOLDING_PLANE_EPSILON ............................................................................................ 400
XS_UNIQUE_NUMBERS............................................................................................................... 400
XS_UNIQUE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS ......................................................................................... 400
XS_UPDATE_MARK_PLACING_IN_DRAWING........................................................................... 400
XS_UPDATE_MARKS_IN_FROZEN_DRAWINGS ....................................................................... 401
XS_UPSIDE_DOWN_TEXT_ALLOWED ....................................................................................... 401
XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT................................................................................... 401
XS_USABSOLUTE2_TO_RELATIVE_LENGTH_FACTOR........................................................... 401
XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR......................................................................................... 401
XS_USE_BOLT_DISTANCE_IN_NOTCH_CALCULATIONS........................................................ 402
XS_USE_COLOR_DRAWINGS..................................................................................................... 402
XS_USE_CONVEX_PROTECT_AREA ......................................................................................... 402
XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_FILE_NAME ................................................................. 402
XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_TITLE ........................................................................... 402
XS_USE_EIGHT_COLORS_IN_MODELING_VIEWS................................................................... 403
XS_USE_FILE_COMPRESSION................................................................................................... 403
XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION.................................................................................................... 403
XS_USE_LINECLIP ....................................................................................................................... 403
XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR............................................................ 403
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR........................................................................................... 403
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS .................................... 404
XS_USE_NEW_CLASH_CHECK .................................................................................................. 404
XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION....................................................................................... 404
XS_USE_NEW_WELD_PLACING................................................................................................. 404
XS_USE_NEW_USNOTCH ........................................................................................................... 404
XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR ............................................................................ 405
XS_USE_OLD_FILTERING ........................................................................................................... 405
XS_USE_OLD_HQ_PROFILE_DEFINITION................................................................................. 405
XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_CALCULATION .............................................................. 405
XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_SHEET_SIZES.............................................................................. 405
XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_WELD_LENGTH ........................................................................... 405
XS_USE_ONLY_NOMINAL_REBAR_DIAMETER ........................................................................ 406

XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING........................................................................................ 406
XS_USE_POINT_AS_SEPARATOR_IN_PROFILE_NAME.......................................................... 406
XS_USE_SEMI_ORTHO ............................................................................................................... 406
XS_USE_SMALLER_GUSSET_PLATE ........................................................................................ 406
XS_USE_SMOOTH_LINES........................................................................................................... 406
XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING ........................................................................................... 406
XS_USE_SPECIAL_FILLER_PLATE_THICKNESS...................................................................... 407
XS_USE_TUBE_INNER_LENGTH_IN_DIMENSIONING ............................................................. 407
XS_USE_VERTICAL_PLACING_FOR_COLUMNS_IN ................................................................ 407
XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE........................................................................... 407
XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS .............................................. 407
8.22 V ......................................................................................................................................................... 408
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBERS .................................. 408
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER .................................................... 408
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS........................................................ 408
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBERS ................................................ 408
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS ................................................................. 408
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_POSITION_NUMBERS ........................................................... 408
XS_VIEW_DIM_LINE_COLOR...................................................................................................... 409
XS_VIEW_DIM_TEXT_COLOR..................................................................................................... 409
XS_VIEW_FAST_BOLT_COLOR.................................................................................................. 409
XS_VIEW_FREE_MEASURE_PLANE .......................................................................................... 409
XS_VIEW_HEIGHT........................................................................................................................ 410
XS_VIEW_PART_LABEL_COLOR................................................................................................ 410
XS_VIEW_POSITION_X................................................................................................................ 411
XS_VIEW_POSITION_Y................................................................................................................ 411
XS_VIEW_TITLE_FONT................................................................................................................ 411
XS_VIEW_WIDTH ......................................................................................................................... 411
8.23 W ........................................................................................................................................................ 411
XS_WARP_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS................................................................................... 411
XS_WARP_MAX_DEVIATION ...................................................................................................... 411
XS_WEB_PUBLISHING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY .................................................................... 412
XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE ............................................................................................................ 412
XS_WELD_FONT .......................................................................................................................... 412
XS_WELDING_LENGTH_TOLERANCE ....................................................................................... 412
XS_WELDING_TOUCH_TOLERANCE......................................................................................... 412
XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR.......................................................................... 412
XS_WELD_NUMBER_FORMAT ................................................................................................... 412
XS_WORKING_POINTS_VALID_ALSO_OUTSIDE_PART.......................................................... 413
8.24 Z.......................................................................................................................................................... 413
XS_ZERO_POINT_SYMBOL_OLD_WAY..................................................................................... 413
XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO ............................................................................................................. 413

XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE ............................................................... 413
XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE........................................................................... 413
9 File extensions ...................................................................................... 415
10 Reserved shortcuts............................................................................... 419

10.1 Common shortcuts.............................................................................................................................. 419
10.2 Modeling commands........................................................................................................................... 420
10.3 Drawing commands ............................................................................................................................ 421
10.4 UCS..................................................................................................................................................... 422
10.5 Representation for parts...................................................................................................................... 422
10.6 Representation for component parts................................................................................................... 422
11 Template attributes ............................................................................... 423

11.1 Content type........................................................................................................................................ 423
11.2 Attributes............................................................................................................................................. 425
11.3 User-defined attributes in templates ................................................................................................... 426
Adding attributes to contentattributes_userdefined.lst .................................................................. 428
Modify the way attributes are displayed in the attribute tree .................................................... 429
11.4 A.......................................................................................................................................................... 430
ACN................................................................................................................................................ 430
ACTIVE_DESIGN_CODE .............................................................................................................. 430
ADDRESS ...................................................................................................................................... 430
ALIAS_NAME1 ... 3........................................................................................................................ 430
ANG_S, ANG_T, ANG_U, ANG_V................................................................................................. 431
ANG_U_MAX, ANG_U_MIN, ANG_V_MAX, ANG_V_MIN............................................................ 431
AREA.............................................................................................................................................. 431
AREA_FORM_TOP, AREA_FORM_BOTTOM, AREA_FORM_SIDE ........................................... 431
AREA_GROSS............................................................................................................................... 432
AREA_NET .................................................................................................................................... 432
AREA_PER_TONS ........................................................................................................................ 432
AREA_PGX, AREA_NGX, AREA_PGY, AREA_NGY, AREA_PGZ, AREA_NGZ........................ 432
AREA_PLAN .................................................................................................................................. 433
AREA_PROJECTION_GXY_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_GXZ_GROSS,
AREA_PROJECTION_GYZ_GROSS ............................................................................................ 433
Restrictions .............................................................................................................................. 433
AREA_PROJECTION_GXY_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_GXZ_NET,
AREA_PROJECTION_GYZ_NET.................................................................................................. 433
AREA_PROJECTION_XY_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_XZ_GROSS,
AREA_PROJECTION_YZ_GROSS............................................................................................... 433
AREA_PROJECTION_XY_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_XZ_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_YZ_NET .

434
AREA_PX, AREA_NX, AREA_PY, AREA_NY, AREA_PZ, AREA_NZ ......................................... 434
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL ..................................................................................................... 434
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED........................................................................ 434
ASSEMBLY_PLWEIGHT ............................................................................................................... 434
ASSEMBLY_POS .......................................................................................................................... 435
ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE .................................................................................................... 435
ASSEMBLY_PREFIX..................................................................................................................... 436
ASSEMBLY_SERIAL_NUMBER ................................................................................................... 436
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL ............................................................................................................. 436
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED................................................................................ 436
11.5 B ......................................................................................................................................................... 437
BOLT_EDGE_DISTANCE ............................................................................................................. 437
BOLT_EDGE_DISTANCE_MIN..................................................................................................... 437
BOLT_MATERIAL_LENGTH ......................................................................................................... 437
BOLT_NPARTS ............................................................................................................................. 437
BOLT_STANDARD ........................................................................................................................ 437
BOTTOM_LEVEL........................................................................................................................... 437
BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED ............................................................................................. 437
BUILDER........................................................................................................................................ 437
11.6 C ......................................................................................................................................................... 438
CANTILEVER................................................................................................................................. 438
CAST_UNIT_POS.......................................................................................................................... 438
CAST_UNIT_POSITION_CODE.................................................................................................... 438
CAST_UNIT_PREFIX .................................................................................................................... 438
CAST_UNIT_SERIAL_NUMBER................................................................................................... 438
CATALOG_NAME.......................................................................................................................... 438
CC .................................................................................................................................................. 438
CC_CROSS ................................................................................................................................... 438
CC_EXACT .................................................................................................................................... 438
CC_EXACT_CROSS ..................................................................................................................... 439
CC_EXACT_LONG........................................................................................................................ 439
CC_LONG...................................................................................................................................... 439
CC_MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 439
CC_MAX_CROSS ......................................................................................................................... 439
CC_MAX_LONG ............................................................................................................................ 439
CC_MIN ......................................................................................................................................... 439
CC_MIN_CROSS........................................................................................................................... 439
CC_MIN_LONG ............................................................................................................................. 439
CLASS ........................................................................................................................................... 439
CLASS_ATTR ................................................................................................................................ 440
CODE............................................................................................................................................. 440

COG_X, COG_Y, COG_Z.............................................................................................................. 440
comment......................................................................................................................................... 440
CONNECTED_ASSEMBLIES........................................................................................................ 440
CONNECTED_PARTS................................................................................................................... 440
CONNECTION_CODE................................................................................................................... 440
CONNECTION_DSTV.................................................................................................................... 440
CONNECTION_ERROR ................................................................................................................ 440
CONNECTION_GROUP ................................................................................................................ 441
CONNECTION_NUMBER.............................................................................................................. 441
CONNECTION_RUNNING_NUMBER........................................................................................... 441
CONTENTTYPE............................................................................................................................. 441
COVER_AREA............................................................................................................................... 441
CROSS_SECTION_AREA............................................................................................................. 441
CURRENT_PHASE........................................................................................................................ 441
11.7 D.......................................................................................................................................................... 441
DATE.............................................................................................................................................. 441
DATE_CREATE ............................................................................................................................. 442
DATE_END .................................................................................................................................... 442
DATE_ISSUE ................................................................................................................................. 442
DATE_LAST................................................................................................................................... 442
DATE_MODIFY.............................................................................................................................. 442
DATE_PLOT .................................................................................................................................. 442
DATE_START ................................................................................................................................ 442
DESIGNER..................................................................................................................................... 442
DIAMETER..................................................................................................................................... 442
DIAMETER_1, DIAMETER_2 ........................................................................................................ 443
DIAMETER_X ................................................................................................................................ 443
DIAMETER_Y ................................................................................................................................ 443
DIM_A ... DIM_G, DIM_H1, DIM_H2, DIM_I, DIM_J, DIM_K1, DIM_K2, DIM_O, DIM_R, DIM_TD,
DIM_X, DIM_Y ............................................................................................................................... 443
DIM_A_MAX ... DIM_G_MAX, DIM_H1_MAX, DIM_H2_MAX, DIM_I_MAX, DIM_J_MAX,
DIM_K1_MAX, DIM_K2_MAX, DIM_O_MAX, DIM_R_MAX, DIM_TD_MAX, DIM_X_MAX,
DIM_Y_MAX................................................................................................................................... 444
DIM_A_MIN ... DIM_G_MIN, DIM_H1_MIN, DIM_H2_MIN, DIM_I_MIN, DIM_J_MIN, DIM_K1_MIN,
DIM_K2_MIN, DIM_O_MIN, DIM_R_MIN, DIM_TD_MIN, DIM_X_MIN, DIM_Y_MIN ................... 444
DR_DEFAULT_HOLE_SIZE .......................................................................................................... 444
DR_DEFAULT_WELD_SIZE ......................................................................................................... 444
DR_PART_POS ............................................................................................................................. 444
11.8 E.......................................................................................................................................................... 444
ECCENTRICITY_X, ECCENTRICITY_Y ....................................................................................... 444
EDGE_FOLD, EDGE_FOLD_1, EDGE_FOLD_2 .......................................................................... 445
END_X, END_Y, END_Z................................................................................................................ 445
END1_ANGLE_Z ........................................................................................................................... 445

END1_ANGLE_Y ........................................................................................................................... 445
END2_ANGLE_Z ........................................................................................................................... 445
END2_ANGLE_Y ........................................................................................................................... 445
END1_CODE, END2_CODE ......................................................................................................... 445
END1_SKEW, END2_SKEW......................................................................................................... 446
11.9 F.......................................................................................................................................................... 446
FATHER_ID ................................................................................................................................... 446
FINISH ........................................................................................................................................... 446
FLANGE_LENGTH_B.................................................................................................................... 446
FLANGE_LENGTH_U.................................................................................................................... 446
FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO.............................................................................................................. 446
FLANGE_THICKNESS .................................................................................................................. 446
FLANGE_THICKNESS_1, FLANGE_THICKNESS_2 .................................................................. 446
FLANGE_THICKNESS_B.............................................................................................................. 447
FLANGE_THICKNESS_U.............................................................................................................. 447
FLANGE_WIDTH ........................................................................................................................... 447
FLANGE_WIDTH_1, FLANGE_WIDTH_2..................................................................................... 447
FLANGE_WIDTH_B....................................................................................................................... 447
FLANGE_WIDTH_U ...................................................................................................................... 447
FOLD_ANGLE ............................................................................................................................... 447
11.10 G ......................................................................................................................................................... 447
GRADE .......................................................................................................................................... 447
GROUP_TYPE............................................................................................................................... 447
GUID .............................................................................................................................................. 448
11.11 H ......................................................................................................................................................... 448
HEAD_DIAMETER......................................................................................................................... 448
HEAD_THICKNESS....................................................................................................................... 448
HEIGHT.......................................................................................................................................... 448
HEIGHT_1 ... 4............................................................................................................................... 448
HOLE_TOLERANCE ..................................................................................................................... 448
HOOK_START, HOOK_END......................................................................................................... 449
HOOK_START_ANGLE, HOOK_END_ANGLE ............................................................................ 449
HOOK_START_LENGTH, HOOK_END_LENGTH ....................................................................... 449
HOOK_START_RADIUS, HOOK_END_RADIUS ......................................................................... 449
11.12 I........................................................................................................................................................... 449
INNER_DIAMETER ....................................................................................................................... 449
ID.................................................................................................................................................... 449
INFO1, INFO2 ................................................................................................................................ 449
IS_POLYBEAM .............................................................................................................................. 449
11.13 L.......................................................................................................................................................... 449
LAST .............................................................................................................................................. 449

LAST_MARK .................................................................................................................................. 450
LAST_TEXT1...3 ............................................................................................................................ 450
LENGTH......................................................................................................................................... 450
LENGTH_GROSS.......................................................................................................................... 450
LENGTH_MAX ............................................................................................................................... 450
LENGTH_MIN ................................................................................................................................ 450
LONG_HOLE_X ............................................................................................................................. 450
LONG_HOLE_Y ............................................................................................................................. 450
LOT_NUMBER............................................................................................................................... 450
LOT_NAME .................................................................................................................................... 450
11.14 M ......................................................................................................................................................... 451
MAJOR_AXIS_LENGTH_1 ... 2 ..................................................................................................... 451
MARK ............................................................................................................................................. 451
MATERIAL ..................................................................................................................................... 451
MATERIAL_TYPE .......................................................................................................................... 451
MESH_POS ................................................................................................................................... 451
MINOR_AXIS_LENGTH_1 ... 2...................................................................................................... 451
MODEL........................................................................................................................................... 451
MODEL_TOTAL ............................................................................................................................. 451
MODULUS_OF_ELASTICITY........................................................................................................ 452
MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_X............................................................................................................ 452
MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_Y............................................................................................................ 452
MORTAR_VOLUME....................................................................................................................... 452
11.15 N.......................................................................................................................................................... 452
NAME_BASE ................................................................................................................................. 452
NAME_FULL .................................................................................................................................. 452
NAME_SHORT .............................................................................................................................. 453
NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_ELASTIC_X................................................................................... 453
NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_ELASTIC_Y................................................................................... 453
NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_PLASTIC_X................................................................................... 453
NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_PLASTIC_Y................................................................................... 453
NORMALIZED_WARPING_CONSTANT....................................................................................... 453
NUMBER#1, NUMBER #2 ............................................................................................................. 453
11.16 O ......................................................................................................................................................... 453
OBJECT ......................................................................................................................................... 453
OBJECT_DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................... 453
OBJECT_LOCKED ........................................................................................................................ 454
OBJECT_TYPE.............................................................................................................................. 454
OWNER.......................................................................................................................................... 454
11.17 P.......................................................................................................................................................... 454
PAGE ............................................................................................................................................. 454
PART_POS .................................................................................................................................... 454

PART_PREFIX............................................................................................................................... 455
PART_SERIAL_NUMBER ............................................................................................................. 455
PCS................................................................................................................................................ 455
PHASE ........................................................................................................................................... 455
PLASTIC_MODULUS_X................................................................................................................ 455
PLASTIC_MODULUS_Y ............................................................................................................... 455
PLATE_DENSITY .......................................................................................................................... 455
PLATE_THICKNESS ..................................................................................................................... 455
PLOTFILE ...................................................................................................................................... 455
POISSONS_RATIO ....................................................................................................................... 456
POLAR_RADIUS_OF_GYRATION................................................................................................ 456
PRELIM_MARK ............................................................................................................................. 456
PROFILE........................................................................................................................................ 456
PROFILE_DENSITY ...................................................................................................................... 457
PROFILE_TYPE ............................................................................................................................ 457
PROFILE_WEIGHT ....................................................................................................................... 457
PROFILE_WEIGHT_NET .............................................................................................................. 457
11.18 R ......................................................................................................................................................... 458
RADIUS_OF_GYRATION_X ......................................................................................................... 458
RADIUS_OF_GYRATION_Y ......................................................................................................... 458
REBAR_POS ................................................................................................................................. 458
REFERENCE_MODEL .................................................................................................................. 458
REFERENCE_MODEL_OBJECT .................................................................................................. 458
ROUNDING_RADIUS, ROUNDING_RADIUS_1 ... 2.................................................................... 458
ROW_IN_PAGE............................................................................................................................. 458
11.19 S ......................................................................................................................................................... 459
SCALE1...5 .................................................................................................................................... 459
SECTION_MODULUS_X, SECTION_MODULUS_Y .................................................................... 459
SHAPE ........................................................................................................................................... 459
SHAPE_INTERNAL ....................................................................................................................... 459
SHEAR_CENTER_LOCATION...................................................................................................... 459
SIMILAR_TO_MAIN_PART ........................................................................................................... 459
SITE_WORKSHOP........................................................................................................................ 459
SIZE ............................................................................................................................................... 459
SORT_OF_E_x_Cw_PER_G_x_J ................................................................................................. 460
SUPPLEMENT_PART_WEIGHT................................................................................................... 460
START_X ....................................................................................................................................... 460
START_Y ....................................................................................................................................... 460
START_Z ....................................................................................................................................... 460
STATICAL_MOMENT_Qf .............................................................................................................. 460
STATICAL_MOMENT_Qw............................................................................................................. 460
STIFFENER_DIMENSION............................................................................................................. 460

STIFFENER_DIMENSION_1 ... 3 .................................................................................................. 460
STRAND_DEBONDED_STRANDS_1...5 ...................................................................................... 461
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_END_1...5 ............................................................................... 461
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_START_1...5........................................................................... 461
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_END_1...5 ..................................................................... 461
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_START_1...5................................................................. 461
STRAND_N_PATTERN ................................................................................................................. 461
STRAND_N_STRAND ................................................................................................................... 461
STRAND_POS ............................................................................................................................... 461
STRAND_PULL_FORCE ............................................................................................................... 462
STRAND_UNBONDED .................................................................................................................. 462
SUBTYPE....................................................................................................................................... 462
SURFACING_NAME...................................................................................................................... 462
11.20 T.......................................................................................................................................................... 462
TANGENT_OF_PRINCIPAL_AXIS_ANGLE.................................................................................. 462
TEXT1...3 ....................................................................................................................................... 462
THERMAL_DILATATION ............................................................................................................... 462
THREAD_IN_MATERIAL ............................................................................................................... 462
TILE_NUMBER .............................................................................................................................. 462
TILE_VOLUME............................................................................................................................... 462
TIME............................................................................................................................................... 463
TITLE.............................................................................................................................................. 463
TITLE1...3....................................................................................................................................... 463
TOP_LEVEL................................................................................................................................... 463
TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED ..................................................................................................... 463
TORSIONAL_CONSTANT............................................................................................................. 463
TYPE .............................................................................................................................................. 463
TYPE1 ............................................................................................................................................ 464
TYPE2 ............................................................................................................................................ 464
TYPE3 ............................................................................................................................................ 464
TYPE4 ........................................................................................................................................... 464
11.21 U.......................................................................................................................................................... 464
USERFIELD_1 ... _8 ...................................................................................................................... 464
11.22 V.......................................................................................................................................................... 464
VOLUME ........................................................................................................................................ 465
VOLUME_GROSS ......................................................................................................................... 465
VOLUME_NET ............................................................................................................................... 465
11.23 W......................................................................................................................................................... 465
WARPING_CONSTANT ................................................................................................................ 465
WARPING_STATICAL_MOMENT ................................................................................................. 465
WEB_HEIGHT................................................................................................................................ 465
WEB_LENGTH............................................................................................................................... 465

WEB_THICKNESS ........................................................................................................................ 465
WEB_THICKNESS_1, WEB_THICKNESS_2................................................................................ 465
WEB_WIDTH ................................................................................................................................. 465
WEIGHT......................................................................................................................................... 466
WEIGHT_GROSS.......................................................................................................................... 466
WEIGHT_M.................................................................................................................................... 466
WEIGHT_MAX ............................................................................................................................... 466
WEIGHT_MIN ................................................................................................................................ 466
WEIGHT_NET................................................................................................................................ 466
WEIGHT_PER_UNIT_LENGTH .................................................................................................... 467
WEIGHT_TOTAL ........................................................................................................................... 467
WELD_ANGLE1, WELD_ANGLE2 ................................................................................................ 467
WELD_ASSEMBLYTYPE .............................................................................................................. 467
WELD_DEFAULT .......................................................................................................................... 467
WELD_FATHER_CODE ................................................................................................................ 467
WELD_FATHER_NUMBER........................................................................................................... 467
WELD_FILLTYPE1, WELD_FILLTYPE2 ....................................................................................... 467
WELD_FINISH1, WELD_FINISH2................................................................................................. 467
WELD_ROOT_FACE_THICKNESS .............................................................................................. 468
WELD_SIZE1, WELD_SIZE2 ........................................................................................................ 468
WELD_TEXT.................................................................................................................................. 468
WELD_TYPE1, WELD_TYPE2...................................................................................................... 468
WIDTH ........................................................................................................................................... 468
WIDTH_1, WIDTH_2...................................................................................................................... 468
12 Reinforcing bar bending types............................................................. 469

12.1 Reinforcement in templates ................................................................................................................ 490

Preface
Tekla Structures includes complete documentation in an accessible help system. Our online help
is a detailed guide to Tekla Structures concepts, tools, commands, and features, with plenty of
examples. The documentation is also available in PDF format.
Topics in the Preface are:
• Audience (p. 37)
• Additional help resources (p. 37)
• Conventions used in this guide (p. 38)
• Related guides (p. 39)
Audience
This guide is aimed at structural engineers, detailers and designers who model, analyze, and
design concrete and steel structures.
We assume that you are familiar with the processes of structural engineering.
Additional help resources

The following resources also provide information about Tekla Structures:
Web site http://www.tekla.com
E-mail Contact your local helpdesk via e-mail:
Area office E-mail address

China TeklaStructures.Support.CHI@Tekla.com
Finland TeklaStructures.Support.FI@Tekla.com

Area office E-mail address
France TeklaStructures.Support.FR@Tekla.com
Germany TeklaStructures.Support.GER@Tekla.com
Japan TeklaStructures.Support.JPN@Tekla.com
Malaysia TeklaStructures.Support.MY@Tekla.com
Middle East TeklaStructures.Support.ME@Tekla.com
Sweden TeklaStructures.Support.SWE@Tekla.com
UK TeklaStructures.Support.UK@Tekla.com
US TeklaStructures.Support.US@Tekla.com
If you believe you have discovered a problem with this software, please report it to your Tekla
Structures Reseller using the maintenance request form provided at Help > Tekla on the
Web > Maintenance request....
Please send any comments or suggestions about Tekla Structures documentation to

BetC_Documentation@tekla.com.
Tekla Extranet Anyone with a current maintenance contract can use Tekla Extranet. Register now to get free
access to our online discussion forums, hints & tips, software downloads, tutorials, and more.
To register, go to https://extranet.tekla.com. You can also access Tekla Extranet from Tekla
Structures by clicking Help > Online Support > Tekla Extranet.
Conventions used in this guide

Typefaces We use different typefaces for different items in this guide. In most cases the meaning is obvious
from the context. If you are not sure what a certain typeface represents, you can check it here.
Convention Usage
Bold Bold indicates the names of keyboard keys.
Bold is also used for general emphasis in text.
Arial bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in Arial bold. Items
such as window and dialog box titles, field and button names, combo
box options, and list box items are displayed in this typeface.
Italic bold New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context
for the first time.
Monospace Extracts of Tekla Structures’s program code, HTML, or other mate-
rial that you would normally edit in a text editor, appears in mono-
spaced font.
Filenames and folder paths appear in monospace.

Also all the text you enter yourself appears in monospaced font.
Noteboxes We use several types of noteboxes, marked by different icons. Their functions are shown below:

A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing
things. A tip never contains information that is absolutely necessary.
A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can
also point you to other information in this guide that you might find
useful.
You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this
one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your
time.
This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that is

usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers. You
are never required to understand this kind of information.
Related guides
Tekla Structures includes a comprehensive help system in a series of online books. You will also
receive a printed installation guide with your Tekla Structures installation DVD.
• Modeling Manual
How to create a physical model.
• Analysis Manual
How to create loads and run structural analysis.
• Detailing Manual
How to create reinforcement, connections, and details.
• Drawing Manual
How to create and edit drawings.
• System Manual
Covers advanced features and how to maintain the Tekla Structures environment.
• TplEd User’s Guide
How to create and edit report and drawing templates.
• SymEd User’s Guide
How to use the SymEd graphical interface to manipulate symbols.

• Installation Troubleshooting Guide
Printed booklet explaining how to install Tekla Structures.

1 Using Tekla Structures
effectively
Introduction With Tekla Structures you do not have to do everything manually. There are many features you
can you use to automate your work processes. You will find it useful to read this chapter before
starting a project in Tekla Structures.
In this chapter This chapter is a collection of practical suggestions from experienced Tekla Structures users and
service personnel on how to use Tekla Structures effectively. You will also find many links to
more detailed explanations of the various features discussed here and step-by-step instructions
where appropriate.
Contents This chapter is divided into the following sections:
• General (p. 41)
• Modeling (p. 45)
• Drawings and printers (p. 47)
• Autosave (p. 48)
• Customizing the interface (p. 51)
• Optimizing system performance (p. 54)
1.1 General
This section describes how to make the most of various Tekla Structures features when setting
up a project.
Topics Firm and project folders (p. 42)
Numbering series (p. 42)
Phases (p. 42)
Catalogs (p. 42)
Preferences (p. 43)
Recording and running macros (p. 44)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com Using Tekla Structures effectively
Firm and project folders
Before you customize any object properties for specific projects or organizations, create firm
and project folders in which to store them. This will save you time setting up future projects and
also when you upgrade Tekla Structures.
See also Project and firm folders (p. 96)
Folder search order (p. 94)
Predefining part properties (p. 46)
Numbering series
Numbering series Before you start modeling, it is good idea to plan the numbering prefixes and start numbers you
will use for the entire project. Careful planning prevents numbering conflicts.
Example You could define the prefixes and start numbers for a multi-storey building as follows:
Column Beam Brace Truss

Profiles Plates assembly assembly assembly assembly
1st floor PR1000 1000 C1000 B1000 V1000 T1000
2nd floor PR2000 2000 C2000 B2000 V2000 T2000
See also Numbering parts

Numbering
Preferences (p. 43)
Phases
You can use phases to break up a model into different sections. Phases are often used to indicate
erection sequences. You can create reports and views, hide objects and copy objects from other
models according to their phase number.
Example You have a large project on which several users will work simultaneously in single-user mode.
First create a basic model which includes, for example, the columns. This is phase 1. You then
copy this basic model to all users.
Each user then works on a separate part of the building. As each part of the model is completed,
you can copy it back to the basic model as a separate phase (phase 2, 3, etc).
See also Phases
Edit > Copy Special > From Another Model...
View filter (Numbers tab)
Catalogs
Before you start a project, check that the catalogs you are using conform to the project
requirements. Ensure all users access the same catalogs.
See also Folder search order (p. 94)
Catalogs (p. 115)
Open a model first (p. 116)

Using Tekla Structures effectively
The profile catalog (p. 117)
The material catalog (p. 130)
The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs (p. 134)
The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 142)
Preferences
Check that your preferences are set up correctly before you start modeling. Click
Setup > Options... > Preferences. Component properties override preferences. Tekla
Structures only uses the values in the Preferences tab if the corresponding fields in the
component dialog boxes are empty.
Tekla Structures uses the information in the Preferences tab when it creates parts using
components.
Example It is important that profile names are set up correctly so that you can use filters and wizards
effectively.
If you change settings in the Preferences tab, Tekla Structures only applies the new settings to
components you subsequently create. Components you created prior to changing the preferences
are not affected.
In multi-user mode, all users working in the same model have the same
preferences as well as other properties, catalogs, etc.
Profile names
In the Preferences tab, profile names are parametric profile prefixes. They must exist in the
profile catalog. If you want to use a parametric profile name that does not exist in the catalog,
first add it to profile catalog, then enter it here. Tekla Structures uses the Folded plate prefix
when you use the Polyplate command in macros.
See also The profile catalog (p. 117).
Connections
To define the default bolt properties to use in connections, select a Bolt standard and Bolt size.
Enter part start numbers in fields Pos1 to Pos4. Cross-check these settings against the
numbering series you define to make sure they cannot overlap. If they overlap, Tekla Structures
may create two non-identical parts with the same part number. This generates an error in the log
file numbering.history.
Edge distance
When you use components, Tekla Structures uses the Factor of bolt edge distance and
Element considered fields to check that the bolts it creates are not too close to the edge of a
part. Tekla Structures warns you if they are.
Check that bolt edge distance is set according to the standard you are using. Use the Element
considered field to base edge distance checks on bolt or hole diameter.
Default edge distance settings depend on the environment. If you change the default settings, use
Save defaults (p. 105) command to save settings in the current model folder.
See also Getting started.

Recording and running macros
Tekla Structures enables you to record a series of actions from menus, dialog boxes, and
shortcuts.
Recording a To record a macro:
macro
1. Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box.
2. Enter a Macro name.
3. Click Record.
4. Perform the actions you want to record.

5. Click Stop to stop recording.
Macros are saved as *.cs files, in the folder defined with the XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY
variable in the environment-specific initialization files.
The recorded macro is saved in the drawings or modeling folders,

depending on in which mode the macro was recorded in.
Creating a macro To manually create a macro file, click Create in the Macros dialog box. This creates an empty
manually macro file, which you can manually edit, or copy and paste commands to it from other macro
files.
Running a macro To run a macro:

2. Select the macro and click Run.
Editing macros To view or edit a macro:
1. First check that the file type .cs is associated with suitable text editor.
3. Select the macro and click Edit.
4. The macro opens in the associated text editor.
Macros are based on C# commands and in case you want to edit macros,
knowledge of C# programming is needed.
Timestamp If you want to examine the time spent on different tasks while recording macros, use the variable
XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP.
Warning messages
Some third party applications may cause unexpected complications, such as unnecessary
warning messages, when working with Tekla Structures. Applications that are known to cause
complications are anti-spyware programs.
1.2 Modeling
This section explains how to make the most of the various modeling tools and features in Tekla
Structures.
Topics Automating the detailing process (p. 45)
Predefining part properties (p. 46)
Modeling tools (p. 46)
AutoDefaults (p. 47)
AutoConnection (p. 47)
Automating the detailing process

If you have a standard way of configuring connections, save time by saving the connection
properties once. Store them in firm or project folders for future use. See Firm and project
folders (p. 42).
Tekla Structures includes AutoConnection and AutoDefaults tools to automate the modeling
process. So you can customize Tekla Structures to suit a particular project and the way you work.
See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults and also AutoConnection (p. 151).
There are three levels of automation that you can help you work faster and more accurately.

Predefining part properties
If you have additional information you need to include for particular parts, create user-defined
attributes. Tekla Structures saves all customized object properties in the current model folder.
You can also copy the attribute files to project or firm folders for future use. See Firm and
project folders (p. 42) and Part properties.
In multi-user mode, all users working on the same model use the same
preferences and attribute files.
Example For beam properties, this technique guarantees that part names are correct. This means you can
easily use a wizard to create drawings. See Using drawing wizards and Creating
AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 106).
Consider developing a naming policy for files containing customized object properties. Then
you can easily cut and paste them to firm and project folders. This also makes it easier to manage
objects in view filters, selection filters, drawing properties, etc.
Using predefined properties

You can set the properties for macros, connections, and other objects (columns, beams, bolts,
etc.) then save them. It is then simple to reload these properties either for current or future
projects.
Modeling tools
Customize the properties of modeling tools you use to create objects, rather than changing the
properties manually each time.
Example You know you will use the same type of stairs in several projects. Set up and save the stair
modeling tool properties once.

When you next need to use that particular stair modeling tool you can just load the pre-defined
properties, as shown below. When you apply the modeling tool, Tekla Structures creates exactly
the same stairs.
Predefined properties
See also Getting started.
AutoDefaults
Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply the correct properties to existing connections.
Using this technique you are also building your own expertise into the Tekla Structures database,
so the entire company benefits from it.
See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults, and also AutoConnection (p. 151).
AutoConnection
Use the AutoConnection feature to automatically apply connections.
You can use AutoConnection to quickly add connections individually, in phases, or project-
wide. This is a useful technique when you are working on a large project using many
connections, modifying a model, or importing modified profiles.
See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults, and also AutoConnection (p. 151).
1.3 Drawings and printers

This section explains how to make the most of the selection filters, wizards and printer catalog
settings to standardize drawing creation and printing.
Topics Drawing properties (p. 48)
Layouts and templates (p. 48)
Reports and symbols (p. 48)
Selection filters (p. 48)
Wizards (p. 48)
Defining print devices (p. 48)

Drawing properties
Using well-prepared drawing settings and wizards can dramatically reduce the time it takes to
create and edit drawings. Define the settings for different types of parts and assemblies carefully.
Then the drawings you create are as complete as possible, with little or no need for editing.
Examples Define different assembly drawing settings for columns, beams, secondary beams, plates,
bracings and trusses.
Define single-part drawing settings for I and H profiles, tubes, round tubes (wrap-around) and
plates.
Predefine drawing view properties to use additional views in drawings, such as detail, section or
plan views.
See also Drawing Properties.
Layouts and templates

Plan and define the layouts and templates for drawings you will use before you start a project.
See Drawing Layout.
Reports and symbols

Plan and define special reports and symbols you need for a project.
Selection filters
Create your own selection filters to use both when modeling and using wizards to automate
drawing creation.
You will find it useful to create selection filters for each part with a different name (column,
beam, sec.beam, plate, brace, truss, etc.).
Use the Selection Filter dialog box to modify existing filters or create your own. See Selection
filter.
Wizards
Use wizards to create objects and drawings automatically.
See Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 106) and Using drawing wizards.
Defining print devices

Set up print devices before starting the project.
See The plotter catalog.
1.4 Autosave
Tekla Structures includes the Autosave feature that backs up and saves your work automatically
at set intervals. In addition, we strongly recommend that you implement and test a corporate

backup strategy. When restoring system backups, you should always restore an entire copy of a
model rather than parts of it. Autosave files have the extension .db1_<user>.
In multi-user mode, Autosave is not equivalent to the Save command.

Autosave only saves a single user’s version of the model and does not
update the master model.
Topics Setting Autosave interval (p. 49)

Autosave file location (p. 49)
Keeping Autosave files (p. 50)
Usernames (p. 50)
Application error (p. 50)
Setting Autosave interval

You can define Autosave intervals separately for operations performed in the Drawing Editor or
while modeling, and for automatic drawing creation.
Click Tools > Options > Options... > General.
The first value defines how often Tekla Structures performs an autosave while working in the
Model Editor or the Drawing Editor. This number represents the number of menu commands
issued. If the command is recursed, for instance creating many beams without interrupting the
Create > Beam command, it counts as one menu command. Likewise, in the Drawing Editor,
creating many dimensions with the Create > Horizontal dimension command without
interrupting the command counts as only one command.
The second value is the number of drawings after which Tekla Structures automatically saves
your work.
Autosave file location

To have Tekla Structures store Autosave files in a specific folder, use the variable
XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY. Tekla Structures creates the folder automatically. You will find the
Autosave file in the autosave folder, in a subfolder with the same name as the model.
If you do not use this variable, Tekla Structures stores Autosave files in the current model folder.
Example You are working in multi-user mode and want Tekla Structures to store Autosave files locally,
not in the model folder. Set the variable
XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY=%XS_RUNPATH%\autosave.

In multi-user mode, Autosave only saves a single user’s version of the
model and does does not update the master model.
You will notice that in multi-user mode Autosave is much faster than using the Save command.
This is because Autosave performs a local save, but the Save command updates the master
model.
Keeping Autosave files

By default Tekla Structures deletes Autosave files when you save and close a model.
To keep Autosave files, even if you exit Tekla Structures without saving the model, set the
variable XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING=TRUE.
Usernames
Give all users a different username when working in both single- and multi-user mode. Tekla
Structures identifies users by username.
Single-user In single-user mode, if several users with the same username open a model, Tekla Structures
does not display a warning. So you risk conflicts when saving the model.
Multi-user In multi-user mode, Tekla Structures saves Autosave files in the master model folder by default
with the filename <model>.db1_<user>. So, if several people are using the same username,
conflicts are inevitable.
See also Multi-user mode (p. 57).
Application error
When you open a model, Tekla Structures automatically checks if the previous session exited
normally. If it did not, Tekla Structures prompts whether you want to continue using the
Autosave model or the original model.
Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read.

When Tekla Structures displays the warning Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read, it means
that hardware problems have damaged the model database. Your hard disk may be damaged.
Use autosave or system backup files to restore the model.

1.5 Customizing the interface
Once you are familiar with Tekla Structures, you can create your own toolbars, menu and
shortcuts containing the commands you use every day. This section explains how to do this.
Topics Toolbars (p. 51)
Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 52)
Creating a user-defined menu (p. 53)
Defining shortcuts (p. 53)
Toolbars
In Tekla Structures, both customized toolbars and user-defined menus belong to the user, not the
model or PC.
You can create as many toolbars as you need.
Do not change existing toolbars, particularly the connection toolbars.

Instead, create new ones. See Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 52).
Managing toolbars
To open the Customize dialog box, click Tools > Customize....
Use the Toolbars tab to reorganize toolbars: move commands from one toolbar to another and
even create your own toolbars.
The tree on the right contains all available toolbars and displays the commands they include.

Action Description
Add or remove commands In the Customize dialog box, click on a
command to select it, then on the toolbar
on which you want the command to
appear. Click the right arrow to add
commands, the left arrow to remove
them.
Delete commands or toolbars In the Customize dialog box, click a
command or toolbar to select it, then
click Delete.
Restore original toolbar Click Reset to restore the original
toolbar.
Display toolbar Check Visible to display the toolbar in
Tekla Structures. Tekla Structures uses
the following icons to indicate if a
toolbar is visible or not:
Move command in toolbar tree Use arrow buttons.
Icons
Tekla Structures displays the icon for the command you select. By default, the icon is 16x16
pixels. If the icons look too small, check Large icons which are 24x24 pixels. Check Tooltips
to see the command name when you hold the pointer over an icon.
Creating a user-defined toolbar

To create your own toolbar:
1. Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box.
Create also the toolbars for Drawing Editor in the Modeling Editor, other-
wise they are not written to the registry.
2. On the Toolbars tab, click New.... An new toolbar with the name User Toolbar 1 appears
in the toolbar tree. You can enter a new name for the toolbar.
3. Click commands on the list on the left, then the right arrow to add them to a toolbar. Use
the left arrow to remove commands from a toolbar.
4. Repeat step 3 until you have all the desired commands on the toolbar.
5. Click Close.
See also Toolbars (p. 51) and Creating a user-defined menu (p. 53).

Creating a user-defined menu
Each user can create their own menu, which is always named User. You can only create one user
menu per user.
To create your own menu:
Create also the menu for Drawing Editor in the Modeling Editor, other-
wise it is not written to the registry.
2. Click the Menu tab.

3. Click commands on the command list on the left, then the right arrow to add them to the
menu. Tekla Structures displays the commands on the menu on the right of the dialog box.
4. Use the left arrow to remove commands from the menu.
5. Use the arrow buttons to move a command up or down the toolbar tree.
6. Use the line button to add a separator line above the selected command.
7. Repeat step 3 until you have added all the desired commands to the menu.
8. Click Close.
9. You must restart Tekla Structures to activate the menu. The menu name is always User.
See also Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 52).
Defining shortcuts
If you frequently use certain commands, assign keyboard shortcuts to them. You will find it
faster than using the icons and menus.
To assign a shortcut to a command:
2. Click on the command on the list on the left of the dialog box. Use the Filter list box to find
commands easily. Click to select subgroups of commands. ALL displays all the commands
available in Tekla Structures. You can also type in the command name to search for
commands.
3. Use the Shortcut fields to assign a shortcut to the command. You can use a single letter, or
combine a letter with the Shift, Alt or Ctrl keys.
4. Copy the command to the User menu to activate the shortcut. See Creating a user-defined
menu (p. 53).
5. Click Close to exit the Customize dialog box.
Valid shortcut You can use the following keys in shortcuts:
keys
• A–Z
• 0–9
• F1–F24
• Left, Right Up, Down
• Backspace, Enter, Esc, Tab

• Insert, Delete, Home, End, Page Up, Page Down
• Numpad 0–9
• Numpad */+-, (Multiply, Divide, Add, Subtract, Decimal)
To define, for example, + as a shortcut, enter add in the Shortcut field:
Restart Tekla Structures. To execute the command, use the + key on the
Numpad. The same procedure applies for Multiply, Divide, Subtract and
Decimal.
Tekla Structures also includes many predefined shortcuts. See Appendix E, Reserved shortcuts
(p. 419).
1.6 Optimizing system performance

There are various settings in Tekla Structures that you can modify to improve system
performance, which is particularly useful when you are handling large and complex models.
Topics Virtual memory (p. 54)
Display adaptor (p. 54)
Solid buffer size (p. 55)
How Tekla Structures handles solids (p. 55)
Virtual memory
You will probably need to adjust the virtual memory settings in Windows to optimize system
performance. The amount of virtual memory you need depends on the size of the model, and the
processes you are using. (For example, saving in multi-user mode is more memory-intensive
than in single user mode.)
To prevent data loss, always use identical values for the Initial size and
Maximum size of virtual memory.
Display adaptor
Tekla Structures makes use of OpenGL technology, if your display adaptor supports it. You may
need to indicate that your display adaptor does not support OpenGL technology. Indications can
be: objects displayed incorrectly, or difficulty selecting objects.
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced options dialog box.
2. In the Model view category, set the variable XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING to TRUE.

3. Restart Tekla Structures.
Solid buffer size

To improve performance in large models, try increasing the solid buffer size using the variable
XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE. This results in Tekla Structures keeping more solids in memory, so
it does not have to continuously recreate them. This technique uses a little extra memory, but
can result in significant increases in speed. In one example, increasing the solid buffer size from
5000 to 20000 decreased the time taken to run the numbering routine by 80%.
This variable affects many aspects of modeling, drawings and numbering.
If you increase the solid buffer to a size that exceeds the available
memory, Tekla Structures uses the hard drive. This slows down the
system significantly. Trial and error is the best way to optimize the solid
buffer size.
See also How Tekla Structures handles solids (p. 55).
How Tekla Structures handles solids

One of the factors that affect performance is the number of verteces in objects. For instance,
tubes, particularly if they are curved, usually contain a large number of verteces, as can large
numbers of round cuts. The key to optimizing performance in these circumstances is to
manipulate the settings that affect how Tekla Structures handles solids. Techniques you can try
include:
• Try setting the variable XS_ROUND_SEGMENTS=21. This results in fewer segment in round
cross sections, up to 50% of the original load.
• Minimize the number of curved segments in curved beams. A value of 20 or less is usually
adequate for the bottom chords. See Bending.
• Maximize solid buffer size. See Solid buffer size (p. 55).
• Minimize the number of views, when you create assembly drawings. For instance, avoid
using automatic section view creation in an assembly drawing with many tubes. When
Tekla Structures creates the cuts, the solids are are actually cut in the drawing, which is
time-consuming.
• When you create assembly drawings, minimize the number of dimensions, as searching for
dimension points in tubes is time-consuming. Avoid using automatic dimensioning in
trusses. See Dimensioning.
• It is much faster to use fast, or reference line parts and fast hole and bolt representation.
When you want an exact view of the parts, either minimize the work area first, or only the
objects you want Tekla Structures to draw with exact lines. See Display.

2 Multi-user mode
Introduction You can work on Tekla Structures models in either single-user or multi-user mode. Multi-user
mode allows several users to access the same model at the same time. Several users can work on
the same project and be aware of the others’ progress. This eliminates the need for copying and
merging models.
This chapter describes how to set up a multi-user system and how to work in multi-user mode.
Assumed You need some experience using the Tekla Structures Model Editor.
background
• Multi-user mode (p. 57)
• Modeling in multi-user mode (p. 67)
• Drawings in multi-user mode (p. 73)
• Maintenance procedures (p. 74)
• Access rights (p. 75)
2.1 Multi-user mode

This section explains how multi-user mode works, and how to set up and use Tekla Structures
in multi-user mode.
Tekla Structures multi-user mode only runs on TCP/IP-based networks.
Topics When to use multi-user mode (p. 58)

Overview of the multi-user system (p. 59)
How multi-user works (p. 60)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com Multi-user mode
Setting up the multi-user system (p. 61)
Saving in multi-user mode (p. 62)
Shutting down the model (p. 64)
Copying multi-user models (p. 64)
Error messages (p. 65)
Recommendations (p. 66)
When to use multi-user mode

You can use Tekla Structures in either single-user or multi-user mode. In single-user mode, only
one user can work on a model at one time. When modeling a large project, multi-user mode
allows many users to work on a model simultaneously.
Advantages • No duplicate models to control, track or store
• Less interfacing reduces onsite errors
• Erection plans based on a single master model
• Bolt and material lists generated from a single master model
• Ability to share the workload of large projects among many users
• Ability to collect model history (see XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY in the online help)

Other issues to As with all projects, you need to plan your multi-user project carefully. Some issues to consider
consider are:
• Only one user can save to the master model at a time
• Use a numbering plan
• Schedule numbering sessions appropriately (it can take some time to number larger models)
• If possible, assign distinct areas of the model to each user.
• You should never use a mix of single-user and multi-user setups on one project. Saving a
multi-user model in single-user mode deletes changes by other users working on the model,
and can also corrupt the model. See Saving in multi-user mode (p. 62) to find out how
saving works in multi-user mode.
Switching between single-user and multi-user modes

You can easily switch between single-user and multi-user modes by using the different options
in the Open dialog box.
To open a multi-user model in single-user mode:
1. In the Open dialog box, select the multi-user model.
2. Right-click and select Open as single-user model from the pop-up menu.
To open a single-user model in multi-user mode:
1. In the Open dialog box, select the single-user model.
2. Right-click and select Open as multi-user model from the pop-up menu.
3. Tekla Structures asks for the name of the server. In the Open as multi-user model dialog
box, enter the server name or select it from the list box, and then click OK.
Changing the To change the Tekla Structures server of a multi-user model:
server
1. In the Open dialog box, select the multi-user model.

www.cadfamily.com
Multi-user mode EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
2. Right-click and select Change server from the pop-up menu.
3. Tekla Structures asks for the name of the new server. In the Change server dialog box,
enter the server name or select it from the list box, and then click OK.
If you change the server of a model, but the connection to the new server
cannot be established, the old connection is restored.
The file .This_is_multiuser_model located in the model folder

defines whether the model is a multi-user or a single-user model. The file
includes also the name of the server. You can open the file using any stan-
dard text editor.
See also For more information on the multi-user mode, see Multi-user Mode.
Overview of the multi-user system

A Tekla Structures multi-user system runs on a TCP/IP network and consists of:
• A server computer running xs_server.exe
• A file server computer containing the master model
• Client computers running Tekla Structures
We recommend that you only run one Tekla Structures server on a

network.
The Tekla Structures server

The Tekla Structures server program performs these main tasks:
• Distributes ID numbers for new objects
• Locks the model when somebody saves or numbers the model
• Identifies client computers

To optimize the performance of a multi-user system, run as few other programs as possible on
the Tekla Structures server. This ensures that it processes network requests for object ID
numbers efficiently.
Server shutdown Users should save their working models to the master model before the Tekla Structures server
is shut down. If the server closes down before saving the working models, simply restart it, then
have users save their working models to the master model.
See also How multi-user works (p. 60)
Setting up the multi-user system (p. 61)

How multi-user works
The multi-user model consists of a single master model. Each user can access this model and
open their own local view of the model. This local view is called a working model. The above
image shows one possible configuration of the multi-user system.
Any changes a user makes to his working model are local and are not visible to other users until
he saves the working model to the master model.
The multi-user system can contain several client computers, where users work on their working
models. The master model can be located anywhere on the network, including any of the client
computers.
When you open a multi-user model on a client computer, Tekla Structures makes a copy of the
master model and saves it locally on the client computer (a working model).
When you click Save to save your working model back to the master model, Tekla Structures:
1. Takes a new copy of the master model and compares your working model with it.
2. Saves the changes in your working model to the copy of the master model (locally).
3. Saves this copy back to the master model. (Other users can now see your changes.)
4. Takes a new copy of the master model and saves it locally as your working model. (You can
see your own changes and those uploaded by other users.)
Locking
To preserve the integrity of the multi-user model, Tekla Structures locks the master model when
a user:
• Opens the multi-user model
• Saves a plan model to the master model
• Runs numbering
When you try to save the model when it is locked, Tekla Structures gives you an option to queue
for saving until the model is unlocked.

www.cadfamily.com
If you click Yes, Tekla Structures displays the following message:
Tekla Structures will keep on retrying every 15 seconds until the operation is completed or until
you click Cancel.
See also Saving in multi-user mode (p. 62)
Setting up the multi-user system

The following steps outline how to set up a multi-user system:
1. Set up one computer to run the Tekla Structures server program, xs_server.exe.
This program must be launched before anybody opens the multi-user model in Tekla
Structures.
The xs_server.exe program is installed by default in the folder
..\TeklaStructures\MultiUserServer\<version>.
2. In the Windows Start menu, go to All Programs > Tekla Structures Multi-user server >
Tekla Structures Server to start the Tekla Structures server program.
3. Users can now start working on their copies of the multi-user model.
4. Check the DOS window created by xs_server.exe to check that it is running. This
shows all the server activity (for example, who has a model open, etc.).
You can also:
• Run the server program from the command prompt using the same command.
• Click Start on the taskbar, select Run... and then type the command shown in the box above.
We recommend that you make it a common practice to update the

xs_server.exe also when updating the client computers with the latest
version of Tekla Structures.
See also Overview of the multi-user system (p. 59)

How multi-user works (p. 60)

Saving in multi-user mode
Tekla Structures multi-user mode uses a flexible master model and plan model concept, rather
than more limiting ’file-locking’ technology. See How multi-user works (p. 60) for more
information.
Save
Tekla Structures preserves the integrity of the model, even if more than one user edits the same
model objects. If two users modify the same object, then save to the master model, the master
model will only contain the changes of the user who most recently saved their working model
to the master model.
To avoid potential save conflicts, have users work on different areas of

the model.
If Tekla Structures detects conflicts in the multi-user model when you are
saving the model before exiting, it asks if you wish to review the conflicts
before exiting.
Tekla Structures creates connections to the right parts, even if the part is moved by another user.
Autosave
Autosave (p. 48) only saves to your computer, and does not reload the master model. Other users
do not see the modifications you make after an Autosave. In multi-user mode, this makes
Autosave much faster than the Save command. Save updates the master model.
To save quickly during a Tekla Structures session:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Options... > General, and define Autosave intervals for
operations performed in the Drawing Editor or while modeling in Autosave.
2. Periodically autosave the model manually.
To do so,
• create a shortcut for the Autosave command, see Defining shortcuts (p. 53)
OR
• add the command to a toolbar, see Toolbars (p. 51).
Remember to save regularly to the master model by clicking Save.
See also Error messages (p. 65)

Copying multi-user models (p. 64)

www.cadfamily.com
Saving model revision comments
You can save model revision comments when working with multi-user models. This means that
all objects which have been changed during the last save interval include the revision
information in them. You can use this information in filtering and reports.
Preconditions Set the variable XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT to TRUE in Tools > Options > Advanced
Options... > Multi-user.
Set the variable XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY to TRUE in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options... > Speed and Accuracy.
1. When you have set the variables mentioned above to TRUE, Tekla Structures displays the
Model revision comments dialog box when you are saving the model. Enter the desired
revision comment and code in the Model revision comment and Model revision code
fields.
2. Click OK.

Tekla Structures applies the values of this dialog box to parts that were changed after the last
save. When you inquire objects, you can see the model revision information in the Inquire
Object dialog box. You can use this information also for selection and view filtering.
To disable the saving model revision comments, add it to the user.ini

file without a value. For more information see Disabling variables in an
initialization file (p. 81).
Shutting down the model

Do not shut down the computer containing the master model while other users are working on
their working models. They will not be able to save their changes to the master model.
If this does happen, to avoid losing any changes, follow the steps below:
1. Keep the working model(s) open on the client computer(s).
2. Restart the computer containing the master model.
3. Open the master model on the computer containing it and autosave the model.
4. Click Save on the client computers to save the working models to the master model.
See also Save (p. 62)
Autosave (p. 62)
Copying multi-user models

To copy a multi-user model:
1. Have all users quit the master model.
2. Click File > Open, right-click the multi-user model and select Open as single-user model.
3. Use Save as to make a copy of the multi-user model.
4. Exit Tekla Structures and re-open the model in multi-user mode to continue working on it.
Displaying active multi-users

You can display information on users working on the same server. To do this:
1. Click Tools > Active Multi-Users...
The Active Multi-Users dialog box displays the following information:
Field Description
Locked The time when the model was locked.
Model name The name of the model.
User Users that are currently working on models
on the server.
Latest login The time when the users have logged in.
Latest access to server The time when the users have last accessed
the server.

www.cadfamily.com
Field Description
Editing drawings The drawings that are currently being edited.
Edited drawings The drawings that have been edited and
saved to the server.
The Active Multi-Users dialog box is refreshed every 30 seconds. You

can refresh it immediately by clicking Refresh.
Clearing locks
You can clear the locks of objects from other users in the multi-user server.
Preconditions To use this feature you need to define the action AllowMultiuserKick and give full
permissions to the users that may clear locks in the file privileges.inp located in the
folder ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\*your_environment\inp.
To clear the locks of a user:
Usage 1. Click Tools > Active Multi-Users...
2. Right-click a user whose locks you want to clear and select Clear locks from the pop-up
menu.
Result Using this command removes all the locks the user has on objects. This means that if an
application error has occurred on the user’s computer, the locks on locked objects can be cleared.
See also Locks for drawings (p. 74)
Error messages
This section describes the error messages you might come across when you work in multi-user
mode, their probable causes, and possible solutions.

Error message Problem Solution
Database write More than one user has Check the
conflicts detected changed an object. conflict.log. It
lists the ID numbers of the
objects that more than one
user has changed. This is
not usually a critical
problem. No need to use
the Check database tool.
See also Save (p. 62).
Could not save You tried to save a multi- • Check that the
model. Disk is full or user model to a computer computer where you
write protected. or folder that you could want to save the
not access. model is switched on.
• Check that you have
permission to write
to the model folder.
• Check that there is
enough disk space to
save the model.
• Restart the computer
where you want to
save the model. Try
to save the model
again.
Database locked Computer crashed while To unlock the model, the
cannot open model saving the model, which user whose system
locks the model. crashed should open the
model in multi-user mode
and save it.
Recommendations
Here are some recommendations on how to optimize your multi-user setup.
Server computer
The Tekla Structures server does not have a high workload and can be run on a relatively low
specification computer. You do not need a commercial network file server. Its main task is to
process network requests for object ID numbers. See The Tekla Structures server (p. 59) for
more information.
Client computer
Have as much RAM as possible (128 Mb minimum). This speeds up saving in multi-user mode.
See Save (p. 62) to find out more about the multi-user save process.
We also recommend using a fast processor, particularly for computers where you run
numbering.
LVD (Low Voltage Differential) drives speed up the saving and opening of models, if the
system does not have to use virtual memory (or file swapping to the hard disk).

www.cadfamily.com
Network
Ensure that the TCP/IP protocols are set correctly:
• Each PC on the same network has a unique ID number
• Each PC on the same network has an identical Subnet mask
To find the IP address of a computer, type ipconfig at the DOS prompt.

In Windows 2000 you can also use Control panel > System > Network
identification.
Model dump
Do not import model dumps in multi-user mode.
2.2 Modeling in multi-user mode

This section describes aspects of modeling in Tekla Structures that are specific to multi-user
mode.
Topics Working with a master model (p. 67)
Numbering setup (p. 71)
Numbering – specific cases (p. 72)
Working with a master model

Before you start a project, assign each user an area of the model. To prevent potential save
conflicts, you need to avoid having more than one user working on the same, or adjacent model
objects. See also Saving in multi-user mode (p. 62).
Example If three users are to model a project, User #1 could model columns, User #2 the 1st floor beams,
and User #3 the 2nd floor beams.
In the following example, three users are working on the same model. You can see how
modeling and saving works in practice.
The master model contains columns and grids, as you can see here.
Each user opens the model in multi-user mode. All users are now working on working models,
locally.

On the working models:
User #1 adds base plates to the columns:
User #2 adds and connects the 1st floor steel beams:

www.cadfamily.com
User #3 adds and connects the 2nd floor steel beams:
User #1 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows the base plates
he added and looks like this:

User #2 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows his 1st floor
framing and and User #1’s base plates:
User #3 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows all three users’s
work:

www.cadfamily.com
To see the updated master model, Users #1 and #2 need to save to the master model again to
update their working models.
Numbering setup
We strongly recommend that you do not carry out numbering on more

than one computer working on the multi-user model, but if you do so,
number newly created parts before saving to the master model. This is
because numbering modifies the part. If you save unnumbered parts and
continue working with them, some other user may number the model,
including your new parts, and save to the master model, and thus over-
write your modifications.
To lock the master model and allow the other users continue working during numbering:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings....
2. In the Numbering setup dialog box, select the Synchronize with master model (save-
numbering-save) check box.
When you select this check box, you can cancel the numbering before the last save is made.
This is useful, for example, if you want to check the numbering results and you find
something that you still want to change.
3. Modify the other properties as required.
4. Click OK.
Tekla Structures will now save the model before and after you run full numbering, or
number modified parts.
When you run numbering by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number All Parts
(Full Numbering), Tekla Structures displays a list that shows the numbering progress. When the
numbering is finished, the changed numbering results are highlighted in the list.

When you select an item on the list, Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding object(s) in
the model. If you keep the F key pressed when you select the item, Tekla Structures fits the work
area of the current view around the objects.
If the numbering results are correct, click Save numbers to make the second save. To cancel
the numbering before the second save, click Cancel. If you cancel the numbering, the model is
returned to the state before numbering and standard files are read to all dialogs.
To review the numbering results further, click Stop timer.
To change the time frame in which Tekla Structures makes the second save, use the variable
XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME.
Adjusting the variable XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE in Tekla Structures

can improve numbering speed.
See also Controlling access to numbering setup (p. 78)
Numbering – specific cases

If you need to include numbering information from areas in the model that have been modeled
by other users:
1. Save your working model.
2. Ask all the other users to save their working models. This updates the master model.
3. Number the model. Make sure that the Synchronize with master model (save-
numbering-save) checkbox is selected in the Numbering setup dialog box (see
Numbering setup (p. 71)). This updates each working model, numbers the master model,
and then saves the numbered master model for all users to access.

www.cadfamily.com
If you create drawings and/or reports after numbering, you need to save
the master model again to make them visible to other users.
2.3 Drawings in multi-user mode

The multi-user environment is very useful when several users are simultaneously editing
drawings. This section describes aspects of drawing production that are specific to multi-user
mode.
Topics About drawing files (p. 73)
Guidelines for multi-user drawings (p. 73)
About drawing files

Tekla Structures saves each drawing in a unique file. These drawing files are located in the
drawing folder in the master model folder.
The file is in the format D0000123456.dg. dg files are part of the model, so you can only
open them using the Tekla Structures drawing editor.
dg files contain the locations of views, details of any editing done to the drawing, and the
positions of dimensions, part marks, and text. The dg filename does not contain any reference
to assembly, part, or multi-drawing numbers.
If two users open and save the same drawing in their working models, then save their changes
to the master model, one set of changes will be lost. The master model will only contain the
changes of the user who most recently saved their working model to the master model. See
Saving in multi-user mode (p. 62).
The Tekla Structures server program xs_server.exe assigns the general arrangement
drawing numbers automatically. This means that each drawing gets the first free number
available. If users A and B both create a general arrangement drawing at the same time, they are
automatically assigned different numbers. The same applies to multi-drawing numbers.
Guidelines for multi-user drawings

You may find the following guidelines useful when you edit or check drawings:

Action Recommendation
Saving drawings Periodically save your working model to the master
model (every 5–10 drawings).
Editing drawings • Assign each user a different range of drawings to
edit.
• Lock finalized drawings.
• If Tekla Structures displays the message Data-

base write conflicts detected and a drawing ID
number, two or more users have opened and
saved the same drawing. See About drawing
files (p. 73).
Checking drawings Only check locked drawings.
Printing drawings Make sure that no-one else is working with the same
drawing. If you print a drawing while someone else is
editing it and then save the model, the other user’s
changes will be lost, even though you have not
opened, modified, or saved the drawing.
You can disable the print date by using the variable
XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE.
Creating GA draw- Create and assign blank GA drawings to each user.
ings This prevents users overwriting each others changes,
or creating GA drawings with the same name.
Locks for drawings

When you are about to open a drawing, Tekla Structures displays a notification on the status of
the drawing. The options are:
• Someone is already editing it.
• Someone has already edited it (drawing has been saved to their computer, but not yet to the
server).
• The drawing has already been saved and there is a newer version available on the server.
Locks for drawings are only used when a drawing is edited manually, not
for example when drawings are automatically edited through cloning.
See also Clearing locks (p. 65)
2.4 Maintenance procedures

This section contains advice on maintaining your multi-user model.
Topics Checking multi-user databases (p. 75)

www.cadfamily.com
Deleting unnecessary dg files (p. 75)
Checking multi-user databases

To preserve the integrity of your multi-user model, you need to remove any inconsistencies from
the multi-user database at least once a day. This may also fix assemblies with no main part and
drawings of unknown (U) type.
To remove inconsistencies from a multi-user database:
1. Have all other users exit the multi-user model.
2. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Diagnose Model.
3. Save the model.
4. Exit the model.
We recommend that you check the multi-user databases regularly.
Deleting unnecessary dg files

Every time you update a drawing,Tekla Structures creates a new drawing (.dg) file in the
drawings sub-folder of the model. After that, the previous drawing file is not used.
You can have the unnecessary drawing files deleted automatically when the last user exits the
model and saves the model. To do this, set the variable XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DRAWINGS
to TRUE in the global_default_env.ini file located in the
..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\country-independent folder.
For additional safety, drawing files that are less than seven days old are
not deleted.
2.5 Access rights

You can protect user-defined attributes using privileges. You can also protect your model and
drawings from accidental changes using a lock attribute. Using the lock attribute and privileges
together you can even restrict some users or organizations from modifying your model.
For example, you can limit access to the model so that a checker can only change status
attributes. Or you could prevent certain users from changing the user-defined attributes used for
approval or manufacturing and erection status.
Topics Locking objects (p. 76)
Controlling access to attributes (p. 76)
Restricting access to model (p. 77)

Locking objects
To protect objects from being accidentally changed, you can use a user-defined attribute called
a lock attribute. You can use it for:
• parts (separately for beams, columns etc.)
• bolts
• welds
• specific drawing types
• project properties
• phase properties
The lock attribute has two values, Yes and No. When set to Yes, the object is locked and you
cannot modify its properties. You can only change the object’s user-defined attributes that do
not affect numbering. If you try to modify a locked object, Tekla Structures shows the message
"There are locked objects, see report. The operation could not be performed." and a report on
access rights.
To add the lock attribute to the user interface, you need to add the following line in the object’s
section in the objects.inp:
objects.inp
attribute("OBJECT_LOCKED", "Locked:", option,"%s", none,
none, "0.0", "0.0")
{
value("No", 1)
value("Yes", 0)
}
For more information on objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 98) and Interpreting
objects.inp (p. 101).
Controlling access to attributes

Use the privileges.inp file to control access to user-defined attributes. It is a standard text
file that you can open using any text editor.
Tekla Structures searches for the file first in the current model folder, then in the folder defined
by the variable XS_INP. Below is an example file:
privileges.inp
attribute:APPROVED_BYCOMPANYA/full
attribute:APPROVED_BYCOMPANYB/view
attribute:APPROVED_BYeveryonenone
attribute:STATUSCOMPANYB/full
attribute:STATUSCOMPANYA/view
attribute:STATUSeveryonenone
Each row contains three columns, separated by tabs:

www.cadfamily.com
Column Option Description
protected user- attribute:name Affects the user-defined attribute
defined "name". Check the exact spelling of
attribute the name in the objects.inp.
user everyone All users
domain/ Affects all users within the network
domain "domain".
domain/nn Affects the user "nn" in the network
domain "domain".
nn Affects the user "nn".
rights full User can change the user-defined
attribute.
view User can view the user-defined
attribute, but not change it. The
field is grayed out to the user.
none The user-defined attribute is hidden
from the user.
If you do not set any privileges, all users have full rights.
Tekla Structures checks the privilege defaults in the input file privileges.inp when you
create a model, and each time you open a model.
Changing rights If you need to the change the privileges, just change the privileges.inp file and re-open
the model. However, you can only change the privileges of the objects the organization owns.
Only the person who created the model can modify its privi-
leges.inp file.
Restricting access to model

To prevent a user from changing object properties, set their access to the lock attribute to none
in the privileges.inp.
In this example, privileges.inp gives the users "man" and "man2" full rights to lock and
unlock objects, but hides that attribute from everybody else:
privileges.inp
attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDeveryonenone
attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDmanfull
attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDman2full
To protect other user-defined attributes, you need to list them in the

privileges.inp.
See also Locking objects (p. 76)

Controlling access to attributes (p. 76)
Controlling access to numbering setup

To prevent unauthorized users from modifying the numbering settings, restrict their access to
the numbering properties in the privileges.inp file.
Users can still run numbering even if they have no privilege to modify the
numbering settings.
To control access to the numbering properties:

Usage 1. Open the privileges.inp file in any text editor.
The file is located in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\inp folder.
2. Make the required changes in the file. You can set values to the attribute
action:PartnumbersOptions.
The option view cannot be used for controlling access to the numbering
properties.
3. Save the file.

Result If a user who has no privilege to modify properties in the Numbering Setup dialog box tries to
access the dialog box, Tekla Structures displays a warning message, which states that the user
does not have the required privilege.
Example In this example, only the administrator can modify the properties in the Numbering Setup
dialog box:
privileges.inp
action:PartnumbersOptions everyone none
action:PartnumbersOptions ORGANIZATION\admin full
See also Controlling access to attributes (p. 76)

www.cadfamily.com
3 Files and Folders
Introduction This chapter explains where Tekla Structures stores information. It describes the file types Tekla
Structures contains and how to use files to customize Tekla Structures. You will also find out
how to use model, project and firm folders effectively.
It also explains how the initialization files work and how you can use them to customize Tekla
Structures. This chapter also includes information on the various log files and how to interpret
them.
Assumed We assume that you have experience using Windows Explorer to manage files and folders. You
background should also know how to use a standard file editor, such as Wordpad.
Organization This chapter is divided into the following sections:
• Initialization files (p. 79)
• File types and function (p. 85)
• Folders (p. 92)
• Customizing Tekla Structures (p. 98)
• Log files (p. 110)
3.1 Initialization files

Initialization files are used to launch Tekla Structures. They can contain many variables that
you can use to configure Tekla Structures for different standards and your own style of working.
Tekla Structures automatically creates the necessary initialization files during installation.The
number of initialization files it creates depends on how many country-specific environments you
choose to install.
We recommend that you make all your customizations in the user.ini file, which is located
in the ..\TeklaStructures\ 14.0\nt\bin folder. This way the customizations are kept
when you install the next version of Tekla Structures.
Topics About variables (p. 80)
Structure (p. 81)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com Files and Folders
Creating shortcuts (p. 83)
See also Appendix C, Variables (p. 285)
About variables
Tekla Structures contains two kinds of variables, user variables and system variables.
User variables User variables set your personal preferences, for example the appearance of the Tekla Structures
window. Tekla Structures saves user variable settings in the
options_<your_username>.ini file, located in the TeklaStructures\
14.0\nt\bin folder.
System variables options.ini contains the settings for system variables. It is located in the current model
folder. To share your settings with other people, copy options.ini to the system, project or
firm folders.
If required, Tekla Structures prompts you to restart Tekla Structures when

you change a variable setting,
Setting variables
Use variables to configure Tekla Structures to suit the way you work, or to comply with specific
project requirements or industry standards. You can set variables by:
Using the Advanced Options dialog box (p. 80)
OR
Editing the user.ini file (p. 80)
We recommend that you only use one of these methods to set variables. The variable settings in
the Advanced options dialog box override those in the initialization files.
If required, Tekla Structures prompts you to restart Tekla Structures when

you change a variable setting.
Using the Advanced Options dialog box

To set a variable using the Advanced Options dialog box:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced Options dialog box.
2. Browse the categories to find the variable you want to set.
3. Set the variable, then click Apply or OK in the Advanced Options dialog box.
Editing the user.ini file

To set a variable in the user.ini file:
1. Locate the variable in the ..\TeklaStructures\ 14.0\nt\bin\user.ini file.
Check that it is set and has the value you want to use.
• If it is has, you can stop here.
• To change or add the variable, follow steps 2 to 5.

www.cadfamily.com
Files and Folders EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
2. Right-click the ..\TeklaStructures\ 14.0\nt\bin\user.ini file in Windows
Explorer and click Open with.... Select a standard text editor from the list of available
programs.
3. On a new line, type set, then the name of the variable followed by its value in a single line.
Tekla Structures only reads lines in the initialization file that start with set, for example,
set XS_DIR=C:\TeklaStructures\ 14.0.
4. Save user.ini.
5. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the variable.
You must restart Tekla Structures after changing the initialization file for
the changes to take effect.
Different variables use different switches in Tekla Structures. To check which switch a variable
uses, check Appendix C, Variables (p. 285).
Switc
h Value Example
TRUE set XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID=TRUE
FALSE set
XS_DIMENSION_DIRECTION_REVERSED=FALSE
1 On set XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS=1
0 Off set XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS=0
string set
XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE=bolt_
symbol_table.txt
number set XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE=12
Disabling variables in an initialization file

To disable a variable, add it to the user.ini file without a value. Do not add any spaces or
characters after the equals sign. See the example below:
set XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS=
In previous versions you could disable a variable by adding "rem" before

it. This does not disable the variable, if the same variable is set in the other
initialization files.
rem set XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY=%XS_RUNPATH%\autosave
Structure
This section describes the location and folder and hierarchical structure of different initialization
files.

teklastructures.ini in the bin folder calls the other initializa-
tion files in the environments subfolders.
Add your own settings to user.ini in the bin folder.
teklastructures.in The file teklastructures.ini in the bin folder starts Tekla Structures.
i
env_global_defau The file env_global_default.ini is used as a default for all environments. New options
lt.ini can be added in this file until they are localized and specified differently in environment-specific
initialization files.
env_<your_envir The env_<your_environment>.ini files in the environments subfolders contain all
onment>.ini the variables that have environment-specific settings.
user.ini The user.ini file is where you save your personal settings. The variables in user.ini
override those in other ini files. For example, if you have set the same variable in an .ini file
in a file in environments subfolder and the user.ini file, Tekla Structures uses the value
in the user.ini file.
See Variables (p. 285) for details of all variables.
Default settings teklastructures.ini and the .ini files in the environmentssub folders contain
default settings. Tekla Structures creates them automatically during installation. We recommend
that you do not modify these files.
Initialization file reading order

The initialization files are read in the following order during startup:

www.cadfamily.com
1. Program settings: .../nt/bin/TeklaStructures.ini
2. Language-specific settings: .../nt/bin/lang_<CurrentLanguage>.ini
3. Environment and other settings: all .ini files given as program startup parameters (in the
given order)
The variable settings in the user.bat file override those in the batch
files contained in the environment and language folders.
Creating customized initialization files

You can create customer-specific initialization files that include custom settings particular to
each customer, a company and/or a single project. You can also create customized initialization
files for multi-user mode as needed. To do this:
1. Open the user.ini file located in the folder..\TeklaStructures\
14.0\nt\bin using any standard text editor. Save the file with the required name, such
as customer.inior project.ini.
2. Edit the file by adding the required customer settings.
3. Save the modified initialization file.
Including other initialization files

Initialization files can include or call other initialization files. You can use this functionality to
create shortcuts for different purposes, for example to have different setup files depending on
the client you are working for in a project such as fabricators.
Below is an example of a project initialization file that calls other initialization files.
MyProject.ini:
// The project is based on the default US imperial settings
call c:\TeklaStructures\13.1\environments\usimp\env_usimp.ini
// ..but our company policy requires these changes
call c:\CompanySettings\OurPolicy.ini
// ..and the fabricator requires something
call c:\Fabricators\Fabricator1.ini
// ..and then we let users to make some changes (bg color etc.)
call c:\Users\user_%USERNAME%.ini
The project shortcut for MyProject:
C:\TeklaStructures\13.1\nt\bin\TeklaStructures.exe -i
\\MyServer\MyProject\MyProject.ini
\\MyServer\MyProject\MyModel\MyModel.db1
Creating shortcuts
Shortcuts are used to start teklastructures.exe with defined initializations. The Tekla
Structures installation automatically creates shortcuts for the selected environments.
To create a project-specific shortcut:
1. Make a copy of the default shortcut. In the Windows Start menu, go to All Programs >
Tekla Structures 14.0 > Tekla Structures 14.0 <your_environment> and right-click.
2. Select Copy from the pop-up menu.
3. Paste the shortcut to your desktop.

4. Select the shortcut and right-click.
5. Select Properties... from the pop-up menu.
6. Modify the Target of the shortcut by adding the required project initializations to it.
You can use the following parameters in shortcuts:

• -i InitializationFile: Initialization file to be read during startup, for example: -i
\\MyServer\MyProject\Project1.ini. You can repeat this parameter as many times
as you need.
• ModelToBeOpened: Full path to the model to be opened automatically.
The maximum length of a shortcut is 256 characters. If you have prob-

lems with this, you can include other necessary initialization files from
your project initialization file instead of adding them to the shortcut. For
more information see Including other initialization files (p. 83).

www.cadfamily.com
3.2 File types and function
This section describes the various types of file Tekla Structures uses and explains their uses and
location.
Topics Input files (p. 85)
Data files (p. 86)
DSTV connection properties (p. 89)
Messages (p. 89)
Profiles (p. 90)
Bin (p. 91)
Fonts (p. 91)
Symbols (p. 91)
System (p. 92)
Input files
Tekla Structures uses input files to control dialog boxes, as well as how components work. All
input files have the extension inp.
File Description More information

objects.inp Controls the user-defined Adding properties
attributes (p. 98)
profitab.inp Contains available para- Customizing para-
metric profiles metric profiles (p.
104)
fltprops.inp Includes materials and Using flat bars (p.
dimensions of available 108)
flat bars
pop_mark_parts. Contains settings for pop- Pop-mark settings
inp marking (p. 179)
privileges.inp Controls access rights. Controlling access
to attributes (p. 76)
rebar_config.in Contains settings for rein-
p forcement marks
rebar_schedule_ Contains internal bending Reinforcing bar
config.inp types of reinforcing bars bending types (p.
and their mapping to area 469)
specific bending codes..
component_confi Contains settings for the
g.inp representation and
marking of cast-in fittings
analysis_design Contains settings for anal-
_config.inp ysis and design

Component description files
Tekla Structures uses component description files to define the properties of system
components. As a general rule, you should not modify these files, as they affect the operation of
system components. See When to modify.
These files are located in the folder:
..\applications\steel1\
and
..\applications\steel2\
There is one input file for each component toolbar. For example, xs_page_10.inp controls
the components on toolbar 10.
When to modify You will only need to modify component description files in the following circumstances:
• If you add step profiles to the steps.dat file, you should change the
xs_page_10.inp file to reflect those changes. If you do not, Tekla Structures will not
display the changes in the Steps dialog box. See also Example 1: Stairs (S82).
• If you modify the Stanchion connection type used in handrailing (1024). See Example 2:
Handrailing (1024) for more information.
Data files
Tekla Structures reads data files from the system folder. See System folder (p. 96). These files
contains data used by certain modeling tools and details. They are:
File Description
joints.dat Contains the data used in detail 1024 and
modeling tool S76. Used in the Stanchion
connection type field
railings.dat Contains the data for railing detail 1025. This
information is used in the the railing type field.
stairs.dat Contains the data for the modeling tool S83. Used
in the Stair type field
steps.dat Contains the data for modeling tool S82. Used in
the Step profile field
std_flange_plate Contains the detail used in modeling tool S99.
s.dat Used in the fields:
• Outer flange profile
• Inner flange profile
• Top plate profile

std_stiffener_pl Contains the data used in modeling tool S99.
ates.dat Used in the Horizontal stiffener profile field
marketsize.dat Contains available market sizes for certain mate-
rial grade. Can be used with fMarketSize()
function in the custom component editor. See also
Using market sizes (p. 109).

www.cadfamily.com
These files affect the operation of modeling tools and details.
Data files and modeling tools

Here are two examples of how data files and modeling tools work together.
You can open data (*.dat) files using a standard text editor. Tekla
Structures lists the information in data files in text columns. You will find
an explanation of the column names at the beginning of each data file.
Example 1: Stairs The modeling tool Stairs (S82) is on component toolbar 10, so we need to look at the file
(S82) xs_page_10.inp. See Component description files (p. 86).
The entry for Stairs (S82) in the xs_page_10.inp file starts:
attribute("step_index", "j_step_profile", option,"%s", none,
none,"0.0", "0.0")
Next Tekla Structures lists the options that appear in the Step profile field in the Tekla
Structures Stairs (82) dialog box:
{
value("DEFAULT", 1)
value("PLAIN50x200", 0)
etc...
Tekla Structures gets additional information to create the object from the file steps.dat. It
reads the information in by line number, not name.
Do not change the line order in data files or modeling tool description
files.
The option PLAIN50X200 in the Step profile field in the Stairs (S82) dialog box appears on
line two of the xs_page_10.inp file. If you pick this option, Tekla Structures reads in the
information from line 2 of the steps.dat file.

Line 2
You can open data (*.dat) files using a standard text editor. Tekla
Structures lists the information in data files in text columns. You will find
an explanation of the column names at the beginning of each data file.
Example 2: Handrailing detail 1024 is on toolbar 10, so we need to look at the file xs_page_10.inp. See
Handrailing Component description files (p. 86).
(1024)
The entry for handrailing 1024 in the file xs_page_10.inp starts:
tab_page("","jd_Parameters",3)
{
attribute("cut2", "j_railing_type", option, "%s", none, none,
"0.0","0.0")

www.cadfamily.com
Next Tekla Structures lists the options that appear in the Stanchion connection type field in
the Handrailing (1024) and Stanchions (S76) dialog boxes:
value("j_Default", 2)
value("j_auto", 1)
value("j_MONO_S", 0)
value("j_MONO_SC", 0)
value("j_MONO_SO", 0)
etc...
Tekla Structures gets additional information to create the object from the file joints.dat. It
reads the information in by line number, not name.
Do not change the line order in data files or component description files.
The joints.dat file contains the following fields:
Field Description
index For info only. Tekla Structures reads information in by
line number, not index number
name For info only. Tekla Structures reads information in by
line number, not name
joint number Number of the connection to use
attribute name Name of the connection attribute file to use
updirection
origin type If railing type and stringer collide use COLLISION,
otherwise use MIDDLE
double bolts 0 indicates that the connection only uses one bolt group
1 indicates that the connection uses two bolt groups
DSTV connection properties

The file ..\environments\country-independent\inp\dstv.lis contains the
properties for different DSTV standard connections.
Do not change this file, as the information it contains is based on Euro-

pean standards.
Messages
Tekla Structures uses the information in the message files to display messages in the user
interface. The message files for different languages are located in
..\TeklaStructures\14.0\messages.

All message files have the file extension ail.
See also Customizing message files (p. 102).
Profiles
Tekla Structures uses ASCII and binary files to manage profiles. Each environment has its own
profile folder. For example, ..\environments\europe\profil\ contains the files for
managing European profiles.
You can edit ASCII files using a standard text editor. Information in the binary files can only be
changed via the user interface. This section describes the various file types in the ..\profil\
folder.
inp (ASCII)
profitab.inp The file profitab.inp defines the names that you can use for parametric profiles. Tekla
Structures searches for this file in the standard search order (see Folder search order (p. 94))
and then the folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file. See also
Customizing parametric profiles (p. 104).
rebar_database.i The file rebar_database.inp contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete
np structures. It includes both the standard bending radii and the standard hook dimensions. See
also The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 142).
mesh_database.i The file mesh_database.inp contains details of the reinforcement meshes used in concrete
np structures. See also Reinforcement mesh.
cnv (ASCII)
Tekla Structures uses the information in cnv files to convert materials and profiles when
transferring model information using links. For example, when you use the PML or HLI links,
Tekla Structures reads the cnv files from the folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the
initialization file.
lis (ASCII)
Tekla Structures creates lis files when you export bolt, profile and material catalogs. See also
Merging profile catalogs (p. 128) and Merging bolt catalogs (p. 141).
Binary files
Tekla Structures stores catalog information in the binary files, which have the file extension
bin. Tekla Structures searches for these files in the following folder search order
• Model
• Project
• Firm
• Folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.

www.cadfamily.com
This means that if Tekla Structures finds binary catalog files in the current
model folder it does not use the catalogs located in the folder indicated by
the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.
If you want to make catalogs available to other users, we recommend that you save catalogs in
the project or firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 96).
These are the binary catalog files:
File Description
assdb.db Bolt assembly catalog
profdb.bin Profile catalog
matdb.bin Material catalog
screwdb.db Bolt catalog
Bin
The folder ..\nt\bin\ contains Tekla Structures executable files and the Symbol, Drawing,
Report and Template Editors. It also contains some support files for Tekla Structures editors.
Fonts
The variable DXK_FONTPATH in the initialization file should point to this folder. It includes the
graphic fonts:
• romsim
• romco
• fixfont
The Template Editor always searches the folder indicated by the variable DXK_FONTPATH, even
if you configure it to also search other folders.
The variable TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE points to the the conversion file Tekla
Structures uses to map Tekla Structures fonts to Windows fonts. Windows fonts must have the
extension ttf and be located in the ..\windows\fonts folder.
Symbols
The folder ..\environments\country-independent\symbols\ contains the
Tekla Structures symbol files. There are two types of symbol files, sym and dwg. The Symbol
Editor creates sym files. dwg files contain the symbols Tekla Structures displays in rendered
views (for example, connection, point and origin symbols).
The variable DXK_SYMBOLPATH in the initialization file should point to this folder.

The Template Editor always searches for symbols in the folder indicated
by the variable DXK_SYMBOLPATH.
System
The folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\system\ includes several file
types:
rpt
Report templates you create with the Template Editor.
tpl
Drawing template files you create with the Template Editor.
lay
Layout definitions you create with the Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing
Layout... option.
plotdev.bin
This file contains the print device definitions you create using File > Print... > Printer Catalog....
See The printer catalog. The definitions in the system folder are accesible to all users. You can
also save printer definitions in the current model folder or the project and firm folders. See
Project and firm folders (p. 96).
Tekla Structures searches for plotdev.bin in the model, project and firm folders, then the
folder indicated by the variable XS_DRIVER.
Wizard files (dproc)

Tekla Structures wizard files automate drawing creation by performing a series of actions you
would otherwise have to perform manually. Wizard files have the file extension dproc. Tekla
Structures searches the system folder (see System folder (p. 96)) for wizard files. See also
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 106).
3.3 Folders
This section describes how Tekla Structures stores the files associated with a model and explains
how to use folders to manage files, including those you customize to project and company
specifications.
Topics Folder structure (p. 93)
Folder search order (p. 94)
Model folder (p. 95)
System folder (p. 96)
Project and firm folders (p. 96)

www.cadfamily.com
Template folder (p. 97)
Folder structure
This is a quick reference to the default locations for folders and files discussed in this section.
You will find more detailed information on files and folders throughout this chapter.
Catalog files
System folder
Firm folder
Message files
Bin folder
Project folder
Model folder

Folder search order
When you open a model, Tekla Structures searches for the associated files in specific folders in
a set order.
It is important that you locate files in the correct folders. Once Tekla Structures finds the
associated files, it stops searching. So files that have the same name but are located lower down
the search order are ignored.
The folder search order is:
Folder Defined by
Current model The open model
Project variable XS_PROJECT
Firm variable XS_FIRM
System variable XS_SYSTEM
Tekla Structures does not search for certain files in exactly this order. The exceptions are listed
below. The table also includes links to more information.
The exceptions are:
File (type) More information

objects.inp Adding properties (p. 98)
*.dat files Data files (p. 86)
Templates Search order:
• XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
• Model folder
• XS_PROJECT
• XS_FIRM
• XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM
• XS_SYSTEM
For more information, see Template folder (p.

97)
Catalogs Profile, bolt, material and reinforcement cata-
logs.
Search order:
• Model folder
• XS_PROJECT
• XS_FIRM
• Folder indicated by the variable

XS_PROFDB
For more information, see Binary files (p. 90).

www.cadfamily.com
Do not use the system folder to store customizes files. You will avoid
having problems or doing a lot of unecessary work when you upgrade.
See System folder (p. 96) and Project and firm folders (p. 96).
Model folder
Tekla Structures stores all files associated with a model in a folder it creates with the same name
as the model database file (*.db1). In multi-user mode all users access the same model folder.
To view the files in the model folder, click File > Open model folder.
Saved attributes
When you change object properties, templates, reports, connections, etc. and then click Save or
Save as in the dialog box, Tekla Structures saves the changed files in the current model folder
in the attributes sub-folder. See also Project and firm folders (p. 96) and Folder search order
(p. 94).
Tekla Structures creates the following files in the model folder:
File/extension Description
db1 The model database. Tekla Structures uses the
filename without the extension to name the
model folder.
db2 Numbering database. The filename without the
extension should be the same as the model
folder.
xslib.db1 Contains user-defined connections and details.
Can be copied from one model folder to
another.
xslib.db2 Stores numbering information.
xs_user.user_name Contains interface settings for each user, such
as drag and drop settings. See Mouse and
pointer settings.
xsdb.xs When you open a project database, Tekla
Structures displays the name in the Open
dialog box, if it finds this file in the current
model folder.
bak Tekla Structures saves a backup copy of the
model databases each time you save the model.
To restore a previous version of the model,
rename the *.bak file to *.db1.

File/extension Description
dg Located in the sub-folder ..\drawings
under the model folder. These are drawing
files, which include information on how each
drawing was created. Tekla Structures also
stores information on current drawings in the
model database. Opening or printing a drawing
opens the corresponding *.dg file.
Do not manually delete *.dg files. Tekla
Structures deletes *.dg files when you delete
a drawing.
xsr Tekla Structures reports
nc1 Neutral files in DSTV format for NC tooling
machines. The filename consists of the part
mark and this extension.
You can change the file extension in the NC
files dialog box Tekla Structures displays
when you click File > Export > CNC > Create
NC Files.... By default it is nc1.
Log files See Log files (p. 110)
.This_is_multiuser_ Contains information about the PC running
model xs_server.exe.
Do not alter or delete this file in normal
circumstances. If, you move a model to a
different server, you should delete this file.
Tekla Structures generates a new file with the
same name.
System folder
The system folder contains templates for drawings and reports and object settings and
properties. Files in the system folder are read-only. See Project and firm folders (p. 96) and
Folder search order (p. 94).
The location of the system folder is defined by the variable XS_SYSTEM in the initialization file.
Do not store customized files in the system folder. Tekla Structures may
replace these files when you install a new release. This is not the case with
files in the project and firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 96).
Project and firm folders

You can create project and firm folders for customized files. This is a useful technique if you
want to store the files for future use, or want to retain them when you install a new release.
Property files are always saved in the attributes folder under the current model folder, for
example, ..\TeklaStructuresModels\my_building\attributes.
You can copy these files to the project or firm folders. See Folder search order (p. 94) for
important information on where to locate files.

www.cadfamily.com
Tekla Structures does not replace files in the project and firm folders when you install a new
release, so you retain your customized files without having to cut and paste, or export and import
from previous versions.
Create firm and project folders for example on the same level as the Tekla Structures folder and
make them available in all versions using variables: XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM.
Project folder
The project folder is where you should store files you customize for a particular project.The
location of the project folder is defined by the variable XS_PROJECT in the initialization file. See
also Folder search order (p. 94).
You need to create a project folder manually, then edit the variable XS_PROJECT to point to that
folder.
Firm folder
Use the firm folder to store files customized for a particular organization or company. The
location of the firm folder is defined by the variable XS_FIRM in the initialization file. See also
You need to create a firm folder manually, then edit the variable XS_FIRM to point to it.
Example You regularly work for a company that has specific drawing layout standards it expects you to
use. Customize the drawing templates once for the company and save them in a sub-folder
located under the firm folder. You can then use the customized drawing templates for all future
projects for that company. And all users can access the customized files.
Template folder
Tekla Structures searches for the Template Editor v. 3.3 templates and reports in the following
order:
Folder Defined by variable

Folder containing your XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
templates
Model
Project XS_PROJECT
Firm XS_FIRM
Environment-specific XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM
system templates
System XS_SYSTEM
To modify the variables, click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations.
Tekla Structures searches for version 2.2 templates in two locations, in
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY and in the first folder containing templates:
• model
• project
• firm
• system templates
• system

When Tekla Structures finds a template in one of these folders, it stops searching.
3.4 Customizing Tekla Structures

This section explains how to customize Tekla Structures. It covers the following subjects:
Adding properties (p. 98)
Interpreting objects.inp (p. 101)
Customizing message files (p. 102)
Changing the language of the user interface (p. 103)
Customizing parametric profiles (p. 104)
Save defaults (p. 105)
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 106)
Unfolding parameters (p. 107)
Using flat bars (p. 108)
Using market sizes (p. 109)
See Project and firm folders (p. 96).
Adding properties
Many dialog boxes contain user-defined attributes for various objects, including beams,
columns, bolts and drawings, in Tekla Structures. You can use the
..\environments\country_independent\inp\objects.inp file to define your
own attributes for these objects.
Tekla Structures displays these fields when you click User defined attributes or the User
attributes tab in the relevant dialog box. You can then use these values in reports and drawings.
When you upgrade Tekla Structures, the user-defined attributes that you have added in the
objects.inp file in the previous version of Tekla Structures are automatically copied to
version 14.0 or later.
The objects.inp file reads attributes in order from the folders listed in the table below
starting with the model folder:
Folder Defined by variable

Model
Project XS_PROJECT
Firm XS_FIRM
System XS_SYSTEM
inp XS_INP

www.cadfamily.com
The files are merged so that if there are user-defined attributes in any of the files, they are
displayed in the user interface. Tekla Structures merges the files in a way that eliminates
duplicate attributes.
If Tekla Structures encounters the same attribute name in different objects.inp files, the
attribute from the first read objects.inp file will be used.
You should only edit the user-defined fields in the objects.inp file.
Do not change other standard field names or values.
Changing user-defined fields

You can customize existing User fields shown in dialog boxes. You can also add more user-
defined fields. See also User-defined fields in templates (p. 100).
Example You want to change the name of the user-defined attribute User Field 1 in the Column dialog
box, which by default looks like this:
Steps 1. Open the objects.inp file using a standard text editor.

2. Find the section:
/******************************************************/
/* Part attributes */
/******************************************************/
3. Each attribute is listed on a new line and starts with the word attribute. Find the line:
attribute("USER_FIELD_1", "j_user_field_1", string, "%s", no, none,
"0.0", "0.0")
4. Change the line to read:
attribute("MY_INFO_1", "My Info 1", string, "%s", no, none, "0.0",
"0.0")

Attribute names must be unique. The maximum number of characters in
a name is 19.
5. Save the objects.inp file.

6. Close Tekla Structures and restart the program for the changes to take effect. The Column
properties dialog box will now look like this:
This change affects dialog boxes of all parts, not only columns.
User-defined fields in templates

This section explains how to use user-defined attributes with Template Editor version 2.2.
For more information on how to use user-defined attributes in Template Editor version 3.3, see
User-defined attributes in templates (p. 426).
If you change the name of a user-defined field, or create a new user-defined field, you need to
modify the legend_text.fields located in the ..nt\bin\ folder, before you can select
the field from a list in the Template Editor. You can also use user-defined fields without
modifying the legend_text.fields, if you just type the field name correctly. For the
example shown in Changing user-defined fields (p. 99), change legend_text.fields as
follows:
Example TITLE3 CHARACTER LEFT 40
MY_INFO_1 CHARACTER LEFT 40
USER_FIELD_2 CHARACTER LEFT 40

www.cadfamily.com
Effect on numbering
You can set whether the user-defined attribute affects numbering or not. See Numbering
settings. This is useful when you have members that are identical in all respects, apart from their
user-defined attributes.
Consider If you want Tekla Structures to consider the user-defined attribute when numbering, use the
attribute option yes in objects.inp, see Interpreting objects.inp (p. 101). In this case, Tekla
Structures assigns different marks to parts that are identical, but have different user-defined
attributes.
You must also change the entry for the field in the Part attributes section of the
objects.inp file for the user-defined value to be considered when numbering.
Ignore attribute If you want Tekla Structures to ignore the user-defined attribute when numbering, use the option
no in objects.inp. In this case, Tekla Structures assigns the same mark to parts that are
identical, but have different user-defined attributes.
Only user-defined attributes of parts affect numbering. User-defined

attributes of other objects, such as phases, projects, drawings, etc. do not
affect numbering.
Interpreting objects.inp
The main components of objects.inp are shown below. See also Fields in objects.inp (p. 102).
attribute or unique_attibute
Attribute name
Prompt
Affects numbering
Default value
Type of values
Make sure Tekla Structures does not already use the attribute name you use. Consider using a
prefix that ensures the name is unique, for example, your initials, or an abbreviation of your
company name.
Do not use spaces or reserved characters in attribute names.

The text you enter in the prompt section of the attribute is exactly what Tekla Structures displays
in dialog boxes. Some default attributes have prompts like j_comment, meaning that the prompt
comes from the joints.ail message file. For more information, read Messages (p. 89).
To include an attribute in a report or template, add the name of the attribute to your layout in the
Template Editor. When you run a report or create a drawing, Tekla Structures displays the
current value of the attribute.
Fields in objects.inp
The objects.inp file contains the following field names:
Field Description
attribute Regular attribute, which is copied with other
part properties.
unique_attribute Non-copyable attribute. The value of the
attribute is never copied to another part. For
example part checking status attributes are
usually non-copyable.
attribute_name Attribute name, used to find the attribute value
label_text Text Tekla Structures displays in the dialog box
value_type integer, float for numbers
string for text
option for lists
date for date with small calendar
date_time_min for date and time [12:00] with

small calendar
date_time_sec for date and time [12:00:00]
with small calendar
field_format Definition of the field format in the dialog box.
Uses C program terminology:
• "%s" for strings
• "%d" for numbers
consider_in_number See Effect on numbering (p. 101)
ing
check_switch none, check_max, check_min,
check_maxmin
attribute_value_ma The maximum possible value for the attribute
x
attribute_value_mi The maximum possible value for the attribute
n
Customizing message files

You can customize message files in Tekla Structures.
Example The message file by_number.ail contains both prompts and default text (or text strings) that
Tekla Structures uses in drawings. If you want to change the text Tekla Structures uses for near
side plates from N/S to NS, do the following:

www.cadfamily.com
1. Open by_number.ail using a standard text editor.
2. Change the N/S into NS in the following section:
string by_number_msg_no_675 {
...
entry = ("enu", "(N/S)");
};
3. Save by_number.ail.
See below for an extract of theby_number.ail file:
by_number.ail
entry = ("chs", "(NS)");
entry = ("cht", "(N/S)");
entry = ("csy", "(N/S)");
entry = ("deu", "(vorn)");
entry = ("esp", "(L/C)");
entry = ("fra", "(AV)");
entry = ("hun", "(N/S)");
entry = ("ita", "(N/S)");
entry = ("jpn", "N/S");
entry = ("nld", "(VZ)");
entry = ("plk", "(N/S)");
entry = ("ptb", "(L/L)");
entry = ("ptg", "(L/L)");
entry = ("rus", "(N/S)");
entry = ("enu", "(N/S)"); };
entry = ("chs", "(FS)");
entry = ("cht", "(F/S)");
entry = ("csy", "(F/S)");
entry = ("deu", "(hinten)");
entry = ("esp", "(L/L)");
entry = ("fra", "(AR)");
entry = ("hun", "(F/S)");
entry = ("ita", "(F/S)");
entry = ("jpn", "F/S");
entry = ("nld", "(AZ)");
entry = ("plk", "(F/S)");
entry = ("ptb", "(L/P)");
entry = ("ptg", "(L/P)");
entry = ("rus", "(F/S)");
entry = ("enu", "(F/S)");};
Changing the language of the user interface

You can change the language of theTekla Structures user interface.
Preconditions The languages between which you can switch are the languages you have chosen when installing
Tekla Structures.
Usage 1. Click Tools > Change Language...
2. Select the language in the Language list box.
3. Click OK.
4. Restart Tekla Structures for the change to take effect.

The language you in which you install Tekla Structures will be the default
language of the user interface.
See also Languages and environments
Customizing parametric profiles

The file profitab.inp defines the names that you can use for parametric profiles in Tekla
Structures. You can customize this file to add more parametric profile names.
See also The profile catalog (p. 117).
Example You want to use parametric plate profiles with a different name, PLTE.
1. Open the profitab.inp file in a standard text editor.
2. Add the line:
PLTE ! PL ! +2 ! ! 1 ! 2 ! ! !
3. Save profitab.inp to the current model folder and close the file.
See also Project and firm folders (p. 96).
Interpreting profitab.inp
The first block in this file is the column titles. It also contains an explanation of possible values.
Title Description
Prefix Prefix Tekla Structures uses for the parametric
profile. See also Appendix A, Parametric
Profiles.
Type The parametric profile type, e.g. I profile.
SO Sort order.
The available options are:
• -1: Decreasing sorting order
• +1: Increasing sorting order
• 0: No sorting order
• 2: Name increasing, value decreasing
• -2: Name decreasing, value increasing
For example, if your input is PLT200*10 or

PLT10*200 and you select 2, the result in the
output (such as a report) for both cases is
PLT200*10. If you select -2, the result for both
cases is PLT10*200.
Z Unit of measure used when inputting data

www.cadfamily.com
Title Description
MI Minimum number of parameters you can use in
the Select profile dialog box.
For example, a rectangular hollow section has
sub-types: h*t, h*b*t, h1*b1-h2*b2*t.
You define SHS with a minimum of two and a
maximum of two parameters. When you use the
Prefix option in the Select profile dialog box,
you will only have the option h*t. Using the
same example, SHS300*200*5 will not be
available either.
MA Maximum number of parameters you can use in
the Select profile dialog box. See MI above for
example.
G3-NAME Only used for user-defined parametric profiles.
Used by Tekla Structures to find the generation
component.
Z3-NAME Only used for user-defined parametric profiles.
Identifies the modeling tool name.
Save defaults
You may find it useful to create a set of standard files for a new project, or to set up Tekla
Structures to suit the way you work. You can copy these standard files to the project or firm
folders for future use. See Project and firm folders (p. 96).
Many dialog boxes Tekla Structures displays when you are modeling contain properties for
objects (beams, columns, modeling tools, etc.). Typically they have a Standard option in the
Load list box. By default Tekla Structures uses the settings in the Standard file when applying
commands.
Use Tools > Defaults > Save Defaults to save a set of Standard files in the current model
folder. Tekla Structures creates the following files:
File Dialog box

standard.asv Autosave properties
standard.clm Column properties
standard.cpl Contour plate properties
standard.crs Beam/orthogonal beam properties
standard.dia Twin profile properties
standard.fms Plotting frames
standard.fpl Folded plate
standard.ler Layer properties
standard.mvi Model view properties
standard.num Setup - Numbering
standard.prf Project properties
Numbering and coefficient information from
the Options dialog box.

File Dialog box
standard.prt Beam properties
standard.scr Bolt properties
standard.stp Setup - Preferences
standard.wld Weld properties
Creating standard files

You can also create standard files not listed above. Simply change the properties of a file, then
save it as standard (use lower case). Tekla Structures saves standard files to the current model
folder. See System folder (p. 96) for more on using standard files. See also Project and firm
folders (p. 96).
Customizing other files

Tekla Structures also stores a number of files, all of which contain object properties, in the
current model folder. Tekla Structures creates these files when you click Save or Save as in
dialog boxes.
Example You change the standard column properties to create a new type of column you call custom1.
When you click Save as, Tekla Structures creates the file custom1.clm in the current model
folder.
See Appendix D, File extensions (p. 415), for a full list of files Tekla
Structures creates in this way.
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files

You can create your own AutoDrawings wizard files using any standard text editor. Use the
existing wizard files as examples to construct your own.
A typical AutoDrawings wizard file includes several sets of drawing requests containing
drawing, attribute and part settings to apply to selected objects, as well as a selection filter. The
order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures only creates one drawing for each object.
Example The AutoDrawings wizard file creates an assembly drawing for an object that fulfills the
selection filter criteria in one set. Tekla Structures will not create another assembly drawing for
that object, even if it matches the criteria of the selection filter in later sets in the same wizard
file.
Interpreting a Wizard files consist of the following entries. Note the use of parentheses.
wizard file
set_drawing_type(assembly)
This line defines the type of drawing the wizard creates. The drawing type appears in
parentheses. The options are:
Option Creates
single workshop drawings
assembly assembly drawings
multi_single workshop multi-drawings

www.cadfamily.com
Option Creates
multi_single_with_layout workshop multi-drawings with layout
multi_assembly assembly multi-drawings
multi_assembly_with_layout assembly multi-drawings with layout
cast_unit cast-unit drawings
set_drawing_attributes(column)
This line tells Tekla Structures which drawing properties to use when creating the drawings. The
name of the saved drawing properties appears in parentheses.
set_filter(column_filter)
This line tells Tekla Structures which selection filter to use to select the parts from which to
create drawings.The filter name appears in parentheses. See also Selection filter.
create_drawings()
Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. This line should always appear immediately after
the lines set_drawing_type, set_drawing_attributes and set_filter.
See also Using drawing wizards
AutoDrawings Wizard log (p. 113)
Unfolding parameters
The unfolding parameters define the location of the neutral axis when a profile is unfolded. The
neutral axis is a line which runs along the length of a profile where stress and strain are equal to
zero.
Tekla Structures uses these parameters to create NC files and to display unfolded profiles in
single-part drawings. Set these parameters in the conversion file,
unfold_corner_ratios.inp, located in the system folder.
Here is an example of a simple conversion file:
1 HE300A S235JR 0 180 1 0 90 .7
1 HE300A S235JR 0 180 2 0 1000 .7
2 PL* S235JR 0 200 1 0 90 .6
The parameters must be in a certain order in the conversion file:
1. Type
• 1 is for polybeams
• 2 is for plates modelled as polybeams (profile e.g. PLT)
2. Profile (you can use wildcards, too)
3. Material (you can use wildcards, too)
4. Rotation/thickness min
• for polybeams: the minimum angle when the profile is rotated around its longitudinal
axis
• for plates: the minimum thickness of plate
5. Rotation/thickness max
• for polybeams: the maximum angle when the profile is rotated around its longitudinal
axis
• for plates: the maximum thickness of plate

6. Flag
• 1 is for sharp folds
• 2 is for curved bends
7. Angle/radius min
• the minimum angle of sharp folds
• the minimum radius of curved bends
8. Angle/radius max
• the maximum angle of sharp folds
• the maximum radius of curved bends
9. Ratio
• defines how much the profile stretches or shrinks when unfolded. Ratio = (1 - the
relative location of the neutral axis). If only the inner surface of the profile shrinks, the
ratio is 1. If only the outer surface of the profile stretches, the ratio is 0. By default, the
ratio is 0.5 for length calculation and 0.0 for bending radius calculation.
Tekla Structures applies the unfolding ratio if the profile properties are within the range
indicated by the minimum and maximum values.
To define the rotation angle, set the work plane by the first three points of
the polybeam. Set the rotation angle in the Rotation field in the Beam
properties dialog box.
Using flat bars

When you have completed the model, you can have Tekla Structures show plates as the
equivalent flat bars for manufacturing. Tekla Structures displays the plates as flat bars in reports
and drawings.
To show plates as flat bars:
1. Set the variable XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION=TRUE.
2. Indicate the prefix you want to use for flat bars using the variable XS_FLAT_PREFIX. For
example, set XS_FLAT_PREFIX=FLAT.
To prevent Tekla Structures displaying the profile in metric units in the

US Imperial version, add the flat bar prefix to the profitab.inp file
as a parametric profile.
3. Define materials, thickness, and width of available flat bars in the fltprops.inp file.
See Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp (p. 109).
4. By default, Tekla Structures only compares plate width with the available flat bar
dimensions.
• To include plate length, set the variable XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO=TRUE.
• To define the tolerance between the actual and standard gusset width, set the variable
XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE.

www.cadfamily.com
• To define the tolerance between the actual and standard stiffener width, set the variable
XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE.
Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp

Use the fltprops.inp file to define flat bar length, width, and material. The file is located
in the ..\environments\your_environment\profil folder. You can open it using
any standard text editor. You can also copy it to model, project, or firm folders. If Tekla
Structures cannot find the fltprops.inp file, it searches for the file fltprops (without
.inp extension). See also Folder search order (p. 94).
The first row in the file contains flat bar material definitions (enclosed in quotes " ") followed
by plate thicknesses. If you do not define a material, you can use all materials for all flat bars.
The following rows define the widths of available flat bars.
Units are millimeters.
fltprops.inp
5,6,"S235",8,10,"S275J0",10,15
40,45
50,55
60,65
70,75
100,110
200,220
Using the fltprops.inp file above, Tekla Structures displays the following plates as flat
bars:
Plate Material
5x40, 5x45, 6x50, 6x55 All materials
8x60, 8x65, 10x70, 10x75 S235
10x100, 10x110, 15x200, 15x220 S275J0
Connections Some connections use the fltprops.inp file to convert plates to flat bars after creating the
connection:
40, 41, 42, 47, 71, 78, 101, 102, 105, 106, 111, 123, 130, 132, 161, 162, 163, 164.
Settings The following variables affect flat bar lists:
• XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION
• XS_FLAT_PREFIX
• XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO
• XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE
• XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE
• XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION.
Using market sizes

Market size is used in custom components to select a suitable plate dimension (usually plate
thickness) from the available market sizes. For example, a plate’s thickness should match the
web of a beam.

To use market sizes, you must define a custom component using a custom component editor.
1. In the Variables dialog box, add the function =fMarketSize(material, thickness,
extrastep) for a parameter.
2. Define the available material sizes in the marketsize.dat file. See Defining market
sizes with marketsize.dat (p. 110) for instructions.
Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat

Use the marketsize.dat file to define available thicknesses (or any other dimension) for
each material grade. The file is located in the
..\environments\your_environment\profil folder. You can open it using any
standard text editor.
A material grade element must begin each row followed by a comma-separated list of available
plate thicknesses. These units are described in millimeters.
marketsize.dat
S235JR,6,9,12,16,19,22
SS400,1.6,2.3,3.2,4.5,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38
DEFAULT,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38
Example
If the following row is in the marketsizes.dat file:
S235JR,6,9,12,16,19,22
then the available market size plate thicknesses for S235JR plates are 6, 9, 12, 16 and 22 mm.
So the function =fMarketSize("S235JR",10,0) would return 12, and
=fMarketSize("S235JR",10,1) would return 16 (one size up).
You can also use the function without entering any size up:
=fMarketSize("SS400",7) which is the equivalent of =fMarketSize("SS400",7,0)
3.5 Log files

Tekla Structures writes information to log files when you perform operations such as numbering
or saving a model. This section describes these log files and how to interpret them.
All log files are located in the current model folder.
Topics Tekla Structures log files (p. 110)

Viewing log files (p. 114)
Direct access to parts from log files (p. 114)
Tekla Structures log files

This section contains information on the following log files in Tekla Structures.

www.cadfamily.com
File Description
check_database.l Tekla Structures writes information to this log
og file when you use the Correct database
command. If inconsistencies are found in a part,
the part id is written in this log. You can then
access the part using the technique described in
Direct access to parts from log files (p. 114).
conflict.log This file lists write conflicts. You can view this
file automatically. A write conflict occurs in
multi-user mode when more than one user
changes an object.
drawing_cloning. History of cloning drawings.
log
drawing_history. History of drawing creation. See Drawing
log history log (p. 113) for more information.
dstv_nc.log Tekla Structures writes information to this file
about the assemblies processed each time you
create NC files. If you use the NC file classifier,
this log file contains additional information on
the process, e.g. which machine you used, etc.
Also contains error messages.
filetran- Only used for cold rolled components, e.g.
error.log Albion, Ayrshire, Hispan etc. Tekla Structures
writes error messages to this file if transfer
macros fail.
numbering.histor This file has full details of each time numbering
y was carried out on the model. See Numbering
history log (p. 111) for more information.
save_history.log Tekla Structures writes information to this file
each time you save a model.
wizard.log Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run
a wizard. See AutoDrawings Wizard log (p.
113) for more information.
TeklaStruc- Contains information on the entire Tekla Struc-
tures.log tures session (from opening the model to closing
it), e.g. errors, which catalogs you are using, etc.
analysis.log Tekla Structures writes information to this file
when you run the analysis. Analysis log file
contains also information on errors that occur
during load distribution.
Numbering history log

Tekla Structures stores a full numbering history in the file numbering.history. The file
has full details of each time numbering was carried out on the model. Tekla Structures places
each session in a different block.

Interpreting numbering.history
The header line of each block contains details of the user who carried out the numbering and the
date.
*** Numbering (kke): Tue Jun 27 10:38:03 2000
The next lines contain details of the numbering settings used:
Full numbering
Compare modified to old parts
Compare new to old parts
Tolerance: 1.000000
Then a list of defined series, prior to numbering. In this example, the first line means that in the
series PL/1 the highest part position number is 1 and the highest assembly postion number is 0.
PL/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly 0
B/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly 0
A/1 Max Part 0 Max Assembly 14
P/1 Max Part 12 Max Assembly 0
/1001 Max Part 2 Max Assembly 0
If both the part and assembly numbers here are not zero and you have set
the variable XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR to MAIN_PART, there
may have been a conflict during numbering.
Tekla Structures then lists information on the parts and assemblies numbered.
Column headings appear in this example, they do not appear in the file itself.
Part/ Numbering Position number
assembly ID series Old New
Part 124228 series:P/1 P/9 -> P/13
Part 1541381 series:/2001 /0 -> /2001
Part 1541698 series:/2001 /0 -> /2002
Part 1541760 series:/1001 /0 -> /1005
Part 1541820 series:/1001 /0 -> /1006
Part 1541879 series:/1001 /0 -> /1004
Part 1541941 series:/1001 /0 -> /1006
Part 1542095 series:/1001 /0 -> /1007
Part 1542129 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Part 1542142 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Part 1542153 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Part 1542164 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Part 1542175 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Part 1542186 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Tekla Structures then shows an updated list of the defined series.
PL/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly 0
B/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly 0
A/1 Max Part 0 Max Assembly 14
P/1 Max Part 13 Max Assembly 0
Assembly 124236 series:A/1 A/11 -> A/15
The final line of the block shows the end of the numbering session.
*** Operation finished Tue Jun 27 10:38:03 2000 Full numbering

www.cadfamily.com
If you remove or delete the file numbering.history, Tekla Structures generates a new file
with the same name when you next run numbering. The new file does not contain a history of
previous numbering sessions.
Overlapping part/assembly series

Tekla Structures records the error message shown in the following example in the
numbering.log when you do not have enough free numbers in the numbering series.
Example Assembly numbering series overlap: Position number 1 in series 0
overlaps with position number 1 in series 1.
See also Numbering.
Drawing history log

Use the variable XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE in the Drawing properties category in the
Advanced options dialog box, to define what information Tekla Structures writes in the
numbering history log file.
You can use all, or any combination of, these options:
• NEW
• DELETED
• MODIFIED
Separate the options using the _ character, for example,

XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE=NEW_DELETED.
AutoDrawings Wizard log

Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run an AutoDrawings wizard. The log file contains
information about errors, number of drawings created, commands used etc.
You can configure whether or not Tekla Structures creates a log file and how it is displayed
using the Advanced tab in the AutoDrawings dialog box.
Create log options:
• No
Tekla Structures does not create a log file.
• Create
Tekla Structures creates a new log file and deletes the old one.
• Append
Tekla Structures adds a new entry to the existing log file.

Display log options:
• No
Tekla Structures does not display the log,
• With associated viewer
Tekla Structures displays the log file in an associated viewer (e.g. Notepad) when you run
the wizard. You can edit the log file.
• On dialog

Tekla Structures displays the log file in a dialog box when you run the wizard. You can not
edit the log file.
Viewing log files

You can configure how Tekla Structures displays log files.
Check Tools > Display Log File > With Associated Viewer to show log files in a viewer
associated with the file type, e.g. Notepad.
Use Tools > Display log file to view the following log files in a dialog box:
• Tekla Structures log
• Numbering history log
• Drawing history log
• Model history log (save_history.log)
• Clash check history log
• Analysis history log

You can also display log files on a toolbar at the bottom of the Tekla Structures window by
checking Tools > Toolbars > Message Panel.
Direct access to parts from log files

There is a direct link from Tekla Structures log files to the model, so you do not have to search
for parts mentioned in the log file.
To view parts in log file entries:
1. Click the line in the log file which contains the part. Parts have the prefix ’id’.
2. Tekla Structures highlights the part in the model view.
If multiple part ids or an assembly appear on one line in the log file, Tekla Structures highlights
all the parts.
You can also select parts on different lines of the log file simultaneously.
Access part pop-up menu

You can also access the pop-up menu of a part straight from the log file:
Right-click the part id in the log file. Tekla Structures displays the same pop-up menu that you
see when you right click a part in the modeling view.

www.cadfamily.com
4 Catalogs
Introduction Catalogs are databases containing the information you would normally expect to find listed in
design code tables, or printed reference material. For example, the bolt catalog contains a library
of standard bolts and bolt assemblies used in structural steelwork. Catalogs can also contain
project- or company-specific information.
Catalogs are available for many environments, with region-specific elements.
In this chapter This chapter explains how to view and modify catalogs. You will also learn how to add user-
defined information to existing catalogs. The final section includes some information on
advanced techniques that may be of interest to experienced users.
• Things you should know (p. 115)
• The profile catalog (p. 117)
• The material catalog (p. 130)
• The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs (p. 134)
• The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 142)
• For the advanced user (p. 143)

How to use this You will find it useful to read Things you should know (p. 115) before moving on to subsequent
chapter sections.
4.1 Things you should know

This section describes features and processes that are common to all the catalogs. You should
read this section before moving on to modifying the catalogs.
Topics Open a model first (p. 116)
The filter (p. 116)
Saving a modified catalog (p. 116)
What is the difference between Update and OK? (p. 117)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com Catalogs
Open a model first
You must open a model to view or modify the catalogs, as this action opens the related catalogs.
Which catalog is Several catalogs of each type (profile, material, bolt, etc.) can be stored simultaneously in
used? different locations, so it is important to know which catalog you are using.
When you open a model, Tekla Structures searches for the catalog files in a specific order, until
they are found.
• current model folder
• project folder
• firm folder
• profile folder
The physical location of the project, firm and profile folders are defined in the initialization file
by the variables shown in the illustration below. XS_PROFDB only applies to the profile catalog.
XS_SYSTEM applies to all other catalogs.
The filter
The filter option appears in all the modify catalog dialog boxes.
Use it to specify which entries from a catalog should appear in the tree.
The default filter string is the wildcard symbol (*). This displays all items in the catalog.
Using filter To display all parts with names beginning with A, enter A* in the Filter field. To display all parts
strings with names containing 100, enter *100*. Tekla Structures only shows the elements that satisfy
your criteria. See Filter in the Modeling manual for more on filtering.
Saving a modified catalog

This information only relates to profile and material catalogs.
To save changes to a catalog:

www.cadfamily.com
Catalogs EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
1. Click OK to exit the Modify catalog dialog box.
2. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changed catalog to the current
model folder. Click Cancel to return to the Modify catalog dialog box.
3. To exit without saving changes, click Cancel in the Modify catalog dialog box.
What is the difference between Update and OK?

This information only relates to the profile and material catalogs.
Summary This table lists the various save and exit functions, together with a brief explanation of what each
one does.
Button Action
Saves changes to the catalog in memory until you click OK.
Saves changes to the catalog on the hard disk.
Used to exit without saving changes.

Not currently available in the bolt or plotter catalogs.
How it works When you first open a model, Tekla Structures reads information from the relevant catalogs on
the hard disk and stores it in the computer’s memory.
When you select a material or profile Tekla Structures reads the data from the catalog in memory
and displays it in the dialog box. This is a much faster method than accessing the catalog stored
on the hard disk.
When you change data in the dialog box, the changes appear immediately, but the information
is not saved to the catalog in memory until you click Update.
Tekla Structures only saves the modified catalog to the hard disk when you click OK to exit the
Modify catalog dialog box and click OK in the save confirmation dialog box.
4.2 The profile catalog

Introduction Tekla Structures stores the analysis and design properties of standard and user-defined profiles
in the profile catalog.
Standard profiles are ones which can be obtained premanufactured.
You can also create user-defined profiles from user-defined cross sections.
Parametric profiles have a predefined, hard-coded shape, with one or more parameters to define
the size of the profile. Tekla Structures calculates the cross-section shape each time you open
the model. You can create parametric profile names and enter dimensions for them. See also
Appendix A, Parametric Profiles, in the Modeling Manual.
To view or modify profiles, click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the
Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
Tekla Structures displays profiles in a tree structure.
Profiles are grouped according to rules such as profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type
(e.g. HEA).

Different icons denote profile types, rules and profiles within the tree:
Icon Used to show

Profile type rule. Different icons show different types.
Rule
Individual standard profile
Individual parametric profile
Pop-up menus allow you to modify the tree.

Before you start Read Things you should know (p. 115).
Topics Working with rules (p. 118)
Viewing or modifying the profile catalog (p. 122)
Adding a profile (p. 122)
Creating a cross section (p. 123)
Modifying a cross section (p. 124)
Deleting a cross section (p. 125)
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile (p. 125)
Adding user-defined attributes to a profile (p. 127)
Merging profile catalogs (p. 128)
Exporting the profile catalog (p. 128)
Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 128)
Importing from previous versions (p. 129)
Importing the profile catalog (p. 129)
Working with rules

What is a rule? A rule filters the information in the catalog according to criteria set in the rule filter. For more
information on how the filter works, read The filter (p. 116). For example, in the Modify profile
catalog dialog box, profiles are grouped according to profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile
sub-type (e.g. HEA) using rules.

www.cadfamily.com
To change how entries in the profile catalog are grouped, you will need to modify the rules in
the profile catalog. Read Adding a rule (p. 121).
Defining the material of profiles

Use the Modify profile catalog dialog box to associate profile types with certain material. You
can define which profiles are available for steel parts, concrete parts, or both. This affects which
profile types are shown in the Select profile dialog box. For example, if you create a steel part
and click the Select... button next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box, certain
profile types will appear:

To define the material of a profile type:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to modify the profile catalog.
2. In the Modify profile catalog dialog box, select the profile type, for example L profiles.
3. To associate the L profiles with steel, right-click and select Material > Steel from the pop-
up menu.
A check mark next to Steel on the pop-up menu indicates that L profiles are available for
steel parts.
4. To make the L profiles available also for concrete parts, right-click again and select
Material > Concrete.

www.cadfamily.com
5. To remove a check mark, select the profile type, right-click, and select Material and the
option you want to make unavailable.
6. Click OK to close the Modify profile catalog dialog box.
7. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the profile catalog.
Adding a rule
To add a rule to the tree:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog
box.
2. Right-click any existing rule, click Add rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog
box.
3. Type in the Rule name.
4. Choose the Profile type to which the rule will be applied.
5. Enter the Name filter string that will define the new rule. As a default the wildcard symbol
(*) is entered, meaning “all entries”. To group all catalog entries with names beginning with
A, enter A* as the Name filter string. To group all catalog entries with names containing
100, enter *100*. Tekla Structures groups the catalog entries that satisfy your criteria under
a new rule.
For more information on filtering, see Using wildcards.
Adding a next level rule

A next level rule creates a subgroup under an existing rule.
Follow the instructions for Adding a rule (p. 121), but use the option Add next level rule.
Editing a rule
To edit a rule:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog
box.
2. Right-click any existing rule, click Edit a rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog
box.
3. Modify the rule as required. Read Adding a rule (p. 121) for more on rules.
4. Click OK to return to the Modify profile catalog dialog box.
Organizing rules
Tekla Structures lists profiles in alphabetical order, and rules in the order which you can specify.
To change the order in which rules appear:
1. Click File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify... to display the Modify profile catalog dialog
box.
2. Right-click the rule and use the Move Up/Move Down options.
Deleting a rule
To delete a rule from the tree:

1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify profile catalog dialog
box.
2. Right-click any existing rule, click Delete a rule. The rule is deleted and you are returned
to the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
See also Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 128)
Viewing or modifying the profile catalog

To view or modify the profile catalog:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog
box.
2. Click an existing profile to view or modify it.
Information on profiles is separated into three tabs:
General tab The General tab has information on profile types and dimensions.
Analysis tab The Analysis tab has information on the properties used in structural analysis. The structure is
analyzed using the Finite Element Method.
User attributes The User attributes tab is for viewing or entering user-defined attributes for profiles. Read A
tab closer look at the export file (p. 143) for more information.
Adding a profile
There are two ways to create a new profile:
• Copy an existing profile.
• Create a new profile from scratch.
Copy an existing profile

The simplest way to create a new profile is by modifying a copy of an existing, similar one, as
in the following example.
Choose profile type and profile dimensions so that they match the new
cross section as closely as possible. The profile type and profile dimen-
sions (height, width, etc.) affect the connections applied, so a bad profile
type, or missing values, may result in problems with connections.
Remember that some connections only work for certain types of profiles.
Always enter values for h and b, as these values can affect how Tekla
Structures display profiles.
Steps 1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog
box.
2. Find a profile similar to the one you want to create and right-click. A similar profile might
be one with the same profile type and subtype as the one you want to create.
3. Click Copy profile.
4. Change the profile name.
5. Modify the profile properties.
6. Click Update and then OK to save your profile.
7. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.

www.cadfamily.com
Creating a new standard profile
Alternatively you can create a new profile.
Steps 1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog
box.
2. Right-click anywhere in the tree structure and click Add profile. A new profile will be
created with the name PROFILE (number).
3. Change the profile name. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla
Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case in this field.
4. Choose a profile type and profile subtype, then enter the profile properties.
5. Click Update and then OK to save your profile.
See also Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile (p. 125)
Creating a cross section

Employ user-defined cross sections to create user-defined profiles.
Cross-section data is now stored in the profdb.bin, not the

profcs.bin, as in previous versions.
Cross section with no inner contours

To create a cross section with no inner contours:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Crosss Section Using Polygon.
2. Pick the corners of the cross section. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon.
3. Pick the center point of the cross section. This will serve as the center-line point when used
in a profile with user-defined cross sections.
4. Name the cross section in the User profile cross section dialog box, which opens
automatically after the center point is picked.
5. Click OK to save the cross section.
6. Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.
Cross section with inner contours

To create a cross section with inner contours:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section Using Polygon.
2. Pick the corners of the cross section. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon.
3. Pick the corners of the cross-section inner contour. Pick the starting point to close the
current polygon. Repeat until all inner contours are picked. Click the middle mouse button.
4. Pick the center point of the cross section. This will serve as the center-line point when used
in a profile with user-defined cross sections.
5. Name the cross section in the User profile cross section dialog box, which opens
automatically after the center point is picked.
6. Click OK to save the cross section.

When creating multi-cross-section profiles, it is important to create cross

sections with the same number of points, created in the same order.
Example A pitched I profile needs two cross sections with the same center point height. You can create a
pitched profile as illustrated below. The cross-section inner contour and outer contour can be
picked either clockwise or counterclockwise.
See also Modifying a cross section (p. 124)

Deleting a cross section (p. 125)
Modifying a cross section

To modify an existing cross section:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Sectionto display the Modify Cross
Section dialog box.
2. Click on the cross section you want to modify.
3. Modify the cross section point data.
4. Click Update and then OK to save the cross section and exit the dialog box.
Different types of chamfer

You can use different types of chamfer in user-defined profiles. Click Modeling > profiles >
Edit Polygon Cross Section to open the Modify Cross Section dialog box.
Number on the Point properties tab refers to each point picked when the cross section was
created, in numerical order. The first point picked is Number 1, the second 2, etc. Click on the
down arrow against Number to view or change the properties of each point.

www.cadfamily.com
Click on the cross section, then click the down arrow in Chamfer type to choose a chamfer type.
The x and y values apply to the chamfer type. For example, for the chamfer to be equal on both
sides of the angle, only enter a value for x, as in the illustration above. For an uneven chamfer,
enter values for x and y.
Deleting a cross section

To delete a cross section from the catalog:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Section.
2. Click a cross section.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK to exit the Modify cross section dialog box.
5. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile

Only user-defined cross sections are used to create user-defined profiles. Create the cross
sections needed before adding a standard user-defined profile.
Read Creating a cross section (p. 123) for more on cross sections.
Single cross- To create a user-defined profile using a single cross section:

section profile
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog....
2. Right-click an existing profile, click Add profile.
3. Name the profile. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures
will automatically convert lower case text to upper case.
4. Click User-defined, fixed in the Profile type list box.

5. Click the user-defined cross section to be used in the Profile subtype list box.
6. Enter 1 for the Cross section number and 0.0000 for the Relative location.
7. Click OK to save your profile.
Multi-cross- To create a multi-cross-section profile:
section profile
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog....
2. Right-click an existing profile, click Add profile.
3. Name the profile. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures
will automatically convert lower case text to upper case.
4. Click User-defined, fixed in the Profile type list box.
5. Click the user-defined cross section to be used in the Profile subtype list box.
6. Enter the Cross section number and the Relative location, assigning a new number and
location for each one. Relative location values indicate the location of the cross section
along the axis: 0.0 for starting end and 1.0 for second end.
7. Use the Add button in the Modify profile catalog dialog box to create more cross sections.
8. Click Update after defining each cross section in the profile.
9. Click OK to save your profile.
Example In a pitched profile, Relative location values are 0.0, 0.5 and 1.0, for cross sections 1, 2 and 3.
Remember, cross sections affect the total weight of the profile.
Choose the profile type and dimensions so that they match the new cross section as closely as
possible. Profile type and dimensions affect the connections applied, so the wrong profile type
or missing values may result in problems with connections.
Some connections only work for certain profiles.
Always enter values for h and b as they affect how the profile is displayed.

www.cadfamily.com
The values h and b are used when calculating the height of a part in pixels.
If the values are 0, the part is drawn as a line.
These values are also used when setting the position of the part.
Adding user-defined attributes to a profile

In addition to general and analysis properties, you can also create your own attributes for
profiles. For instance, you might specify paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain size of
concrete using a user-defined attribute.
To create a user-defined attribute for a profile:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to open the Modify Profile Catalog dialog
box.
2. Click Definitions... on the User attributes tab to open the Modify profile properties dialog
box.
3. Click Add to add a user-defined attribute. The dialog box will now look like this:
4. Click the text under each heading to define the attributes using the following fields:
Field Comment
Profile type Click the down arrow to indicate the profile types that the
property will be applied to.
Quantity type The type of information the user-defined attribute will
contain, e.g. weight, area, ratio, string.
Order The order in which user-defined attributes are shown in
the dialog box. Smaller values are shown first.
Property This field is saved in the catalog and can be used in reports
name and templates.
When this field is used in a template,
PROFILE.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the property
name will appear.
Example:PAINT_LAYER_THICKNESS

Field Comment
Symbol An abbreviation that can be used for the property, such as
Ix, ct, etc.
Label The property name is translated to the label in various
circumstances.
Merging profile catalogs

The import and export options work together and are used to merge catalogs. It is a useful
technique when:
• Upgrading to a new version of the program, when you want to retain customized catalogs
from the previous version.
• Combining catalogs stored in different locations.
• Sharing information from catalogs with other users.

See also Exporting the profile catalog (p. 128)
Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 128)
Importing from previous versions (p. 129)
Importing the profile catalog (p. 129)
Exporting the profile catalog

To export the entire profile catalog:
box.
2. Click the Export button.
3. Choose a location for the export file.
4. Type in a name for the file. If you type in an existing filename, that file will be overwritten.
Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.
Use this method to export the entire profile catalog. If you want to export
only part of your catalog, read Exporting elements from the profile
catalog (p. 128).
Exporting elements from the profile catalog

You can also export a branch of the profile tree, i.e. all the profiles grouped under a rule, or a
single profile.
Branch To export a branch of the profile tree:
box.
2. Right-click the branch to be exported.
3. Click Export profiles.

www.cadfamily.com
5. Type in a name for the file.
Single profile To export a single profile:
box.
2. Right-click the profile to be exported.
3. Click Export profile.
5. Type in a name for the file. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.
Read A closer look at the export file (p. 143) if you are interested in the
contents of the export file. You should also read this section if you are
considering editing the export file.
Importing from previous versions

You cannot import export files created with previous versions of the program. However, profile
catalogs from previous versions are automatically converted when a model is opened in the new
version. So, to create a suitable export file, open the relevant model in the new version and
export the catalog.
Do not save your model in the new version, or you will not be able to open
it in the older version.
Importing the profile catalog

To import a profile catalog:
1. Open a model which uses the profile catalog to which you wish to import.
box.
3. Click Import.
4. Indicate the location of the file to be imported. Exported catalog files have the file extension
lis.
Read Exporting the profile catalog (p. 128) for information on how to
create an export file.
What happens to existing profiles?

If an existing profile has the same name as the one being imported, the program will give you
three options:

Option What happens
Replace The current profile is deleted, the profile in the file
being imported is added.
Merge Profile properties that are different in the file being
imported are added to the existing profile, all the other
properties remain unchanged.
Use this option to import only certain attributes of
profiles.
Leave The existing profile is not replaced and the definition in
the import file is ignored.
The merge option is a very useful one if you want to import certain
elements of the catalog. For example, you could use it to import only the
user-defined attributes of a profile.
User-defined fixed cross section definitions

Each cross section definition has a unique name and ID number. If, during an import, a cross
section is found in the existing profile catalog which has the same name, but different properties,
the cross section being imported is renamed (an incremental number is added to the end of the
existing name). The new name is also written to the Tekla Structures log file.
User-defined attributes
If a user-defined attribute with a different definition already exists, you will be prompted to
replace or leave the existing attribute.
4.3 The material catalog

The material catalog contains information on material grades.
Materials are displayed in a hierarchical tree, grouped according to material, e.g. steel and
concrete.
Topics Viewing or modifying the material catalog (p. 130)
Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade (p. 131)
Adding a material type (p. 132)
Adding a new material grade (p. 132)
Deleting a material grade (p. 133)
Defining your own symbols for materials (p. 133)
Export and import (p. 134)
Viewing or modifying the material catalog

To view or modify the material catalog:

www.cadfamily.com
1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog to view the Modify material catalog dialog box.
2. Click an existing material to view or modify its properties.
Information on materials is contained on four tabs in the Modify material catalog dialog box.
General tab The General tab has fields for three alternative names (or aliases) for the material. These are
usually the material names used in different countries or standards. It also contains the profile
and plate density values.
Analysis tab The Analysis tab has information on the properties used in structural analysis. The structure is
analyzed using the Finite Element Method.
Design tab The Design tab has information on design-specific properties such as strengths, partial safety
factors, etc. Click the correct design code in the Design code list box:
User attributes In addition to general and analysis properties, you can also create your own attributes for
tab material grades. For instance, you might specify paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain
size of concrete using a user-defined attribute.
Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade

To add a user-defined attribute to a material grade:
1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to open the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.
2. Click Definitions on the User attributes tab to open the Modify profile properties dialog
box.
3. Click Add to add a user-defined attribute.
4. Click the text under each heading and use the list box to define each attribute.
The following fields can be used:

Field Comment
Category The material category to which the user-defined attribute
will be applied.
Design code The design code it comes under.
Material type
Quantity type The type of information the user-defined attribute will
contain, e.g. weight, area, ratio, string.
Order The order in which user-defined attributes are shown in
the dialog box. Smaller values are shown first.
Property name This field is saved in the catalog and can be used in
reports and templates.
When this field is used in a template MATE-
RIAL.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the property
name will appear.
Label The property name is translated to the label in various
circumstances.
Units of measure
Set units of measure for both input and output using Tools > Options > Options... > Units and
decimals.
Adding a material type

If the tree does not contain the material type you need, you can add material types.
1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to display the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.
2. Click a material (e.g. steel) and right-click to access the pop-up menu.
3. Click Add material.
4. Enter the material properties in the Add material dialog box.
5. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box.
Adding a new material grade

The simplest way to create a new material grade is by modifying a copy of an existing, similar
one.
Steps 1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog...to display the Modify material catalog dialog box.
2. Click a material grade similar to the one you wish to create, right-click.
3. Click Copy grade.
4. Change the Material name.
5. Modify the material grade properties.
Alternatively you can create a new material.

www.cadfamily.com
Steps 1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog...to display the Modify material catalog dialog box.
2. Click a material type (e.g. steel), right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Add grade.
3. Change the material grade name in the Selected grade field.
4. Enter the material grade properties.
Deleting a material grade

To delete a material grade from the catalog:
1. Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to display the Modify Material Catalog dialog box.
2. Click a material, right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Delete grade.
3. Click OK to exit the Modify material catalog dialog box.
For more on saving the catalog, read Saving a modified catalog (p. 116).
Defining your own symbols for materials

You can replace existing material definitions with your own, which will then be displayed in
drawings.
Material definitions can contain text, numbers and symbols.
Where are User-defined material definitions are stored in the file defined by the variable
material XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE.
definitions
stored? The suggested filename is material_symbol_table.txt. This file does not exist until
you create it.
Once this file is created and set for use in the Advanced options dialog box, Drawing
properties category, using the variable XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE, all
the named materials in the catalog will be replaced with the ones defined in this file.
Each line of the file defines a material, using the syntax:
Material_name symbol_file.sym @ n
Syntax of the
material file
Value Description
material_name The name of the material used in the material catalog.
symbol_file The file name of the symbol to be used. This must have
the suffix .sym. There is an example of a user-defined
symbol at the end of this section.
n The symbol number. This number is also displayed in
the Symbol Editor.

Example SM400A ud_mat.sym @ 13 A
SM400B ud_mat.sym @ 13 B
SM490 ud_mat.sym @ 11
When creating your own material definition file, ensure that materials
with extended material names are listed before ones with similar, simpler
names, or they will both be given the same symbol. For example,
SM400B must be listed before SM400.
This is an example of a user-defined symbol:
Export and import

The export and import process is the same as for the profile catalog, which is described in
Merging profile catalogs (p. 128).
4.4 The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs

Bolts are used in a model as predefined assemblies made up of components such as bolts,
washers, nuts, etc.
The bolt catalog contains bolt assembly elements, such as bolts of different size and length,
nuts, washers, etc.
The bolt assembly catalog contains bolt assemblies.
When bolt assemblies are used in a model, the program automatically handles bolt length,
number of washers, nuts, etc.
Topics Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog (p. 135)
Saving a modified bolt catalog (p. 137)
Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies (p. 137)
Creating studs (p. 139)
Merging bolt catalogs (p. 141)
Exporting the bolt catalog (p. 141)
Importing the bolt catalog (p. 141)

www.cadfamily.com
Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog
To view individual bolt elements, such as bolts, washers, and nuts:
Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... to access the Bolt Catalog dialog box.
Filter The Filter option is used to limit the list of entries from the catalog which are displayed. Read
The filter (p. 116) for more on filtering techniques.
Layout The Modify bolt catalog dialog box contains a list box. Single click an entry on the list to access
its properties.
The following table explains the terms used for the properties of bolts, washers and nuts, in the
Bolt catalog dialog box.
Term What does it mean? When is this value used?

add. dist Length of the part of the Bolt length calculation
bolt that protrudes from
the nut
top thick Thickness of bolt head Drawing the bolt (e.g. to screen)
thread len The length of the threaded This is not used in bolt length
part of the bolt shaft calculation (value is 0) if the bolt
is fully-threaded.
washer tol Tolerance between the When searching for the correct-
washer inner diameter sized washer for the bolt. Not
and the bolt diameter used in bolt length calculation.
span size Size of the wrench needed Drawing the bolt (e.g. to screen)
top diam Diameter of the hexagon For information only
calc thick Calculation thickness of a Used in bolt length calculation
nut or washer
real thick True thickness of a nut or For information only
washer
inner diam Inner diameter of a nut or For information only
washer
outer diam Outer diameter of a nut or For information only
washer
An example of the properties of a typical bolt:

An example of the properties of a typical nut:
An example of the properties of a typical washer:

www.cadfamily.com
Saving a modified bolt catalog
Click Update to save the changes in memory until OK is clicked.
When you modify a catalog and click OK to exit a dialog box prompts for a choice between two
options:
The first option saves the modified bolt catalog to the current model folder. The second acts like
the Windows Cancel button and does not save the modified catalog.
Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies

To view or modify bolt assemblies:
Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... to access the Bolt Assembly Catalog
dialog box. Click an entry on the list to access its properties.

The Bolt assembly catalog dialog box contains two fields for assembly names, Short name
and Standard, which are used in different areas of the program.
Field Description When is this value used?

Short This name is used in Drawing the bolt (e.g. on the
name marking and reports. It is screen)
usually the commercial
name for a specific bolt.
Standard This is the full name and Bolt length calculation
is show in the list box in
the Bolt properties
dialog box invoked from
the Model Editor.
The illustration below shows the possible components of the assembly. The program chooses
the appropriate components when the assembly is used.

www.cadfamily.com
Does value for additional length affect all or individual diameters?
Enter additional length value here.
Click here to specify whether the value is absolute or relative to diameter.
The value given for additional length can affect either individual or all diameters of one bolt
assembly. See the illustration above.
The value for length can either be absolute or relative to diameter. See the illustration above.
Defining Use the Add. dist... button to control how much of the bolt protrudes from the nut. It is useful
additional length for performing a quick update of the entire bolt catalog. This value is used in bolt length
for bolt calculation.
calculation
Clicking Add. dist updates the Add. dist values of all bolts which use the
selected bolt standard and have the selected diameter.
For more information, read Bolt length calculation (p. 146).
Creating studs
A stud is special type of bolt that is welded to steel parts to transfer loads between steel and
concrete.

To create and use studs:
1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... and create a stud bolt in the bolt catalog. Enter the
following properties:
Property Value
Name Name for the stud bolt.
Type
Standard This name is needed

when creating bolt
assembly for the stud.
Diameter Shank diameter.
Length Stud length.
Weight Stud weight.
top thick Head thickness.
top diameter Head diameter.
2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... and create a stud bolt assembly.
Select the standard for the stud bolt.
Set all the other assembly component to NONE.
3. To create studs in the model, use the Bolt command and select the stud assembly standard.

www.cadfamily.com
Merging bolt catalogs
The import and export options work together and are used to merge catalogs. It is a useful
technique when:
• Upgrading to a new version of the program, when you want to retain a customized bolt
catalog from the previous version. Read Upgrading to a new version (p. 141) for a specific
example of this.
• Combining bolt catalogs stored in different locations.
• Sharing information from the bolt catalog with other users.
The export and import method for the bolt catalog is different to that used
for the profile and materials catalogs.
Exporting the bolt catalog

To export the entire bolt catalog:
1. Open the model containing the required bolt catalog.
2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog.
3. Tekla Structures writes the bolt catalog to the file screwdb.lis in the current model folder.
This method exports the entire bolt catalog. To export only part of the
bolt catalog, edit the export file to contain only the required elements.
Importing the bolt catalog

To import the bolt catalog:
1. Open the model to which you want to import the bolt catalog.
2. Copy the screwdb.lis file you want to import to the current model folder.
3. Click Detailing > Bolts > Import Bolt Catalog to import the bolt catalog file
screwdb.lis from the current model folder. Tekla Structures does not replace entries in
the existing catalog that have the same names as the entries in the import file.
4. Check the status bar for error messages. To view errors, check the Tekla Structures log by
clicking Tools > Display Log File > Session History....
Upgrading to a new version

Example This is an example of how to use import and export when you upgrade to a new version of Tekla
Structures. This technique ensures that you retain any customization made to your existing
catalog and that only catalog additions from the new version are merged.
Basically you will export the new catalog to your existing one. This prevents Tekla Structures
overwriting existing catalog entries, or creating duplicates. The following steps explain how to
do this when changing from one version of the program to another.

Do not simply copy and paste the bolt catalog from a previous version
over the one in the new version. This will result in additions to the new
version being lost.
1. Open a model in the new version. Do not save the model, or you will not be able to use it in
previous versions.
2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog. The program will create the export file
screwdb.lis in the current model folder.
3. Open the same model in the previous version.
4. Click File > Catalog > Bolts > Import. The program imports from the file screwdb.lis
in the current model folder. Existing entries with the same name as in the imported catalog
are not replaced.
5. The merged catalog is now available in the previous version.
6. To use the merged catalog in the new version, first rename the screwdb.db file in the
new version folder \environments\*your_environment*\profil\.
Rename the screwdb.db file in the new version, before replacing it

with the screwdb.db file from the previous version.
7. Copy the screwdb.db file (which contains the merged bolt catalog) from the previous
version folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\profil\ to the new
version folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\profil\.
The bolt assembly catalog cannot be exported and imported.
4.5 The reinforcing bar catalog

The reinforcing bar catalog contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete structures. It
includes both the standard bending radius and the standard hook dimensions. This section
explains how to add, delete and modify entries in the reinforcing bar catalog.
Read Reinforcement in the Detailing Manual for information on how to

create reinforcing bars in Tekla Structures. This chapter also contains a
detailed explanation of reinforcing bar properties.
The catalog is stored in the file

..\environment\*your_environment*\profil\rebar_database.inp. To
modify the catalog, edit this file using any standard text editor.

www.cadfamily.com
4.6 For the advanced user
The section provides addtional information on the following subjects. It is aimed at experienced
Tekla Structures users.
Topics A closer look at the export file (p. 143)
Do’s & don’ts of editing the export file (p. 144)
Importing part of the bolt catalog (p. 144)
Units used in export and import (p. 145)
Bolt length calculation (p. 146)
A closer look at the export file

This information only relates to the profile and material catalogs and provides additional
information on the export file discussed in Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p.
128) and Export and import (p. 134). We will use a typical export file from the profile catalog
as an example. Catalog export files have the file extension lis.
Sections of the The export file is divided into specific sections.
export file
The first line of the file will be (n is the version number):
PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = n
Do not delete this line. If it does not appear in the file, the import will be
canceled.
The next section defines the hierarchical tree structure used to display the contents of the catalog.
The next section contains the profiles.
Standard profiles Most profile types are hard-coded into the program and look like this in the export file (partial
entry shown):
PROFILE_NAME = "HEA120";
{
TYPE = 1; SUB_TYPE = 1001; COORDINATE = 0.000;
"FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" 0.000000000E+000
"ROUNDING_RADIUS_2" 0.000000000E+000
"FLANGE_THICKNESS" 8.000000000E+000
"WEB_THICKNESS" 5.000000000E+000
"WIDTH" 1.200000000E+002
"HEIGHT" 1.140000000E+002
User-defined User-defined fixed profiles can have more than one cross section. They look like this in the
fixed profiles export file:

PROFILE_NAME = "TAN_HK_TEST_2_CS";
TYPE = 998; SUB_TYPE = 253; COORDINATE = 0.000;
"EQUIVALENT_TYPE" 11
"FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" 0.000000000E+000
"ECCENTRICITY_Y" 0.000000000E+000
"ECCENTRICITY_X" 0.000000000E+000
"FLANGE_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000
"WEB_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000
The profile type for user-defined fixed profiles is 998. SUB_TYPE refers to the name of the cross
section definition. When importing user-defined fixed profiles, the relevant cross section
definitions must be in the same import file as the profile.
The cross section definition appears like this in the import file:
CROSS_SECTION_NAME = "MY_OWN_PROFILE"
POINT_NUMBER = 1;
POINT_X = 200.00;
POINT_Y = -200.00;
CHAMFER_TYPE = 0;
CHAMFER_X = 0.00;
CHAMFER_Y = 0.00;
POINT_NUMBER = 2;
POINT_X = 200.00;
POINT_Y = 200.00;
CHAMFER_TYPE = 0;
CHAMFER_X = 0.00;
CHAMFER_Y = 0.00;
User-defined The geometry of user-defined parametric profiles is defined in the file
parametric ..\environments\country-independent\inp\sections.clb. A user-defined
profiles parametric profile can only be imported if it is defined in this file.
As this type of profile is user-definable, different users may have different definitions.
Do’s & don’ts of editing the export file

There are a few rules to follow when editing the export file.
You will find it very useful to familiarize yourself with the different
sections of the export file by reading through A closer look at the export
file (p. 143).
• Do not delete the line PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = 2. If it does not appear
in the file, the import will be canceled.
• The hierarchical tree structure can always be deleted.
Importing part of the bolt catalog

To only import part of a bolt catalog:
1. Follow the steps in Exporting the bolt catalog (p. 141) to create an export file.

www.cadfamily.com
Make a copy of the export file and give it a different name before you edit
it, so that it easier to go back and try again if you do not get it right first
time.
2. Edit the file using a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad. Notice that each item in the
catalog is listed on a separate line. Delete the unwanted lines from the file.
3. Do not delete these lines: STARTLIST and ENDLIST.
4. Save the file with the same name and file extension. The filename must be screwdb.lis.
5. Follow the steps in Importing the bolt catalog (p. 141) to import the catalog.
Units used in export and import

This list of units Tekla Structures uses when exporting and importing only relates to the profile
and material catalogs. You will find it useful if you want to write your own import routines for
large amounts of data.
Type Unit (no unit if blank)

Boolean
Integer
String
Ratio
Strain
Angle degree
Length mm
Deformation mm
Dimension mm
Radius of inertia mm
Area mm2
Reinforcement area mm2
Transverse reinforcement area mm2/m
Area/unit length mm2/m
Volume mm3
Section modulus mm3
Moment of inertia mm4
Torsion constant mm4
Warping constant mm6
Force N
Weight kg
Distributed load N/m
Spring constant N/m

Type Unit (no unit if blank)
Mass/length kg/m
Surface load N/m2
Strength N/m2
Stress N/m2
Modulus N/m2
Density kg/m3
Moment Nm
Distributed moment Nm/m
Rotation spring constant Nm/rad
Temperature K (oC)
Thermal dilation coefficient 1/K (1/oC)
Factor
Bolt length calculation

The diagram below shows how Tekla Structures calculates bolt length. A full explanation
follows the diagram.

www.cadfamily.com
Bolt length calculation uses values from the bolt and bolt assembly catalogs.
The following illustration from the Bolt properties dialog box shows the values used in bolt
length calculation.

Checkboxes indicate if the component is used in the assembly.
Washer (1)
Washer (2)
Washer (3)
Nut (1)
Nut (2)
If unchecked, only a hole will be created
Explanation 1. The minimum possible length of the bolt is calculated as follows:

washer (1) thickness +
material thickness +
(if checked) washer (3) thickness +
nut (1) thickness +
nut (2) thickness +

www.cadfamily.com
extra length
2. Tekla Structures searches for the closest match in the bolt catalog.
3. The number of fitting washers required (must not exceed 10) is calculated so that the
length of the shaft is less than:
nut (1) thickness +
nut (2) thickness +
(number of fitting washers*washer (3) thickness)
4. Tekla Structures checks that the bolt found in step 2 is longer than:
extra length +
nut (1) thickness +
nut (2) thickness +
add. dist (from bolt catalog) +
(number of fitting washers * washer (3) thickness)
5. If the selected bolt does not fulfill the criteria in step 4, Tekla Structures returns to step 2,
otherwise it continues on to step 6.
6. The program checks that the selected bolt satisfies all the following conditions
• Can the thread be inside the material to be connected? Even if this is not allowed, the
calculation always allows 3 or 4 mm of thread to be inside the material, depending on
bolt diameter. If bolt diameter ≥ 24 mm, it allows 4 mm, otherwise it allows 3 mm.
• Shaft length must be more than:
extra length +
washer (1) thickness -
maximum thread in material allowed (if thread in material = no) = 3 mm or 4 mm
• Shaft length is calculated as:
Screw length - screw thread length - thread end.
• Thread end is the part of the bolt between the shaft and the thread. It is calculated as
follows:
Diameter of Thread end

bolt (mm) (mm)
>33.0 10.0
>27.0 8.0
>22.0 7.0

Diameter of Thread end
bolt (mm) (mm)
>16.0 6.0
>12.0 5.0
>7.0 4.0
>4.0 2.5
≤4 1.5
7. If the selected bolt does not satisfy all the above conditions, Tekla Structures returns to step
2 and tries the next longest bolt.
8. If the variable XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON is set, the epsilon thickness is added to, or
subtracted from, the material thickness, to avoid inaccurate bolt length calculation. As an
example, if this value were not taken into account, where the calculated length was
38.001 mm, a 39 mm bolt might be selected. If no value is set, a default value of 0.1 is used.

www.cadfamily.com
5 AutoConnection
Introduction You can use AutoConnection to select and apply a connection to parts in a model, using
standard connection properties. AutoDefaults allows you to modify standard connection
properties and save them for use in specific circumstances. You can define rule groups and rule
sets for both AutoConnection and AutoDefaults to use for different conditions within the model.
In this chapter This chapter introduces AutoConnection, which you can use to automatically create connections
in a model. You can use AutoDefaults together with AutoConnection to define connection
properties. You can also use AutoDefaults to define connection properties and apply them to a
single connection.
Test model Before using AutoConnections and AutoDefaults in a working model, we recommend that you
create a test model, and create all the connection conditions in it that you need for a particular
project. You can then use this test model to check the rules and properties of various connection
types. It also acts as a quick reference for connection information.
Contents This chapter concentrates on the following topics:
• AutoConnection setup (p. 151)
• AutoDefaults setup (p. 155)
• AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules (p. 159)
5.1 AutoConnection setup

Introduction Use AutoConnection to automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties
to selected parts. With AutoConnection, Tekla Structures automatically creates similar
connections for similar framing conditions.
Topics AutoConnection setup (p. 152)
AutoConnection rule groups (p. 153)
AutoConnection rule sets (p. 153)
Rules.zxt (p. 155)
Changing a connection (p. 155)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com AutoConnection
AutoConnection setup
With AutoConnection you can define groups of rules which Tekla Structures automatically
applies when you use AutoConnection to create connections in a model.
For example, you can create separate rules for different standards, projects, manufacturers, and
even individual models. By using a rule group to select connections and connection properties,
you can create connections automatically, without having to select each connection and define
its properties individually.
Tree structure To access the AutoConnection Setup dialog box, click Detailing > AutoConnection >
AutoConnection Settings.... The connection types used in various cases are shown in a tree
structure:
Icon Type Description

Rule group The 1st level in the tree shows the rule
groups. These are user-definable. They
help you to group the rules according to
different standards, projects, manufac-
turers, and models.
Framing condition The 2nd level shows the different
predefined framing conditions (connec-
tion types). Tekla Structures creates
them automatically and you cannot
change them.
The framing conditions include the
following: beam to beam web, beam to
beam flange, beam to column web,
beam to column flange, beam splice, and
column splice.

www.cadfamily.com
AutoConnection EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
Rule set Under each framing condition you can
create rule sets to specify which connec-
tion to use for specific conditions within
the model.
Connection The connection to apply if the rule set
criteria are met.
To apply a particular connection, the conditions within the model have to match all the rules in
the branch containing the connection. If you do not want to apply a connection for certain rules
sets, right-click the connection name and then select No connection from the pop-up menu.
The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the
first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should
place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic,
lowest.
Restrictions AutoConnection has the following restrictions:

• You can have a maximum of two secondary parts in the connection (for example, you
cannot use complex gussets with several secondaries). AutoConnection uses profile height
and ID number as the criteria for determining 1. secondary and 2. secondary parts.
• AutoDefaults only affects connection parts (clip angles, shear plates, end plates, …), bolts,
and welds. AutoDefaults cannot change beam profiles or the connection number.
See also For more information on rules, see AutoConnection rule groups (p. 153) and AutoConnection
rule sets (p. 153).
For more information on how to use AutoConnection, see Using AutoConnection.
AutoConnection rule groups

Before using AutoConnection, you need to define rule groups, so that you can group the rules
according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, etc. To create a new rule group:
1. Open your test model. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoConnection Settings....
2. Right-click an existing rule group, and select New rule group from the pop-up menu.
3. Double-click the group New and rename it. Give it a distinctive name.
Give the rule group a name that reflects the group of connections that you
want to create. For example, use the fabricator's name, the project name,
or any name that will clearly identify the connection rules that you want
to use for a specific model.
When you create a new rule group, Tekla Structures automatically adds the framing conditions
branches under it (beam to beam web, beam to beam flange etc.).
AutoConnection rule sets

Each framing condition can contain rule sets, which you can use to specify which connection to
use for specific conditions within the model. You only need to create AutoConnection rule sets
if you plan to use different connections to connect similar framing conditions.

For example, you have beam to beam connections, some require clip angles, others need shear
tabs. In this case, you need to set up rule sets to determine where each connection type should
be used.
Creating a rule To add a new rule set under a framing condition:
set
1. Right-click the framing condition. A pop-up menu appears.
2. Select New rule set. A New entry appears in the tree.
3. Give the new rule set a descriptive name.
Creating a 1. Right-click an existing rule set. A pop-up menu appears.
subrule set 2. Select Create additional rule sets. A New entry appears in the tree.
3. Give the new subrule set a descriptive name.
Creating a new rule set or subrule set only adds a rule set to the setup tree. You need to define
its contents separately. See Editing a rule set.
Editing a rule set You can edit the contents of a rule set (for example, change the name or add rules to it):
1. Right-click the rule set. A pop-up menu appears.
2. Select Edit rule set... to open the AutoConnection Rules dialog box.
3. Select a rule from the Available rules list.
4. Click the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list of rules in the rule set.
5. In the right pane under Rules in rule set, fill in the acceptable values for the rule. You can
either define an exact value, or minimum and maximum values.
6. The name you enter in the Rule set name field is shown in the setup tree.
The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the
first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should
place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic,
lowest.
You can change the priority of a rule set by right-clicking the rule set and selecting Move Up or
Move Down.
For more information on rules, see AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules (p. 159).

www.cadfamily.com
Rules.zxt
When you use AutoConnection, Tekla Structures creates an Attributes subfolder in the
current model folder and saves the AutoConnection information in a zipped text file called
rules.zxt.
You can copy this file to the project or firm folders to make it available for other models (see
also Project and firm folders (p. 96)). Each time you modify AutoConnection setup you need
to recopy this file to the firm and/or project folders.
When you copy this file for use in other projects, remember to restart Tekla Structures to use the
new setup.
We do not recommend that you edit the rules.zxt file using a text
editor, but if you do so, check that you use the right syntax. The easiest
way to unpack the zxt file is to change the file extension zxt to
txt.gz and unpack the file using WinZip. Change the extension back to
zxt when you have finished. You do not need to zip the file after editing
it, Tekla Structures can also read the unzipped file.
Changing a connection
To change the connection in a rule set, use the Connection Browser dialog box which lists all
the Tekla Structures connections available in the connection toolbars.
To open the Connection Browser:
1. Right-click a connection in the AutoConnection Setup tree. A pop-up menu appears.
2. Select Select connection type... to open the Connection Browser dialog box.
3. Select a connection and click OK to update the tree.
Deleting an item Use the Delete rule set command in the pop-up menu to delete a rule set from the Setup tree.
This also deletes its subrule sets.
5.2 AutoDefaults setup

Introduction Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply connections. With AutoDefaults you can create rules
defining when to use different connection properties.
Topics AutoDefaults setup (p. 156)
Connection properties files (p. 157)
Defaults.zxt (p. 158)
Priority of rule sets (p. 158)
Editing connection properties (p. 158)
For more information on how to use AutoDefaults, see Using AutoDefaults.

AutoDefaults setup
With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different predefined connection
properties. When you modify connections (for example changing the beam size), Tekla
Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using AutoDefaults setup.
Use AutoDefaults to modify standard connection properties and save the modified properties for
use in specific situations.
Tree structure To open the AutoDefaults setup dialog box, click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults
Settings.... The connection types used in various cases are shown in a tree structure:

Rule group The 1st level in the tree contains rule
groups. The rule groups are user-defin-
able. They help you to group rules
according to different standards,
projects, manufacturers, and models.
Connection page The next two levels show all the connec-
tions available on the toolbars. They are
Connection
predefined and you cannot change them.
Rule set Under each connection you can create

rule sets to specify which connection
properties to use when specific condi-
tions within the model are met.
Connection properties file Every branch in the tree ends with
connection properties file(s) (for
example, standard.j144). You can
save connection properties that you
want to use again. See Saving connec-
tion properties (p. 157).
Rule sets You define AutoDefaults rule sets in the same way as AutoConnection rule sets. See
AutoConnection rule sets (p. 153).
Tekla Structures saves the AutoDefaults rules in the defaults.zxt file in the current model
folder. You may want to copy defaults.zxt and all the connection properties files

www.cadfamily.com
associated with it (for example, sec_0-190.j141) to the firm or project folders to use in
other models. See Defaults.zxt (p. 158).
Connection properties files

By default, each connection has a standard properties file which defines the standard properties
for the connection (for example, standard.j144). You can save connection properties that
you want to use again in separate properties files and give them a distinctive name.
Saving connection properties

To save connection properties for later use in similar conditions within the model, you can save
them in a properties file:
1. Set the properties you want to save (for example, bolt, profile, material properties).
2. In the Save as field, enter a distinctive name for the connection properties. Enter the same
name in the Connection code field and click Save as.
When you save connection properties to use with AutoDefaults, it is a

good idea to enter the same name in the Save as and Connection code
fields on the General tab. This means you can easily check later which
properties Tekla Structures used in specific situations. Tekla Structures
does not automatically show the AutoDefault values in the connection
properties fields.
Tekla Structures creates the properties file in an Attributes subfolder in the current model
folder. The filename consists of the name you entered in Save as and the extension .jXXX,
where XXX is the connection number (for example, sec_0-190.j141).
Access to properties files

To view the list of properties files for a certain connection:
1. In the AutoDefaults Setup tree, select a properties file (for example, standard.j144).
2. Right-click the selected properties file. A pop-up menu appears.
3. Click Select connection parameters.... Tekla Structures displays the Attribute File List
dialog box, containing the existing properties files for the connection.

Defaults.zxt
When you use AutoDefaults, Tekla Structures creates an Attributes sub-folder in the
current model folder and saves the AutoDefaults setup in a zipped text file, defaults.zxt.
You can copy this file to the project or firm folders to make it available in other models. See also
Project and firm folders (p. 96)). Each time you modify the AutoDefaults setup, you need to
recopy this file to the firm, or project folders.
When you copy this file for use in other projects, remember to restart Tekla Structures to use the
new setup.
We do not recommend that you edit the defaults.zxt file using a text
editor, but if you do so, check that you use the right syntax. The easiest
way to unpack the .zxt file is to change the file extension zxt to
txt.gz and unpack the file using WinZip. Change the extension back to
zxt when you have finished. You do not need to repack the file after
editing it, Tekla Structures can also read the unpacked file.
Priority of rule sets

Tekla Structures processes AutoDefaults rule sets in the order in which they appear in the tree,
so you can control the selection of properties. Usually, one framing condition, profile type, and
orientation can have several property combinations, for example, a different profile height.
Example For example, if you have properties files and rules for maximum profile heights of 150, 160, 170
and 190 mm, and AutoDefaults is selecting properties for a height of 158 mm, three properties
files are valid. AutoDefaults selects the first one to match (in this case, 160 mm). Where there
is no match, you will need a default rule and properties file.You should set the default rule so
that it does not define the profile height and is the last item in the branch. In this way the default
rule will always be the last one to match and any properties file that matches the profile height
will override it.
Editing connection properties

To edit connection properties in the AutoDefaults Setup tree:
1. Right-click a connection standard.j file (for example, standard.j144). A pop-up menu
appears.
2. Select Edit connection parameters to open the connection dialog box.
3. Set the properties as you would when manually creating connections.
4. Type a descriptive name for these properties in the Save as text box and click Save as. Use
a name that distinguishes these as AutoDefaults setup.
5. Click Cancel to close the dialog box and return to the AutoDefaults setup dialog box.
If you click OK to close the dialog box, you need to load the default prop-
erties next time you use this connection. This ensures that AutoDefaults
can modify the properties.
6. Right-click the standard.j again. Click Select connection parameters....

www.cadfamily.com
7. The Attribute File List opens. It contains the properties that have been set and saved in the
connection dialog box.
8. You can now apply any of the properties that have been saved in a rule set.
5.3 AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules

Introduction You can use the rules listed in the sections below to accurately select connections and
connection properties when using AutoConnection and AutoDefaults. Using these rules you can
create your own standards to apply project or company defaults.
General The general rules are:
• Profile name: the name in the Name field in the Profile catalog dialog box.
• Profile type: use the following table to find the correct number:
Profile type Number

I 1
L 2
Z 3
U 4
Plate 5
Round bar 6
Pipe 7
Square pipe 8
C 9
T 10
ZZ 15
CC 16

Profile type Number
CW 17
Polygon plate 51
• Number of secondaries.
• Number of primaries.
• Material name.
Orientation Depending on the relative angle a beam, the connections can be classified as:
• Sloped angle (relative to primary part cross section)
The longitudinal axis of the secondary part follows the slope of the longitudinal axis of the
primary part.
• Skewed angle (relative to primary part longitudinal axis)

The longitudinal axis of the secondary part is skewed according to the primary part cross
section. The angle is the smaller of the angles between the longitudinal axis of the secondary
part and the primary part Z or Y axis.
• Cant angle
For rotated secondary parts.
Sloped, skewed, and cant angle value can be 0 - 90 degrees. Do not use
negative values.
Dimensions • Profile depth

• Web depth

www.cadfamily.com
For profiles with an upper and lower flange, web depth is:
h - t1 - t2 - 2*r1
Or, if t2 is zero:
h - 2*t - 2*r1
For profiles with one flange, web depth is h - t - r1 - r2.
• Web thickness
• Flange thickness
Forces and • Shear force
strengths
• Axial force
• Bending moment
Combining and iterating properties

AutoDefaults includes these features:
Feature Description
Combining You can save connection properties files covering different
groups of properties, then use these files to define many
rules. For example you can have one file for bolt properties
and another for profile properties. Tekla Structures
combines the files when it runs AutoDefaults.
Iterating Tekla Structures tests properties until the connection symbol
is yellow or green. Iteration changes connection properties
automatically if connection fails, even if the rules would
match. If Connection Check is set on, the iteration results in
connection properties that have passed the check.
Using these To use either of these features for a rule set:

features
1. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefault Settings...
2. Browse the tree and right-click a rules set.
3. Select Edit rule set...
4. Set Parameters files selection to one of the following options:
Option Description
Use combination of Tekla Structures uses the properties files it finds in
first parameters the first matching sub-rule set and does not check
other rule sets.
Iterate until the Tekla Structures checks sub rule sets until it finds
connection symbol is matching properties that leave the connection
green symbol green.

Option Description
Iterate until the Tekla Structures checks sub rule sets until it finds
connection symbol is matching properties that leave the connection
yellow symbol yellow.
Use combination of all Tekla Structures checks all rule sets and uses prop-
parameters erties files in all matching rule sets. The order of
properties files is important, since the last over-
rides.
The order of files in the tree is important. When Tekla Structures

combines the properties files, the most recent files (the lowest in the tree)
override previous ones. If you leave properties blank, Tekla Structures
does not override previous properties with blank properties.
Limitations
Tekla Structures cannot iterate properties files directly. Use a single iteration rule set with sub
rule sets.
You cannot have many parallel iteration rule sets. Use a single iteration rule set and place it just
before the default rule set.
Place the combination rule sets above the iteration rule set in the tree.
Combination rule sets can only be one level deep.
Tekla Structures disregards empty rule sets, so include at least one rule in each rule set.
See also Combining properties (p. 162)
Iteration with connection check (p. 163)
Combining properties
The AutoDefaults combine feature combines separate properties files into one file. This means
you define fewer files, because you use one file for several rules. If files contain different values
for the same property, Tekla Structures uses the last property it finds. See the image below.

www.cadfamily.com
See also Combining and iterating properties (p. 161)
Iteration with connection check

This example shows how you can use the iteration feature of AutoDefaults. In this example
iteration sets the number of bolts according to the result of the connection check.
When using this rule group for a connection in the model, AutoDefaults sets the number of bolts
until the connection symbol is green.

The iteration rule forces Tekla Structures to tests sub rules until the
connection symbol is green in the model.
Creating iteration First, create connection properties files for each number of bolts. See Editing connection
rules properties (p. 158).
1. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults Settings...
2. Right-click the tree and select New rule group. Click the rule group and rename it to
"Iteration example".
3. Browse the tree and find connection 144. Right-click it and select Create additional rule
sets....
4. Right-click the rule set and select Edit rule set..., to open the AutoDefault rules dialog box.
5. Change the Rule set name to "ITERATION".
6. Set Parameters file selection to Iterate until the connection symbol is green.
7. Click OK.
8. To create a rule set "2 bolts", right-click the first rule set and select Create additional rule
sets....
9. Right-click the new rule set and select Edit rule set.... AutoDefault rules dialog box
appears.
10. Select rule Secondary 1 depth and set the minimum and maximum depth values for two
bolts.
11. Set Parameters file selection to Use combination of first parameters.
12. Click OK.
13. Right-click the connection properties file standard.j144, and click Select connection
parameters.. to open the Attribute File List dialog box. Select the properties file for two
bolts and click OK.
14. Repeat steps 8 to 13 for other rule sets.
Using rules and You can use the connection check result when applying AutoDefaults with iteration. If a rule
check together matches, but connection do not pass the check and symbol remains red, AutoDefaults continues
testing other rules and properties until the connection symbol is green.
To apply a rule group and connection check for a connection:

www.cadfamily.com
1. Open the connection properties dialog box.
2. Load the <Defaults> properties.
3. Click General tab and set AutoDefaults Rule Group to the "Iteration example" you
created.
4. Click Design type tab and set Connection check to Yes.
5. Enter the load from secondary members in the fields Shear, Tension, Moment.
6. Click OK to create the connection.
Checking To see which rules AutoDefaults used, right-click the connection symbol, and select Inquire.
To see which values AutoDefaults set, double-click the connection symbol to open the
connection dialog box, select <AutoDefaults>, then click Load.
Reaction forces and UDL

You can save reaction forces:
• In the user-defined attributes of a part (for AutoConnection and AutoDefaults).
• On the Design tab in the connection dialog box (for AutoDefaults).
Using reaction When you use reaction forces in a rule and AutoDefaults is activate, Tekla Structures first
forces searches for reaction forces in the corresponding connection’s properties. If they do not contain
reaction forces, Tekla Structures searches the user-defined attributes of the secondary part of the
connection. If Tekla Structures finds no forces there, you cannot use reaction force rules.
Shear force Shear force calculation is the exception. If you have not given any reaction force values, shear
calculation force is calculated using the UDL shear force routine. The UDL calculation is based on the AISC
ASD Specification and is mainly intended for use with imperial units. It uses the yield stress
value, profile dimensions, and UDL percentage to calculate the maximum allowable shear force.
Tekla Structures compares the result with the Shear force rule in AutoDefaults.
• Yield stress is defined in the material catalog.
• Profile dimensions come from the profile catalog.
• UDL percentage is taken either from the connection dialog box or from a variable.
UDL for To switch on UDL calculation for AutoConnection:
AutoConnection
1. On the Design tab in the connection dialog box, set the field Use UDL to Yes.
2. Enter the UDL percentage in the UDL % field. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures uses a
default percentage (set using the variable XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT).
UDL for To switch on UDL calculation for AutoDefaults:
AutoDefaults
• Set the variable XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL to TRUE.
• Use the variable XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT to set the UDL percentage.

www.cadfamily.com
6 CNC
Introduction CNC (Computer Numerical Control) refers to the operation of a machine tool via motors,
switches, and so on, with a computer controlling the manufacturing process. During the
manufacturing process a machine tool or machining center cuts or shapes the piece of material.
In this chapter This chapter describes how to export CNC data from Tekla Structures models for use by
machine tools. We explain how to export the data in different formats, such as DSTV, Peddimat,
and DXF. We describe how to generate pop-marks in NC files. Pop marks are small holes that
help the shop assemble individual parts to form an assembly. Then we explain how to generate
hard stamps in NC files. Hard stamps are text marks that can contain various kind of information
about parts. Finally we explain the plate nesting procedure.
• NC files (p. 167)
• DSTV (p. 174)
• DXF (p. 175)
• Peddimat (p. 176)
• Pop-marks (p. 178)
• Hard stamps (p. 181)
• Plate nesting (p. 183)
6.1 NC files
After you finish detailing in Tekla Structures, you can deliver the results to the next phase. You
can use CNC links to send the information directly to automatic cutting and welding machines,
or produce data for MIS systems (management information systems).
Formats Tekla Structures produces NC files in the following formats:
1. DSTV
2. Peddimat
For DOS

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com CNC
For Windows
3. Daito
4. DXF
Tekla Structures creates the files from completed regions of the Tekla Structures model. Tekla
Structures translates part length, hole positions, bevels, notches, and cuts into sets of coordinates
that sawing, drilling and profile burners can use to create the part in the shop.
DSTV format is an industrial standard defined by the German Steel Construction Association.
Often NC machines can use these files directly to punch, drill, and copy parts. For other
machines you may need to translate DSTV files to suit the specific machine. If you need
machine-specific files, you may have to post-process the NC files Tekla Structures produces,
using an NC Translator program.
Tekla Structures model
NC files
NC software
NC machine
Finished machined part
To define NC settings and create NC files, go to File > CNC > NC files...
Topics Setting up NC files (p. 168)
Pop-mark settings (p. 179)
Defining destination machines for parts (p. 170)
Defining hole properties (p. 172)
Creating NC files (p. 172)
Defining the output format and folder (p. 173)
Setting up NC files
Use the NC file settings dialog box to edit machine-specific settings, such as the file format.
This helps you sort NC files into machine-specific folders. You can also specify that different

www.cadfamily.com
CNC EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
parts be machined by different NC machines, for example, plates by one machine, drilled parts
by another, etc.
NC file settings
Plates
Plasma cut
Drilled parts
To set up NC files:
1. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files...
2. Click Add to open the NC file settings dialog box, which contains several tabs:
Tab Description More information

Files and part selec- Output format, the profile Defining the output
tion types that machines can format and folder (p.
handle, and maximum 173)
hole diameters
Defining selection
criteria (p. 170)
Holes and cuts Slot conversion options, Defining hole prop-
standard tooling for erties (p. 172)
Peddimat
Defining Peddimat
standard tooling (p.
177)
Hard stamp Hard stamp options Hard stamp proper-
ties (p. 181)
Tekla Structures saves the settings files in the attributes folder under the current model
folder.
See also Pop-mark settings (p. 179)
Defining destination machines for parts (p. 170)
Fittings affect NC data (p. 174)

Defining destination machines for parts
To define the limits of an NC machine:
1. Open the NC file settings dialog box and go to the Files and Part selection tab.
2. In the Selection criteria for parts section, use the Maximum size and Profile type fields
to define the limits of the NC machine, for parts and profile types. Larger parts will be sent
to the next machine.
Tekla Structures uses DSTV standard names for profile types: I, U, L, M, R, B, CC, T, SO. See
also Profile type (p. 171).
Inner corners Use the options in the Holes and cuts tab, Inner corner shape list box to define the shape of
shape the inner contour, which can be radial, tangential or square. Inner contours are always rounded.
Enter a radius for rounding in the Radius field.
See also Creating NC files (p. 172)
Defining selection criteria

Each NC file setting is meant for one NC machine. The selection criteria determine the part types
and maximum sizes the machine is meant to or able to process.
To define the selection criteria:
1. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... The NC Files dialog box appears.
2. Select a setting from the list and click Edit.... If the list is empty, click Add... to create new
settings.
3. In the NC file settings dialog box, define the selection criteria.

www.cadfamily.com
Maximum size
The maximum size options define the maximum length, width, and height of the parts the
machine can handle. Larger parts are sent to other machines.
Profile type
The machine can handle all the profile types which have the option Yes in the Profile type list.
Profile types are named according to the DSTV (p. 174) standard:
DSTV profile type Description

I I profiles
U U and C profiles
L Angle profiles
M Rectangular tubes
R Round bars and tubes
B Plate profiles
CC CC profiles

DSTV profile type Description
T Tee shaped profiles
SO Z profiles and all the other
types of profile
The DTSV standard does not support curved beams, so Tekla Structures
does not support them, either.
Round tubes By default Tekla Structures unwraps round tubes as plate profiles and uses the plate profile type
B in the NC file header data. To change this, use the variable
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC.
Maximum size of holes

The Maximum size of holes list defines how large holes the machine is able to drill. Parts
containing larger holes are sent to other machines. The hole size is connected to material
thickness (or plate thickness). Each row contains the maximum hole diameter and material
thickness. Row 60 45 means that when the material thickness is 45 mm or smaller, holes of a
diameter of 60 mm and smaller will be drilled. The remaining rows serve the same purpose.
Defining hole properties

Open the NC file settings dialog box and go to the Holes and cuts tab. You have the following
options:
Slotted holes Options that define slotted holes:
• Ignore slots: deletes slotted holes
• A single hole in the center of the slot: drills a single hole in the center of the slotted hole
• Four small holes, one at each corner: drills 4 smaller holes, one at each corner
• Internal contours: flame-cuts the slots as internal contours
• Slots: leaves slots as they are.
Maximum hole Holes and slotted holes that are larger than the maximum hole diameter are manufactured as
diameter internal contours.
Maximum size of Use the Maximum size of holes section of the Files and part selection tab to define the
holes maximum hole diameter for different plate thicknesses.
Once you have finished defining NC settings, click OK to save your changes and close the NC
file settings dialog box.
See also Creating NC files (p. 172)
Creating NC files
To create NC files:
If necessary, define the NC file settings. See Setting up NC files (p. 168).
1. Go to the NC files dialog box, or click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to open it.

www.cadfamily.com
2. Select the Create checkboxes in the NC file settings section to indicate which NC file
settings to use.
3. Against the Create files for field, select a checkbox to indicate the parts you want to create
NC files for:
• All parts
• Selected parts
4. Click Create to create the NC files.
Tekla Structures does not create NC files for curved beams.
See also Setting up NC files (p. 168)

Defining the output format and folder

Format Use the options in NC file settings > Files and part selection, File format field to select the
file format. For more information on formats, see:
• DSTV (p. 174)
• DXF (p. 175)
• Peddimat (p. 176)

Folder By default Tekla Structures creates NC files in the current model folder. To change this:
1. Go to the Files and part selection tab.
2. Click the Browse button next to the File location field.
3. In the Set file location dialog box, locate the correct folder. If the folder does not exist, use
the Create New Folder button to create it.
You must select a file in the destination folder to get the folder selected
in the File location field. It does not matter which file you select. If there
are no files in the folder, create one there, for example an empty .txt file.
4. Click OK. Tekla Structures displays the folder path in the File location field.
Relative paths You can also enter a folder name or a relative path directly in the File location field.
The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values of the File
location field, when the variable XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is set to C:\NC.
File location NC files are created to

C:\NC
.\ C:\NC\ModelName
.\MyFiles C:\NC\ModelName\MyFiles
C:\TEMP C:\TEMP

The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values of the File
location field, when the variable XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is NOT set.
File location NC files are created to

model folder
.\ model folder
.\MyFiles model folder\MyFiles
C:\TEMP C:\TEMP

6.2 DSTV
DSTV format is an industrial standard defined by the German Steel Construction Association.
The data for NC output comes from the model. We recommend that you complete detailing and
create drawings prior to producing NC output.
To create DSTV files:
1. Select the parts from which you want to create NC files.
2. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to display the NC files dialog box.
3. Click Add to display the NC file settings dialog box.
4. Go to the File format field on the Files and part selection tab and select DSTV.
5. In the Settings name field, enter a distinctive name for the settings.
6. Click OK to save your settings and close the NC file settings dialog box.
7. Go to the NC File settings section of the NC files dialog box and select the DSTV file
settings you created.
8. Select the Selected parts checkbox.
9. Click Create.
This will create nc1 files for all selected parts and put them in the model folder. The filename
consists of a position number and the extension nc1.
See also Pop-marks (p. 178)
Setting up NC files (p. 168)
Fittings affect NC data

When creating NC files in DSTV format, the method you use to cut the end of the beam affects
beam length in the NC file. The illustration below shows the default length when you have fitting
and line cuts.

www.cadfamily.com
Fitting affects the length
Line cut does not affect length
Line cut
Fitting
The overall length of a beam will be the fitted net length of the beam. This means that Tekla
Structures always takes the fitting into account when calculating beam length. For lines,
polygons, or part cuts, the cut does not affect beam length, but the overall length in the NC/
DSTV file will be the gross (initial modeled) length of the beam.
Shortest length If you want to use the shortest possible length in the NC file, you can change this so that the cut
affects part length:
1. Open the Advanced options dialog and enter 1 in the Value field for variable
XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH in the CNC category.
2. Restart Tekla Structures.
Net and cross If you want to include both net and cross length into NC file header data, set the variable
length XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH.
6.3 DXF
This section explains how to create NC data in 2D DXF format.
Preconditions Before running a DXF conversion, you must first create NC files in DSTV format. For more
information, see DSTV (p. 174).
You can then use a separate Tekla Structures program, dstv2dxf.exe to convert the files to
DXF format. The program converts NC DSTV files to 2D DXF files. Tekla Structures only
writes one side of a part (front, top, back or bottom) to file, so this export format is most suited
to plates.
Topics Converting DSTV files to DXF (p. 176)

Converting DSTV files to DXF
The most convenient way to convert DSTV files to DXF files is to use the macro
Convert_DSTV2DXF, located in Tools > Macros....
You can also use a dstv2dxf converter to convert DSTV files to DXF files.
To start the conversion:
1. Save the *.nc1 file(s) in the dstv2dxf folder.
2. Double-click the suitable dstv2dxf conversion .bat file (for example
tekla_dstv2dxf_metric_conversion.bat) in the TeklaStructures/
14.0/nt/dstv2dxf folder.
3. The converter converts the files to dxf format in the same folder.
If you need to adjust the conversion settings, edit the settings in the file
dstv2dxf.def and restart the conversion.
For more information on settings, see the document DEF File
Description.pdf in the same folder.
6.4 Peddimat
This section explains how to create NC files in Peddimat format. The files you create can be
downloaded straight to the CNC machinery software.
Topics Creating NC files in Peddimat format (p. 176)
Output formats for Peddimat (p. 177)
Setting up NC files (p. 168)
Defining Peddimat standard tooling (p. 177)
Creating NC files in Peddimat format

To create NC files in Peddimat format:
1. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to display the NC files dialog box.
2. Click Add to display the NC file settings dialog box.
3. Go to the File format field on the Files and part selection tab and select the approriate
Peddimat option.
For more information on the Peddimat options, see Output formats for Peddimat (p. 177).
1. In the Settings name field, enter a distinctive name for the file.
3. Go to the NC files dialog box, select the Peddimat file settings you created.
4. Select the All parts checkbox.
5. Click Create.
See also Output formats for Peddimat (p. 177)

www.cadfamily.com
Output formats for Peddimat
To set the Peddimat format, go to NC file settings > File and part selection. This table shows
the available output formats for NC files for Peddimat machines:
Option Description
Peddimat for Windows Supports standard Peddimat for
Windows
Peddimat for Windows (one Supports Peddimat for Windows
cope file) with a single file containing all
copes
Peddimat for Windows (two Peddimat for Windows with two
cope files) cope files. The copes at the right
and left ends of the part are
written to two separate files
Peddimat for Windows (without Peddimat for Windows without
copes) cope files
Peddimat for DOS Supports Peddimat for DOS
See also Creating NC files in Peddimat format (p. 176)

Defining Peddimat standard tooling

You can define standard tooling before creating NC files in Peddimat format. Standard tooling
minimizes the number of tool changes in the workshop.
To define standard Peddimat tooling diameters, go to the Holes and cuts tab in the NC file
settings dialog box.
Example The following example first shows the tooling from Peddimat for Windows, then the settings in
Tekla Structures:
To ensure that the part origin is calculated correctly, even if the part is coped and mitered, select
Calculate part origin without copes on the Holes and cuts tab.

6.5 Pop-marks
Tekla Structures can generate pop-marks in NC files to help position parts that will be manually
welded to the main part. Pop-marks are usually made using a drilling machine.
To include pop-marks in the NC file, you have to define a list of part names to pop-mark in the
Pop-mark settings dialog box. To access the dialog box, select File > Export > CNC > Create
NC Files... > Pop-marks...
You can save the pop-mark settings in a .ncp file, which Tekla Structures saves in the
attributes folder under the current model folder by default. Tekla Structures only creates
pop-marks for parts for which you have defined properties.
The Pop-marking options tab in the Pop-mark settings dialog box contains options for
controlling the settings for marks in the back of parts, and other additional options. For more
information on these settings, see Pop-marking options (p. 180).
To have Tekla Structures create pop-marks when creating NC files, select the check box in NC
files > NC file settings: > Pop-marks.
Pop-marking also affects numbering.

For example, if two parts have different pop-marks, or one part has pop-
marks and the other one does not, Tekla Structures gives the parts
different numbers.
See What affects numbering.
Creating pop-marks
To create pop-marks in an NC file:
1. Define and save the pop-mark settings in the Pop-mark settings (p. 179) dialog box.
2. To display pop-marks in a model view, select Pop-marking options > Show pop-marks
in the model.
3. Create the NC files. Remember to select the Pop-marks checkbox in the NC files dialog
box.
Pop-marks are written in the NC file BO block as 0 mm diameter holes.
Tekla Structures displays thick red lines for each pop-mark pair in the model view which was
last updated.

www.cadfamily.com
Topics Pop-mark settings (p. 179)
Pop-marking options (p. 180)
Pop-mark settings
The Pop-mark settings dialog box includes pop-mark settings that define:
• Which parts are pop-marked
• Where the pop-marks are created
Tekla Structures saves the settings file .ncp in the attributes folder under the current
model folder.
Tekla Structures looks for this file in the current model folder, then uses the standard folder
search order. See Folder search order (p. 94).
You can use wildcards (* ? [ ] ) in the Main part name and Secondary part name fields in the
Pop-mark settings dialog box. For example, HE* matches all parts with a profile name that
begins with the characters "HE". For more information on wildcards, see Using wildcards.
The order of the lines in the dialog box is important. Tekla Structures uses
the match it finds, so you should put the most limiting definition first, and
the most generic one last.
Pop-mark
settings
Option Description
Main part profile The main part profile types to pop-mark. The list
type box contains profile types corresponding to the
DSTV standard.
Main part name The main part profile names to pop-mark. You
can enter several part names separated by
commas.
Sec part profile type Secondary part profile type.
Secondary part Secondary part name. You can enter several part
name names separated by commas.

Option Description
Pop-mark location Defines how the secondary part is projected onto
a main part.
• Left side: The left side of the secondary part
is marked on the main part. The left side is
the side of the secondary part that points in
the negative direction of the main part local
coordinate system.
• Right side: The right side of the secondary
part is marked on the main part.
• Both sides: combines Left side and Right
side.
• Center: Center of the secondary part.
• Left side holes: Marks the main part with

the hole positions on the left side of the
secondary.
• Right side holes: Marks the main part with
the hole positions on the right side of the
secondary.
• Both side holes: combines Left side holes
and Right side holes.
• Middle line: Marks two points on the middle
line of the secondary part x axis.
Edge distance Minimum distance from a pop-mark to the edge
of the main part. Tekla Structures does not create
pop-marks inside this distance. If a pop-mark is
inside the defined edge distance, Tekla Structures
moves it (with the exception of Center).
Move to flange Moves pop-marks to the main part flange.
Secondary pop- Creates pop-marks into secondary parts.
marks
Pop-marking options
Options for Use the options for marks in the back face of parts to set the NC machine to:
marks in the back
• Rotate the part if there are items on the back of it and none on the front.
• Drill the pop-marks through to the back, if there are no other items there. The hole diameter
must also be defined.
• Rotate the part and drill pop-marks through to the back if there are no items on the front but
some in the back or more pop-marks on the back than on the front. The hole diameter must
also be defined.
Other options • No pop-marks on overlapping holes deletes a pop-mark if a hole overlaps it.
• Pop-mark centres of studs adds pop-marks to the center point of studs. Uncheck this
option to prevent studs from being pop-marked.
• Show pop-marks in the model displays pop-marks in model views.

www.cadfamily.com
Examples The following line in the Pop-mark settings dialog box tells Tekla Structures to mark the center
point of all round secondary profiles on a main part, and not to create pop-marks closer than 10
mm to the main part edge.
The following line in the Pop-mark settings dialog box tells Tekla Structures to project the hole
locations in secondary plates onto a main part:
6.6 Hard stamps

Tekla Structures can output DSTV files that include hard stamps for the workshop to apply to
main and secondary parts. Hard stamps are text marks that contain information about parts and
assemblies, for example, project and lot number, phase, or part and assembly position.
Creating hard stamps

To include hard stamps in a DSTV file:
1. In the NC file settings dialog box, go to the Hard stamps tab.
2. Select the checkbox Create hard stamp.
3. In the Available elements list, select the elements to include in the hard stamp.
Example This example shows a hard stamp that contains the elements Phase, Part position, Material, and
Text.
See also For more information on hard stamp settings, see Hard stamp properties (p. 181),
XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP (p. 383) and
XS_HARD_STAMP_BY_ORIENTATION_MARK (p. 345).
Hard stamp properties

Use the options on the Hard stamp tab to define the properties of hard stamps on main and/or
secondary parts, including:
• Information contained in hard stamps (p. 182)
• The order in which the different elements appear

• Text height and case
• Position of hard stamps (p. 182)
• Hard stamps for secondary parts (p. 182)
Information contained in hard stamps

You can include the following information in hard stamps:
Element Description
Project number Adds the project number to the hard stamp.
Lot number Adds the lot number to the hard stamp.
Phase Adds the phase number to the hard stamp.
Part position Prefix and position number of the part
Assembly position Prefix and position number of the assembly
Material The material of the part.
Finish The type of finish.
User-defined attribute Adds a user-defined attribute (user fields 1-4)
to the mark.
Text Opens a dialog box where you can add user-
defined text to the hard stamp.
If you include part position and/or assembly position in the hard stamp, they affect the DSTV
filename as follows:
• Part position: P1.nc1, P2.nc1
• Assembly position: A1.nc1, A2.nc1
• Assembly and part position: A1-P1.nc1, A2-P2.nc1
Position of hard stamps

Use the options in the Position along the part and Position in depth of part list boxes to define
the position of hard stamps on parts. The options are:
• Middle, Middle
• Middle, Left
• Middle, Right
• Bottom, Middle
• Bottom, Left
• Bottom, Right
• Top, Middle
• Top, Left
• Top, Right
Hard stamps for secondary parts

To create hardstamps also for secondary parts, set XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP to TRUE
in Tools > Advanced options > CNC.

www.cadfamily.com
Tekla Structures does not create hard stamps for plates.
6.7 Plate nesting

Tekla Structures Plate Nesting finds the best layout pattern for cutting plates from the available
metal sheets. Tekla Structures Plate Nesting uses DSTV NC files to create the nesting tasks and
the nesting layout. The results are DXF drawings, which you can view using the Result Viewer.
You need to have the Plate Nesting module acquired in your Tekla Structures license entitlement
in order to do plate nesting. The plate nesting functionality is automatically available in Tekla
Structures if acquired.
Phases Plate nesting has following phases:
1. Create NC files. See DSTV (p. 174).
2. Creating nesting tasks (p. 183)
3. Editing nesting tasks (p. 183)
4. Nesting tasks (p. 185)
5. Viewing nesting results (p. 186)
Creating nesting tasks

First you need to create NC files of the parts to nest. For more information, see DSTV (p. 174).
Then follow these steps:
1. Click File > Export > CNC > Define Nesting Tasks... to display the Tekla Structures Plate
Nesting - DSTV2TASK dialog box.
2. Set DSTV Directory to point to the NC files folder.
3. Enter a name for the task group.
4. Select the NC files you want to nest from the upper list, then click Add.
5. Click Start.
6. Tekla Structures prompts you ...directory does not exist. This is just for information.
Answer OK to these prompts.
7. To preview the parts, highlight them on the Created Parts list.
8. Close the dialog box.
Tekla Structures groups the selected NC files into nesting tasks. Each task consists of parts with
the same material thickness and grade.
Next step Editing nesting tasks (p. 183)
Editing nesting tasks

This is the second phase in plate nesting, where you set the manufacturing information or nesting
tasks.

1. Select File > Export > CNC > Edit Nesting Tasks to display the Tekla Structures Plate
Nesting - TaskEdit dialog box.
2. Click Browse to select the task.
3. Enter additional manufacturing information.
4. To define the stock required, click Define Stocks. For more information, see Defining
stocks (p. 184).
5. To preview the plates in the task, click Define Parts.
6. To save the settings, click Save.
7. Click Yes, when Tekla Structures prompts you that the task file already exists. The Save
Task Information dialog box appears.
8. Click OK to save the selected settings for the other tasks in the group.
Next step Nesting tasks (p. 185)
Task properties
The following illustration shows cutting cap and edge allowances:
Cutting Cap defines the cutting gap between nested parts to allow for tool size.
Edge allowance defines the clearance around the edge of a stock sheet to allow for trimming or
clamping.
Left
Cutting Cap
Bottom
Bridge width
Defining stocks
You need to define the stock to use for nesting tasks. See Editing nesting tasks (p. 183). The
stock sheet information includes the number of distinct stocks, the sheet size, and quantity.
1. Click Define stock to display the Stock sheet specification dialog box.
This is where you define the stock sheet information, including the number of distinct
stocks. You also need to prioritize stock sizes. See also Stock properties (p. 185).

www.cadfamily.com
2. To define which stock to use, select a stock from the Available Stocks list, then click Add
to display the Stock specification - Add dialog box.
3. Set the stock properties and click OK. The stock appears in the Selected Stocks list.
4. After selecting the stock you require, click OK to return to the TaskEdit dialog box.
Stock properties
You can define the following properties for stock:
• Width and Length
The width and length of the stock sheet. In the imperial version of Tekla Structures, you can
either enter feet and inches, or just inches.
• Quantity
Quantity of stock sheets of a particular size to use for the task. You can use a maximum of
9999 for each stock size.
• Stretchable
You can use this option for tasks nesting more than one part. For stock sheets in reels or
rolls, Tekla Structures Plate Nesting can stretch the sheet length to best fit all the parts.
• Priority
Defines the order in which Tekla Structures Plate Nesting uses the stock sheets. 1 has the
highest priority, 99 has the lowest.
Nesting tasks
After you create tasks and edit the plates, you can run the nesting program. In this phase, Tekla
Structures Plate Nesting optimizes the layout of plates on the stock sheets and saves the layout
in DXF files.
1. Click File > CNC > Plate Nesting > Nesting… to display the Tekla Structures Plate
Nesting - NestPRO dialog box.
2. Select the tasks to nest, then click Add.
3. Click Start to start the nesting process.
4. When the nesting process ends, close the dialog box.

Error If you get the error messages Not all shapes are nested. Insufficient stock, you need to create
the required stock and run the nesting again, because the available stock was not large enough.
Next step Viewing nesting results (p. 186)
Viewing nesting results

To view the nesting process results you need to start the Result viewer:
1. Click File > Export > CNC > View Nesting Resultsto display the DWG Viewer window.
2. Click File > Open.
3. Select the task file and click OK.
Zoom in or out in Result viewer window using the Ctrl key and the mouse
wheel.

www.cadfamily.com
7 Import and export
Introduction Tekla Structures includes several tools you can use to import and export models and the
information they contain. You can:
• Import data from other software and use it to create models and reports.
• Export data from Tekla Structures to use in manufacturing information systems and
structural analysis programs.
In this chapter This chapter explains how to import and export data in Tekla Structures, and describes the
formats and tools available. The first section covers the basics of import and export. The final
two sections give more details about the import and export options.
Assumed You should have some experience of modeling in Tekla Structures.
background
• Import and export basics (p. 187)
• Conversion files (p. 192)
• Importing models (p. 194)
• Exporting files (p. 219)
• Reference models (p. 271)
• Tekla WebViewer (p. 278)
7.1 Import and export basics

This section gives you an overview of importing and exporting data in Tekla Structures, as well
as step-by-step instructions. It includes the different import and export formats available in
Tekla Structures. It also describes the conversion files you can use to import profiles and
materials.
Topics Using import and export (p. 188)
Available formats (p. 188)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com Import and export
Re-importing a model (p. 197)
Revision control options (p. 197)
Creating reports of import (p. 198)
Using import and export

You can use import and export in Tekla Structures for several purposes:
• Import 2D or 3D models created by other software, then detail them using Tekla Structures.
Once detailing is complete, export the model and return it to the architect or engineer for
review.
• Export Tekla Structures models to use in analysis and design (several formats). Then import
the design and analysis results back to the Tekla Structures model.
• Export data for use in the fabrication phase:
• You can export CNC data (Computer Numerical Control) for use by automated cutting,
boring and welding machinery,
• MIS (Manufacturing Information Systems) so that fabricators can track project
progress.
Available formats
The following tables list many of the different software and formats you can use in Tekla
Structures to import and export data.
Locate the software in the first column (Software). Read across the columns to locate import
and export tools (for example, DWG/DXF, FEM). Each cell displays the import and export
formats (for example, Calma, XML, SDNF).
You may also be able to exchange data with software not listed here.
Importing into Tekla Structures
Import tool
–>
DWG/
Software DXF FEM CIMsteel CAD Other
ArchiCAD 2D, 3D XML
AutoCAD 2D, 3D
BUS BUS
Cadmatic 2D, 3D
Calma Calma
ESA Prima DSTV
WIN
ETABS CIS2 SDNF
PDMS
(only
straight
profiles)

www.cadfamily.com
Import and export EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
Import tool
–>
DWG/
FabTrol CIS2 FabTrol
XML,
SteelFab
FrameWorks SDNF DGN (as
Reference
models (p.
271))
GT Strudl CIS2 MicasPlus
IFC schema IFC2X,
edition IFC2X2,
IFC2X3 (as
Reference
models (p.
271))
MicasPlus MicasPlus
MicroStation DGN (as
Reference
models (p.
271))
ModelDraft
Multiframe 2D, 3D
Nastran STAAD
PDMS SDNF DGN (as
Reference
models (p.
271))
PDS DGN (as
Reference
models (p.
271))
Plantview Plantview
PowerFrame DSTV
RAMSteel CIS2
Revit IFC 2X3
ROBOT DSTV CIS2
RSTAB 2D, 3D DSTV STP
SACS SACS SDNF
SAP 2000 SDNF
PDMS
(only
straight
profiles)
SDS/2 CIS2 SDNF
SESAM SACS
S-frame 2D, 3D S-frame

Import tool
–>
DWG/
SAP2000 SDNF
SmartPlant CIS2 DGN (as
Reference
models (p.
271))
SPACE SDNF
GASS
Speedikon HLI
STAAD 2D, 3D STAAD
Stan 3d Stan 3d
StruCad SDNF
Structural for DGN (as
MicroStation Reference
TriForma models (p.
271))
TriForma CIS2
Exporting from Tekla Structures
Export tool
–>
DWG/
ArchiCAD 2D, 3D XML
AutoCAD 2D, 3D
Cadmatic XML
Calma Calma
FabTrol CIS2 MIS
(Manufac-
turing)
FrameWorks CIS2
Plus
EJE MIS
EPC MIS
ETABS FEM CIS2 SDNF
PDMS (only
straight
profiles)
ESA Prima DSTV
WIN
Eureka LPM CIS1 & 2
Fabtrol CIS2
FrameWorks CIS1 & 2 SDNF, PML 3D DGN
GT Strudl STAAD

www.cadfamily.com
Export tool
–>
DWG/
IFC schema IFC2X,
edition IFC2X2,
IFC2X3
MicroSAS MicroSAS
MicroStation 3D DGN
ModelDraft PML
Multiframe 2D, 3D
Nastran STAAD
PDS SDNF DGN
PDMS (only
straight
profiles with
end codes)
PDMS SDNF
Plantview Plantview
PowerFrame DSTV
RAM CIS2
Revit IFC 2X3
ROBOT DSTV
RSTAB 2D, 3D DSTV
SAP 2000 CIS2 SDNF
PDMS (only
straight
profiles)
SCIA SCIA
SDS/2 CIS2
SmartPlant CIS2 DGN
SPACE SDNF
GASS
Speedikon HLI
STAAD 2D, 3D STAAD
Steel 2000 MIS
Steelcad 2D, 3D SDNF
StruCad SDNF
Structural for 3D DGN
MicroStation
TriForma
TriForma CIS2

7.2 Conversion files
About conversion Conversion files map Tekla Structures profile and material names with names used in other
files software. Conversion files are simple text files, containing the Tekla Structures name in the first
column, and the name used in the other software package in the second column. Columns are
separated by a space. All parametric profiles must be entered in the profile conversion file.
You can use the same conversion file both when importing and exporting models. You can
specify the location of conversion files in most of the import and export tools.
• If you leave the field blank, Tekla Structures looks for the conversion file defined by the
variable XS_PROFDB, in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations.
• If you enter a conversion file name without a path, Tekla Structures searches for the file in
the current model folder.
Tekla Structures includes several conversion files in the standard installation, and you can also
create your own. See Creating conversion files (p. 192). Conversion files are located in the
\environments\environment\profil folder. All conversion files have the extension
cnv.
Converting twin profiles

Tekla Structures also includes twin profile conversion files. Tekla Structures reads the twin
profile conversion file before the profile conversion file, so you should include the profiles from
the original model in the import.
The twin profile conversion file is a text file containing the profile prefix (characters only) and
the distance between the profiles in mm, separated by a space character. Tekla Structures
converts all profiles with the specified prefix to twin profiles.
Additional Creating conversion files (p. 192)
information
Locating conversion files (p. 193)
Sample conversion files (p. 193)
Troubleshooting (p. 193)
Importing models (p. 194)
Creating conversion files

You can also create your own conversion files.
To create a new conversion file:
1. Open an existing conversion file using any text editor (e.g. Wordpad). See Locating
conversion files (p. 193).

www.cadfamily.com
2. Use Save as to give the file a new name.
3. Edit the file, entering profile names recognized by Tekla Structures in the first column, and
the corresponding name recognized by the other software in the second column. See
Sample conversion files (p. 193).
Locating conversion files

Standard conversion files are located in the profil folder for the environment you are using
(for example, \environments\usimp\profil). Tekla Structures searches for profile
conversion files:
• In the current model folder
• Using the path indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in Tools > Options > Advanced
Options... > File Locations.
Sample conversion files

Here are some sample conversion files for reference:
! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> SDNF

!
! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same
! as Tekla Structures-name.
! Tekla Structures-nameConverted-name
C10X15.3C10X15.3
C10X20C10X20
C10X25C10X25
C10X30C10X30
C12X20.7C12X20.7
C12X25C12X25
C12X30C12X30
C15X33.9C15X33.9
C15X40C15X40
C15X50C15X50
C3X4.1 C3X4.1
! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> DSTV

!
! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same
! as Tekla Structures-name.
! Tekla Structures-name Converted-name
C10X15.3 C10X15.3
C10X20 C10X20
C10X25 C10X25
C10X30 C10X30
C12X20.7 C12X20.7
C12X25 C12X25
Troubleshooting
If you have problems importing a model, check the following:

• Are there any error messages in the Tekla Structures log file?
• Is the input file located in the current model folder?
• Are there are blank material definitions (" ", empty quotation marks) in your input file?
• In your input file, see if profile position strings contain a space character (e.g. "Hand Rail"
or "Thread 13").
Examples Errors and corrections are highlighted in the following examples.
Incorrect input file

00100782 4 0 2 "brace" "Tread 4" 1
"TREAD4.5" "" 0.000000 0 0
0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 16.250000 13.154267 3.857143
15.500000 13.154267 3.857143 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Correct input file

00100782 4 0 2 "brace" "Tread_4" 1
"TREAD4.5" "A36" 0.000000 0 0
0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 16.250000 13.154267 3.857143
15.500000 13.154267 3.857143 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7.3 Importing models

This section explains the basics of how to import a model created by a different system into
Tekla Structures. It also contains details of the specific information you need to include for each
type of import file.
Topics Import tools (p. 194)
Overview of importing models (p. 195)
Re-importing a model (p. 197)
Creating reports of import (p. 198)
Import tools
Use the following tools to import different file types into Tekla Structures:
• Importing DWG/DXF files (p. 199)
• FEM import (p. 202)
• CAD import (p. 200)
• CIS import (p. 199) (CIMsteel)
• Steelfab import (p. 215)
• Fabtrol XML import (p. 215)

www.cadfamily.com
• S-Frame import (p. 216)
• MicasPlus import (p. 216)
• Eureka LPM import (p. 216)
• Model dump import (p. 206)
• ASCII import (p. 206)
• ASCII format description
• Attribute import (p. 211)
Overview of importing models

These steps explain the basics of how to import a model into Tekla Structures. You will also
need to refer to other sections for information specific to a particular import type. See also
Import tools (p. 194).
To import a model:
1. Open Tekla Structures and create a new model.
2. Click File > Import.
3. Select any of the following options FEM, CIMSteel, CAD, or Other, to open the New import
model dialog box.
4. Select the import type in the Type list box. See also Re-importing a model (p. 197).
5. Enter a name for the import model in the Name field. The default name is import model.
Tekla Structures uses the model name for revision control. For more information, see
Revision control options (p. 197).
6. Click Properties... to open a dialog box where you can define the settings for the import
file type you selected.
7. On the Parameters tab, enter a file name in the Input file field, or use the browse (...) button
to set the path to the file.
8. Enter values in the Origin fields if you want to import the file to a specific origin.
9. Click OK to return to the New import model dialog box.
Finishing the import

To complete the import:
1. Click OK to open the Import models dialog box.

2. Select the model to import.
3. Click Import.
4. Tekla Structures displays the Import model info dialog box. Select which version of parts
to import.
5. Click Accept all.

6. Tekla Structures prompts Do you want to save the import model for subsequent
imports? Click Yes.
7. Tekla Structures displays the import model in a model view.

www.cadfamily.com
Re-importing a model
If you need to re-import a model:
Follow steps 1 to 4 in Overview of importing models (p. 195), but enter a new name in the
Name field. If you use the same name as in the original import, Tekla Structures generates the
warning Illegal name for import model. Tekla Structures uses this name to track revisions in
the model. See also Revision control options (p. 197).
Revision control options

You have the following options to specify the actions Tekla Structures takes when importing
changed objects:

• The left-hand column, Previous plan, lists the state of objects in your model, compared
with the state of objects in the file to be imported. They can be New, Modified, Deleted, or
Same.
• Tekla Structures compares the state of objects being imported with those in your model.
They can be Not in model, Different, or Same.
• Use the list boxes in the rows under Not in model, Different, or Same to specify the actions
to take when importing changed objects. The options are No action, Copy, Modify, or
Delete.
You can only use Delete to delete objects that have been deleted from your model, not the
imported model.
Creating reports of import

Some of the import tools give you the option to create a report of the import. By default, Tekla
Structures does not create reports when you import files. You specify the following information
using the Report tab:
Field Description
Create report Select Yes to create a report of the imported model
objects.
Display report Select Yes to display the report file in the List dialog
box.
Report template Enter the path of the report template, or use the browse
(...) button to locate it.
Report file name Enter the path for the report file, or use the browse (...)
button to locate it.

www.cadfamily.com
Importing DWG/DXF files
The DWG/DXF import tools import 3D or 2D models, in DXF or DWG. You can import the file
as parts and plates, or reference lines.
To import DWG/DXF files, click File > Import > DWG/DXF....
You will need to include the following additional information about the import file:
• Create:
• Reference lines displays parts in the model using their reference lines in the original
model.
• Parts displays the full profile of parts in the original model, based on the profile sizes
in the Beam profile and Plate profile fields. You can only use metric profiles with this
option.
• Check Use 2D import to import a two dimensional representation of the original model.
This is useful when you use the reference line option. Leave Use 2D import blank to import
the model in 3D.
CIS import
See Overview of importing models (p. 195) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures.
In the New import model dialog box, select CIS Analyse model import from the Type list box.
Use the following fields on the Parameters tab to specify CIS information when importing files:
Field Description
Model type Analysis or Design model.
CIS version Use to select the CIS version:
• CIS/1 imports files compatible with the
CIMsteel LPM4DEP1 schema declaration.
• CIS/2 imports files compatible with the
CIMsteel CIS/2
(STRUCTURAL_FRAME_SCHEMA) schema
declaration.
Combine members Defines whether or not the elements of a single part
in the CIS file are combined to form another part in
Tekla Structures. For example, if a beam in a CIS
file is divided into more than one element, and you
select Yes, the elements are combined to form one
beam in the model. Using No means every element
of the beam in the CIS file forms a single beam in
the model.
Max length for Only applied if you select Yes in the Combine
combining members list box. Defines the maximum length for
combining the elements in the CIS file. Elements
are combined into one part only if their combined
length is less than this value.

Field Description
Ignore offset CIS/1 and CIS/2 analysis models can include
member offsets (nodes are not exactly at the beam’s
end points). With the default Yes, Tekla Structures
uses these offsets to locate the physical members.
With No, Tekla Structures determines the location
using the node locations.
Ignore forces Use to define how forces are imported. With No ,
Tekla Structures imports absolute values of
maximum forces to parts’ user-defined attributes
Shear, Tension and Moment. With Yes, Tekla
Structures does not import forces.
ETABS To import from or export to ETABS software, you need to add two lines to the material
conversion file for each Tekla Structures material grade. The first line is for exports, the second
for imports. This example shows the lines needed for Tekla Structures material grade A36.
A36 S\MAT\ASTM\GRADE36\ASTM_A36\1994
A36 steel_yield_strength_36.00
CAD import
The CAD import tool supports several different formats to import models. See CAD import file
types (p. 200).
Tekla Structures imports a maximum of 10,000 parts using this option. If the number of parts
exceeds this, Tekla Structures displays a warning and does not import the model.
In addition to following the steps in Overview of importing models (p. 195), you will need to
include the following information about the import file:
CAD specific information

Use the Plantview tab to select a material grade.
Creating log files

In CAD import, the SDNF tab gives you the option to create a log file. If the import fails,
examine the log file to find out why. The options in the Create log file list box are:
• Create writes a new log file, and deletes the previous log file, each time you import the
model.
• Append (default) adds the log information at the end of the existing log file.
You can also decide how the log file is displayed:

• With an external viewer (e.g. Notepad).
• Not viewed.
• In a dialog box. (This creates a separate list dialog box in which the file can only be viewed.)
CAD import file types

You can import the following file types into Tekla Structures, using the CAD import tool.

www.cadfamily.com
Option Imports from
SDNF Several different CAD systems. See SDNF
specific options (p. 201).
Steel Detailing Neutral File
Calma Calma plant design system
HLI IEZ AG Speedikon software
High Level Interface
Plantview Plantview design system
SDNF (PDMS) Cadcentre 3D plant design software
Plant Design Management
System
XML ArchiCAD modeling system
SDNF specific options

The SDNF tab contains the following options for SDNF imports:
Field Description
Part Pos_No Enter a prefix and a start position number.
Relates to Position number type below.
Apply cuts and fittings Yes (default) applies cuts and fittings in the
import.
Consider offsets Use No (default) to position part creation
points at part end points; Yes creates offsets.
SDNF log files Creates the log file SDNF_import.log in
the current model folder. See also Creating
log files (p. 200).
Position number type The SDNF file contains identifiers, which
can be included in a part’s user-defined
attributes, or as position numbers. You have
the following options:
• Part position
The identifier becomes the part’s posi-
tion number. Do not use the Part
Pos_No fields with this option.
• Universal ID
The identifier becomes a user-defined
attribute for the part.
To make user-defined attributes visible, you
need to add them to the objects.inp file.
For more information on defining attributes
in objects.inp, see Adding properties
(p. 98).

If you want to import information, which Tekla Structures parts do not
have, you can use the SDNF extension line in the SDNF file to be
imported, and the REVISION_NUMBER user-defined attribute in Tekla
Structures.
FEM import
The FEM (Finite Element Method) import tool supports several formats and provides several
options for importing models. See Overview of importing models (p. 195) for how to import
the model into Tekla Structures.
In the New import model dialog box, select FEM Import from the Type list box.
FEM specific information

The FEM import formats are listed in the table below. You will need to include the following
information for FEM imports:
• Use Part to enter the part position and start number for the model import.
• Use Assembly to enter the assembly position and start number for the model import.
• To combine several elements in the FEM model into one part in Tekla Structures, set
Combine members to Yes. For example, if a beam in an FEM model consists of more than
one element, Tekla Structures combines the elements to form one beam in the Tekla
Structures model. With the option NoTekla Structures creates a beam for each element in
the FEM model.
• Use Maximum length to define the maximum length for combining parts. Tekla Structures
combines elements into one part only if their combined length is less than the value you
enter here.
FEM import file types

Use the following table to select the type of file to import:
Use to import models

File type created in More information
DSTV DSTV format DSTV files (p. 203)
(Deutsche Stahlbau- Yield stress in FEM
Verband) import (p. 205)
SACS SACS modeling and anal- Yield stress in FEM
ysis software. import (p. 205)
S-Frame S-Frame modeling and S-Frame import (p.
analysis software. 216)
Monorail Monorail system
Staad STAAD modeling and STAAD files (p. 204)
analysis system
(Structural Analysis
And Design)
Stan 3d Stan 3d analysis software Stan 3d files (p. 204)
Bus BUS 2.5 analysis soft- Bus import (p. 205)
ware

www.cadfamily.com
Only the options relevant to the selected type have any effect on the
imported model.
DSTV files
This FEM import tool imports models in the DSTV format. See basic information on FEM
import (p. 202).
Fill in the following information if you have selected the DSTV import type on the Parameters
tab:
• On the DSTV tab, select the DSTV version to import.
• If the DSTV file to be imported contains a static and/or a CAD model, you can choose
which one to import:
Answering Yes to Import static elements imports the static model.
Answering Yes to Import other elements imports the CAD model. For more information,
see Model dump import (p. 206).
About DSTV
There are three different sub-model types in DSTV:
• Static models contain general data (profiles, materials, grid lines) and static data (model,
restraints, results).
• CAD models contain general data (profiles, materials, grid lines) and CAD data (elements,
eccentricity).
• NC3D model contains general data (profiles, materials, grid lines), CAD data (elements,
eccentricity), and construction data (holes, chamfers).
Sub-models contain four different data levels:
Static data
General data
CAD data
Construction data
NC 3D model

CAD model
Static model
Different programs produce different DSTV files. For example, the DSTV file produced by
RSTAB static software only contains a static model.
Tekla Structures exports either the static model (CROSS_SECTION), or the CAD model
(MEMBER_LOCATION).
STAAD files
This FEM import tool imports steel structures from the STAAD modeling and analysis system.
See basic information on FEM import (p. 202).
Fill in the following information if you have selected the Staad import type on the Parameters
tab:
• On the Staad tab, enter a material grade, or use the browse (...) button to locate a grade.
Tekla Structures supports the following STAAD table type specifications:
• ST (single section from the standard built-in tables)
• ST PIPE (parametric)
• ST TUBE (parametric)
• RA (single angle with reverse Y_Z axes)
• D (double channel)
• LD (long leg, double angle)
• SD (short leg, double angle)
• TC (beams with top cover plates)
• BC (beams with bottom cover plate)
• TB (beams with top and bottom cover plates)

You can import the types CM and T, user-provided steel table types (UPT), and other non-
standard profiles, if you have defined them in the profile conversion file. You must use the
underline character in the STAAD name (e.g. UPT_1_W10X49). Tekla Structures
automatically converts twin profiles in this import routine.
To make a STAAD input file compatible with the Tekla Structures

STAAD import, in STAAD, use the option to save the input file using the
option Joint coordinate format (Single). This creates a line for each
coordinate in the input file.
Stan 3d files
This FEM import tool imports steel structures from the Stan 3d analysis software. See basic
information on FEM import (p. 202).
Fill in the following information if you have selected the Stan 3d import type on the Parameters
tab:

www.cadfamily.com
• Before importing Stan 3d models, set the work plane orientation to global in Tekla
Structures.
• Define the profile conversion file (prfexp_stan_3d.cnv) in the Conversion tab. You
have two options for mapping profile information:
• Map section data (for example C1, FG, G1) to Tekla Structures profiles in the
conversion file.
• Add full profile information in the comment field in the Stan 3d model. Then map the
comment to Tekla Structures profiles in the conversion file.
Tekla Structures looks at the comment field first. If it is empty or missing,

Tekla Structures uses the section data.
• On the Parts tab, enter the part position and start number for the model import.
• On the Stan 3d tab, enter the material for all imported members in the Material field.
• Specify the scale of the import model. You can import Stan 3d without specifying the scale,
as long as both the Tekla Structures model and the import are in millimeters. If the Stan 3d
file is in millimeters, use a scale of 1. If the Stan 3d file is in meters, use a scale of 1000.
• The default mapping for imports is:
• Stan 3d’s Member Type to Tekla Structures’s Class.

• Stan 3d’s Section Name to Tekla Structures’s user-defined attribute Prelim mark.
• Tekla Structures displays the number of parts not imported due to missing conversion
information in the application window.
Bus import
This FEM import tool imports basic steel structures from the BUS 2.5 analysis software input
file. See basic information on FEM import (p. 202).
On the Parameters tab, select the Bus import type, and then fill in the following information:
• On the Conversion tab, enter the name of the profile and material conversion files
(prf_expbus.cnv and mat_expbus.cnv) , or use the browse (...) button to locate
them.
• On the Parameters tab, enter the name of the input file (or use the browse (...) button to
locate it), and the X, Y, and Z values.
• On the Bus tab, enter the position number, material, name, and class of the parts to import.
Use Beams behind plane to indicate the position of girders and cantilevers. The option Yes
aligns the tops of all beams at the floor level.
Yield stress in FEM import

The Default yield stress limit field is used for SACS import file.
The Default material when yield stress < limit field is used for SACS import file. Define the
material to use if yield stress is less than the limit.

• Use the Default material when yield stress >= limit for SACS or DSTV import files. For
SACS, this field defines the material to use if yield stress is greater than, or equal to, the
limit.
• For DSTV you can enter the material grade here, if it is not contained in the import file.
Model dump import

The import model dump tool reads an ASCII file of a model dump to create a new model in Tekla
Structures, including any views and drawings.
When to use If you have fatal problems with the model (e.g. cannot save the model, or cannot delete ghost
parts), using a model dump is one way of saving your work.
Steps To import a model dump:
1. Open Tekla Structures and create a new model.
2. Copy the model dump file (e.g. model.dmp) from an existing model folder into the new
model folder.
3. Click File > Import > Model dump.
4. Save and close the model, then reopen it to see the model.
You can only import a model dump into a newly-created model. A model
dump can only be imported once into one model. You can import the
same model dump into several new models.
Do not use import model dumps in multi-user mode.
See also Exporting a model dump (p. 237).
ASCII import
This tool imports a model in ASCII format (American Standard Code for Information
Interchange). Some plant design systems export ASCII files (e.g. ModelDraft, PDS, PDMS).
Steps To import an ASCII model:
1. Create a new model in Tekla Structures.
2. Create a new 3D view.
3. Copy the ASCII file into the model folder.
4. Name the file import.asc.
5. Select File > Import > ASCII. Tekla Structures displays the main members created from the
ASCII file in the model.
See also ASCII format description (p. 206)
ASCII format description

Profiles and polygon plates can be exported and imported using the ASCII format described in
this section.
Each part is described by 8 lines. These lines are repeated for each part to be transferred. Units
are always in millimeters, blanks are used as separator. Below is an example of a beam part
description:

www.cadfamily.com
import.asc
4169 HEA300 1
290.000000 8.500000 300.000000 14.000000 300.000000
14.000000
A/6 BEAM
S235JR S235JR
0.000000
16.500000 24000.000000 4855.000000
6000.000000 24000.000000 4855.000000
16.500000 24000.000000 5855.000000
The lines contain the following information:

www.cadfamily.com
Line Description
Line 1 4169 HEA300 1 = ID PROFILE TYPE
• ID 4169: Unique ID (integer).
• PROFILE HEA300: Profile name (string).
• TYPE 1: Profile type (integer)

The available profile types are:
• 0 = free cross section (can be used for special profiles
which are not in the database)
• 1 = I profiles
• 2 = Welded hollow core profiles (HK, HQ)
• 3 = U profiles
• 4 = L profiles
• 5 = Round bars
• 6 = Round tubes
• 7 = Rectangular hollow core sections (RHS, P)
• 8 = T profiles
• 9 = Rectangular bars (FL, PL)
• 10 = Z profiles
• 11 = C profiles
• 12 = Omega profiles
• 13 = Sigma profiles
• 14 = Rail profile
• 16 = Reinforcement bars (DH)

Line Description
Line 2 The contents of line 2 depend on the part profile:
• Polygon plates:
N_POINTS COORDINATES.
N_POINTS: For profiles of type 0.
COORDINATES: Number of the corner points (integer).
The X and Y coordinates of the plate corners (floating). Rota-
tion direction is clockwise. Coordinates follow the global
coordinate system. Z coordinates are taken from the center
line in the plate thickness direction.
Note: line 2 can be divided into several rows in the file.
• Profiles:
For profile types 1-16, the line includes the physical dimen-
sions of the cross section.
HEIGHT S W1 T1 W2 T2: 290.000000 8.500000
300.000000 14.000000 300.000000 14.000000
• HEIGHT 290.000000: Height of the cross section
• S 8.500000: Web thickness.
• W1 300.000000: Width of the upper flange.
• T1 14.000000: Thickness of the upper flange.
• W2 300.000000: Width of the lower flange.
• T2 14.000000: Thickness of the lower flange.

Line 3 A/6 BEAM = MARK NAME
• MARK A/6: Position mark of the part (string).
• NAME BEAM: Part name (string).
Line 4 S235JR S235JR = MATERIAL
Material of the part (string).
Line 5 0.000000 = ROTATION
Rotation angle (degrees) around the local x-axis of the beam.
Line 6 16.500000 24000.000000 4855.000000 = X1 Y1 Z1
Coordinates of the beam starting point. Z coordinates are
center-line coordinates.
Line 7 6000.000000 24000.000000 4855.000000 = X2 Y2 Z2
Coordinates of the beam end point. Z-coordinates are center-
line coordinates.
Line 8 16.500000 24000.000000 5855.000000 = X3 Y3 Z3
Direction vector showing the direction of the local z-axis.

www.cadfamily.com
Attribute import
Use File > Import > Attributes to import user-defined attribute values into a model from a
comma- or tab-delimited text file. For example, you might import a list of manufactured or
checked assemblies.
The file to import can be:
• Exported from other software
• Created manually using a standard text editor
• A simple Tekla Structures report containing the part ID’s and user-defined attributes.
See About input files (p. 212) for more information on the import file.
You can import user-defined attribute values into the entire model or drawing, or into a selected
area of the model.
To save an Excel spreadsheet to a tab-delimited text file, use the Save As

command in Excel.
Steps To import user-defined attributes values:

1. Copy the text file that you want to import into the model folder.
2. If you only want to import user-defined attributes into a selected area of the Tekla Structures
model, select an area in the model now.
3. Click File > Import > Attributes to open the Import Attributes dialog box:
4. Click the Browse button next to the Input File field to locate the file to import.
5. Select an option in the Input scope list box. The options are:

Option Description
Default Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attribute
Entire values of objects in the input file to matching objects
model in the model.
Selection Tekla Structures only assigns the user-defined attribute

only values of objects in the input file to matching objects
in the selected area of the model.
Only use this option to import attributes into models.
Do not use for drawings.
6. Select an option in the Create log file list box. The options are:
Option Description
Create Creates a new log file named
attribute_import.log in the current model
folder each time you use File > Import > Attributes.
This overwrites any previous attribute import log files.
Append Adds log entries to the attribute_import.log
file in the current model folder each time you use File
> Import > Attributes. If the log file does not exist,
Tekla Structures creates it.
No Does not create a log file.
7. Select an option in the Display log file list box. The options are:
Option Description
No Does not display the log file.
On dialog Displays the log file in a separate window. Click an
object ID in the log file to have Tekla Structures high-
light the part in the model.
8. Click Create to import the file.
About input files

Input files are comma or tab-delimited text files. They contain the names and values of the user-
defined attributes to import into the Tekla Structures model.
In the input file, the column headings must contain the names of properties and user-defined
attributes in model objects and drawings. The remaining rows contain the values of the
properties and user-defined attributes. See Example input file for parts (p. 214).
The user-defined attributes you can include in an input file are defined in
the file import_macro_data_types.dat. See Data types file (p.
214) for more information.

www.cadfamily.com
You must include at least one key field as a column heading. Key fields are drawing or model
object properties. Tekla Structures uses these key fields to identify the model objects or
drawings it will assign the user-defined attributes to.
The key fields for model objects are:
Key field Example Action

ID 131 Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined
attributes in this row in the input file to the
model object that has an ID value of 131.
ASSEMBLY_POS A3 Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined
or
assembly that has an ASSEMBLY_POS
MARK value of A3
Repeat this line for each assembly you want
to include.
PHASE 2 Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined
assembly that has a PHASE value of 2.
You must also use ASSEMBLY_POS as a key
field with this option.
The key fields for drawings are:
Key field Example Action

TYPE NAME A D4 Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined
drawing that has a TYPE value of A and a
MARK value of D4
Use both key fields in the input file.
To have Tekla Structures ignore an entry in a row, replace the value with
the word null. Leaving the entry blank will cause errors.
Example input file for drawings

TYPE and NAME are the key fields in this input file. Tekla Structures adds a value for the user-
defined attribute User field 4 to drawings with values that match those listed in the TYPE
and NAME columns.
For example, a drawing with the TYPE A (assembly drawing) and NAME B.2 gets the value 4 in
the User field 4.

attributes.txt
TYPE NAME DRAWING_USERFIELD_4
A B.1 3
A B.2 4
A C.1 1
A C.2 2
Example input file for parts

ASSEMBLY_POS and PHASE are the key field in this input file. Tekla Structures adds several
user-defined attributes to the assemblies with values that match those listed in the
ASSEMBLY_POS and PHASE columns. For example, an assembly with the ASSEMBLY_POS
(assembly number) of B5 in phase 1 gets the following user-defined attributes:
• STATUS: 3
• USER_PHASE: 6
• USER_ISSUE: 3/25/2003
attributes.txt
ASSEMBLY_POS PHASE STATUS USER_PHASE USER_ISSUE
B1 1 7 3 3/25/2003
B2 1 7 3 3/25/2003
B3 1 7 3 3/25/2003
B4 1 7 5 3/25/2003
B5 1 3 6 3/25/2003
B1 1 3 5 3/26/2003
B2 2 3 4 3/26/2003
This input file contains repeat entries for B1. In this case, Tekla Structures writes the message
Duplicate entry in input file in the log file and does not overwrite user-defined attributes that
occur earlier in the file with those that occur later. For example, at the end of the attribute import,
B1 will have the following user-defined attributes:
• STATUS: 7
• USER_PHASE: 3
• USER_ISSUE: 3/25/2003
Data types file

The ..\environments\*your
environment*\system\import_macro_data_types.dat file is a simple text file
listing the user-defined attributes that you can include in an input file.
Edit the file using any standard text editor. You can:
• Change any of the user-defined attributes that are not key fields
• Add user-defined attributes as STRING, INT, FLOAT, or DATE variable types
The file contains the following columns, separated by commas or tabs:
VARIABLE_NAME, VARIABLE_TYPE, CONVERSION_FACTOR, COMMENT
Tekla Structures uses CONVERSION_FACTOR to convert imperial values

to metric. Tekla Structures only uses this value in Imperial environments.
We recommend that you check the FLOAT values to avoid conversion
factor errors.

www.cadfamily.com
Tekla Structures treats rows starting with double forward slash characters // as comments and
ignores them when reading the file. Here is a sample section of the
import_macro_data_types.dat file:
Variable name
Variable type
Conversion factor
Comment
Comment
Steelfab import
In the New import model dialog box, select SteelFab/SCIA Import from the Type list box.
Steelfab specific information

In the SteelFab/SCIA import dialog box:
• Set Import weldings to Yes to include welds in the model.
• Set Import holes to Yes to include holes in the model.
• Enter the path, file name, and file extension of the import file in the ASCII file name field.
If it is blank, Tekla Structures looks in the current model folder.
Fabtrol XML import

To import the fabrication status information of parts from a Fabtrol XML file into a Tekla
Structures model:
1. Click File > Import.
2. Select any of the following options FEM, CIMSteel, CAD, or Other, to open the New import
model dialog box.

3. Select Fabtrol XML import from the Type list box and click the Properties button to open
the Fabtrol XML import (17) dialog box.
4. Click the browse button (...) to locate the file for the Input file field.
5. Click OK to import the status information.
S-Frame import
Import analysis models created by the FASTSOLVE suite of programs, so you can detail them
in Tekla Structures.
In the New import model dialog box, select Import S-Frame from the Type list box.
About S-Frame imports

The S-Frame model is used for analysis, so may not contain all the information necessary to
create an accurate Tekla Structures model, particularly for positioning parts. Check the imported
model carefully before you start detailing.
MicasPlus import
In the New import model dialog box, select Import MicasPlus from the Type list box.
MicasPlus specific information

In the Import MicasPlus dialog box, select Front or Top from the Part rotation list box.
Eureka LPM import

Eureka LPM (Logical Product Model) uses the CIMsteel (Computer Integrated Manufacturing)
data exchange format.
In the New import model dialog box, select Import Eureka LPM from the Type list box.
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export

Description Elematic ELiPLAN is a software for resource planning, scheduling, and management for precast
concrete fabricators. Using the export and import features in Tekla Structures you can automate
the data transfer between these two applications.
The data transfer consists of the following actions:
1. Exporting ELiPLAN data file from Tekla Structures
2. Importing ELiPLAN data file into ELiPLAN
3. Exporting ELiPLAN status data file from Eliplan
4. Importing ELiPLAN status data file into Tekla Structures
The ELiPLAN import (2) supports incremental approach, which means that ELiPLAN is able to
create, update, and delete parts in it's database. This means that precast detailers can export the
most up-to-date data files whenever the Tekla Structures model has been changed.

www.cadfamily.com
Similar incremental support is included in the Tekla import (4). To keep the status and schedule
data in Tekla Structures model up-to-date, we recommend you to update the status data
regularly.
See also Exporting ELiPLAN (p. 264)
Import ELiPLAN status data
Importing status If you have a status data file created in ELiPLAN, you can then import it into your Tekla
and scheduling Structures model with theImport Eliplan status data (69) component. For more information on
information transferring data between Tekla Structures and ELiPLAN, see Overview of ELiPLAN import
and export (p. 216).
The format and contents of this file are completely different than those in
the file that is exported from Tekla Structures to ELiPLAN.
To import status and scheduling information from ELiPLAN to Tekla Structures:

1. Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog.
2. Type in Eliplan and click Search.
3. Double-click Import data from EliPlan to open the following dialog box:
4. Select the status data file to import. When you click the Create button, Tekla Structures
updates the status and schedule data for parts in the Tekla Structures model. When the data
is read, Tekla Structures shows the log file in the list:

The list contains the parts whose data is updated correctly and also provides information on
possible problems that may have occurred. When you select an item in the list, Tekla Structures
automatically selects the corresponding part in the model.
The overall status information is shown at the end of the list.
Tekla Structures stores the actual status data to the user-defined attributes of the parts. To view
the data, open the user-defined attributes from the part properties dialog box.
The ELiPLAN-specific user-defined attributes are not in the default envi-

ronment of Tekla Structures. You need to modify the objects.inp to
use and view them. For more information, see Configuration for
ELiPLAN export.

www.cadfamily.com
7.4 Exporting files
Tekla Structures exports models in several formats. This section explains how to export models
and drawings from Tekla Structures. Most of the export tools are available on the pull-down
menu File > Export.
You can also export drawings from the drawing list, click Drawings &
Reports >Drawing List....
Also, you can export your model to a web page using the command File > Publish as Web
page... to make it available on the Internet, using a web browser. For more information, see
Tekla WebViewer (p. 278).
Topics Exporting 3D DWG/DXF
Exporting 3D DGN
Exporting drawings
Exporting FEM
Exporting CIMsteel
Exporting CAD
Exporting MIS
Exporting ASCII
Exporting IFC
Exporting a model dump
Exporting 3D DWG/DXF
You can export models as a 3D DWG or 3D DXF file type to use in other modeling or analysis
programs. By default, Tekla Structures creates the model.dwg file in the current model folder.
To create a 3D DWG/DXF export file:
1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. Select File > Export > 3D DWG/DXF... to open the following dialog box.

3. Modify the export options as required.
4. Accept the default file name, or use Browse... to navigate to another file.
5. Select whether to export as DWG or as DXF.
6. To export the model, click:
• Export all to export the whole model, or
• Export selected to export selected parts from the model.
7. Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.
Export as
Following options are available:
Export as Description
Faces Exports parts as faces.
Lines Exports parts as lines located in the center of profile
cross section. Used when exporting to analysis soft-
ware.
Reference lines Exports parts as reference lines, drawn between the
creation points. Used when exporting to analysis
software.
Exporting 3D DWG or DXF files as Faces uses more memory and may
take longer, but the end result is better.
If the model is large, or you have less memory to use, Export asRefer-
ence lines option is faster, and the resulting file size is smaller.
Use the Faces option to change part and bolt accuracy, and select whether or not to export cuts
and inner contours.

www.cadfamily.com
Field Option Description
Type Normal
High Also exports chamfers in profile cross-
sections.
Bolt accuracy High Exports the entire bolt assemblies,
including washers.
Normal Only exports the bolt and nut.
No bolts Exports no bolts.
Cuts Yes Exports cuts.
Inner contours Yes Exports radiused corners in cuts.
None of these options exports bolt holes. Curved beams and polybeams are exported as single,
continuous beams. The number of segments in the curved beams is as defined in the Curved
beam properties.
The ID of each part is exported as an attribute and written into the export file for each part.
Exporting 3D DGN
The 3D DGN export tool creates a model.dgn file in the current model folder, which you can
import into other modeling systems.
Follow these steps to export a 3D DGN file:
2. Select the objects in the model to export.
3. Click File > Export > 3D DGN... to open the Export 3D DGN dialog box.
Enter the name of the export file, or click Browse... to locate it.
Click Export all, or Export selected to export the selected parts.
4. Tekla Structures creates the model.dgn file in your current model folder.
Settings You can also use the following variables to control DGN exports:
• XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS (p. 317)

• XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE (p. 340)

• XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME (p. 340)
• XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS (p. 340)
• XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR (p. 340)
Exporting FEM
There are several options for exporting a model with the FEM (Finite Element Method) export
tool.
To create a FEM export:
2. Click File > Export > FEM.... The FEM export dialog box appears.
3. Click the Conversion tab and enter the path to the required conversion files. For more
information about conversion files, see Conversion files (p. 192).
4. Click the Parameters tab.
5. In the Output file field, accept the default, or use the browse (...) button to select another
output file.
6. Select an output file type:
• DSTV
• MicroSAS
• Staad
7. Select the parts in the model to export.

8. Click Apply and then Create.
Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.
Combine segments (MicroSAS)

Combine segmented members (MicroSAS) gives you the option to combine multiple parts to
form one part in the exported model.
For example, if you have divided a beam into several elements and select the Yes option, Tekla
Structures combines the elements so that they form one beam in the exported model. With the
option No every element of the beam in the model forms individual beams.
STAAD
The options on the Staad tab are only relevant to Staad file types in the FEM export.

www.cadfamily.com
Parametric shapes when possible defines how Tekla Structures exports the profiles PL, P, D,
PD, SPD to Staad. Yes exports the profiles as parametric shapes so that STAAD can identify
them correctly. No exports all profiles as standard STAAD shapes.
Example Example of a plate PL10*200
• Exported as parametric shape (Yes):
13 PRI YD 200.000000 ZD 10.000000
• Exported as a standard shape (No):
13 TABLE ST PL10*200
If a profile is not defined on the Staad tab, Tekla Structures cannot identify it, and so does not
import it.
DSTV
The options on the DSTV tab only relate to DSTV file types in FEM export.
Select a DSTV version to export:

Element Tekla Structures exports either a static model CROSS_SECTION, or a CAD model
reference with MEMBER_LOCATION.
The DSTV entities are listed below. Tekla Structures supports those marked (*). See the DSTV
standard "Stahlbau - Teil 1. März 2000" for more information.
Static data:
• vertex (*)
• polyline
• substructure (*)
• node (*)
• element (*)
• element_eccentricity (*)

• raster
• boundary_condition
• elastic_support
• nodal_reaction
• element_reaction
General data:
• material (*)
• cross_section (*)
CAD data:
• member (*)
• member_location (*)
• construction-data
• cutout
• hole
Exporting CIMsteel
You have the following options when exporting a CIMsteel model:
• Analysis model (p. 224)
• Manufacturing model (p. 226)
Analysis model
To export a CIMsteel analysis model:
2. Click File > Export > CIMSteel > Analysis model.

www.cadfamily.com
Use the option CIS to select the CIS (CIMsteel Intergration Standard) version.
• CIS/1 generates a file that is compatible with the CIMsteel LPM4DEP1 schema
declaration.
• CIS/2 generates a file compatible with the CIMSteel CIS/2
(STRUCTURAL_FRAME_SCHEMA) schema declaration.
3. Enter the path and name for the export file in the Step file field or accept the default. If you
do not enter a path, Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.
4. If required, enter the a name and organization to identify who created the export file.
5. Select one of the following standards (Flavor) to apply to the export:
• UK
• EUROPEAN
• US
6. Set units to metric or imperial.
Imperial is only available for CIS/2. CIS/1 is always exported in metric

units.
7. Enter values for the origin of the exported model. The origin comes from the origin in Tekla
Structures.
8. To split a part in the Tekla Structures model into several elements in a CIMsteel model,
select Split members (Yes).
As an example, three columns are connected to a beam in a model, so that one column is in
the middle and the others are at each end of the beam. With the Yes option the beam is split
into two equal elements in the CIMsteel model. With the No option there will be one beam,
a single linear element, and two nodes (a node at each end), in the CIMsteel model.
9. Select the parts in the model to export, then click Apply and Create.

Manufacturing model
Follow these steps to export a CIS2 CIMsteel manufacturing model:
2. If you want to include information on drawings and NC files in the export file, you need to
• Export or print needed drawings to the model folder in dwg format. See Exporting
drawings (p. 266) or Printing to file.
• Create single-part drawings, and then create NC files with the extension .nc1. See
DSTV (p. 174).
3. Click File > Export > CIMSteel > Manufacturing model to export a model that contains all
of the parts needed for manufacture and erection.
5. Enter a name for the export file in the Output file field. CIS uses the file extension stp.
6. Set Linear units to metric or imperial units (only for CIS/2 format).
With Imperial units Tekla Structures writes all of the designations for
nuts, bolts, and washers in fractional inches.
7. If required, enter a name for the structure in the Structure name field.
8. Enter the path to the profile conversion file. For more information, see More CIMsteel
information (p. 227).
9. Enter the path to the material conversion file. For more information, see Material
conversion.

www.cadfamily.com
If you leave the profile and material conversion file paths empty, Tekla
Structures uses the conversion files in the current profile folder for the
conversion.
10. To include information on NC files in an export, set Include NC files to Yes and specify a
path (relative to the current model folder) to the folder where the NC files are located.
11. To export globally unique ID’s instead of internal ID numbers, select Yes in the Export
Globally unique ID’s list box.
12. Click the Profile standard tab to enter information about the standard.
14. Click Apply and then Create. Tekla Structures creates the export file in your current model
folder.
More CIMsteel information

Profile This example shows part of the profile conversion file prfexp_cis.cnv:
conversion
! US Imperial Flavor
! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> CIS
!
! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be
! the same as Tekla Structures-name.
!
!American Sections - Imperial
!W - Wide Flange Beams

W44X335 S\SECT\US\W44X335\ASTM_A6\1994
Converted-name contains the following information, each value separated by a back slash ‘\’:
• S (fixed value)
• SECT (fixed value)
• Name of the standardization organization
• Standard name of the profile shape
• Name of the standard
• Year of the standard

If the conversion file does not contain the relevant profile type, the Tekla Structures name of the
profile is used. Tekla Structures also uses the Standardization organization, Standard name
and Year of standard defaults on the Profile standard tab.
Material This example shows part of the material conversion file matexp_cis.cnv:
conversion

! US Imperial Flavor
! Material name conversion Tekla Structures -> CIS
!
! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be
! the same as Tekla Structures-name.
# Carbon Structural Steel (ASTM_A36\1994)

GRADE32 S\MAT\US\GRADE32\ASTM_A36-94\1994
GRADE36 S\MAT\US\GRADE36\ASTM_A36-94\1994
#High Strength Carbon Manganese Steel (ASTM_A529\1994
GRADE42 S\MAT\US\GRADE42\ASTM_A529-94A\1994)
Converted-name contains the following information, each item separated by the backslash
character (\):
• S (fixed value)
• MAT (fixed value)
• Name of the standards organization
• Standard name of the material

Converted-name contains the following information about bolts, nuts, and washers, separated
by two colon characters (::):
• Name of the standards organization
• Standard name of the bolt, washer, or nut

Tekla Structures names for bolts, washers, and nuts are constructed from their fastener standard,
fastener type and size.
If the conversion file does not contain an equivalent profile name, Tekla Structures uses the
name of the material.
Tekla Structures takes the following default values from the Material standard and Bolt
standard tabs for materials, bolts, nuts and washers:
Field Description
Standardization organiza- The organization that published the standard.
tion
If this field is blank, Tekla Structures places an
empty entry ("") in CIS/2 files.
Name of standard The name or number of the standard.
If this field is blank, Tekla Structures places an
empty entry ("") in CIS/2 files.
Year of standard The year the standard was published.
If the field is left blank, Tekla Structures uses
1999 as the default value.

www.cadfamily.com
Exporting CAD
You can export a CAD model in several formats. To export a CAD model:
2. Click File > Export > CAD... to open the CAD export dialog box.
3. Click the Conversion tab and enter path to the required conversion files. For more
information about conversion files, see Conversion files (p. 192).
5. In the Output file field, accept the default, use the browse (...) button to select another output
file.
6. Select one of the output formats in the Type list box:
Format Description
PML PML exports files in Intergraph’s Parametric Modeling
Language format. The PML export can be used with
several Intergraph systems.
HLI HLI (High Level Interface) option is used for exporting
data to IEZ AG’s Speedikon software.
SCIA SCIA is used for SteelFab interface.
Calma Calma option is used for exporting data to the Calma plant
design system.
SDNF SDNF (Steel Detailing Neutral File) option is used to
export models for use in several different CAD systems.
PDMS PDMS (Plant Design Management System) option is used
to export models for use with the Cadcentre’s 3d plant
design software. For more information, see PDMS (p.
232).
SDNF (PDMS) SDNF (PDMS) is used for exporting information to PDMS
via SDNF link. Tekla Structures writes the information of
finish field in the member class attribute, whereas in
SDNF export it omits the class information.
XML XML is used for exporting information to ArchiCAD
modeling system. There are some limitations in the export:
• Conversion files are not used.
• Holes, bolts and welds are not exported.

7. Use the Origin X, Y, Z fields to specify the origin of the exported model.
9. Click Apply and then Create.
Tekla Structures then creates the export file in your current model folder.
PML
For PML output format, use the following options on the PML tab.
• Select the units for the export model.
• Export cut parts controls whether cuts are included in the export. Select Yes to export part
cuts.
When you export models from Tekla Structures into an other software
using PML, enter the Tekla Structures profile names in the conversion
file. This makes the other software consider parts as beams and columns
(not as plates), and reduces the export file size.
The following variables control PML export:

• PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE (p. 370)
• PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE (p. 371)
SDNF
For SDNF, SDNF(PDMS), or PDMS output formats, use the following options on the SDNF tab:

www.cadfamily.com
Field Description
SDNF version number Select the SDNF version to be used in the export.
Apply cuts and fittings Select Yes (default) applies cuts and fittings in the export.
Position number type The SDNF file contains identifiers, which can be included
in a part’s user-defined attributes, or as position numbers.
You have the following options:
• Part position
The identifier becomes the part’s position number. Do
not use the Part Pos_No fields with this option.
• Assembly position
The identifier becomes the assembly’s position

number.
• Universal ID
The identifier becomes a user-defined attribute for the

part.
To make user-defined attributes visible, you need to add
them to the objects.inp file. For more information on
defining attributes in objects.inp, see Adding proper-
ties (p. 98).

Field Description
Consider offsets To ignore the offset records during export, select No, and to
take them into account, select Yes.
This setting does not affect the actual start and end point
information, only the offset. Tekla Structures writes the start
and end points based on the actual solid, not on the reference
line.
PDMS phase offset PDMS phase offset defines phase offset for exported parts.
For example, if the first phase in Tekla Structures model is
1 and you enter 10 for phase offset, the Tekla Structures
parts in another software get the phase 11 and up.
Engineering Firm Enter the name of the engineering firm.
Client Enter the name of the client.
Structure ID Enter a unique identification number for the exported
model.
Project ID Enter a unique identification number for the exported
project.
Revision Number Enter a revision number (optional). Tekla Structures takes
the revision number from the user-defined attributes
(REVISION_NUMBER) of the model. If this field is blank,
Tekla Structures uses a revision number from the CAD
export dialog box (Revision Number).
Issue Code Tekla Structures writes the issue code in the header section
of the output file. For PDMS, this value should always be
"Tekla Structures".
Design Code Define the design code to be used in structural design. For
more information, see Design codes and methods.
XML
For XML output formats, use the following options on the XML tab:
• Use Units to specify unit conversions. For example, for a Tekla Structures model created
using millimeters, select IN to convert all part dimensions to inches in the output file.
• XML structure ID is a unique identification number for the exported model. You must
always enter an identification number. Tekla Structures uses this value to identify the model
if you re-export it.
PDMS
Tekla Structures uses some of the information you enter on the SDNF tab. It supports two
different PDMS export formats, EXTRUSION and NOZZLE.
Tekla Structures decides which export format to use by searching for the Tekla Structures profile
name in the profile conversion file (by default, prfexp_pdms.cnv). If the profile is not there,
Tekla Structures exports the part in both EXTRUSION and NOZZLE formats.
When you add a profile to the NOZZLE catalog, you must also add it to
the profile conversion file.

www.cadfamily.com
Using EXTRUSION transfers data from Tekla Structures to PDMS using EXTRUSION elements.
EXTRUSION Tekla Structures describes profiles in the export file using the vertices of the profiles. So you can
elements also export contour plates and folded plates. Tekla Structures exports profiles as solids, which
may not be suitable for some profile types (e.g. tubes).
Loading a You can also transfer data from Tekla Structures to PDMS by loading a NOZZLE catalog into
NOZZLE catalog a PDMS project. The NOZZLE catalog is contained in the file load_nozz_cata.mac,
located in the European profile folder. This file describes the profiles you can export to PDMS
systems. It also enables Tekla Structures to use NOZZLE elements. This format creates exact
profiles (even for tube profiles), and a smaller export file than the EXTRUSION option. You can
edit the NOZZLE catalog with a text editor to add profiles to it.
Exporting MIS
Use the MIS (Manufacturing Information System) tool to create list files. You can create them
from selected parts, or from all the parts in the model. The MIS command creates the following
file types: DSTV, KISS, EJE, EPC, or Steel 2000.
To create an MIS list file:
1. Open the Tekla Structures model to export.
2. Click File > Export > MIS... to display the MIS dialog box.
3. In the MIS type list box, select the file type. See MIS types (p. 233).
4. In the MIS list file field, enter the name of the list file, including the file extension. You need
to use specific file extensions for some file types. See MIS list file (p. 234) for a list of file
extensions.
5. Click Create all or Create selected. Tekla Structures creates the MIS file in the current
model folder.
MIS types
The file types you can use for MIS output are:
• DSTV
The file only contains the MIS information for the DSTV model.
• Fabtrol/KISS
Gives you the following additional options:

• Customer name

• Full material list. Check this box to add labor-related information to the list (holes,
welds, cambers, preliminary marks, etc.).
• EJE
US Imperial version only.
Structural Material Manager internally stores all dimensions in

sixteenths. Its External Data Interface writes all dimensions, such as
widths, lengths, etc, except for Beam and Channel descriptions, in
sixteenths of an inch.
As an example the length 12'-8 7/8 is equivalent to 2446 sixteenths,
which is calculated as (feet x 192) + (inches x 16) + sixteenths.
• EPC
The EPC (Estimating and Production Control) module of SDS/2 requires multinumbering
to be active.
• Steel 2000
MIS list file

Use the following MIS list file extensions, according to which file type you are creating:
Type File extension

DSTV xsr
Fabtrol/KISS kss
EJE eje
EPC None
Steel 2000 None
Exporting ASCII
To export an ASCII file of a model:
1. Open the Tekla Structures model you want to export.
2. Select the parts of the model you want to export.
3. Click File > Export > ASCII. Tekla Structures creates the model.asc file in the current
model folder.
See also ASCII format description (p. 206)
Exporting IFC
You can export the basic parts of a Tekla Structures model into IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3 and
IFC2X3_mapping schema edition files.
To define as which IFC entities the model objects are exported, use the user-defined attributes:
1. Double-click the part to open the part properties dialog box, and click User-defined
attributes... button.
2. On the IFC export tab, define the following properties:

www.cadfamily.com
Property Option Description
IFC entity Auto The object is exported as
default entity.
See a list of default settings
below.
None The object is not exported.
IfcBeam Supported IFC entities.
IfcColumn
IfcWall
IfcWallStandardCase
IfcBuildingElement-
Part
IfcSlab
IfcPlate
IfcFooting
IfcPile
IfcRailing
IfcBuildingElement-
Proxy
IfcMember
IFC export type BREP Brep presentation is used for
all objects.
AUTO Constructive solid geometry
is used when possible, and
brep presentation is used
otherwise.
IFC site name Enter the site, building and
IFC building name building storey name.
IFC building With these fields you can

storey name divide the parts to different
sites, buildings and building
storeys.
If you leave the fields empty,
the site, building, and
building storey name remain
undefined in the IFC file.
IFC entity attribute set as Auto:
Tekla Structures object IFC entity exported

Beam IfcBeam
Twin profile 2x IfcBeam
Column IfcColumn

Tekla Structures object IFC entity exported
Slab IfcSlab
Concrete Panel IfcWallStandardCase
Pad footing IfcFooting
Strip footing IfcFooting
Contour plate IfcPlate
To export a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file:

1. Select the model objects to export.
2. Click File > Export > IFC...
3. Select the Schema edition, the options are IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3 and IFC2X3_mapping.
Number all parts before exporting when you have selected the
IFC2X3_mapping schema edition.
4. Browse for the Output file location and enter the file name. The file extension for the output
file is .ifc.
The length of the file path is limited to 256 characters.
5. Select whether to export parametrized profiles or not: Select Yes or No in the
Parameterized profile list box.
6. Select the export type, the options are AUTO and BREP.
Defining the color The color of the exported objects is defined according to the class definition, in the following
of the exported manner:
objects
Class definition Color

1 Grey
2 Red

www.cadfamily.com
Class definition Color
3 Green
4 Dark blue
5 Cyan
6 Yellow
7 Dark magenta
8 Dark grey
9 Dark red
10 Dark green
11 Dark cyan
12 Magenta
13 Orange
14 Blue
Limitations
The following model parts are not supported in the export:

• Bolts, nuts and washers
• Welds
• Reinforcing bars
• Surface treatments
• Grids
Exporting a model dump

A model dump creates an ASCII file of a model that you can use in other models.
To export a model dump file:
1. Open the Tekla Structures model to export.
2. Click File > Export > Model dump.
Tekla Structures creates the model.dmp file in the current model folder.

The model dump file contains the entire model, including views and
drawings.
See also Model dump import (p. 206).
Exporting BVBS
Description This component exports the geometry of reinforcements into BVBS (Bundesvereinigung
Bausoftware) format. The result is a text file in ASCII format. The supported versions of the
BVBS format are:
• 1.0 year 1995
• 2.0 year 2000
The component is able to export bent reinforcing bars, reinforcing bar groups and polygonal or
rectangle not-bent meshes. The export of the hooks is also supported.
Limitations Each point of unbent reinforcement must lie on the same plane (BF3D export is not supported).
Example 1 Exporting reinforcements with standard bending radius:

www.cadfamily.com
BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l922@n1@e0.790@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl375@w90@l547@w0@
C85@
Example 2 Exporting reinforcements with non-standard bending radius:
BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l831@n1@e0.728@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl163@w0@r200@w90@
l335@w0@C84@
See also Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format (p. 240)

Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box (p. 240)
BVBS (78) specification (p. 242)
Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format

To export the geometry of the selected reinforcement to the BVBS format, follow the steps
below.
Preconditions If you create a new reinforcement in an actual model, you need to close and re-open the export
dialog box.
Usage 1. Select the reinforcing bars to export.
2. Click Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in BVBS and click Search. Double-
click Export rebar BVBS (78) to open the component dialog box.
3. Set the following options in the Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box:
a Set Selection to Selected rebars only.
b Set Standard bending radius to Use Tekla standards.
c Set Draw rebars to Yes to see the exported geometry in the model after exporting.
4. Click Create.
5. Check the exported geometry.
6. Find the name of the exported file in the component output window.
7. Check the created file in the current model folder.
Result Using this component creates one output file. The output file is created in the current model
folder. The file name depends on the settings in the dialog box and it is shown in the console
output window (see the picture). The existing files are rewritten. To check the exported
geometry, set Draw rebars to Yes.
See also Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box (p. 240)
BVBS (78) specification (p. 242)
Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box

This section describes the fields in the Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box.

www.cadfamily.com
Configuration
Field Description
File name Specify the name of the output file. The default file
name is Project Number.
Ext file name Specify the extension of the output file. The default file
extension is txt.
Version Specify the version of the BVBS format. The supported
versions of BVBS are:
1.0 year 1995
2.0 year 2000
Selection Define which reinforcements will be exported.
• All rebars in the model no preselected parts are
required, all reinforcements from the current model
are exported.
• Selected rebars only only the selected reinforce-
ments are exported.
• All rebars of selected concrete elements only
reinforcements that belong to the selected concrete
parts are exported.
2D rebars Export single reinforcing bars and groups consisting of
straight bars.
3D rebars Export bent reinforcing bars. Not supported at the
moment.
Spiral rebars Export spiral reinforcements. Not supported at the
moment.
Not bent meshes Export unbent meshes. Polygonal and rectangle meshes
are supported.
Bent meshes Export bent meshes. Not supported at the moment.
Standard bending radius Specify the value of the standard bending radius.
• Use Tekla standards: Each material and diameter
has its own initial bending radius in Tekla Struc-
tures. These values are used for each reinforcing
bar group from the file \environ-
ments\europe\profil\rebar_databas
e.inp (Column “Min bend rad”). These values
are used for the standard bending radius.
• Use radius coef: the standard bending radius is the
bending radius of the exported reinforcing bars
multiplied with Radius coef.
• Use rebar radius: the bending radius of exported
reinforcing bars is used as the standard bending
radius.
Radius coef Define the number used for the computation of the stan-
dard bending radius. Entire number is required. Used
only if Standard bending radius is set to Radius coef.

Field Description
Draw rebars Draw the exported geometry in the model. It is repre-
sented by the lines created inside reinforcements
(straight bars and meshes) or on the side of reinforce-
ments (bent bars).
In case of 180° hooks, the hook line is inside the main
line.
Ignored classes List of classes. Reinforcements with classes in this list
will not be exported. E. g. “5 7 17”.
BVBS (78) specification

Each exported reinforcing bar or group of the same reinforcing bars has one row in the exported
file. One row consists of a HEADER block, a GEOMETRY block and a CHECKSUM block.
Example BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l5950@n1@e5.284@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl5950@w0@C84@
Header block starts with the letter H.

• j – Project number
• r – Plan number – not used, exported as 0
• i – Plan index – not used, exported as “a”
• p – Position – index of the output file row is exported
• l – Total length of reinforcement
• n – Number of reinforcements
• e – Weight of one rod
• d – Reinforcement diameter
• g – Material
• s – Standard bending radius (see below)
• v – Author – not used

Geometry block starts with the letter G.
• l – particular length
• w – bending angle
• r – bending radius (relates to the standard bending radius, see below)

CheckSum block starts with the letter C.
• see the BVBS specification
Measuring Measuring of the length is done according to the BVBS specification. Calculation of lengths also
depends on the bending angle. Lengths L1 and L2 are exported.

www.cadfamily.com
Standard bending The bending radius affects the export of the reinforcements. If the bending radius is the same for
radius the entire reinforcing bar and this bending radius is set by dialog box field Standard bending
radius (is also written in exported HEADER block), these bending radiuses are not exported in
the GEOMETRY block. Otherwise the bending radiuses are exported for each bending. The
value of the bending radius can be set in fields Standard bending radius and Radius coef in
the dialog box.
Exporting Unitechnik
Description This component exports the 3D geometry of the cast units into Unitechnik format. The result is
a text file in ASCII format. Supported versions of the Unitechnik format are:
• 6.0.0 14.6.2005
• 5.2b 11.9.2000
• 5.0c 30.10.1997
This component is able to export cast units consisting of concrete, steel and surface materials.
Exporting of not-bent reinforcing bars, reinforcing bar groups and meshes with hooks is also
supported. This macrocomponent also supports exporting braced girders and double walls.
Example 1 Exported cast unit:

Hole
Steel embed
Reinforcing bars
Insulation plate (green)
See also Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format (p. 244)

Unitechnik export reference (p. 247)
Main (p. 248)
Unitechnik configuration (p. 253)
TS configuration (p. 257)
Reinforcement (p. 259)
Data specification (p. 263)
Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format

To export the geometry of the selected cast units to the Unitechnik format follow the steps
below.
Preconditions This component reads and exports some data from the numbering series of parts. It is important
to have all exported parts numbered correct. Incorrectly numbered parts are not exported.

www.cadfamily.com
The parts you need to select depend on the selected option in the Create
from list.
Usage 1. Update numbering.

2. Select one object of a cast unit.
3. Click Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in Unitechnik and click Search.
Double-click the Export unitechnik (79) to open the Export unitechnik (79) dialog box.
4. On the Main tab, set the Create from to Selected cast units.
5. On the TS configuration tab, set the following fields:
a Draw profs to Yes to see exported geometry in the model after creating the
component.
b Insulation classes to 3. Green object with class 3 will be considered as insulation
plate.
c Embeds to Selected + steel (orange steel objects will be considered as embeds)
6. On the Reinforcement tab, set the following fields:

a Single rebars export to Yes to export reinforcing bars in the top concrete panel.
b Mesh export to Yesto export reinforcing bars in the bottom concrete panel.
7. Click Create.
8. Check the exported geometry.
9. Search the name of the exported file in the component output window.
10. Check the created file in the current model folder.
Result This component creates one or several output files. Number of created output files depends on
the option selected in the Create from list and the total number of selected parts, cast units or
assemblies.

If the scanning direction is wrong, use the Rotation and Extra rotation fields.
Wrong scanning plane (from the right side to the left side):
Correct scanning plane ( from back to front side):

www.cadfamily.com
See also Exporting Unitechnik (p. 243)
Unitechnik export reference (p. 247)
Data specification (p. 263)
Unitechnik export reference

Object geometry To obtain the geometry of all parts in a cast unit this component uses scanning layers. The
scanning number of the scanning layers depends on the selected Scan position (p. 258). Each object of
the cast unit is scanned in one direction, which can be set with Rotation (p. 248) and Extra
rotation (p. 250) properties.
Real scanned geometry can be shown in the model after you have used the component with
Draw profiles (p. 257) property.
Insulation All parts considered as insulation (see Insulation classes (p. 259)) are exported in the
MOUNTPART block.
Embeds All embeds (see Embeds (p. 259) and Embed classes) are exported in the MOUNTPART
block. Other properties that affect the export of embeds are Export assemblies (p. 252) and
Export assemblies outside (p. 252). If the embeds block consists of several parts, it is useful to
weld all embeds into one block and then connect the created block with concrete part to a cast
unit. Subassemblies are also supported.
Reinforcement This component can export single and groups of straight reinforcing bars, rectangular or
polygonal meshes. The export of the bent reinforcing bars and bent meshes is ignored. The
reinforcing bar group, rectangular or polygonal mesh is divided into several single reinforcing
bars. All reinforcing bars are exported in the RODSTOCK block. The exported geometry can be
shown with Draw profiles. This property shows the inside lines of the exported reinforcing bars.
Hooks are also supported. If Export type is set to Fabrication of welded rebars, the single
reinforcing bar is exported in one STEELMAT block, all reinforcing bars of one group are

exported together in one STEELMAT block, all reinforcing bars of one mesh are also exported
together in one STEELMAT block.
Braced girders The class of reinforcements, steel rods or profiles representing braced girder has to be entered
in the Braced girder classes (p. 260) field. For example 15 17 5 means that parts with class
15, 17, or 5 are consider as braced girders. If the Braced girder export and Braced girder
classes fields are not set, the braced girders will be exported incorrectly as reinforcement or
embeds.
Double walls Set the user-defined attribute Product type (UT product type) of the first panel to Double wall
(1st stage). Set the other panel to Double wall (2nd stage). Double wall panels are exported
separately in UNITECHNIK.
Main
This describes the fields on the Main tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component.
Create from This option defines the parts or cast-units that are exported.
• All parts: preselected parts are not required, all cast units from the current model are
exported. Each cast unit has one output file.
• Selected cast units: exports only cast units that have one or more parts selected in the
model. Each cast unit has one output file.
• Selected parts (specially): exports only the selected concrete parts (also embeds and
insulation parts belonging to the selected part). Each part has one output file.
• Selected parts (cast united): selected parts belonging to one cast unit are grouped and
exported together in one output file.
• Selected assemblies: all selected assemblies are exported. One assembly equals one cast
unit and has one output file. Selection of subassemblies is also allowed.
Rotation This option defines the scanning direction. The scanning direction depends on the plane of the
cast unit main part. A floor panel is scanned from bottom to top side. Awall panel and a column
are scanned from one side to the other side. The position and direction of a basic shape of the
exported cast unit depends on the rotation.

www.cadfamily.com
Option Description Example
No Floor: Bottom to top
Wall: Front to rear side
Column: Side to side
180 Floor: Top to bottom

Wall: Rear to front side
Column: From one side to
the opposite side
+90 around X Floor: Left to right side

Wall: Top to bottom
Column: Side to side
-90 around X Floor: Right to left side

Wall: Bottom to top
Column: From one side to
the opposite side

Option Description Example
+90 around Y Floor: Front to rear side
Wall: Left to right side
Column: Bottom to top
-90 around Y Floor: Rear to front side

Wall: Right to left side
Column: Top to bottom
Extra rotation This affects the rotation around the Z coordinate. The Z coordinate still has the same direction,
but the X and Y direction are changed. To show the actual coordinate system, set Draw axis to
Yes on the TS configuration tab.
Option Description
No No extra rotation.
Swap X/Y Swap X and Y axis.
X=max(X_dim,Y_dim X axis goes through the longer side of the main part.
) main part
X=min(X_dim,Y_dim X axis goes through the shorter side of the main part.
) main part
X=max(X_dim,Y_dim X axis goes through the longer side of the cast unit.
) cast unit
X=min(X_dim,Y_dim X axis goes through the shorter side of the cast unit.
) cast unit
+90 around Z Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by 90 degrees.
- 90 around Z Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by -90 degrees.
180 around Z Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by 180 degrees.
The following picture shows the coordinate system with no rotation and no extra rotation
settings. Panel 1 has the X axis set parallel to the shorter side. It is incorrect in Unitechnik
format, so the coordinate system has to be rotated. Panel 2 shows a rotation by 90 degrees around
the Z axis.

www.cadfamily.com
Special assemblies export / Special export assembly file name
These properties influence the exported geometry of the embeds. The real geometry is replaced
by the geometry defined in special text files. The default name of the text file is
spec_assemblies_def.txt and is primary searched in the model folder. The file name
and path can be specified by the Special export assembly file name property.
Required structure of text file is:
• Name(text) Number_of_lines_defined(number)
• S(representing single line) Start_coors(number number) End_coors(number number)
• S(representing single line) Start_coors(number number) End_coors(number number)

Example of the file:
The geometry of all embeds with names (from example Quicky, QuickyS, E-Doze) are replaced
by geometry defined in the text file. In the following example, the part number 1 (the name is
Beam) was not found in the text file so the geometry is exact. On the opposite side the part
number 2 (the name is Quicky) was found, so the geometry is replaced.

Export Specifies export of embeds and steel blocks.
assemblies
Option Description
Exports embeds as parts. All embed welds
and assembly relations are ignored. The
exported geometry is a projection of the
objects into the basic shape.
Welded embeds and assembly block are

exported as one part.
Exports only the main part of the embed

block or embed assembly.
Exports the main part of the embed block

extended in the X direction to cover all the
parts of the embed block.
Export Defines if embeds outside concrete part are exported or not.

assemblies
outside

www.cadfamily.com
Option Description
Exports all embeds without modification.
Exports only embeds inside concrete parts.

Embeds outside the concrete element are
ignored. If embed is partly inside and partly
outside concrete part, then the outside part
of embed is cut off.
Unitechnik configuration
This describes the fields on the Unitechnik configuration tab of the Export unitechnik (79)
component.
File name Specify the name of the output file and file name extension. The options are:
• Proj_number.Cast_unit_number
• Proj_number.Cast_unit_pos
• Proj_number.Ass_control_number
• Proj_name.Cast_unit_number
• Proj_name.Cast_unit_pos
• Proj_name.Ass_control_number
• Cast_unit_number.user_extension
• Cast_unit_pos.user_extension
• Ass_control_number.user_extension
Cast_unit_number is the assembly position number of the main part of the cast unit.
Cast_unit_pos is the assembly position of the main part of the cast unit.
Ass_control_number is a special user-defined attribute, a unique number that Tekla Structures

generates. To generate the assembly control numbers, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering
> Assign control numbers…. This requires the following definition in the
..\environments\country_independent\inp\objects.inp for concrete parts:
unique_attribute("ACN", "j_acn", integer, "%d", no, none, "0.0", "0.0"){
value("", 0)}
user_extension is defined with the File name extension property.

Ext file name Specify the file name extension, if the File name is set to an option containing .user_extension.
File mask Specify the format (length) of the output file name and file name extension. Numbers represent
the length of the output string. If the name is longer than the selected option, it is cut. Symbol
“x” represents unlimited size.
Version Specify version of Unitechnik. Supported versions are:
• 6.0.0 14.6.2005

• 5.2b 11.9.2000
• 5.0c 30.10.1997
Blank symbol Specify the blank symbol.
An example with "_" symbol:
An example with " " symbol:
Layer structure Define the structure of the exported file (slabdate and layer part).

www.cadfamily.com
Option Description
Multiple layers One SLABDATE block with N layers. Each cast unit has its
own LAYER block. Embeds, reinforcement and insulations
belong to one concrete part, and they are exported in the
related LAYER block.
HEADER__
…
SLABDATE
…
LAYER___
…
END LAYER___
LAYER___
…
END LAYER___
LAYER___
…
END LAYER___
END SLABDATE
END HEADER__
Single layer, 1 slabdate Each cast unit has its own SLABDATE block, no LAYER
blocks.
HEADER__
…
SLABDATE
…
END SLABDATE
SLABDATE
…
END SLABDATE
SLABDATE
…
END SLABDATE
END HEADER__
Single layer, n slabdate Cast units with equal geometry are collected in one SLAB-
DATE block. No LAYER and LOT blocks are defined.
Embeds, reinforcement and insulations belonging to a cast
unit with the same geometry are collected and exported in one
SLABDATE block.
HEADER__
…
SLABDATE
…
END SLABDATE
SLABDATE
…
END SLABDATE
END HEADER__
Geometry export Specify if the geometry of the exported part is represented as polygons or lines. Below are two
examples of the output file showing the differences between the polygons and the lines exported.
Polygons exported:

Lines exported:

www.cadfamily.com
TS configuration
This describes the fields on the TS configuration tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component.
Draw axis Shows the coordinate system. The X axis is a line consisting of single points. The Y axis is a line
consisting of doubled points line. The Z axis is a line consisting of three points in line.
Draw profiles This option allows you to check, if the geometry of the exported parts is correct. It shows the
lines representing the exported rectangle of the basic shape, the exported geometry of parts, cuts,
embeds, and reinforcement. Embeds are projected to the plane of the basic shape. The
reinforcement lines are positioned inside each reinforcing bar.

Basic shape
Geometry of main element.
Cut geometry
Embed geometry
Scan position Defines the position in which all parts are scanned. Each part is scanned separately. Scanning
plane is parallel to the basic shape plane.
Option Description
Bottom and top Two scanning planes at the start and at the end of the bounding
box of the scanning part.
Bottom only One scaning plane at the start of the bounding box of the scan-
ning part.
Top only One scaning plane at the end of the bounding box of the scan-
ning part.
Middle only One scanning plane at the middle of bounding box of the scan-
ning part.
To move the position of the exact scanning plane, use the Start distance in material and End
distance in material properties.
Start distance in Defines the start offset of scanning. This property moves the scanning plane.
material
End distance in Defines the end offset of scanning. This property moves the scanning plane.
material
Contour export This component is able to export one scanned layer only. With two scanned layers, they have to
be recomputed into one layer. Two options of recomputation are:

www.cadfamily.com
Option Description
Intersection Make polygons intersection (AND operation) of two countour
geometries.
Layer scanned first
Layer scanned the second.
Layers
Union Makes polygons union (OR operation) of two contour geome-
tries
Cutout export The same as Contour export, but for holes only.
Ignored classes List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will not be exported.
Insulation List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will be exported as insulation parts.
classes
Embeds Defines the parts that are considered as embeds. Embedded parts are exported in the
MOUNTPART block.
• Selected + steel: all classes listed in the Embed classes list are considered as embeds. All
steel parts are also considered as embeds.
• Selected: classes listed in the Embed classes list are only considered as embeds.
• No export: ignores the Embed classes list and exports all steel parts as standard parts.
Reinforcement
The fields on the Reinforcement tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component are described
below.
Single rebars When set to Yes, allows exporting straight reinforcing bars. Hooks are supported.
export
Bended single Not supported at the moment.
rebars export
Meshes export When set to Yes, allows exporting of polygonal or rectangular meshes. Hooks are supported.
Bended meshes Not supported at the moment.
export
Braced girder When set to Yes, reinforcing bars or steel rods representing braced girders are exported
export separately in the BRGIRDER block.
When set to No and if Single rebars export is Yes, then straight reinforcing bars representing
braced girders are exported normally as rebars, steel rods are exported as mounted parts.

Braced girder List of classes. Parts with classes in this list are exported as braced girders.
classes
Export type Define the structure of the exported file for reinforcements.
Option Description
Plant with lying robot only Exports all embeds without modifications.
SLABDATE
CONTOUR
CUTOUT
MOUNPART
RODSTOCK
BRGIRDER
EXTIRON
END
SLABDATE

www.cadfamily.com
Option Description
Fabrication of welded rebars The structure of the output file (one SLABDATE is
shown only):
SLABDATE
CONTOUR
CUTOUT
MOUNPART
RODSTOCK
BRGIRDER
REFORCEM
STEELMAT
RODSTOCK
BRGIRDER
END
STEELMAT
STEELMAT
RODSTOCK
BRGIRDER
END
STEELMAT
…
EXTIRON
END
REFORCEM
END
SLABDATE

Option Description
Form mesh automatically The structure of the output file is the same as for Fabri-
cation of welded rebars. This option allows you to
collect mesh, single reinforcing bars and reinforcing bar
groups into groups exported in one STEELMAT block.
Collecting is made by Mesh defined by and Name UDA
fields. Collecting of meshes which belong to different
concrete cast units is supported.
1 (orange color) – the mesh belongs to the bottom panel

of the cast unit, mesh name is MESH1.
2 (blue color) – two single bars, name is MESH1.
3 (green color) – one reinforcing bar group belongs to
the top panel, name is MESH1.
If Export Type is set to Form mesh automatically and
Mesh defined by is set to Name, all three different rein-
forcement types are collected into one mesh, which is
exported in one STEELMAT block.
Mesh defined by Parameter for automatic mesh collecting. Meshes with one bar are exported as a single
reinforcing bar.
• Class
Reinforcement with the same class number are collected into meshes. Reinforcement with
one class number equals one mesh in the exported file.
• Name
Reinforcement with the same name are collected into meshes. Reinforcement with the same
name equals one mesh in the exported file.
• UDA

www.cadfamily.com
Reinforcement with the same user-defined attribute (defined with Name of UDA property)
are collected into meshes.
Name of UDA Specify the name of the user-defined attribute for the Mesh defined by property.
Data specification
This describes the fields on the Data specification tab of the Export unitechnik (79)
component.
Order name Fills order fields in the HEADER block with the selected data. The options are:
(HEADER block)
• Project number
• Project name
• Cast unit number
Project, line 3 Fills project information fields (3rd line) in the HEADER block with the selected data.
content
project, line 4 Fills project information fields (4rd line) in the HEADER block with the selected data.
content
Custom UDA or Information displayed in the project information fields of the HEADER block. The typed text
string depends on the selected option of the project, line 4 content. If the selected option is Project
UDA, type in the name of the user-defined attribute, if it is User defined text, type in the text
you like.
Braced girder Specify braced girder type in the BRGIRDER block in the exported file.
type
• Empty: no string exported
• Name: the name of the braced girder type. If the name of the top part of the braced girder is
empty, checks the remaining bar names.
• UDA: the value of the user-defined attribute (defined by UDA name or string) is exported.
• String: the text defined by UDA name or string is exported.
UDA name or Specify the name of the user-defined attribute or text used in Braced girder type.
string
Slab number Specify filling of slab number field in the SLABDATE blocks. Options are:
(SLABDATE
BLOCK) • Counter
• Cast unit position
• Cast unit number
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export

Description Elematic ELiPLAN is a software for resource planning, scheduling, and management for precast
concrete fabricators. Using the export and import features in Tekla Structures you can automate
the data transfer between these two applications.
The data transfer consists of the following actions:
1. Exporting ELiPLAN data file from Tekla Structures
2. Importing ELiPLAN data file into ELiPLAN
3. Exporting ELiPLAN status data file from Eliplan
4. Importing ELiPLAN status data file into Tekla Structures

The ELiPLAN import (2) supports incremental approach, which means that ELiPLAN is able to
create, update, and delete parts in it's database. This means that precast detailers can export the
most up-to-date data files whenever the Tekla Structures model has been changed.
Similar incremental support is included in the Tekla import (4). To keep the status and schedule
data in Tekla Structures model up-to-date, we recommend you to update the status data
regularly.
See also Exporting ELiPLAN (p. 264)
Exporting ELiPLAN
Exporting to To export part data to ELiPLAN,

ELiPLAN
1. Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog.
2. Type Eliplan and click Search.
3. Double-click Export data to EliPlan file to open the following dialog box.
4. Set Scope of export to All and click Create to export the file. For more information on the
other properties, see the table below.

www.cadfamily.com
Field Description
Scope of export Use to export all parts or only selected parts. Because of
the incremental import of ELiPLAN you need to select the
same parts (and some additional parts, if needed) again
when exporting the next time. Otherwise ELiPLAN will
think that the parts missing from the subsequent file have
been deleted in the Tekla Structures model.
We recommend you to always use the All option. Use the
Selected option only in special cases or when you are
exporting parts for the first time.
Output file name The name of the export file created in the model folder.
The default name is eliplan.eli. You can import this
file into ELiPLAN.
Data conversion file With this file you can convert the parametric profile names
into the ELiPLAN product codes, and the material descrip-
tions into the ELiPLAN accessory codes. The default file
name is eliplan_export.dat and this file can be
located in your model, XS_FIRM or XS_PROJECT folder.
List of classes to be A list of classes to exclude from the export. Typically this
ignored (CIP) contains the class numbers used for cast-in-place concrete
parts.
Export plotter data Use to include or exclude the plotter data in the exported
file.
If you do not need this data in ELiPLAN, select No to
exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size.
Note that once you have transferred the file with the plotter
data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export of
plotter data in subsequent exports.
Export material data Use to include or exclude the detailed material data
(receipt) of parts.
If you have no use for material data in ELiPLAN (you have
no material handling module in ELiPLAN), select No to
Note that once you have transferred the file with the mate-
rial data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export
of material data in subsequent exports. If you do this, the
receipt is also cleared in the ELiPLAN database and all
modifications are lost.
Export rebar bending data Use to include or exclude the detailed rebar bending infor-
mation.
If you do not need this data in ELiPLAN, select No to
Note that once you have transferred the file with the rebar
bending data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the
export of rebar bending data in subsequent exports.
Create Click this button to export the data.

Before you can transfer data to EliPlan you need to define how the
product codes, types, and accessory codes (material description) are
moved from the Tekla Structures model to ELiPLAN. For more informa-
tion, see Configuration for ELiPLAN export.
See also Overview of ELiPLAN import and export (p. 216)

7.5 Exporting drawings

To export Tekla Structures drawings as a DXF or DWG file:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List....
2. Select the drawings from the list.
3. Right-click and select Export... from the pop-up menu. The Export drawings dialog box is
displayed.
4. On the Export file tab, browse for the file you want to export by clicking the Browse...
button.
5. Select a file type: DXF or DWG.
6. Select the Include revision mark to file name check box if you want to include a revision
mark in the file name.
7. Set the layer options as required on the Layer options tab. For more information, see
Layers (p. 266).
8. Set the other options as required on the Options tab:
• If you want to export the drawing so that the DWG/DXF content is grouped by object,
select the Export objects as groups check box. When you do this, Tekla Structures
forms a new group for each object (part, mark, dimension line etc.).
• Set the Drawing scale and Line type scale.
• Select the Cut lines with text check box if you do not want to display continuous lines
in exported drawings, for example, to run the line through text or drawing marks.
9. Click Export.
Layers
Use the Layer options tab on the Export Drawings dialog box to define the layering options.
If you want to specify which layers different drawing objects belong to, click Setup.... The
Drawing Export Layers dialog box is displayed.

www.cadfamily.com
Rules define the drawing objects
Available layers
Click to modify layer names and color
Organize the rules by right-clicking and using Move up and Move down. You cannot move the
rule Other object type. This collects all the exported objects that do not match any other rules.
Changing layers To change a layer:
1. Right-click a layer item, and select Select layer.... The Select layer dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the desired layer.
3. Click OK.
Defining marks to You can define marks to their own layers. This applies to all kinds of marks: bolt marks, part
their own layers marks, connection marks, neighbour part marks, reinforcement marks and component marks. To
do this:
1. Select the mark layer rule of the mark you want to define to its own layer in Layer rules.
2. Right-click and select Add next level rule from the pop-up menu.
3. Enter a rule name (for example, BeamMark) and select a filter (for example, beams) and
click OK.
4. Tekla Structures creates the new rule BeamMark, which you can use when exporting
drawings.
Advanced line You can use advanced conversion to convert the type, color and weight of lines and layers.
type and layer
conversion For more information, see Advanced line type and layer conversion (p. 268).

Copying settings To copy layer settings to another project:
1. Enter a name in the uppermost field.
2. Click Save as.
3. Copy the file *.ldb from the current model folder to the firm or project folder. See also
The font name used in Tekla Structures is used to form the name of the
text style in AutoCAD. Use dxf_fonts.cnv conversion file to define
which font file will be connected to the created AutoCAD style.
See also Conversion files (p. 192).
Advanced line type and layer conversion

You can use advanced conversion to convert the type, color and weight of lines and layers.
Usage 1. Select the Advanced line type and layer conversion check box on the Layer options
tab in the Export Drawings dialog box.
2. Define the file to be used in the conversion in Conversion file.
Tekla Structures uses the file LineTypeMapping.xml in the folder
..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\country-
independent\inp by default for the conversion.
If you need to define your own line type mappings, you can use the file
LineTypeMapping.xml as a template. For more information, see Defining your
own line type mappings (p. 268).
Defining your own line type mappings

If you need to define your own line type mappings, you can use the file
LineTypeMapping.xml in the folder
..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\country-independent\inp as a
template. To define your own line type mappings:
1. Open the mapping file using a text editor.
We recommend that you use an editor that is capable to validate XML in

order to maintain the structure of the document valid.
2. Add your own definitions.

Some mappings have been predefined in the mapping file. Use these mappings as a
template for your own mappings. You have two options for defining the mappings:
• Mapping according to line types only, for example all lines in all layers with line type
XKITLINE01 will be exported to DASHED.
• Mapping according to line types and layer, for example all lines on the layer BEAM
with line type XKITLINE01 will be exported to
DASHED. Tekla Structures first searches for this kinds of mappings by default.
This is how the file LineTypeMapping.xml is composed:

www.cadfamily.com
The first section consists of XML and document type definition. Do not change or
remove this section.
The mappings that are available are defined here. You can use these mappings as a
template for your own mappings.

In the following example, a new Mapping element is added to the file, where
XKITLINE00 lines in the Beam layer are converted to BORDER type, color is
converted to 10 and weight to 1.00 mm:
• For the list of available line types, see the TeklaStructures.lin file, which
is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\country-
independent\inp folder. You can open and edit the file using any text editor.
The table below describes which line type name corresponds to which line type
appearance.
Line type name Line type appearance

XKITLINE00
XKITLINE01
XKITLINE02
XKITLINE03
XKITLINE04
XKITLINE05
XKITLINE06
• Define the color of the line in the Color attribute. Enter the color values in
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) codes (numbers from 0 to 255).
• Define the thickness of the line in the Weight attribute. Enter the values in
hundredths of millimeters.
• Define the layers that the mapping will apply to in the LayerName attribute.
• If you leave out the attribute LayerName, Tekla Structures uses the line type
mapping for any layer. If you include the attribute LayerName, Tekla Structures uses
the line type mapping for that layer only.
3. Save the mapping file to the model folder of the model whose drawing you want to export.
Exporting hidden You can use the LineTypeMapping.xml file also for exporting hidden lines to separate
lines layers in DWG/DXF export.
Define the hidden lines to their own layers. In the following example, a Mapping element is
added to the file, where XKITLINE02 lines in the Part layer are converted to HIDDEN2 type,
and the layer name is converted to Part_Hidden.

www.cadfamily.com
For the export to succeed, make sure that the Part_Hidden layer exists
on the list of available layers in the Modify Layers dialog box.
7.6 Reference models

A reference model is a file which helps you to build a Tekla Structures model. The following
file types are supported:
• AutoCAD (*.dxf)
• AutoCAD (*.dwg)
• MicroStation (*.dgn, *.prp)
• Cadmatic models (*.3dd)
• IFC files (*.IFC)
• WebViewer XML files (*.xml)

The reference model appears in the background of your Tekla Structures model. You can snap
to reference model points. Tekla Structures loads the reference model from file each time you
open your model. It does not save the reference model when you save the current model. The
filename extension of a saved reference model properties file is rop.
Topics Using a reference model (p. 271)
Using several reference models (p. 272)
Handling large reference models (p. 273)
Supported DGN objects (p. 277)
Using a reference model

To use a reference model in a Tekla Structures model:
2. Check the work plane position. This determines the rotation of the reference model in the
Tekla Structures model.
3. Double-click the Insert reference model icon.

4. Use Browse... to locate the reference model file.
5. Set the scale of the reference model, if it is different to the one in the Tekla Structures model
(for example, if they use different measurement units).
6. Click Apply or OK to save the current reference object properties.
7. Pick the position for the reference model origin.

If you do not define the reference model file to use, or it does not exist,
Tekla Structures displays a default reference model.
See also Using several reference models (p. 272)

Reference objects in drawings
XS_REFERENCE_CACHE (p. 377)
Using several reference models

You can use several reference models in one Tekla Structures model.
To check which reference models are included in a model, click File > Reference Model List....
Select a reference model object in the dialog box to have Tekla Structures highlight it in the
model.
Use the Reference Models dialog box to:
• Show or hide reference models using the Visibility field
• View user-defined attributes of reference objects. To modify user-defined attributes,
double-click an object on the list to open the Reference Model Properties dialog box, then
click User-defined attributes.
You must define user-defined attributes in the objects.inp file. See

Adding properties (p. 98).
View filter You can also use the view filter to define which reference models are visible in each view.
To hide a reference model in a view.
Find out the ID of the reference model to hide:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Object.
2. Click the reference model you want to hide. The Inquire Object dialog box appears.
3. Copy the ID number.
4. Interrupt the command.
Select the view where you want to hide the reference model:
1. Double-click the view to display the view properties.
2. In the View Properties dialog box, click Object group....
3. Click the Add row button to add a new row.
4. In the Category column, select Reference object.
5. In the Property column, select Id number.
6. In the Condition column, select Does not equal.
7. In the Value column, enter the ID number. To hide several reference models, separate their
IDs with spaces.
8. Click Modify.

www.cadfamily.com
See also Using a reference model (p. 271).
Updating reference models

You can update the reference models in your Tekla Structures model in case there have been
changes in the original reference models after you have brought them into Tekla Structures.
To update all reference models:
Usage 1. Click File > Reference Model List...
2. Click Reload all.
When you click Reload all, Tekla Structures goes through all the reference models and
regenerates the cache for the reference models that have a newer modified date than the one
already in the cache.
Handling large reference models

This section contains tips for speeding up large reference models.
• To open the Reference object properties dialog box, click File > Reference objects...
• Select the reference model and set Visibility to Wireframe.
• Switch off Xsnap. It affects picking speed, because one dgn file is one solid object and it
takes time to find correct picking point.
• Split large dgn files into smaller ones.
• Use fewer segments to represent round reference objects. Set the variable
XS_REFERENCE_ROUND_SEGMENTS=8. Default is 16 segments.
Easier viewing In rendered views, only view reference model objects as rendered inside the work area. This
feature is designed solely for DGN cylindrical structures, like piping. To do this, set the variable
XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING=TRUE.
Tekla Structures then shows the objects as follows:
• Objects entirely inside work area are rendered.
• Objects entirely outside work area are hidden.
• Objects partly inside the work area are rendered inside work area, and wireframe outside
work area.
Gray reference View all reference model objects in gray by setting the variable
models
XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_COLORS=FALSE
Detecting changes in reference models

Reference models are often updated, but the changes are rarely documented. You can see the
changes between an old and a new reference model in Tekla Structures by using the commands
in the Reference Object Properties dialog box.
You can choose to display one of the following:
• The new file
• The old file
• Unchanged objects

• Changed objects
• Deleted objects
• Inserted objects
You can detect changes in reference models that are of the following file
formats:
• IFC (.ifc)
• Cadmatic (.3dd)
• WebViewer (.xml)
• DWG (.dwg)
Usage 1. Select the reference model and double-click it to display the Reference Object dialog
box.
2. Browse for the name of the old file by clicking the Browse... button next to the Old file
name field.
3. Select an option in the Show list box in the Change detection section. For example,
select Changed to see the changed objects in a reference model.
4. Click Display. Tekla Structures highlights the changed reference model objects.
5. Click Modify to stop detecting the changes.
Example In the following example you will see the how the changes are displayed in the reference model.
The old file:

www.cadfamily.com
The new file:
The Show option has been set to Changed in the Reference Object Properties dialog box:
The Show option has been set to Inserted in the Reference Object Properties dialog box:

The Show option has been set to Deleted in the Reference Object Properties dialog box:
Reference model objects

You can split reference models into separate reference model objects. Reference model
objects can have separate user-defined attributes that can then be used for reports and view and
select filters.
Restrictions The use of this functionality depends on the file format and file structure. You can use it for
example for IFC and for DWG files that include any of the following objects:
• block table
• polyface mesh
• polygon mesh
• proxy object (for example, ADT)
• ACIS objects (3DSolid, Body, Region)
You cannot use this functionality for DGN files.
See also Selecting reference models and reference model objects (p. 276)
Listing reference models and reference model objects in reports (p. 277)
Selecting reference models and reference model objects

You can define whether to select reference models or reference model objects.

www.cadfamily.com
Selecting To select a reference model:
reference models
1. Activate the Select component switch.

2. Select the reference model.
Selecting 1. Activate the Select objects in components switch.
reference model 2. Select the desired object in the reference model.
objects
See also Selecting model objects
Listing reference models and reference model objects in reports

You can list reference models and reference model objects separately in reports.
Listing reference To list reference models in reports, use the content type REFERENCE_MODEL.
models
Listing reference To list reference model objects in a reference model in reports, use the content type
model objects REFERENCE_OBJECT.
See also Content type (p. 423)
Supported DGN objects

Tekla Structures can display the following DGN objects in reference models:
• Line Elements (Type 3)
• Line String (Type 4)
• Shape (Type 6)
• Text Nodes (Type 7)
• Curve (Type 11)
• Complex Chains (Type 12)
• Complex Shapes (Type 14)
• Elliptic Elements (Type 15)
• Arc Elements (Type 16)
• Text Elements (Type 17)
• Surfaces (Type 18)
• Solids (Type 19)
• Point String Elements (Type 22)
• Cone Elements (Type 23)
• B-spline Surfaces (Type 24)
• B-spline Curves (Type 27)
• Shared Cells (Type 34, 35)
• Mesh Elements (Type 105), subtype "Indexed Face Loops"

The following DGN objects are not supported:
• Dimension Elements (Type 33)
• Multiline Elements (Type 36)
• Mesh Elements (Type 105), other subtypes than "Indexed Face

Loops"
SmartSolid elemets are supported as WireFrame only.
7.7 Tekla WebViewer

You can publish your Tekla Structures models as web pages that can be viewed via the Internet
using a web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer).
Topics Publishing a model as a web page (p. 278)
Web templates (p. 279)
Emailing WebViewer models (p. 279)
Handling named views (p. 280)
Handling clip planes (p. 281)
Hiding and showing objects (p. 282)
Full content rendering (p. 282)
Publishing a model as a web page

To publish a Tekla Structures model as a web page:
1. Click File > Publish as Web page.... The following dialog box appears:

www.cadfamily.com
2. In the File name field, enter the destination path and file name for the published model.
3. Click Publish. If you select the Open in browser checkbox, the model opens in your web
browser.
By default, Tekla Structures creates a PublicWeb folder with sub-folders in the current model
folder, and places the published model there as an index.html file.
You can choose the location and name for the published model folder and
rename the published file but do not change the file name extension.
When you open the model in a web browser, it includes several commands for examining the
model. You can also right-click the model in the browser to access a pop-up menu containing
these commands.
Web templates
The sub-folders under ..\
TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\WebTemplates\TeklaWebViewer contain all
Tekla Web Viewer specific materials, for example, a tool (*.dll) for viewing the model, and
templates for HTML files. When you publish a model as a web page, Tekla Structures copies
the tool and files to the folder you have specified in the File name field. You cannot modify the
tool, but you can modify the HTML files to include information relevant to your firm and
project.
You can use project-specific template fields in the HTML files. Just insert them, surrounded by
% characters, in an HTML file in the Tekla Web Viewer folder. Tekla Structures replaces
them with the current information from the model you are publishing.
Example When you want the project name to show in the Web Viewer model, insert the string %NAME% in
an HTML file. When you publish models as a web page, Tekla Structures takes the project name
information from the Project properties dialog box.
Do not remove the string %PUBLISHED_MODEL% from the index.html

file. Tekla Structures replaces it with the file name information from the
dialog box.
Emailing WebViewer models

To email a published model:
1. Zip the entire PublicWeb folder. Remember to use the folder structure.
2. Attach the .zip file to an e-mail message and send it to the recipient. The recipient can
then unzip the files and save the contents.
See also Receiving WebViewer models (p. 279)
Receiving WebViewer models

When you receive a zipped WebViewer model, ensure you keep the folder names when you
unzip it. To open the model, double-click the index.html file.

See also Sending WebViewer links (p. 280)
Handling named views (p. 280)
Handling clip planes (p. 281)
Hiding and showing objects (p. 282)
Full content rendering (p. 282)
How to move and zoom? (p. 282)
Sending WebViewer links

There are two ways to send links from Tekla WebViewer:
• Send WebViewer link
• Send URL link
Send WebViewer Use this tool to send a link to a single Tekla Structures view. To see the view name in the Named
link views list, the receiver copies the text string and pastes it into the WebViewer model.
To send several views, copy the text strings pointing to the views into a
text file and send the text file. The receiver then copies the contents of the
text file and pastes it into the WebViewer model.
See also Receiving WebViewer models (p. 279).

Send URL link Use this tool to send a URL link to the model. Recipients must have access to the folder
containing your published model.
Handling named views

To create named views from a published model,
1. Open the index.html for the published model.
2. Zoom in on the part of the model from which you want to create the view.
3. Right-click and select Copy location.
4. Create a new file in any text editor (for example, Notepad) and paste the location
information into it. It should look like this:
5. The default name for the view is xyz. To change it, in your text editor, replace the text xyz
with the view name that you want to use.
6. Now you need to copy the updated location information to the published model. Select all
the text in the text editor, right-click and select Copy.
7. In WebViewer, right-click on the model and select Paste location. The view name appears
on the Named views list.

www.cadfamily.com
WebViewer does not save named views with the published model. But,
you can save the text file that contains the location information, then cut
and paste the text to the published model in WebViewer the next time you
want to use the view.
To allow others to see your named views, send them using the Send WebViewer link tool. See
Sending WebViewer links (p. 280).
Handling clip planes

Use the keyboard shortcut P or the pop-up menu to create clip planes:
To create a clip plane, click shortcut P, and select a plane in the model:
To select the clip plane, click the scissor symbol:

Moving clip
planes
Move the clip plane
by dragging the
scissor symbol.
You can change the
location of the symbol
by holding down the
Shift key and moving
the symbol.
Select one clip plane
and press space bar to
jump between clip
planes.
Hiding and showing objects

Use the mouse wheel to hide and show objects:
• To hide objects, move the cursor over the objects, hold down the Ctrl key and scroll up (or
press the Page Up key).
• To unhide object, move the cursor over the hidden objects, hold down the Ctrl key and scroll
down (or press the Page Down key).
• Press the Esc key to show all objects.
Full content rendering

To handle large models faster, make full content rendering unavailable:
• Right-click and select Disable full content rendering from the pop-up menu.
• To enable full content rendering, select Enable full content rendering from the pop-up
menu.
How to move and zoom?

Use the following commands to move and zoom in a model:

www.cadfamily.com
Command
(Shortcut) Action/Description
Zoom Click Page Up or Page Down keys, or
scroll mouse wheel forward to zoom
in, and backward to zoom out.
Pan (P) Click Pan and drag, or drag with the
mouse middle button.
Rotate (Ctrl + R, Shift ? Totate with mouse (Ctrl + R), rotate
R, Shift + T) model one round (Shift + R) or rotate
the model continuously (Shift + T).
Fly (Shift+F) Click Fly and move the mouse
forward to fly forward. To change
flying direction, move the mouse to
the desired direction.
To stop, click Esc.
Center (Ins) Centers the model on the screen.
Home (Home) Returns the model to the original
view.
Set view point (V) Use to relocate the center of rotation.
1. Press the V key.
2. Click to pick the new center of
rotation.
3. Hold down the Ctrl key and drag
with the middle mouse button.
You can also right-click the model and select the move and zoom
commands from the popup menu.

www.cadfamily.com
8 Variables
Introduction Tekla Structures includes several variables that you can use to customize your version of Tekla
Structures. For example, you can choose to use imperial units by setting a variable.
The variables are grouped in different categories according to their usage in the Advanced
options dialog box. To access the dialog box, click Tools > Options > Advanced options....
You can also use initialization files for setting variables. For more detailed information, see
Setting variables (p. 80). We recommend that you only use one of these methods to set
variables.
Topics List of variables (p. 285)
Categories in the Advanced Options dialog box (p. 285)
User variables (p. 286)
See also About variables (p. 80)
Setting variables (p. 80)
8.1 List of variables

Click on a letter below to see a list of variables that begin with that letter, ignoring the initial
letters XS. For example, under A you will find the variable XS_AISC_WELD_MARK, under B,
XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR,etc.
Variables starting with XSR are listed under R. They control how Tekla Structures displays
imperial units in reports and drawing tables.
A B C D E F G H I J K L
M N O P R S T U V W Z
Categories in the Advanced Options dialog box

The Advanced Options dialog box groups variables in the following categories:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com Variables
• Analysis & Design
• CNC
• Components
• Concrete Detailing
• Dimensioning: General
• Dimensioning: Bolts
• Dimensioning: Parts
• Dimensioning: Unfolding
• Drawing Properties
• Drawing View
• Export
• File Locations
• Hatching
• Imperial Units
• Import
• Marking: General
• Marking: Bolts
• Marking: Parts
• Model View
• Modeling Properties
• Multi-user
• Numbering
• Plate Work
• Printing
• Profiles
• Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
• Speed and Accuracy
• Templates and Symbols
• Welds

User variables
Tekla Structures saves the settings for the following variables in the
options_username.ini file:

www.cadfamily.com
Variables EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
• XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY
• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR
• XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT
• XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X
• XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_Y
• XS_BASICVIEW_WIDTH
• XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR
• XS_CLASH_CHECK_COLOR
• XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY
• XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE
• XS_DEFAULT_FONT
• XS_DISABLE_PARTIAL_REFRESH
• XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS
• XS_DO_NOT_DISPLAY_CHAMFERS
• XS_DO_NOT_PLOT_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLES
• XS_DONT_SHOW_POLYBEAM_MID_EDGES
• XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT
• XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X
• XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y
• XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH
• XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR
• XS_GRID_DIMENSION_OVERALL_LENGTH
• XS_HIDDEN_USE_BOLT_PLANES
• XS_IMPORT_MODEL_LOG
• XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING
• XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX
• XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE
• XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX
• XS_MACRO_LOG
• XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT
• XS_MDIVIEWPARENT
• XS_MDIZOOMPARENT
• XS_NO_AUTO_DISPLAY_VIEWS
• XS_NO_CHAMFERS_IN_EXACT_MODE
• XS_PIXEL_TOLERANCE

• XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL
• XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT
• XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_COLORS
• XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_LINES
• XS_REFERENCE_ROUND_SEGMENTS
• XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING
• RPC_WAIT_TIME
• XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
• XS_SNAPSHOT_DIRECTORY
• XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE
• TEXT_X_SIZE
• TEXT_Y_SIZE
• XS_TEXT_FONT
• XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_TITLE
• XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS
• XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_SHEET_SIZES
• XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_WELD_LENGTH
• XS_USE_SMOOTH_LINES
• XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING
• XS_VIEW_HEIGHT
• XS_VIEW_POSITION_X
• XS_VIEW_POSITION_Y
• XS_VIEW_WIDTH
• XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE
• XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE
• XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO
• XS_CIS_DEP1_EXPRESS_FILE
• XS_POP_MARK_EDGE_DISTANCE


www.cadfamily.com
8.2 A
XS_AD_CURVED_BEAM_SPLIT_ACCURACY_MM
Category Analysis & Design
Use to set the maximum distance between a curved member and straight segment. The default
is 25 mm.
See also XS_AD_CURVED_BEAMS_BY_STRAIGHT_SEGMENTS
XS_AD_CURVED_BEAMS_BY_STRAIGHT_SEGMENTS
Set to TRUE to model curved beams as straight segments in the analysis model. Using straight
segments ensures that releases are supported for curved beams. The default is TRUE.
When set to FALSE, straight segments are not used.
See also XS_AD_CURVED_BEAM_SPLIT_ACCURACY_MM
XS_AD_DISABLE_EDITING_BY_UDA
Use to negate the effect of the following user-defined attributes on analysis models:
• Member level
• Node offset X
• Node offset Y
• Node offset Z
See also Fine-tuning analysis model
XS_AD_ELEMENT_ANGLE_CHECK_ANGLE_DIFF_LIMIT
Use to set a limit angle between physical part and analysis model member, in order to test the
validity of the analysis model. When the angle is greater than the limit, a message appears and
a warning is added to the log. Small differences in angles are usual in the analysis model of a
truss, for example.
XS_AD_ENABLE_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL

Set to TRUE to simplify the analysis model on the edges of plates that are shorter than the limit
value set by the variable XS_AD_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL_LIMIT_MM.
A typical example is a slab supported by a beam close to the slab edge, so that the beam
centerline is located 100–200 mm from the slab edge.
When the analysis model is generated for the slab, nodes appear in the beam centerline and too
many nodes and small elements appear in the area between the centerline and the edge
(cantilever). Typically the cantilever area is not required in the calculation, so this option tries
to remove that area.
XS_AD_MEMBER_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION
Use to show or hide member numbers when displaying the analysis model in a model view. The
default is TRUE, which shows the numbers.
See also Showing analysis models and support conditions in model views
XS_AD_MEMBER_TYPE_VISUALIZATION
Use color to show different analysis member types when displaying the analysis model in a
model view. A setting of FALSE shows the analysis members in red. The default setting is TRUE.
This identifies analysis members using the following colors:
• Red = normal member
• Gray = composite beam
• Green = truss member
• Violet = truss member, tension only
• Yellow = truss member, compression only
• Dark blue = rigid link
• Light blue = plate, slab, or panel edge

XS_AD_NODE_COLLISION_CHECK_DISTANCE

www.cadfamily.com
To make members meet in analysis models, Tekla Structures merges analysis nodes. Tekla
Structures will not merge nodes that are farther apart then the value you specify in this variable.
The default is 10 mm.
XS_AD_NODE_NUMBER_VISUALIZATION
Use to show or hide node numbers when displaying the analysis model in a model view. The
default is TRUE, which shows the numbers.
XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_DISABLED
Use to check profile catalog analysis values. For more information, see
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL.
XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_RECURSE_CATALOG
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures ignore profile catalog rules for optimizing steel part sizes
and search the entire profile catalog.
XS_AD_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL_LIMIT_MM
Sets the limit distance for cantilever area to be removed from the slab or plate edge in the
analysis. For more information, see
XS_AD_ENABLE_PLATE_CANTILEVER_REMOVAL.
XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_DISTANCE_LIMIT
Use to define the distance at which Tekla Structures considers nodes to be too close. The default
value is 100 mm. When nodes are too close to each other in slab or wall meshes, Tekla Structures
writes information to the analysis.log file.
To define the distance within which Tekla Structures considers nodes to be too close, use this
variable.
To restrict the distance check to a particular object, enter the object ID in the Value field for the
variable XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_PART_ID. The default value is 0.
Tekla Structures writes three rows in the analysis.log file:
• The first row contains information on parts, for example: "Mesh point distances less
than the specified limit for PartId: 123"
• The second row contains information on the first node, for example: " NodeId: 456,
x = 100.0000, y = 200.0000, z = 10000.000"

• The third row contains information on the second node, and distance, for example: " -
>NodeId: 789, x = 150.0000, y = 200.0000, z = 10000.000, distance =
50.0000"
When you click a line in the log file that contains an object ID, Tekla Structures highlights the
object in the model.
XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_PART_ID
Use to restrict the distance check in slab or wall mesh nodes to a particular object. For more
information, see XS_AD_PLATE_MESH_CHECK_DISTANCE_LIMIT.
XS_AD_RESULT_DATABASE_ENABLED
Use to define whether the analysis results database analysis_results.db5 is created or

not. The default setting is TRUE. This creates the analysis results database.
If you decide not to create the analysis results database, set this variable to FALSE. In this way
the use of large models with several load combinations is faster and less memory consuming.
XS_AD_SOLID_AXIAL_EXPAND_MM
Extended clash check is the default method when creating analysis models. By default this
expands solids by 1 mm in all directions, including the axial direction. Use this variable to define
how much solids expand in the axial direction.
XS_AD_SUPPORT_VISUALIZATION
Use to show or hide the support conditions when showing the analysis model in a model view.
The default is TRUE, which shows the support conditions.
XS_AD_TWIN_PROFILES_ENABLED
Use to enable or disable the twin profile support in analysis and design. To treat twin profiles as
one member in the analysis, set to TRUE. When set to FALSE, Tekla Structures creates two
analysis members of the twin profiles in the analysis model.
XS_ADJUST_GRID_LABELS
Category Model view
To disable the dynamic moving of grid labels when zooming in, and to keep the labels anchored
to the end of the grid line, set the variable to FALSE. By default, the grid line labels are kept
visible. When working with very large grids, having the grid labels always visible might slow
down Tekla Structures. After you change the variable setting, close and re-open the view to
implement the change.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_AISC_WELD_MARK
Category Welds
Set to 1 to create welding marks according to the AISC standard, instead of the ISO standard
(Default).
AISC weld symbols show the arrow-side weld properties below the reference line in a weld
symbol, and the other-side properties above it.
XS_ALIGN_CUT_SYMBOL_BY_VERTICAL_LINE
Category Drawing properties
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures align the cut symbol with the vertical cut line.
When you set the variable to TRUE, the value of the longitudinal offset is 0. If the variable is not
set, the longitudinal offset is the arrow size multiplied by 1.25.
The variable is set to TRUE. Use this option when you need to see the exact
location of the section view.
The variable is not set. Use this option when it is important to see the direc-
tion rather than the exact location of the section view.
The variable XS_ALIGN_CUT_SYMBOL_BY_VERTICAL_LINE is effec-

tive only when you convert drawings created with Tekla Structures 11.3
or earlier to Tekla Structures 12.0 or later.
XS_ALLOW_DRAWING_TO_MANY_MULTI_DRAWINGS
Category Numbering

Assign any value to this variable to enable the same drawings to be included in more than one
multi-drawing.
If this variable is disabled, you can only include each drawing in one multi-drawing.
XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_DIMENSIONS
Category Dimensioning: general
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include the inch symbol in dimensions.
XS_ALLOW_INCH_MARK_IN_WELD_SYMBOLS
Category Imperial units
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include the inch symbol in weld symbols.
XS_ALLOW_SHEAR_PLATE_CLASH_FLANGE
Category Components
Set to TRUE to omit the default 0.3mm tolerance between shear plate and secondary part web for
shear plate components.
XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_CLOSING_DRAWING
If you close a drawing without making any changes, Tekla Structures does not prompt you to
save the drawing.
Enter TRUE in the value field to always display the confirmation dialog box:
XS_ALWAYS_CONFIRM_SAVE_WHEN_EXIT
Category Modeling Properties
Use to define whether or not Tekla Structures prompts you to save the model if you are closing
it without making any changes.
If the value is set to TRUE, Tekla Structures always asks you to save the model when closing it.
If the value is set to FALSE, Tekla Structures does not ask you to save the model if there are no
changes after the last save.
The default value is TRUE.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER
Category Drawing Properties
Use to add additional parts that are not usually part of a column assembly to an anchor bolt plan,
such as anchor rods or leveling plates. First define a general arrangement drawing filter and then
define that filter name as the value for this variable.
See also Adding additional parts in anchor bolt plan using a drawing filter
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER
Use to limit the number of visible objects by using filtering to determine the parts to be included
in the anchor bolt plan. First create the base plate filter, then enter its name as the value for the
variable. Tekla Structures will not show in the anchor bolt plan the base plates included in the
filter.
Example XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER=<the name of the filter for
base plates>
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER
in the anchor bolt plan. First create the bolt filter, then enter its name as the value for the
variable. Tekla Structures will not show in the anchor bolt plan the bolts included in the filter.
Example XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER=<the name of the filter for bolts>
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER
in the anchor bolt plan. First create the column filter, then enter its name as the value for the
variable. Tekla Structures will not show in the anchor bolt plan the columns included in the filter.
Example XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER=<the name of the filter for
columns>
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE
Use to specify the distance of an assembly from the view plane for the assembly to be included
in the anchor bolt plan. Define the distance in millimeters. The default value is 200.
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSI
ONS

Use to select the direction for the dimensions in the anchor bolt plans. If set to TRUE, anchor
bolt plan detail view dimensions are created using the coordinate system of the main view. The
variable is set to FALSE by default, which means that the dimensions of anchor bolt plan detail
views are created according to the base plate coordinate system.
XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR
Use to define the size of angle symbols:
Value 1 Value 3 (default) Value 5
Setting this variable disables the variable

XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE.
XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING
Category Dimensioning: unfolding
Use to set the prefix text for unfolded angles. This affects single-part drawings that show folded
parts unfolded. See also Unfolding dimensions.
XS_APPLICATIONS
Use to define which folder contains the connection, detail, and modeling tool applications.
If this variable is disabled, the applications folder is two levels up from the path defined by the
variable XS_INP.
XS_ARC_WIDTH_OF_CLOUD
Use to control the width of cloud arcs on paper (default 10 mm). You can use the Cloud tool to
highlight changes in drawings.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_ASCII_IMPORT_CREATES_CONSTRUCTION_LINES
Category Import
Set to 1 to have Tekla Structures only draw construction lines between object points in an ASCII
import.
ASCII_LEGEND_PATH
Category Templates and symbols
Points to the location of the text fields listing file.
XS_ASSEMBLY_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE
Use to define a title for assembly drawing views in a multi-drawing. The options are:
• PART_NAME
• PART_MATERIAL
• PART_POS, ASSEMBLY_POS
• MODEL_NUMBER
• LENGTH, PROFILE
• LENGTH
• BASE_NAME
• NAME
XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category Numbering
Use to define the contents of the assembly family position number. For example, instead of
DT1-1, DT1-2, you can define the numbering as DT1-1A or DT1-A, DT1-B.
Set the variable as follows:
XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING=
%%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%%%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_NUMBER%-
%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER_WITH_LETTERS%%
Use the following switches to define the contents of family position numbers. Use as many
switches as you need, and enclose each one in double percent symbols (%%).
Switch Description
%%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%% Assembly prefix, defined in the part
%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_NUMBER%% Assembly family number, defined by
the start number (in part properties
dialog box) and the final position in that
numbering series.

Switch Description
%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION Assembly family letter, defined by the
_WITH_LETTERS%% start character (in part properties dialog
box) and the final character in the series.
Uses letters A to Z by default, but you
can also define valid letters with the
variable
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEM
BLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMB
ERS.
%%ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIE Assembly family qualifier with letters.
R_WITH_LETTERS%%
Uses letters A – Z by default, but you
variable
BLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER.
See also Family numbering
XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category Numbering
Use to base assembly numbers on drawing numbers. Use the following switches to define the
contents of assembly marks. Use as many switches as you need, and enclose each one in double
percent symbols (%%).
The available switches are:
Switch Description
ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DRA Multidrawing name.
WING_NUMBER
ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DRA Position of the assembly drawing inside the
WING_POS multidrawing.
ASSEMBLY_PREFIX Assembly prefix in the model.
ASSEMBLY_POS Assembly position number in the model.
Template fields Enter UDA: followed by the name of any relevant
template field. Enclose each name in double
percent symbols (%%). For example,
%%UDA:PHASE%%
User-defined attributes Enter UDA: followed by the name of any relevant
user-defined attribute, exactly as it appears in the
objects.inp file. For example,
%%UDA:MY_INFO_1%%
Example To put the assembly multinumbers in the format multi drawing name + part prefix + position on
multi drawing, set the variable as follows:
XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING=%%ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DR
AWING_NUMBER%%%%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%%%%ASSEMBLY_MULTI_DRAWIN
G_POS%%
This will create the assembly mark 10B1, where:

www.cadfamily.com
• 10 is the drawing number
• B is the assembly prefix
• 1 designates that it is the first assembly on the sheet.

See also XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_3D
Set to TRUE to include Z orientation in assembly position codes.
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_TOLERANCE
Tolerance distance to use when identifying grid position code for assembly.
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category Numbering
Use to have Tekla Structures only use letters in assembly numbers.
Do not change this variable after you have created single-part, assembly,
or cast-unit drawings! It may partially separate drawings from the part
they are representing, causing the drawings to be flagged as deleted and
another drawings cloned after the next numbering.
The switches are:
Switch Description
%%ASSEMBLY_PREFIX%% Assembly prefix, defined in the part
%%ASSEMBLY_POS%% Assembly position number, defined by
the start number (from part properties
numbering series.
%%ASSEMBLY_POS_WITH_LETTERS Same as above, but with letters.
%%
variable
BLY_POSITION_NUMBERS.
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE
Category Dimensioning: General

Use to define the height of the change symbol around the points. The default value is 7.
See also XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES (p. 346)
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL
Use to define the used change symbol. The default value is AssociativityAnchor@1 (a
cloud).
XS_ATTRIBUTE_FILE_EXCLUDE_LIST
Category File Locations
Enter the file name or a part of the file name that you want to exclude from the user interface as
the value for the variable. If you enter many values, separate them using a semicolon (;). For
example, setting the variable to _eng;_det removes all the attribute files that include the string
_eng or _det in their name from the user interface.
XS_AUTOCONNECTION_TOLERANCE
Category Components
Use to set the size of the area that Tekla Structures searches for parts to connect with
AutoConnection. Can only be set in millimeters.
Example For 500 millimeters:
XS_AUTOCONNECTION_TOLERANCE=500.0
XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL
Category Components
Set to switch on UDL calculation in AutoConnection. This calculates the maximum shear force
allowed.
XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL=TRUE
XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT
Category Components
Use to set a default percentage for UDL calculation.

In AutoDefaultsTekla Structures uses the percentage in the connection properties. If no
percentage is given, Tekla Structures uses this value.
In AutoConnection only the default percentage is used. You switch UDL calculation on with
the variable XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL.
XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT=50
XS_AUTOMATIC_NEW_MODEL_NAME

www.cadfamily.com
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures suggest a name for a new model automatically in the New
dialog box. The name of the model is New model XX, where XX is a running number.
Set the variable to FALSE to have no suggestion for a model name of a new model in the New
dialog box. The variable is set to TRUE by default.
XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SAVING_INTERVAL
Use to change the saving interval of the automatic user feedback information. The value of the
variable corresponds to the number of rows in the log file.
The log file is called UserFeedbackLog.txt and it is located in the
TeklaStructuresModels folder.
XS_AUTOMATIC_USER_FEEDBACK_SENDING_INTERVAL
Use to change the sending interval of the automatic user feedback information. The value of the
variable corresponds to the number of rows in the log file.
The log file is called UserFeedbackLog.txt and it is located in the
TeklaStructuresModels folder.
XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY
Category File locations
Use to point to the folder containing files Tekla Structures saves automatically.
If this variable is disabled, Tekla Structures places autosave files in the current model folder.
8.3 B
XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1
Category Model view
To have a gradient background color in model views, use the variables

XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1, XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2, XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR3 and
XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR4 to control the color of corners separately in a model view.

Define the color using the RGB (Red Green Blue) values (scale is from 0 to 1). If you want to
use the traditional single-colored background, set the same value for all four background color
variables. Reopen the view for the change to take effect.
Black or white • Use 0.0 0.0 0.0 for black background
background
• Use 1.0 1.0 1.0 for white background
Category Model view
See XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1.
Category Model view
Category Model view
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH
Category Plotting

www.cadfamily.com
Use to specify the base line width for printed drawings. The default value is 0.1. The final line
thicknesses in a printed drawing is base line width multiplied by pen numbers from the Color
table dialog box.
To control the accuracy of line thickness, use a small value for

XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH and a large number for the pen.
This variable also affects lines in the display, if

XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH_AFFECTS_SCREEN is set to TRUE.
XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH_AFFECTS_SCREEN
Category Plotting
Use to control whether XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH affects line widths drawn in the display or
not.
Enter FALSE in the Value field if you do not want XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH to affect line
widths in the display.
XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT
Category Model view
Use to control the height of basic view windows. For more information, see
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X.
Example XS_BASICVIEW_HEIGHT=570
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X
Category Model view
Use to control the horizontal position of basic view windows on the screen.
Origin If the variable XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT is set, the origin for the position is the top left
corner of the client area. Otherwise, the origin is the top left corner of the whole Tekla Structures
window. Moving a toolbar also affects the size of the client area, because menus and toolbars
are not part of it.
Units The width and height are in pixels.
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_Y
Category Model view
Use to control the vertical position of basic view windows on the screen. For information on
using this variable, see XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X.
XS_BASICVIEW_WIDTH
Category Model view

Use to control the width of basic view windows. For information on using this variable, see
XS_BASICVIEW_POSITION_X.
XS_BEVEL_DIMENSIONS_FOR_PROFILES_ONLY
Category Dimensioning: Parts
Use to define whether to show bevel dimensions only for profiles.

By default, the variable is set to FALSE.
If yout set the variable to TRUE, bevel dimensions are shown only for profiles
If you set the variable to FALSE, bevel dimensions are shown always.
XSBIN
Use to define the location of the Tekla Structuresbin folder.
XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND
Category Drawing view
Set to TRUE to have a black backgound and colored lines in drawings. To enable white
background and black lines, clear the Value field.
This variable is user-specific, not model-specific. It only affects the

colored mode, not black-and-white mode.
See also Colors in drawings

XS_USE_COLOR_DRAWINGS
XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON
Category Modeling properties
Use to round bolt length.

Tekla Structures calculates bolt length using material thickness. To avoid having several bolt
lengths where material thickness only differs slightly, set XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON to a
positive or negative value. Tekla Structures adds or subtracts this value from the material
thickness in bolt length calculation. Enter the value in millimeters (all environments). Typical
values are 0.001–0.5.
See also Bolt length calculation
XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX
Category Marking: bolts
Use to specify a prefix for bolt mark diameter. The possible values are NONE or the desired
string.
Example For a bolt group consisting of three 20 mm diameter bolts:

www.cadfamily.com
• If the variable is disabled
the result is 3*M20
• If XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX=NONE
the result is 3*20
• If XS_BOLT_MARK_DIAMETER_PREFIX=D
the result is 3*D20
XS_BOLT_MARK_IS_ALWAYS_VISIBLE_IN_GA
Set to TRUE to hide the bolt marks of bolts hidden from views by other objects in general
arrangement drawings.
Example If there are bolts on either side of a beam, one will be hidden by the beam in front of it. Set this
variable to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures displaying the bolt mark of the hidden bolt.
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Use to define the contents of the Size element in bolt marks. The variables
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE and
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE override this setting.
For switches you can use to define the contents, see Size element in bolt marks.
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Category Marking: Bolts
Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks in general arrangement drawings. If
you have not set the variables XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p.
385) or XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391), then this variable
is used.
See also Size element in bolt marks
XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT
Category Dimensioning: bolts
Use to create minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts.

Example XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT=TRUE
XS_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_PLANE_IN_NC
Category CNC
Set to TRUE to dimension bolts perpendicular to part plane in NC files.

8.4 C
XS_CALC_REFOBJ_PROTECT
Set toTRUE to have Tekla Structures calculate the protection area of reference objects in
drawings. By default Tekla Structures does not calculate the protection area.
There should not be any reason to set this variable, as the protect informa-
tion for reference objects is currently not used in drawing creation. Using
this variable slows down drawing production.
XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE
Use to have Tekla Structures calculate polybeam length along the reference line instead of the
centerline. By default, Tekla Structures measures polybeam length along the centerline of the
beam, regardless of the Position in plane values of the beam.
See also Polybeam length calculation.
The centerline option is always a safe alternative, because other modifi-

cations do not impact on it. For example, if you calculate length using the
reference line and you have used offsets to move the beam, the result may
not be the true length of the beam.
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING
Use to define gage information in the bolt mark. See also GOL, C/C, GAGE.
Defining the Use the switch %%VALUE%% for the numeric value of a gage. Add text before and after the value.
contents
If %%VALUE%% is missing, then Tekla Structures adds the center-to-center distance to the end of
the string.
If the variable is disabled, only %%VALUE%% is used.
If Tekla Structures cannot calculate the gage, then nothing is added to the mark.
Example There is a symmetrical bolt group in beam flange. The value for gage is 10.
Definition in the initialization file Bolt mark

set GAGE = 10
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_
PART_STRING=GAGE = %%VALUE%%

www.cadfamily.com
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING
Use to define the center-to-center distance information in the bolt mark where there are two
parts.
For more information on defining the contents, see
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING.
Example For a symmetrical bolt group in two clip angles. The center-to-center distance is 10.
Definition in the initialization file Bolt mark

set c/c = 10
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_P
ARTS_STRING=c/c = %%VALUE%%
XS_CHAMFER_ACCURACY_FACTOR
Category Speed and accuracy
Use to define the number of points used for chamfers.

The default value is 1.0. Use values smaller than 1.0 to increase the number of points. Use values
larger than 1.0 to decrease the number of points.
XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR
Category Model view
Use to adjust chamfer length. Tekla Structures calculates plate chamfer length from the plate
side length using the following formula: XS_CHAMFER_DISPLAY_LENGTH_FACTOR * plate side
length. By default this factor is 0.08.
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED
Use to define whether dimensions have fixed placing when you drag them away from their
original locations. When set to TRUE, dimension placing uses fixed placing routine instead of
free placing.
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED
Use to define whether part, bolt and reinforcement marks have fixed placing when you drag
them away from their original locations. When set to TRUE, mark placing uses fixed placing
routine instead of free placing.
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED

Use to define whether associative notes have fixed placing when you drag them away from their
original locations. When set to TRUE, associative notes placing uses fixed placing routine
instead of free placing.
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED
Use to define whether texts have fixed placing when you drag them away from their original
locations. When set to TRUE, text uses fixed placing routine instead of free placing.
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED
Use to define whether views have fixed placing when you drag them away from their original
locations. When set to TRUE, view placing uses fixed placing routine instead of free placing
XS_CHANGE_MARK_ASTERISK_TO
Category Marking: parts
Use to specify a symbol to replace the asterisk character (*) in bolt marks and the size elements
of part marks.
Example XS_CHANGE_MARK_ASTERISK_TO=X
You cannot use this variable to change the asterisk character in profile strings (e.g. PL10*100).
XS_CHANGE_WORKAREA_WHEN_MODIFYING_VIEW_DEPTH
Category Model view
Makes working with reference files easier. By default, objects such as parts and reference files
outside the work area are not visible, even when they are within the display depth range.
Set to TRUE to automatically adjust the work area when you change the display depth.
XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO
Category Plate work
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures check plate length and plate width, then compare it with
the possible dimensions for flat bars in fltprops.inp.
If disabled, Tekla Structures only checks plate width.
XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE
Sizes the triangle to fit text in bevel dimensions.

www.cadfamily.com
To define the angle symbol size, use the variable
XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR.
Using variable XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR will

disable variable XS_CHECK_TRIANGLE_TEXT_SIZE.
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS
Category Speed and Accuracy
Use to define the chord tolerance for round tubes smaller than or equal to the limit set by the
variable XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT. Enter the value in millimeters.
The default value is 1.0.
See also XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT (p. 310)

XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS (p. 309)
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS
Use to define the chord tolerance for round tubes larger than the limit set by the variable
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT. Enter the value in millimeters. The
default value is 1.0.
Chord tolerance Chord tolerance is the maximum difference between a straight segment used to display a
tubular section in model views and the actual tubular section:

See also XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT (p. 310)
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS (p. 309)
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_SMALL_TUBE_SIZE_LIMIT
Use to define the limit that determines whether a tube is considered small when calculating the
chord tolerance. The value is compared to the diameter of the profile. Enter the value in
millimeters. The default value is 50.0.
See also XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_TUBE_SEGMENTS (p. 309)
XS_CHORD_TOLERANCE_FOR_SMALL_TUBE_SEGMENTS (p. 309)
XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_NAME
Use to define the name of the temporary database used in CIMsteel transfers.
XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PASSW
Use to define the password for the temporary database used in CIMsteel transfers.
XS_CIS_DEP1_DATABASE_PATH
Use to define a path to the temporary database that Tekla Structures creates while converting a
model from/to CIMsteel STEP format.
XS_CIS_DEP1_EXPRESS_FILE
Use to define the name of the EXPRESS file located in the system folder. The EXPRESS file
describes the CIMsteel DEP1 logical product model. It is used when you convert a Tekla
Structures model to/from CIMsteel DEP1 STEP format.
XS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES
Use to define whether or not Tekla Structures should run the clash check also between reference
models.

www.cadfamily.com
Set to TRUE if you want to perform clash check also between two reference models. The default
value is FALSE.
XS_CLASH_CHECK_COLOR
Category Model view
Use to change the color that indicates clashing parts. You can use fourteen colors (numbered
from 1 to 14, see Colors). The default color is yellow (= 6).
XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY
If you use model history log files, set this variable to clear history data from the log file each
time you open and save the model.
See also XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY
XS_CNC_HOLE_DIAMETER_ROUNDING
Category CNC
Defines the rounding factor of holes for NC files. NC files are accurate to 0.01 mm.
Use to round up bolt diameters with very small differences in diameter to the same value. You
may need to use different diameters because bolts can have different tolerance values in a Tekla
Structures model. You can input more decimals into bolt tolerance values in the component
dialog boxes than in the general bolt dialog box.
The rounding routine is used only when you create NC files.
Set the rounding factor the same value (in mm) as the drill tolerance of the machine tool.
Tekla Structures divides the original hole diameter by the rounding factor, then rounds the result
to the nearest integer, then multiplies it by the rounding factor. As a result, bolt diameters with
very small differences in diameter are now rounded up to the same value.
Example set XS_CNC_HOLE_DIAMETER_ROUNDING=1.5875
Here the rounding factor is 1.5875 (1/16 inch), which results in:
• Diameter 26.99 mm (1” 1/16 from component dialog box) => 26.99/1.5875 => 17.00 => 17
=> 17*1.5875 => 26.99 mm
• Diameter 27.00 mm (1” 1/16 from bolt dialog box) => 27.00/1.5875 => 17.01 => 17 =>
17*1.5875 => 26.99 mm
XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY
Tekla Structures can collect model history data on various objects, for example, parts in the
inquire object dialog, rebars, components in reports, etc. Collecting model history data may
require a lot of disk space and memory so Tekla Structures does not collect it by default. To
collect the data, set this variable to TRUE.
We recommend that you collect the history only if you really need it.

This variable works mainly in multi-user mode. In single-user mode
Tekla Structures collects the history data only on deleted parts.
See also XS_CLEAR_MODEL_HISTORY
XS_COMBINED_BOLT_DIM_CHARACTER
Use to set the character in bolt dimensions.

Example The character used in the bolt dimension 4*50 is *.
XS_COMPLEX_PART_MEMBERS_DO_NOT_HAVE_TO_BE_MAIN_PARTS
Category Dimensioning: parts
Use in complex part/ assembly dimensioning to have Tekla Structures dimension other than
main parts as one.
XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_COLLECTION_NAME_LENGTH
Collection names in the component catalog are truncated to 12 characters. Use this variable to
adjust the length of the names, then re-open the component catalog.
This may increase the size of the component catalog dialog box.
See also XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_THUMBNAIL_SIZE
XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_THUMBNAIL_SIZE
Use to adjust the size of thumbnails to between 6 and 96 pixels. The default is 96 pixels. After
changing the value, re-open the component catalog.
This may increase the size of the component catalog dialog box.
See also XS_COMPONENT_CATALOG_COLLECTION_NAME_LENGTH

www.cadfamily.com
XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_PREFIX
Use to define a numbering prefix for concrete parts.
XS_CONCRETE_PART_NUMBERING_START_NUMBER
Use to define a starting number for concrete parts.
XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL
Use to change the symbol for a connecting side mark. By default the side mark symbol is number
34 in the symbol file. To change the symbol, set this variable to a different symbol number.
XS_CONNECT_PLATE_PROFILES_IN_AUTOCONNECTION
Category Components
Set to TRUE to enable AutoConnection for built-in members. If disabled, Tekla Structures does
not consider plates as members when you use AutoConnection.
XS_CONSIDER_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS_IN_HIDDEN
Set to draw parts behind neighboring parts using hidden lines.
XS_CONSIDER_REBAR_NAME_IN_NUMBERING
Category Concrete detailing
Set to FALSE to haveTekla Structures only take part names into account when numbering, not
reinforcing bar names.
XS_CONVERT_OLD_FORCE_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM
Category Components
Use to define how to convert part and connection attribute tables when you open a Tekla
Structures catalog prior to version 7.0.
Example To convert force units from kip to SI, set XS_CONVERT_OLD_FORCE_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM to
kip.
You can use the following units: kg/T/N/daN/kN/lbf/kip, or a numerical value.
XS_CONVERT_OLD_MOMENT_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM
Use to define how to convert part and connection attribute tables when you open a Tekla
Structures catalog prior to version 7.0.
Example To convert moment units from kip-ft to SI, set
XS_CONVERT_OLD_MOMENT_UNITS_TO_SI_FROM to kip-ft.

You can use the following units: kgm/Tm/Nm/daNm/kNm/lbf-in/lbf-ft/kip-in/kip-ft, or a
numerical value.
XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK
Use to determine how the quantity of parts with merged part marks is shown.
Example When there are four or more identical stiffeners on both sides of a beam web, the mark is
• 4x1002BS if XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK=TRUE
• 2x1002BS if XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK is not set.
See also XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK
XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK
Use to determine how the quantity of parts with merged part marks is shown.
Example When there are two identical stiffeners on both sides of a beam web, the mark is
• 2x1002BS if XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK=TRUE
• 1002BS if XS_COUNT_BOTH_PARTS_IN_NSFS_PART_MARK is not set.
See also XS_COUNT_ALL_PARTS_IN_NSFS_REPEATED_PART_MARK
XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING
Category Marking: General
Use to create all marks to a cloned drawing where new parts have been added, set the variable
To create the marks, set the variable to TRUE. The default is FALSE.
XS_CREATE_ROUND_HOLE_DIMENSIONS
Enter TRUE in the Value field to have Tekla Structures dimension the round hole center point in
drawings.
XS_CREATE_CONNECTION_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS
Set to TRUE to link copied views to the original drawing. For example, when you delete a
drawing from which you copied a view, Tekla Structures also deletes the copied view.
XS_CREATE_VIEW_FROM_MODEL_OLD_WAY
Use to specify which values Tekla Structures uses for view extrema in general arrangement
drawings. This only affects views created from the model.
If disabled (default), the view extrema values are based on the current work area x and y
coordinates of a model view.

www.cadfamily.com
When this variable is set to TRUE, the extrema values of a drawing view are based on the entire
model view, ignoring the work area settings.
In both cases depth values are based on the model view display depth values.
XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE
Use to change the angles dividing a cross section chamfer (default 10.0 degrees).
Example XS_CS_CHAMFER_DIVIDE_ANGLE=10.0
XS_CURVED_AXIS_PLACE
Category Profiles
By default, Tekla Structures calculates the length of curved parts along the center axis. Use this
variable to define the position of this axis as a ratio.
Tekla Structures calculates the location of the axis using the formula h=H/2.0*ratio. The default
value is zero. Define the ratio as 1.0 to calculate length along the upper flange. Define the ratio
as -1.0 to define the length along the lower flange.
This value is used in reports and drawing templates.
XS_CUT_SYMBOL_FONT
Use to define the font for section symbol text. If you do not specify a font, Tekla Structures uses
the default font.
XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_MAX_LOOPS
Use to define how many cycles Tekla Structures makes to solve the dependencies in custom
components. Enter a number for the amount of cycle loops. The default is 2.
XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_USE_ATTRIBUTE_LOOPS
Used in solving dependencies in custom components. Attributes should not be used when Tekla
Structures is solving the multiple dependencies so set this variable to FALSE.
See also XS_CYCLIC_SOLVER_MAX_LOOPS
8.5 D
DAK_BMPPATH
Use to point to the folder for bitmap files used in
• custom components

• user-defined attributes (objects.inp file)
• profile catalog
• some system components

By default this variable is defined in the teklastructures.ini file and it points to the
folder:\TeklaStructures\14.0\nt\bitmaps
To change this folder
1. Copy the entire contents of the \TeklaStructures\14.0\nt\bitmaps folder to
the new location.
2. Add this variable DAK_BMPPATH to the user.ini file.
XS_DEFAULT_FONT
Category Model view
Use to specify the default font when modeling and drawing.
XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE
Category Model view
Use to set the default font size when modeling.
XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DRAWINGS
Category This variable is available only in initialization files.
Set the variable to TRUE in the global_default_env.ini file located in the
..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\country-independent folder to
have Tekla Structures delete unnecessary drawing files.
See also Deleting unnecessary dg files (p. 75)
XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS
Use to define a fixed size for circle-shaped detail boundaries in detail views.
Enter a numeric value in millimeters for the radius.
XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE
Sets the reference text for symbols that show a detail from another drawing. Enter the text in the
Value field. The text can include:
• free text
• user-defined attributes
• template attributes
If you set the variable in the Advanced options dialog box, use single % characters around the
user-defined and template attributes. For example, %DRAWING_TITLE%.

www.cadfamily.com
If you set the variable in the initialization files, use double % characters around the user-defined
and template attributes. For example, %%DRAWING_TITLE%%.
XS_DETAIL_VIEW_REFERENCE
Sets the reference text for detail view labels. See also
XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE.
XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS
Category Export
Use to specify how Tekla Structures exports solids to DGN format.

Set to CELL to export solids as cells containing the solid faces as a DGN shape.
Set to SOLID to export solids as DGN solids defined by boundary elements.
XS_DGN_EXPORT_USE_LOCAL_ID
Category Export
Enter TRUE in the Value field to enable the use of local ID numbers in 3D DGN export. Every
exported part gets a unique ID number starting from 1. The ID is saved as a user-defined attribute
and the same ID will be used in consequent exports.
XS_DIMENSION_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY
Se to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from combining bolt group dimensions.
XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR
Use to define the character to be used as a decimal separator in dimension and level marks.
XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR = <separator character>.
In the following example, the dimension mark contains a comma when the dimension settings
in the Dimension Properties dialog box are as follows, and the variable is set to
XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR=,

In the following example, the separator was first a period and was then changed to a comma.
XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER
Use to specify which separator character to use in large dimension values: for example a comma
(,), where 154321 would become 154,321. If no character is specified, Tekla Structures uses a
space in dimensions when you select Yes in Dimension properties > General > Use grouping.
See also XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT
Dimension properties
XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT
Use to specify the number of digits after which a separator character will be inserted in
dimension values: for example 3, where 154321 would become 154 321.
See also XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER
Dimension properties

www.cadfamily.com
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR
See Create short extension lines.
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_ORIGIN_OFFSET
Use to specify the distance between the extension line origin and the start of the extension line
(extension origin offset).
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_ORIGIN_OFFSET=1.0
extension origin offset
XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR
See Create short extension lines.
XS_DIMENSION_FONT
Use to specify the font for dimension text. If you do not specify a font, Tekla Structures uses the
default font.
XS_DIMENSION_LINE_TEXT_EPS
Flips dimension text that is sloped more than the given value. For more information, see
Aligning sloped dimension text.
Example XS_DIMENSION_LINE_TEXT_EPS=0.1
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY
Use to define the content of the part mark dimension in assembly drawings.
• PROFILE
• MATERIAL
• SIZE

• LENGTH
• COMMENT
• WPDIST (distance between work points)
• GR_L (gross length of the part)
Example XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY=PROFILE_AND_MATERIAL
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY=PROFILE_AND_GR_L
See XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE.
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE
Use to define the content of the part mark dimension in single part drawings.
Example XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE=PROFILE_AND_MATERIAL
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE=PROFILE_AND_GR_L

• PROFILE
• MATERIAL
• SIZE
• LENGTH
• COMMENT
• WPDIST (distance between work points)
• GR_L (gross length of the part)
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
To define the symbol Tekla Structures uses in plate side marks, use the following variables:
• XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
• XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
• XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT
By default Tekla Structures uses the symbols no 0, 1 and 2 , defined in the dim
ension_marks.sym file (located usually in the folder \environments\country-
independent\symbols\).
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
See XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER

www.cadfamily.com
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT
See XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_COLOR
Use to define the color of the dimension point invalidity symbol circles. Enter a numerical value
or the name of the color. Default is DARK RED.
Other valid color names are RED, DARK RED, GREEN, DARK GREEN, BLUE, DARK BLUE, CYAN,
DARK CYAN, GREY, DARK GREY, DARK YELLOW, ORANGE, MAGENTA, BLACK.
XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_INNER_RADIUS
Use to define the length of the inner radius of the dimension point circle. Tekla Structures marks
the invalid dimensions with red dimension point circles.
Enter a decimal value for the custom size of the radius. The default value is 1.0.
See also XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_OUTER_RADIUS (p. 321)
XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_OUTER_RADIUS
Use to define the length of the outer radius of the dimension point circle. Tekla Structures marks
the invalid dimensions with red dimension point circles.
Enter a decimal value for the custom size of the radius. The default value is 6.0.
See also XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_INNER_RADIUS (p. 321)
XS_DIMENSION_SKEWED_BOLTS_IN_PART_PLANE_IN_SINGLE_DRAWIN
GS
Set to TRUE to dimension bolts perpendicular to the part plane in single-part drawings.
XS_DIR
Use to point to the folder for Tekla Structures data, source, and binary files.
XS_DISABLE_ADVANCED_OPTIONS
You can disable the Advanced options dialog box so that the variables can be edited in the
batch files only.
To disable the dialog box, set this variable in the initialization files:
set XS_DISABLE_ADVANCED_OPTIONS=TRUE

For more information on variables, seeSetting variables (p. 80).
XS_DISABLE_CANCEL_DIALOG_FOR_SAVE_NUMBERING_SAVE
Category Numbering
Use to revert to the old numbering functionality that offers no option to cancel numbering before
the second save is made.
See also Numbering setup
XS_DISABLE_CIS2
Use to hide or display the CIMSteel command.
To hide the CIMSteel command in the File > Export and File > Import menus, set the
XS_DISABLE_CIS2 variable to TRUE.
Restart Tekla Structures for the change to take effect.
XS_DISABLE_CLASSIFIER_FOR_MODIFIED_PARTS
Use to disable the Drawing Classifier check for modified parts. When you change part properties
in a model after you have defined the Drawing Classifier settings, part presentation and mark
content are updated in general arrangement drawings unless you have set this variable to TRUE.
To disable the check for modified parts, set the variable to TRUE.
To enable the check for modified parts, set the variable to FALSE.
Drawings are not updated if the change does not affect numbering.
XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE
Use to disable the print date information in drawings. Disabling the print date helps to avoid
possible conflicts when working with multi-user models in situations where a user modifies
drawings while another user prints the same drawings.
By default, the variable is set to TRUE.
XS_DISABLE_PARTIAL_REFRESH
Set to TRUE to disable partial refreshing of OpenGL windows.
XS_DISABLE_TEMPLATE_DOUBLE_CLICK
Use to define whether templates are opened when you double-click the template table in
drawings.

www.cadfamily.com
By default, the variable is set to FALSE.
When set to FALSE, the default template editor will be opened when you double-click the
template table.
When set to TRUE, the Drawing Properties dialog is shown when you double-click the template
table.
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_ASSEMBLY
Use to left-align assembly drawing views.
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_GA
Use to left-align GA drawing views.
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_MULTI
Use to left-align multi drawing views.
XS_DISABLE_VIEW_CENTERING_SINGLE
Use to left-align single-part drawing views.
XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID
Use to disable automatic weld preparation. Set this variable to TRUE to prevent automatic weld
preparation when using certain weld types.
XS_DISPLAY_ZERO_INCHES
Use to display zero inches.
XS_DISTANT_OBJECT_FINDER_TOLERANCE
Category Model View
Use to define the distance outside of which the object must be located for it to be listed by the
Find Distant Objects tool.
The distance is measured from the nearest part. Enter the value in meters. The default value is
100.
See also Finding distant objects

XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS
Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from checking dimension points when you open
drawings.
Or define settings for different drawing types using any combination of the switches A, W, M,
G and C (assembly, single-part, multi-, general arrangement and cast unit drawings).
Example To apply to general arrangement, multi- and assembly drawings, set to GMA.
Using this variable in drawings that contain a lot of parts, especially

curved ones, slows down opening drawings and uses a lot of memory.
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS_FOR_CONCRETE_PARTS
Use to control the creation of single-part and assembly drawings from concrete parts.
To enable the creation of drawings, set the variable to FALSE.
To disable the creation of drawings, set the variable to TRUE.
XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PROFILE_DIMENSIONS_FOR_CONCRETE
Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from automatically displaying the profile dimensions of
concrete parts in cast-unit drawings.
XS_DO_NOT_DISPLAY_CHAMFERS
Category Model view
Set to TRUE to draw polygon plates without chamfers.
XS_DO_NOT_DRAW_COLUMN_MARKS_AT_45_DEGREES_IN_GA_DRAWI
NG
Tekla Structures places column marks in GA drawing plan views by default at an angle of 45
degrees in respect to the position of the column. To place the marks horizontally, set this variable
to TRUE.
XS_DO_NOT_EXTEND_DIMENSION_LINES_THROUGH_ALL_HOLES
Set to TRUE to prevent leader lines from extending through all holes in a bolt group.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_DO_NOT_PLOT_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLES
Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from printing red dimension point circles when you print
from the drawing list. Red dimension point circles are always printed, if you have the Drawing
Editor open.
XS_DO_NOT_REMOVE_END_ABSOLUTE_DIMENSIONS
When you use absolute dimensions, by default, Tekla Structures removes the last absolute
vertical dimension. To prevent this, set to TRUE.
XS_DO_NOT_USE_DMPAPER_USER
Tekla Structures uses a predefined value DMPAPER_USER as the user-defined paper size when
printing. Set this to TRUE to enable the old paper size definition .
set XS_DO_NOT_USE_DMPAPER_USER=TRUE
XS_DO_NOT_USE_FOLDED_GUSSET_PLATE
Set to use part-adds to create folded plates in gusset connections. If disabled (default), Tekla
Structures creates folded gusset plates using the Polybeam command instead of the Part-add
command.
XS_DO_NOT_USE_GLOBAL_PLATE_SIDE
Category Components
By default, connections 141, 146, 147, 149, 181, 184, 185, 186 and 187 create all shear plates
on the same side of the main part, if the main part has several connections (global positioning).
Use this variable to position each shear plate according to which end of the main part the
connection that creates it is closest to (local positioning).
XS_DONT_SHOW_POLYBEAM_MID_EDGES
Set to TRUE to hide polybeam fold and bend lines in drawings.
XS_DRAW_ALL_SECTION_EDGES_IN_DRAWINGS
Set to TRUE to draw the edges of a cut part in the drawing and to FALSE to leave the edges open.
The variable is set to TRUE by default.
XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO_IN_UNFOLDING

Use to show the angle and radius information on the dimension line. See also Unfolding
dimensions.
To hide this information, clear the Value field.
XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONS_IN_UNFOLDING
Use to create bending line dimensions in a drawing. See also Unfolding dimensions.
To not create these dimensions, clear the Value field.
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES
Use the following variables to show or hide bolts that are hidden from view by other parts, in
single part, assembly, and general arrangement drawings. The default values are shown here:
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS=AS_PART
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS=AS_PART
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS=FALSE
Possible values are:

• AS_PART: uses part’s hidden line visibility settings.
• TRUE: always shows hidden bolts.
• FALSE: does not show hidden bolts.
See also XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
See XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES.
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS
XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES
Use the following variables show or hide hidden lines in bolts in single part, assembly, and
general arrangement drawings. The default values are shown here:
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS=AS_PART
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS=AS_PART

www.cadfamily.com
• XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS=FALSE
Possible values are:

• AS_PART: used the visibility settings of the part’s own hidden lines.
• TRUE: always shows bolts’ hidden lines.
• FALSE: does not show bolts’ hidden lines.
See also XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
See XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES.
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_GA_DRAWINGS
XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS
XS_DRAW_BOLTS_PERPENDICULAR_TO_PART_IN_SINGLE_DRAWINGS
Set to TRUE to draw bolts perpendicular to the part plane in single part drawings. This only
applies to bolt symbol types symbol and symbol3.
XS_DRAW_BOLTS_THROUGH_NEIGHBOUR_PARTS
Use to draw the bolt parts that coincide with neighboring parts.
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES
Use to show or hide edge lines of concrete cast units in drawings. Set to TRUE to show
overlapping edge lines between adjacent cast units. See also
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES.
XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES
Use to show or hide concrete part lines inside cast units in drawings. Set to TRUE to show
overlapping part lines inside cast units. See also
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES.
XS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES
Category Model view

Hide or show the handles or chamfers of contour plates and concrete slabs. The options are:
• HANDLES: only shows handles. Makes selecting handles easier.
• CHAMFERS: only shows chamfers
XS_DRAW_CROSS_AXIS
Set to N to have Tekla Structures hide the axis cross in beam cross sections.
Leave blank to display the axis cross in beam cross sections.
XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA
Category Hatching
Use to indicate the name of the schema file to use for assembly drawings.
Example To use the default schema file, enter assembly.htc in the Value field.
XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA
Category Hatching
Use to determine the name of the schema file used for cast-unit drawings.
Example To use the default schema file, enter cast_unit.htc in the Value field.
XS_DRAWING_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_COLOR
Use to change the highlight color of the automatic change symbols. The color options are RED,
BLACK, GREEN, BLUE and GREY.
If you use the default color (magenta), the symbols are displayed on the
screen but they will not appear in the printed drawings.
Example
Color in printed
Set the variable to Color on screen drawings
190(default) not visible
RED red

www.cadfamily.com
Color in printed
Set the variable to Color on screen drawings
GREEN green
BLUE blue
BLACK black
GREY grey
XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA
Category Hatching
Use to determine the name of the schema file used for general arrangement drawings.
Example To use the default schema file, enter general.htc in the Value field.
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FIXED_WIDTH
Use to specify a fixed size for the grid label frames. This is useful, for example, when you want
all the grid label frames to be the same size no matter whether there are one or two digits in the
frame. The default value is zero (0), which indicates that the width of the grid label frame
depends on the width of the grid label. Enter the desired value in millimeters.
If you do not set this variable, Tekla Structures adjusts the grid label frames to text within each
frame
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FIXED_WIDTH = <value in millimeters>
Example of grid label frames when the frame size is not fixed:
Example of grid label frames when the frame size is fixed:

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR
Use to change the thickness of the grid label frame in drawings.

Example XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR=<numerical value>
XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE
Use to define the contents of the drawing history log file. You can use the following switches
individually or in any combination.
• ALL
• NEW
• DELETED
• MODIFIED
Example NEW_DELETED
XS_DRAWING_IGNORE_ZERO_LEVELS_IN_PART_MARKS
Use to control whether zero levels (+0.000) are shown or hidden in part marks. By default the
variable is set to TRUE, so zero levels are hidden in part marks. Set to FALSE to show the zero
levels in part marks.
To list level information in part marks, in the Part mark properties dialog box, use the element
User-defined attribute and type in one of the following template attributes:
• ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL
• ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
• CAST_UNIT_BOTTOM_LEVEL
• CAST_UNIT_TOP_LEVEL
See also Adding user-defined attributes to marks
XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE
Use to set the reference line type in drawings. You can use the following switches:
• POINT_LINE creates a line between the part’s creation points.

www.cadfamily.com
• DEFINITION_LINE creates a line between the part’s definition points (creation points +
end offsets ).
• CORNER_REFERENCE_LINE creates a line between the part’s corner points.
POINT_LINE DEFINITION_LINE CORNER_

REFERENCE_LINE
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY
Category Printing
The folder where Tekla Structures creates the plot files, if the file name field is empty in the Print
Drawings dialog box.
Overrides the folder defined in the printer catalog.
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME
Category Printing
Use to define print filenames for drawings, if the filename is missing from the Print Drawings
dialog box.

Example
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME = %%NAME.%% -
%%TITLE%%%%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1? -
%%%%UDA:DRAWING_USERFIELD_1%%%%DRAWING_REVISION? -
Rev%%%%DRAWING_REVISION%%.dxf
For available switches, see the table in Switches for naming plotfiles.
To define different filenames for different types of drawings, use the following variables:
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A (p. 332)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W (p. 332)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G (p. 332)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M (p. 332)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C (p. 332)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A
See XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME.
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE
Use to scale the points Tekla Structures uses to create reference lines. Enter the scale as a
decimal.
XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE=0.5
XS_DRAWING_SCALE_SEPARATOR_CHAR
Defines the separator character in drawing scales.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT
See XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X.
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X
Use to define the initial position of the drawing sheet. This is useful when using a dual display.
You can set this in the following ways:
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_X=50
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y=50
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_HEIGHT=600
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH=900
X and Y are the coordinates of the upper left corner of the drawing view, measured from the
upper left corner of the MDI client window (the dark gray area in the Tekla Structures window).
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_POSITION_Y
XS_DRAWING_SHEET_WIDTH
XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA
Category Hatching
Use to determine the name of the schema file used for single part drawings.
Example To use the default schema file, enter single.htc in the Value field.
XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY
You define the location of the drawing template library by setting this variable to point to the
model folder that contains the template drawings.
Example set
XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY=C:\TeklaStructuresModels\CloningTemplate
(where CloningTemplate is the model name).

See also Drawing > Clone drawing....
XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES

Use to modify the user-defined attributes of all selected drawings in the drawing list at the same
time, even if the drawings are of different types. The variable is set to TRUE by default.
To allow the modification of user-defined attributes for all drawings types at the same time, set
the variable to TRUE.
To allow the modification of user-defined attributes only for one drawing type at a time, set the
variable to FALSE.
XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING
Use to control how the view placing works. If the views do not fit on the screen after scaling,
Tekla Structures increases the sheet size using the layout properties if autosizing is enabled
(Layout > Drawing size > Size definition mode > Autosize). Use this variable together with
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED (p. 350).
Value Description
TRUE Updates the view placing. Does not affect the scale or the sheet size. This
is the default value.
TRUE, SCALE Updates the view placing and scales the view if the view does not fit on
the sheet. Tekla Structures scales the views smaller using the scales in
layout properties.
TRUE, SHEET Updates the view and increases the sheet size if the view does not fit on
the sheet.
TRUE, Updates the view, scales the view and increases the sheet size, if neces-
SHEET, sary.
SCALE
FALSE Does not update the view placing or change the view scale or sheet size.
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
Use the following variables to define the arrow symbol used in section and end view direction
marks, for each basic view type (front, top, back, bottom):
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM
By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 66 in the xsteel.sym file (located
usually in the folder \environments\country-independent\symbols\).
See also Section view properties
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP

www.cadfamily.com
See XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT.
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM
XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOLDING
Use to display the interior angle instead of the exterior angle in angle text. See also Unfolding
dimensions.
XS_DRAW_LONG_HOLE_DIMENSIONS
Set to 1 to dimension slotted holes to the center points of the curve. By default slotted holes are
dimensioned to the center points of the holes.
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS
Set to TRUE to always draw leader lines in part marks.
XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS
Use to display skewed elevation dimensions. See also Elevation dimensions.
By default this variable is disabled (skewed elevation dimensions are not displayed in drawings).
XS_DRIVER
See plotdev.bin (p. 57).
XS_DSTV_CREATE_AK_BLOCK_FOR_ALL_PLATES
Category CNC
Set to TRUE to create AK blocks in DSTV files also for rectangular plates.

XS_DSTV_LIST_SEPARATOR
Use to define the separator used in DSTV lists. By default the separator is the # character.
XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH
Category CNC
Use to make cuts affect the part length in the NC file header. Otherwise only fittings affect the
length. See Fittings affect NC data.
For advanced The AK block of the NC file always contains the correct net length. Using this variable writes
users the net length, instead of the length, to the header block. Some NC machines take the length
information either from the header or AK-block. Check with the workshop if you are uncertain
which method to use.
Using this variable may damage cutting machines if the part contains cuts
and fittings and the longest length is not at the edge of the part (machine
tries to start cutting in the middle of the part):
See also XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH
XS_DSTV_NO_SAWING_ANGLES_FOR_PLATES_NEEDED
Category CNC
Set to TRUE to have no sawing angles written to the DSTV file header for plates.
XS_DSTV_NUMBER_OF_PARTS_BY_SELECTION
Category CNC
Use to define the number of parts in the header of an NC file by the parts that have been selected
in the model.
When you have set the variable to TRUE, and selected the Create for selected parts option in
the NC Files dialog box, the number of parts in the header of the NC file matches the number of
selected parts.
XS_DSTV_PLATE_PROFILE_WITH_WIDTH
Category CNC
Set to TRUE to have both the plate thickness and the plate profile width written in the DSTV file
header and to FALSE to have only the plate thickness written in the DSTV file header.
XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH
Category CNC

www.cadfamily.com
Use to insert two length values in NC DSTV files:
• Gross length
• Net length
Gross length
Net length
Net and gross length may switch places in the NC file if the variable
XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO is set. Then Tekla Structures
may use the length value it finds in the fltprops.inp file instead.
See also XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH
XS_DSTV_USE_ONE_VERTEX_SHARP_INNER_CORNER
Category CNC
Enter TRUE in the Value field if it is not required for the DSTV NC file to show rectangular (90
degrees) notches without chamfer correctly.
XS_DSTV_WRITE_BEHIND_FACE_FOR_PLATE
Category CNC
Writes (AK + IK) contours for front (v) and back (h) faces of plates in NC DSTV files. Without
this variable Tekla Structures only writes the front face for plate profiles.
XS_DUPLICATE_CHECK_LIMIT_FOR_COPY_AND_MOVE
Use to define the maximum number of objects that are checked for duplicates while copying or
moving objects.
If the selection contains too many objects, Tekla Structures does not check for duplicates. The
default value is 100.
See also Copying and moving objects

XS_DWG_IMPORT_IGNORE_UNITS
If a DWG reference file is created with imperial settings, it will import to Tekla Structures in too
large scale. To prevent this, set this variable to TRUE.
XS_DXF_FONT_NAME
Category Printing
Use to specify a font other than the default for 2D-DXF.
XS_DXF_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR
Category Printing
Use to set a scale factor for 2D-DXF text height. Enter the factor as a decimal.
XS_DXF_TEXT_WIDTH_FACTOR
Category Printing
Use to set the scale factor for 2D-DXF text width. Enter the factor as a decimal.
Example XS_DXF_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR=1.0
DXK_FONTPATH
Use to point to the folder containing Tekla Structures graphic fonts. The Template editor, for
example, uses graphic fonts.
Always end the path with the backslash character.
Example DXK_FONTPATH=C:\TeklaStructures\
DXK_SYMBOLPATH
Use to point to the folder containing Tekla Structures symbol libraries.
Always end the path with the backslash character.
Example DXK_SYMBOLPATH=C:\TeklaStructures\
8.6 E
EDM_LIC13_3_5
Use to define the password for the toolkit used by the CIMsteel export/import option. You also
need a Tekla Structures license file that includes the CIMsteel option.
Set this variable in the Windows Control Panel using Settings > Control panel > System >
Advanced > Environment variables.
Always use the value:

www.cadfamily.com
/suHFt0NTYA.i-W-3n1yiW(y_N__(JTk,8TKDWN3xz9,cozrGY&0'x9P'da
We recommend that you use cut and paste to enter this value.
Do not set this environment variable in the initialization file.
XS_ENABLE_INNER_CONTOURS_IN_CUT_PARTS
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures create a part cut according to the inner and outer surfaces
of the cutting part.
When the variable is not set, Tekla Structures creates the cut according to the outer surface of
the cutting part.
Example Here a beam has been cut with a round tube.
Variable set to TRUE
Variable not set
XS_ENABLE_MIDDLE_BUTTON_DOUBLE_CLICK_ZOOM_ORIGINAL
Use to set the middle mouse button to zoom the model window to its original size.
Example XS_ENABLE_MIDDLE_BUTTON_DOUBLE_CLICK_ZOOM_ORIGINAL=TRUE
XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION
Category Concrete Detailing
Use to select an optimal place for the base point of the reinforcing bar mark leader line . If set to
TRUE, Tekla Structures selects an optimal place for the base point. The base point only points to
one reinforcing bar.
XS_EQUAL_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS_TO_BOTH_ENDS_LIMIT
Shape dimensions are automatically shown on both ends of a beam, even if the dimensions are
the same.
Enter a value for this variable to change this.

Example If you set this variable to 300, and a part is 300 mm shorter in one direction, Tekla Structures
only displays the dimension in the longer direction. Use millimeters in all environments.
XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE
Category Export
Use to set the coordinate scale to use in DGN exports. The default is 100.
XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME
Category Export
Use to indicate the output file name in DGN exports. The default is model.dgn.
XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS
Category Export
Use to define which cuts to include in DGN exports. You can use the following switches:
Switch Use to
FALSE Exclude all cuts.
TRUE Include all cuts (default value).
CLASH Include all cuts but skip hole cuts’ ends.
CLASH_NORMA The same as TRUE for contour plates and CLASH
L_PLATES for all other parts.
XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR
Category Export
Use to include or exclude inner contours in DGN exports. The options are:
• TRUE to include inner contours (default)
• FALSE to exclude inner contours
XS_EXPORT_DGN_ROUND_SEGMENTS
Use to define the number of segments Tekla Structures uses to display round tubes. Tekla
Structures uses this value for large tubes (greater than 100 mm) and 80% of this value for small
tubes. The default value is 40.
XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_CLASS_AS_COLOR
Set the color for exported parts by the part class (like Color by class in the modeling editor).
XS_EXPORT_DGN_USE_VOLUMETRIC
Category Export

www.cadfamily.com
Set to TRUE to set all plates type to 92 in DGN exports.
XS_EXPORT_STEEL2000_PRIMARY_IDS
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include primary part ID’s in MIS export files. ID’s appear
on separate rows in the file.
Example set XS_EXPORT_STEEL2000_PRIMARY_IDS=TRUE
XS_EXTERNAL_EXCEL_DESIGN_PATH
Points to the location of the Excel spreadsheet used in connection design. Set the variable in the
user.ini file.
For more information, see Using Excel in connection design.
8.7 F
XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR
Use to set the separator to use between filter strings (e.g. in the view filter). By default Tekla
Structures uses a space.
Example To use a semi-colon as a separator, set this variable as follows:
XS_FILTER_SEPARATOR_CHAR=;
XS_FIRM
Set the variables XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM along with XS_SYSTEM to point to the folders
Tekla Structures searches for properties files. Tekla Structures always saves properties in the
current model folder. You can then copy or move them.
See also Folder search order (p. 59).
XS_FLAT_PREFIX
Category Plate work
Use to set the flat bar prefix for output, reports, and marks. If Tekla Structures finds a matching
flat bar in the fltprops.inp file, the plate name will consist of the prefix you enter here,
followed by the thickness X width (e.g. FLAT5X100).
By default PL and PLT profiles get the prefix FL or FLT if a matching plate is found in the
fltprops.inp.

In Imperial version, if XS_FLAT_PREFIX is not included in prof-
itab.inp as similar profile as PL (valid parametric profile name), the
profile is shown with metric units.
XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE
Category Plate work
Use to set the checking tolerance for flat bars. Tekla Structures uses this value to check plate
thickness to determine whether to convert it to a flat bar. The default value is 0.1 mm.
XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE
Category Plate work
Tekla Structures uses this value to check plate width to determine whether to convert it to a flat
bar. The default value is 0.1 mm ( XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE=0.1).
XS_FRACTION_HEIGHT_FACTOR
Use to control the total height of fractions.
Example set XS_FRACTION_HEIGHT_FACTOR=1.5
XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
Use to define the far side postfix in merged part marks. This postfix is visible for identical parts
on far side. See Merging part marks.
Example XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK=FS
8.8 G
XS_GA_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE
Use to define a title for a general arrangement drawing view in a multi-drawing.
XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING
Use to display the gage of outstanding leg (GOL) information in bolt marks.
If there is no %%VALUE%% in the string then Tekla Structures adds the GOL value to the end of
the string.

www.cadfamily.com
If you do not set this variable, Tekla Structures only uses %%VALUE%%.
If Tekla Structures cannot calculate the value then nothing is added to the mark.
Example Here, the value for the gage of outstanding leg is 5½.
XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_S
TRING GOL in bolt mark
%%VALUE%% GOL 5½ GOL
GOSL %%VALUE%% GOSL 5½
GOL = GOL = 5½
5½
XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
By default, the symbol for hidden North marks in general arrangement drawings is number 32
in the symbol file. To change the symbol, set the variable to a different symbol number.
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
By default, Tekla Structures draws North marks in general arrangement drawings using a scale
of 1:1. Use this variable to specify a different scale. You could also create a larger symbol for
North marks in the Symbol Editor.
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
By default, the symbol for hidden North marks in general arrangement drawings is number 32
in the symbol file. To change the symbol, set the variable to a different symbol number.
XS_GA_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE
Use to omit marks for specific diameter types in general arrangement drawings. The options are
HOLE or BOLT.
XS_GRID_DIMENSION_OVERALL_LENGTH
Set to add a dimension line spanning the entire grid next to existing grid dimensions.
XS_GRID_COLOR
Category Model View
Use to change the grid color in the Model Editor. Define the color of the grid using RGB values:

XS_GRID_COLOR=<value for red> <value for green> <value for blue>.
Separate the values with spaces. Define the values on a scale of 0 to 1. Close and reopen the view
for the change to take effect.
Example
RGB value Color

1.0 1.0 1.0 White
1.0 0.0 0.0 Red
0.0 1.0 0.0 Green
0.0 0.0 1.0 Blue
1.0 1.0 0.0 Yellow
See also Changing grid color
XS_GRID_PLANES_VISIBLE_WITH_USERPLANES
Category Model View
Use to show or hide the grid planes in rendered views.

Set to TRUE to show the grid planes. Set to FALSE to hide the grid planes.
Reopen the view for the change to take effect.
The grid planes can be shown only if the construction planes are visible.
To display the construction planes, select the Construction planes check
box in the Display dialog box.
XS_GRID_TEXT_FONT
Use to set the font for grid text. If you do not specify a font, Tekla Structures uses the default
font.
8.9 H
XS_HANDLE_SCALE
Category Model view
Use to modify the handle size in rendered model views:

• The default value is 1.0.
• Value larger than 1.0 enlarges the handles.
• Value smaller than 1.0 decreases the handle size.

Close the rendered view and reopen it to view the modified handle size.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_HARD_STAMP_BY_ORIENTATION_MARK
Category CNC
Set to TRUE to have the hard stamps correspond to the orientation marks in drawings.
When you have set this variable to TRUE, you can affect the hard stamp
location also by using the variables
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS (p. 366)
and XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS
(p. 367).
XS_HATCH_SEGMENT_BUFFER_SIZE
Category Hatching
Tekla Structures includes a hatch buffer to speed up opening drawings containing hatch. This
variable defines the size of the buffer.
The default value is 100000. If you use extremely complicated hatches you may get better
performance with a larger value. For small hatches, use a smaller value.
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
Category Hatching
Use to define a hatch color that is not converted to black when printed. This color will be printed
as color or grayscale, depending on the selected printer settings. The hatch color is defined using
RGB (Red Green Blue) values on a scale of 0 to 255.
Define the color using the following variables:
set XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R to 214
set XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G to 214
set XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B to 214
The default value is black (0,0,0). The smaller the values, the darker the shade.
See also Hatching in section views and Special color.
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
Category Hatching
See XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
Category Hatching
See XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R

XS_HIDDEN_LINES_CHECK_TOLERANCE
Defines the distance within which Tekla Structures treats part lines inside cast units as
overlapping lines. The default value is 0.01.
XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
By default the hidden North mark symbol is number 32 in the symbol file. To change the
symbol, set the variable XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL to a different symbol number.
XS_HIDDEN_REMOVE_DOUBLE_LINES
To have Tekla Structures draw double lines when displaying models with Exact representation
and creating drawings and 2D DXF files, set this variable to FALSE.
By default Tekla Structures does not draw double lines, to minimize file size.
XS_HIDDEN_USE_BOLT_PLANES
Set to TRUE to hide lines behind a bolt nut (with Exact part representation).
XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES
Use to define whether changed dimension text and moved dimension points are highlighted in
associative drawings.
When set to TRUE, Tekla Structures highlights the changed dimension text and the moved
dimension points in updated associative drawings.
Tekla Structures highlights the changes in the following ways:
• A change symbol (by default a cloud) is drawn around the old point, the new point and the
dimension values.
• An arrow is drawn from the old point to the new point.
To change the appearance of the change symbol, use the following variables:
• XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL (p. 300)
• XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE (p. 299)
To remove the change symbols, go to Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove
Dimension Point Change Symbol. Select Single or All, depending on how many symbols you
want to remove.
See also XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES (p. 346)
XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES
Use to define whether changed mark contents are highlighted in associative drawings.

www.cadfamily.com
When set to TRUE, Tekla Structures highlights the mark contents that have been changed in
updated associative drawings.
Tekla Structures highlights the changes by drawing a change symbol (by default a cloud) around
the changed mark content.
To change the appearance of the change symbol, use the following variables:
• XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL (p. 300)
• XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE (p. 299)
To remove the mark change symbols, go to Annotating > Review Marks > Remove Mark
Change Symbol. Select Single or All, depending on how many symbols you want to remove.
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Use to define the contents of the Size element in hole marks. The variables
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE and
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE override this setting.
See also Size element in bolt marks.
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks in general arrangement drawings. If
you have not set the variables XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p.
386) or XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391), then this variable
is used.
8.10 I
XS_IGNORE_SUBASSEMBLY_HIERARCHY_IN_DIMENSIONING
Use to defined whether sub-assembly parts are dimensioned as secondary parts of the main
assembly.
When set to TRUE, Tekla Structures ignores sub-assemblies, and parts inside the sub-assemblies
are dimensioned as if they were parts in the main assembly.
XS_IMPERIAL
Set to have output in imperial units only.

This affects only the following elements of bolt marks:

• Gage of outstanding leg (GOL)
• Center-to-center distance
XS_IMPERIAL_BOLT_MARK
Set to 1 to show bolt diameter and length in imperial units in bolt marks.
Use when you need to use imperial bolts and metric units.
• Bolt diameter
• Bolt length
XS_IMPERIAL_DATE
Set to TRUE to use the date format mm/dd/yyyy. Set to FALSE to use the date format
dd.mm.yyyy.
XS_IMPERIAL_HOLE_MARK
Set to 1 to show hole diameter in imperial units in bolt marks.

Use when you need to use imperial bolts and metric units.
• Slotted hole X dimension
• Slotted hole Y dimension
• Slotted hole max dimension
• Slotted hole min dimension
XS_IMPERIAL_INPUT
Set to allow input in imperial units only.
XS_IMPERIAL_TIME
Set to TRUE to use the time format hh:mm:ss am/pm.

Set to FALSE to use the time format hh:mm:ss.
XS_IMPERIAL_TRIANGLES

www.cadfamily.com
Set to 1 to also show triangle ratios in inches.
XS_IMPORT_MODEL_LOG
Category Import
Set to TRUE to create create a log every time you use an import model.
Set to APPEND to append a log entry to the previous log.
XS_INCH_SIGN_ALWAYS
By default, Tekla Structures does not put an inch symbol (") in dimensions which contain only
inches. Set this variable to show inch symbols in all dimensions.
XS_INP
Points to the folder containing the objects.inp. The default location is
\XSDATADIR%\environments\country-independent\inp\.
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS
Enter TRUE in the Value field to prevent drawing views from being deleted when associated
objects are removed from the model. FALSE is the default.
For general arrangement drawings use the variable
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS_IN_GA. TRUE is the default.
XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS_IN_GA
See XS_INTELLIGENCE_DO_NOT_REMOVE_OBSOLETE_VIEWS.
XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PART_COUNT
Enter an integer to define how many parts are taken into account when searching for associated
objects. The variable is set to 10 by default.
XS_INTELLIGENCE_MAX_PLANE_COUNT
Enter an integer to define how many planes are taken into account when searching for associated
objects. The variable is set to 1000 by default.

XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED
Clear the value field or set it to FALSE to prevent Tekla Structures from automatically moving
dimensions, marks, etc. according to model changes.
This setting affects all drawings. To prevent Tekla Structures from auto-
matically updating general arrangement drawings, use the variable
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED_IN_GA (p. 350).
To control how the drawing view placing works when the model changes, set this variable to
TRUE and use it together with the variable XS_DRAWING_UPDATE_VIEW_PLACING.
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED_IN_GA
Clear the value field or set it to FALSE to prevent Tekla Structures from automatically moving
dimensions, marks, etc. according to model changes.
This setting affects only general arrangement drawings. To prevent Tekla

Structures from automatically updating all types of drawings, use the
variable XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED (p. 350).
XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ALLOWED
Set to TRUE to automatically update the following drawing and model objects in cloned
drawings, if the original drawing is associative:
• Dimensions
• Marks
• Drawing welds (welds that you have included in the drawing)
• Modeling welds (weld symbols that have been automatically created in the drawing)
• Text
• Associative notes
• Graphical objects
This variable also:
• Retains single part views included in the drawing
• Enables modeling welds in the cloned drawing.

www.cadfamily.com
This feature is at pre-release stage so it may not function correctly.
See also Drawing> Clone drawing

Drawing objects associated with model objects
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED
XS_INTELLIGENT_MESSAGES_ALLOWED
Use to display message when a drawing is opened if a model object to which one or more
drawing objects are linked is deleted in the model.
To display the message, enter any value in the Value field. To not display the message, enter
FALSE or 0.
XS_I_PROFILE_CENTER
Set to NONE to prevent Tekla Structures using the center line of I profiles to dimension front
views.
8.11 J
XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT
Category Marking: general
The connection numbers are visible in drawings, when you set the Connection mark field to
Number in the Connection mark properties dialog box. Use this variable to define the
connection number format. For example, you can use it to define prefix text.
Example In XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT=J%%3.3d:
J is the prefix and the rest of the string defines the number format:
• The first number defines the minimum field width.
• The second number defines the minimum quantity of numbers to display.
• % and d (integer value) indicate the format.
XS_JOINTS_USE_NOTCH1
Category Components
Set to 1 to have connections use standard notch routines.

Set to 0 to have connections use simple notch routines.

8.12 K
XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING
By default Tekla Structures deletes autosave files when you close a model, to save disk space.
Set this variable to prevent Tekla Structures deleting these files, even if you exit Tekla Structures
without saving the model.
XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX
Defines the character used in absolute snapping. Enter any allowed ASCII character. If you have
set Tekla Structures to use absolute snapping by default, using the variable
XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE) , you do not need to use a snap character for absolute
snapping.
Example XS_KEYIN_ABSOLUTE_PREFIX=$
See also XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE
XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX
XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE
Defines t he snapping mode Tekla Structures uses by default. Set to RELATIVE or

ABSOLUTE.
See also XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX
XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX
Defines the character used in relative snapping. Enter any allowed ASCII character. If you have
set Tekla Structures to use relative snapping by default, using the variable
XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE), you do not need to use a snap character for relative
snapping.
Example XS_KEYIN_RELATIVE_PREFIX=@
See also XS_KEYIN_DEFAULT_MODE

www.cadfamily.com
8.13 L
LEGEND_MODEL_PATH
Points to the location of the legend_text.fields file, which contains all the available
template table fields.
The file legend_text.fields is only used with Template Editor version 2.2.
XS_LINE_WIDTH
Category Model view
Use to change the width of lines in rendered views. Enter the value in pixels.
XS_LOG_FILE_NAME
Use to define the name of the log file. The default is TeklaStructures.log.
XS_LOGPATH
Points to the folder containing the Tekla Structures log file.
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Use to define the contents of the Size element in slotted hole marks. The variables
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE and
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE override this setting.
For switches you can use for defining the contents, see Size element in bolt marks.
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Use to define the contents of the size element in longhole marks in general arrangement
drawings. If you have not set the variables
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386) or
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 392), then this variable
is used.

8.14 M
XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY
Use to specify an alternative folder for recorded macro files. Macro files are usually language
and environment dependent and will not run in any other environment or language.
By default, this variable is defined in the local environment initialization files. For example in
the usimp environment, this variable points to the
..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\usimp\macros folder.
To define your own macro folder, set this variable in the user.ini file.
The macro folder must contain subfolders modeling and drawings.
See also Recording and running macros
XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP
Set to TRUE when you want to examine the time spent on different tasks while recording macros.
The timestamps are in the .cs file of the macro in question, which is located in ../
environments/country-independent/macros folder. The macro is saved in the
drawings or modeling folders, depending on in which mode the macro was recorded.
See also Recording and running macros
XS_MACRO_REFERENCES
Use to define a path to an additional library, which is used when a macro is compiled.
XS_MACRO_LOG
By default Tekla Structures macro output is displayed in the terminal window. Set this variable
to a file name to save this output to a file.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_MAGNETIC_PLANE_OFFSET
Category Components
Use to adjust the magnetic distance of magnetic planes. By default the distance is 0.05 mm. For
more information on magnetic planes, see User-defined planes.
XS_MARK_ALL_BOLT_GROUPS_SEPARATELY
No help available.
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR
By default Tekla Structures leaves a space 0.4*text height between mark elements. Use this
variable to change the default value.
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_HEIGHT
Height of arrow head in mark leader line.
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_ARROW_LENGTH
Length of arrow head in mark leader line.
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH
Use to define the length of the leader line extension. Give the lenght in millimeters. The default
value is 0.
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME
Use to define the leader line position for a leader line with no frame. The default value is 0.

Example
Position Appearance Set the variable to

Nearest corner. 0
In the middle of the text 1

area.
1/3 from the top of the text 2

area.
In the middle of the first 3

row of text.
See also XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME (p.

356)
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME
Use to define the leader line position for a leader line with a rectangular frame. The default value
is 0.

www.cadfamily.com
Example
Position Appearance Set the variable to

Nearest corner. 0
In the middle of the text 1

area.
1/3 from the top of the text 2

area.
In the middle of the firs row 3

of text.
See also XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME (p. 355)
XS_MARK_LINE_SPACE_FACTOR
By default Tekla Structures leaves a space 0.3*text height in multi-line marks (e.g. part, bolt,
and connection marks). Use this variable to change the default value.
XS_MARK_TEXT_FRAME_BOX_HEIGHT_FACTOR
Use to define how close text is to underlining. The default value is 0.5.
XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE

Enter the folder path and filename of the file containing the user-defined material symbols.
XS_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_SKEWED_END_PLATE_AND_BEAM_END
Use to produce section views and dimensions of slightly skewed end plates. An end plate can be
sloping or skewed to such a small degree that it is unnecessary to bevel cut the end of the main
part. If the end plate is not dimensioned in the section view, you need to set a limit for the end
plate angle.
Limit angle
Tekla Structures dimensions any end plate skewed less than this value in section views. Larger
angle dimensions do not appear in the section view. Set the angle between the skewed end plate
and beam in degrees. The default angle is 0.
XS_MAX_ANGLE_TOLERANCE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_MAIN_PARTS
Use to define the maximum angle range (0...1) within which Tekla Structures will dimension
non-parallel parts as one.
XS_MAX_AUTOMATIC_RADIUS_DIMENSION
Defines the maximum radius when you use automatic radius in single part drawings. The default
value is 5000. Tekla Structures will display radii smaller than the value you enter in drawings.
XS_MAX_DECIMALS_IN_PROFILE_NAME
Category Profiles
Use to control the number of decimals in profile names. The default value is 1.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_MAX_FRACTIONS_IN_MODEL_DIMENSION
Defines dimensioning accuracy in models in the US Imperial enviroment.
XS_MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_PLANES_TO_NAME
Use to define how many planes Tekla Structures names when the planes are used, for example,
in defining distance variables. The default value is 400.
When the maximum number of planes is reached, Tekla Structures stops naming the planes and
uses the name Undefined plane for the rest of the planes.
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL
Defines the maximum horizontal distance within which identical reinforcement get merged
marks. The default value is 600 mm.
See also XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL.
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL
Defines the maximum vertical distance within which identical reinforcement get merged marks.
The default value is 600 mm.
See also XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL.
XS_MAX_SPACE_BETWEEN_COMPLEX_ASSEMBLY_PARALLEL_PARTS
Use to define the maximum distance allowed between parallel parts for Tekla Structures to
dimension them as one.
XS_MESSAGES
Use to define the location of the message files. All message files have the file extension ail.
See also Messages (p. 89)
XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT
Category Model view
Set to only allow connection or part basic view windows to be moved within the Tekla Structures
window.
Disable to allow connection or part basic view windows to be moved anywhere on the Windows
desktop.
See also XS_MDIVIEWPARENT.

XS_MDIVIEWPARENT
Category Model view
Set to only allow view windows to be moved within the Tekla Structures window.
Disable to allow view windows to be moved anywhere on the Windows desktop. This gives you
more workspace on the screen, because view windows move to the front when you click on them
and open dialog boxes remain behind the views. It also allows you to enlarge Tekla Structures
windows to fill the entire desktop.
This variable also affects drawing windows. Use the following variables to control connection
and part basic views and zoom views XS_MDIZOOMPARENT and
XS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT.
XS_MDIZOOMPARENT
Category Model view
Set to only allow zoom windows to be moved within the Tekla Structures window.
Disable to allow zoom windows of views to be moved anywhere on the Windows desktop.
This is useful when you want to examine a view using the magnifier tool, because you can click
on a view to bring it to the front of the desktop. They can also be enlarged to fill the entire
desktop.
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT
Use to define the minimum number of identical parts whose marks to merge. See also Merging
part marks.
Example set XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT=2
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_CHARACTERS
Category Numbering
Use to set the minimum number of characters in assembly multinumbers.

Example If you set this variable 3, the multinumber format is 101AAA.
XS_MIN_NUMBER_OF_PART_MULTI_CHARACTERS
Category Numbering
Use to define the minimum number of characters in part multinumbers.

Example If you set this variable to 3, the multinumber format is 101AAA.
XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY
Category CNC
Points to the folder where NC and MIS files are created. The default is the current model folder.

www.cadfamily.com
You can also enter folder as a relative path to the current model folder using the ".\ " characters
in the Value field. If you set XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY=.\NC, Tekla Structures creates NC
and MIS files in NC folder under the current model folder.
Example XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY=c:\TeklaStructures\mis-files
XS_MIS_SEQUENCE
Category Export
Use to enable sequences in EJE and KISS file type MIS exports.
Define which part property is used as the sequence information in the variable. The options are:
• XS_MIS_SEQUENCE=CLASS
• XS_MIS_SEQUENCE=PHASE_NUMBER
• XS_MIS_SEQUENCE=PHASE_NAME
• XS_MIS_SEQUENCE=UDA:USER_PHASE
The limit for the sequence information field lengths are 10 and 4 charac-
ters in KISS and EJE file types, respectively. Do not use long names for
phase names or user phases, if you are using this information as MIS
Sequence.
XS_MODEL_PREFIX_INFLUENCES_MULTI_NUMBERING_FOR
Category Numbering
Use to define whether part and assembly number prefixes affect the numbering of parts and
assemblies in multi-drawings. The options are NONE, ASSEMBLIES, PARTS and
ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.
XS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Use to define where Tekla Structures saves model templates. Only the templates saved in this
folder are listed in the Model template list box in the New dialog box.
The variable is set to
C:\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\<your_environment>\model_t
emplates by default.
XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP
Set to TRUE to remove unnecessary space between the drawing view label and the drawing view
in multi-drawings.
XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_PLACING_TRIAL_NUMBER

Use to define the number of attempts to place the drawing views into a multi-drawing. Enter an
integer between 1 and 500. The variable is set to 500 by default.
XS_MULTI_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE
Use to define a title for a multi-drawing view in a multi-drawing. Arbitrary strings and switches
(BASE_NAME and NAME) can be used for defining the title.
By default the title is defined as follows:
Drawing %%BASE_NAME%%
XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
Use to define the separator in merged part marks. See Merging part marks.
Example XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK=x
8.15 N
XS_NC_DISABLE_PIECE_IDENTIFICATION_FIX
Category CNC
When set to TRUE (default), disables the fix that was made in Tekla Structures 11.0 to DSTV
format. The fix switched the places of phase and drawing identification in the DSTV file header
to follow the DSTV standard better than before.
Because of this change, dstv2dxf converter did not add correct texts to DXF files, and some CNC
controller software will interprete the DSTV files incorrectly.
To enable the fix and create similar DSTV files as Tekla Structures 11.0, set this variable to
FALSE.
XS_NEIGHBOUR_PART_SKEW_LIMIT
Tekla Structures considers neighboring parts as skewed if the product of the vector
multiplication (part axis) (any of the coordinate axis) is less than 1-
XS_NEIGHBOUR_PART_SKEW_LIMIT. The limit has to be given as a floating value.
XSNEST
Use to indicate the folder containing the Tekla Structures Plate Nesting program.
Example XSNEST=C:\PlateNesting

www.cadfamily.com
XS_NO_AUTO_DISPLAY_VIEWS
Category Model view
Set to any value to prevent Tekla Structures displaying views automatically when you start the
program.
Example XS_NO_AUTO_DISPLAY_VIEWS=1
By default views are displayed.
XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS
To create angle dimensions for bolts, clear the Value field. To not create angle dimensions for
bolts, enter any value.
XS_NO_CHAMFERS_IN_EXACT_MODE
Category Model view
Set to any value to prevent Tekla Structures creating chamfers when in exact mode.
Example XS_NO_CHAMFERS_IN_EXACT_MODE=1
By default chamfers are created.
XS_NO_CSK_MARK
Set to any value to omit the countersunk mark at the end of a bolt mark.
Example XS_NO_CSK_MARK=1
XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS
Category Single part view in assembly drawing
Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures from creating end views when you create an assembly
drawing and choose to include single-part drawings.
If this variable is disabled, Tekla Structures creates end views based on the properties of the
single-part drawings.
XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
Set to force shape dimensions to be the same as the dimension type you select.
Example XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS=TRUE
By default, shape dimensions are always relative, no matter which dimension type you select.
XS_NO_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_FOR

Set as follows to prevent Tekla Structures producing single part drawings for assemblies
containing one part:
XS_NO_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_FOR=LOOSE_PARTS
XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
Use this variable to define the scale of the north mark symbol. By default, North marks have a
scale of 1:1. You can also create a larger symbol for north marks in the Symbol editor.
XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
By default the north mark symbol is number 32 in the symbol file. Use this variable to change
the symbol. For information on working with different symbol files, see Working with symbol
files.
XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
Use to define the postfix in merged part marks. This postfix is visible for identical parts on both
side of a main part. See Merging part marks.
Example XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK=BS
XS_NSFS_TEXT_POSITION_IN_PART_MARK
Defines which element the NSFS (or BS) text follows in merged part marks.
Example XS_NSFS_TEXT_POSITION_IN_PART_MARK=22
The number defines the element type in the mark content that precedes the NSFS text. 22 means
after assembly position. The default is 23, which means that the text is located after part
position. If the type that is defined by the variable cannot be found in the mark at all, the text is
located at end of the mark. To force the text to always appear at the end of the mark, use -1.
XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
Use to define the near side postfix in merged part marks. This postfix is visible for identical parts
on near side. See Merging part marks.
Example set XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK=NS
XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME
Category Numbering
Use to set the time frame in which Tekla Structures makes the second save when numbering,
when you have selected the Synchronize with master model (save-numbering-save) option
in the Numbering setup dialog box.

www.cadfamily.com
Enter the desired time in seconds. The variable is set to 1500 by default.
See also Numbering setup
8.16 O
XS_OBJECT_SELECTION_CONFIRMATION
Use to change the time after which Tekla Structures prompts you to cancel object selection. You
can cancel the object selection process if the selection takes over a defined period of time.
The time is defined in milliseconds. The default value is 5000.
See also Canceling object selection
XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS
Set to TRUE to hide part marks of parts hidden by other parts from views in general arrangement
drawings.
Example If you have stiffeners either side of a beam, one will be hidden by the beam in front of it. Set this
variable to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures displaying the part mark of the hidden part.
XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_PARTS_OUT_OF_VIEW_PLANE_LIMIT_ANGLE
Use to hide the part marks for parts outside the current view plane by defining the limit for
inclusion as an angle.
You also need to set Parts out of view plane field in the View part mark properties to Not
visible to hide parts from the view that are outside the angle you specify here. The default value
is 20.0.
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
Set to a value to filter that type of bolt marks when the Bolt size limit field is used in drawing
properties. The options are:
• SITE
• SHOP
• SITE_AND_SHOP (default).
Example If you set this variable as XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE=SITE, Tekla Structures filters

out only site bolt marks that are outside the bolt size limit and workshop bolt marks of all sizes
are shown in drawings.
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE

Use to define which bolt types to omit from drawings.
XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE
Use to define which diameter marks to omit in drawings. The options are HOLE or BOLT.
XS_OMITTED_PART_NAME_IN_AUTOCONNECTION
Category Components
Use to exclude specific part types when you use AutoConnection.

Example Use the variable to filter out brace parts when using AutoConnection. AutoConnection cannot
handle brace connections when large quantities of parts are selected.
There are two ways of doing this:
• Set this variable to XS_OMITTED_PART_NAME_IN_AUTOCONNECTION=brace. Tekla
Structures does not select any parts with names containing the string “brace”.
Or
• Set the Selection Filter to select all parts except for those named “brace*”.
XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE
Category Welds
Use to define which weld types to omit in drawings.
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION
Use to define the direction of orientation marks. The options are NORTH-EAST, NORTH-WEST,
SOUTH-EAST and SOUTH-WEST. For more information, see Orientation marks.
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS
Use to indicate the position of orientation marks for beams. Enter a value indicating the distance
from the end of the part to the orientation mark. The default value is 300.0 mm. You can enter
any value in the range 1.0 to 3000.0. For more information, see Orientation marks.
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS_IN_GA
Indicates the position of beam orientation marks in GA drawings. For more information, see
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS
Use to define the placing of orientation marks for columns. The value assigned to this variable
is the distance from the end of the part to the orientation mark. The default value for columns is
600.0 mm. Possible values range from 1.0 to 3000.0. For more information, see Orientation
marks.
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS_IN_GA
Defines the position of column orientation marks in GA drawings. For more information, see
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS.
8.17 P
XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR
Category Profiles
Use to define an additional character to separate dimensions in the name of parametric profiles.
Tekla Structures always recognizes the standard separator characters X, *, -, and /.
Only one character is accepted as a value for this variable.

You can not use slash (/) in the US imperial environment.
Example XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR=E
Accepted profile names with this setting are:

1. PL500*800
2. PL500X800
3. PL500E800
Any combination of these is also accepted: ProfileName500*500-500*500E500 (the profile
ProfileName should be defined).
See also XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE
Use to indicate the path to the user-defined part dimension planes table. This table defines the
planes in which planes dimensions are created (for example, you might want Tekla Structures
to dimension round bars to the middle of the profile rather than the reference line).
Example XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE=%XS_PROFDB%\dim_planes_table.txt
For more information, see Dimension planes.

XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE
Use to define the maximum distance within which identical parts get merged marks. Units are
in millimeters. See also Merging part marks.
Example XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE=1200
XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category Numbering
Use to define multinumbers for single parts. Use the following switches to define the contents
of part marks. Use as many switches as you need, and enclose each one in double percent
symbols (%%).
Switch Description
PART_MULTI_DRAWING Multidrawing name.
_NUMBER
PART_MULTI_DRAWING Position of the single-part drawing inside the
_POS multidrawing.
PART_PREFIX Part prefix in the model.
PART_POS Part position number in the model.
Template fields Enter UDA: followed by the name of any relevant
template field. Enclose each name in double
percent symbols (%%). For example,
%%UDA:PHASE%%
User-defined attributes Enter UDA: followed by the name of any relevant
user-defined attribute, exactly as it appears in the
objects.inp file. For example,
%%UDA:MY_INFO_1%%
Example To put the part multinumbers in the format part prefix + position on multi drawing + multi
drawing name, set the variable as follows:
XS_PART_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING=%%PART_PREFIX%%%%PART_MULTI_DRAWING
_POS%%%%PART_MULTI_DRAWING_NUMBER%%
See also XS_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
XS_PART_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
Category Numbering
Use to have Tekla Structures use only letters in part numbers.
The switches are:

www.cadfamily.com
Switch Description
%%PART_PREFIX%% Part prefix, defined in the part properties
dialog box.
%%PART_POS%% Part position number, defined by the
start number (from part properties
numbering series.
%%PART_POS_WITH_LETTERS%% Same as above, but with letters.
variable
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_P
OSITION_NUMBERS.
The position number/ letter switch can also include a suffix defining the minimum number of
digits (or letters), for example: %%PART_POS.3%%. This example results in a first part number
of 001, second 002 etc.
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR
Use to dimension the position of parts to the edge that is nearest to the neighbor part. The default
is FALSE.
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE
Forces Tekla Structures to dimension the position of beams to the leading edge. For this variable
to take effect, disable the variable XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING.
For column assemblies, you must also set the variable
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO.
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO
To dimension part position to the leading edge for column assemblies,
set XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO=true
You must also set the variable XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE.
XS_PEDDIMAT_FLANGE_CLEARANCE
When a beam is notched in the workshop, there is a minimum distance from the flanges within
which the web cannot be cut. The default is 10 mm. Use this variable to control the distance in
Peddimat format. It only affects profile types I, C, and L.
Example set XS_PEDDIMAT_FLANGE_CLEARANCE=12

Using an incorrect value can cause problems in the workshop.
XS_PIXEL_TOLERANCE
Category Model view
Use to define the snap zone of objects. Each object has a snap zone, which defines how close
you need to pick to hit a position. When you pick within the snap zone of an object, Tekla
Structures automatically snaps to the closest pickable point on that object. Enter the value in
pixels.
See also Specifying points
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X
Category Printing
Offsets the print origin in the x direction. Use if a drawing does not fit to the paper or is printed
to a wrong location. Units are millimeters.
This variable affects all printers.
See also XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y
Category Printing
Offsets the print origin in the y direction. Use if a drawing does not fit to the paper or is printed
to a wrong location. Units are millimeters.
This variable affects all printers.
See also XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X
PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE
Category Export
Set this variable to any value to have Tekla Structures use assembly marks in PML exports. By
default this variable is disabled and Tekla Structures uses part marks.

www.cadfamily.com
PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE
Category Export
Set this variable to prevent Tekla Structures from using cardinal points in PML exports. This
means that all parts will be defined by their center lines and their position may differ from that
in the Tekla Structures model. By default this variable is disabled.
XS_PML_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID
Category Export
Use to revert to the FrameWorksPlus ID number in PML exports.

See also XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER.
XS_PML_EXPORT_USE_ADDITIONAL_CUT_DIST
Older versions of Tekla Structures added 1mm in length to fitted part ends in PML exports. Use
this variable to force recent versions to also do this.
XS_POLYGON_CUT_EXTRA_THICKNESS
Use to define the cut depth of a polygon cut, for example, to cut thick surface treatment. The
default value for the cut thickness is 5.0 mm.
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR
Category Plate work
Use to rotate plates with perpendicular sides in drawings.

See also XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR.
XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR
Category Plate work
Use to rotate right-angled plates in drawings. The longest side of polygon plates always faces
downwards in drawings, which can affect right-angled plates as illustrated below:
Use this variable to prevent this happening. When this value is set to a factor, Tekla Structures
multiplies the length of the side next to the right angle by that factor, making it the longest side.
Tekla Structures still uses and displays the real dimensions of the plate.

SQUARE CORNER (2.0)
PERPENDICULAR EDGE (1.5)
XS_POP_MARK_COLOR
Use to define the color of a customized pop-mark symbol that is displayed in a drawing. The
default is 1.
See also XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL (p. 372)
XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT (p. 372)
XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT
Use to define the height of a customized pop-mark symbol that is displayed in a drawing. Enter
the value in millimeters. The default is 2.0.
See also XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL (p. 372)
XS_POP_MARK_COLOR (p. 372)
XS_POP_MARK_SYMBOL
Use to define the location of a customized pop-mark symbol that is displayed in a drawing. The
default is xsteel@0.
See also XS_POP_MARK_HEIGHT (p. 372)
XS_POP_MARK_COLOR (p. 372)
XS_POSITION_DIMENSIONS_FOR_HOLES_IN_SINGLE_SECONDARY_PAR
TS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWING
To create position dimensions for holes in single secondary parts in assembly drawing, enter any
value. To not create position dimensions for holes, clear the Value field.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_PRIMARY_PART_FIRST
Set this variable to have Tekla Structures sort part and assembly part lists so that the main part
of the assembly appears at the top of the list, immediately after the assembly.
XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER
Use to define the borders that are left out from the smaller sheets when printing a drawing on
multiple small sheets.
For example, to leave a 3 mm horizontal and a 5 mm vertical border, set the variable to 3,5.
XS_PRINT_REPORT_FONT
Set to the name of a font to define the font for printed reports. Tekla Structures uses this variable
if you do not specify a font for printed reports in the Print dialog box. If no font is given, Tekla
Structures uses the default font.
Example set XS_PRINT_REPORT_FONT=Courier New
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE
Use to specify the number of characters per row in reports printed in landscape orientation.
See also XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_LANDSCAPE
XS_PRINT_REPORT_PAGE_HEIGHT_PORTRAIT
XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_PORTRAIT
Use to specify the number of characters per row in reports printed in portrait orientation.
See also XS_PRINT_REPORT_LINE_WIDTH_LANDSCAPE
Use to specify the number of rows in printed reports with landscape orientation.

Use to specify the number of rows in printed reports with portrait orientation.
XS_PROFDB
Use to point to the profile folder which Tekla Structures searches for profile, material, device,
and bolt catalogs.
You can store several catalogs in different locations, so it is important to know which catalog
you are using. For more information, see Binary files (p. 55).
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL
In the profile catalog you can enter analysis values for each profile. In the analysis, STAAD.Pro
calculates the analysis values and compare them to the values in the profile catalog, and uses
the values in the profile catalog, if they exist.
To check the profile catalog for analysis values for all profiles, enter TRUE in the Value field for
• XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL and
• XS_AD_OPTIMISATION_DISABLED
After that, run the analysis.

If the profile catalog value differs significantly from the value STAAD.Pro calculates, Tekla
Structures enters a warning in the analysis log file. Use the variable
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT to define the warning limit.
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_VALUE_DIFF_LIMIT
Sets the warning limit when checking profile catalog analysis values. For more information, see
XS_PROFILE_ANALYSIS_CHECK_ALL.
XS_PROFILE_DISPLAY_INCH_MARK_AFTER_FRACTIONS_IN_REPORTS
Use to define the location of the inch mark in profile lengths in reports.
To display the inch mark after the fractions (for example, PL1"X18 1/2"), enter TRUE. To display
the inch mark before the fractions (for example, PL1"X18"1/2), enter FALSE.
By default, the inch mark is displayed after the fractions.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_PROJECT
Set the variables XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM, along with XS_SYSTEM, to point to the folders
Tekla Structures searches for properties files. Tekla Structures always saves properties in the
current model folder. You can then copy or move them.
See also Folder search order (p. 59).
XS_PROTECT_SYMBOLS
Set to prevent Tekla Structures drawing objects on top of symbols.
8.18 R
XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONING
Use to set prefix text for radii.
XSR_BOLT_LENGTH_USE_ONLY_INCHES
Set to TRUE to prevent the variable XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE affecting bolt length in bolt
marks.
XSR_DIAMETER_USE_ONLY_INCHES
Use to only output bolt diameter values in reports or drawing templates in inches. The result
would be 0"3/4, not 0'-0"3/4.
XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE
Use to increase the size of the reinforcing bar bend symbols in drawings (in drawing units) in
order to see them more clearly.
See also Reinforcement appearance
XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_MARK_MANUAL_CLOSE_TO_GEOMETRY
Use to add closing dimensions to the edge of the part in reinforcing bar group dimensions. The
default TRUE means that the closing dimensions are added.

XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE
Use to increase the size of the reinforcing bar end symbols in drawings (in drawing units) in
order to see them more clearly. Works for 45 or 135 degree (see
XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS) symbols.
See also Reinforcement appearance
XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_LENGT
H
Use to define the step length while searching for an optimal place for the mark leader line base
point along the reinforcing bar. Enter the value in millimeters.
XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_TOLERANCE
Use to define how far the other reinforcing bars must be from the base point so that Tekla
Structures can place the base point. Enter the value in millimeters.
XS_REBAR_PULLOUT_ANGLE_TEXT_FRAME
Use to turn off the text frame around the angle text in pullout pictures. By default, this variable
is set to TRUE.
XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION
Set to FALSE to have Tekla Structures ignore hooks when it checks the shape of reinforcing bars,
and to have Tekla Structures assign the same bending type to bars with and without hooks.
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures take the hooks into account and to treat bars with or without
hooks, or with different hooks, as different.
The default value is TRUE.
XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS
Use to reverse the reinforcing bar end symbols to a different direction. When this variable is se
to TRUE, the end symbol is drawn at 135 degree angle (used commonly in Norway).
See also XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE
XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS
Category Drawning Properties

www.cadfamily.com
Use to define whether drawings are recreated when you update an assembly, single or cast-unit
drawing that has not been modifed. Drawings are automatically recreated unless they have been
edited and then saved, or they have been issued using the Issue functionality in the drawing list.
To prevent the recreation of the unmodified drawings, set the variable FALSE.
To allow the recreation of the unmodified drawings, set the variable to TRUE.
XS_REFERENCE_CACHE
Use to define the default location of the cache file that is created from the source file when you
load a reference model for the first time. The variable is set to
C:\TeklaStructuresModels\\RefCacheFolders by default.
• You may sometimes want to change the default location of the cache
file when you are working with multi-user models to reduce network
traffic and disk usage in the server or to speed up the cache operation
(if the local drive is faster than the server drive).
• When you are using different versions of Tekla Structures for
different projects and you experience problems with reference
models, empty the folder where the reference cache is created. The
cache file is recreated the next time you open the reference model.
XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_COLORS
Category Import
Set to FALSE to view all reference model objects in gray.
XS_REFERENCE_DGN_READ_LINES
Category Import
Enter FALSE in the Value field to speed up the reading of reference .dgn files.
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE
Use to choose the line type used to display the lines. See the following table for information on
the different line types.
Set variable to Line type appearance

0 _____
1

Set variable to Line type appearance
5
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF
Use to hide reference model lines if they are covered by the model itself. To hide covered
reference lines, enter TRUE. To display covered lines, enter FALSE.
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MOD
ELS
Use to hide reference model lines if they are covered by other reference models. To hide covered
reference model lines, enter TRUE. To display covered lines, enter FALSE.
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES
Use to hide part lines if they are covered by reference models. To hide covered part lines, enter
TRUE. To display covered part lines, enter FALSE.
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS
Use to hide reference model lines if they are covered by model parts. To hide covered reference
model lines, enter TRUE. To display covered lines, enter FALSE.
XS_REFERENCE_ROUND_SEGMENTS
Category Import
Use to define the number of round segments to use in reference objects. The default is 16.
XS_REFERENCE_USE_RENDERED_CLIPPING
Category Import
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures show only the center line of reference objects outside the
work area in rendered views.
XS_RENDERED_CURSOR_LINE_WIDTH
Category Model view

www.cadfamily.com
Use to set cursor line width in rendered views. Enter the cursor line width in the Value field.
• Possible values are 1, 2, or 4. Any other value is handled as 1.
• The default is 2.
Cursor line width of 1 Cursor line width of 4
XS_RENDERED_FOG_END_VALUE
See XS_RENDERED_FOG_START_VALUE.
XS_RENDERED_FOG_START_VALUE
In rendered views distant objects appear progressively darker than close ones. Use the following
variables to control the shade of objects:
set XS_RENDERED_FOG_START_VALUE=0.25
set XS_RENDERED_FOG_END_VALUE=0.50
Use values from 0 to 1 to control the shade of objects. The higher the value, the darker the distant
objects.
Variables set to zero
Variables disabled

XS_RENDERED_PIXEL_TOLERANCE_SCALE
Tekla Structures uses pixel tolerance to differentiate between clicking and dragging the mouse
when zooming. Use this variable to define the pixel tolerance.
The default value is 0.7. If the mouse moves less than the value you specify with the mouse
button depressed, it is treated as a click.
XS_REPORT_OUTPUT_DIRECTORY
Points to the folder where Tekla Structures saves reports. If the full path appears in the report
file name field, Tekla Structures ignores this setting.
XS_ROTATE_CUT_VIEWS
Use to specify the rotation of section views.

BY_MAIN_VIEW (default) uses the same rotation as the orientation as the main view.
BY_SYMBOL_MAIN_VIEW uses the orientation of the view that contains the section symbol. This
only applies to section views that Tekla Structures creates automatically. Manually-created
views have the same rotation as the view they are created from.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_RUNPATH
This variable is available only in initialization files.
Use to point to the folder Tekla Structures searches for models by default. When you open the
New dialog box, the default model folder is displayed in the Save in list box.
This variable does not affect the Open dialog box.
XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SEPARATOR
Set to have Tekla Structures use a space instead of the feet separator in drawing tables and
reports (US imperial environment only), e.g. 2 4''1/4.
You also need to set XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL.
XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL
Set to have Tekla Structures omit the feet symbol in drawing tables and reports (US imperial
environment only), e.g. 2-4''1/4.
XSR_USE_NO_INCH_SYMBOL
Set to have Tekla Structures omit the inch symbol in drawing tables and reports (US imperial
version only), e.g. 2-4 ¼ .

You also need to set XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SYMBOL and XSR_USE_NO_FEET_SEPARATOR.
XSR_USE_ZERO_FEET_VALUE
Set to force Tekla Structures to show zero feet for values less one foot, e.g. 0'-6''3/4.
XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_FOR_FRACTIONS
Set to force Tekla Structures to show zero inches for values only containing fractions, e.g. 2'-3/
4 or 0''1/4.
XSR_USE_ZERO_INCH_VALUE
Set to force Tekla Structures to show zero inches for values only containing feet and fractions,
e.g. 2'-0''3/4 or 1/4.
8.19 S
XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT
Category Multi-user
Set to TRUE to enable the saving of model revision comments in multi-user models.
See also Saving model revision comments
XS_SCALE_COPIED_OR_MOVED_OBJECTS_IN_DRAWINGS
Use to define the scaling of objects that are copied or moved between drawing views that have
different scales.
To scale the objects according to the view scales, set the varible to TRUE.
To keep the object sizes constant, set the variable to FALSE.
XS_SCALE_MARKS_TO_FIT_LIMIT
Tekla Structures fits part marks near the part they belong to by scaling the text height. Set the
minimum scale with this variable.
Example XS_SCALE_MARKS_TO_FIT_LIMIT=0.5

www.cadfamily.com
The default value is 1.0 so that if you do not set the variable, Tekla Structures does not scale
marks. Tekla Structures scales the text height in steps so that first it tries the scale of 0.9. If the
mark does not fit, Tekla Structures scales the mark by 0.8, and so on.
Note that part mark's leader line type has to be either "Try along part" or "Always along part".
XS_SCREW_DIAMOND_WITHOUT_PHI
Set to TRUE to prevent Tekla Structures placing a phi symbol outside the frame of bolt marks
(diamond type only).
XS_SDNF_CONVERT_PL_PROFILE_TO_PLATE
Category Export
Set to TRUE to have SDNF exports convert plate profiles (PL) to contour plates. Works with
SDNF versions 2.0 and 3.0.
XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID
Category Export
Use to revert to the FrameWorksPlus ID number in SDNF exports.

Example XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID=TRUE
See also XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER.
XS_SDNF_IMPORT_STORE_MEMBER_NUMBER
Category Import
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures store the FrameWorksPlus ID number in SDNF imports.
Tekla Structures stores the ID number in the user-defined attribute SDNF_MEMBER_NUMBER.
For information on exporting the ID number, see
XS_SDNF_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID and
XS_PML_EXPORT_INCLUDE_GLOBAL_ID.
XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP
Category CNC
Set to TRUE to include hard stamps for secondary parts in DSTV files. Set to FALSE to create
hard stamps only for main parts.
Tekla Structures does not create hard stamps for plates.

XS_SECTION_LINE_COLOR
Category Hatching
Use to add extra lines in different colors around automatic hatching in section views. Enter a
value for the color (from 1 to 14) in the Value field.
• The default value is 0 (no extra lines).
• The number corresponds to the color sequence in the drawing object properties:
To show lines around hatching, and to be able to add extra lines in

different colors, you may need to set variable
XS_DRAW_ALL_SECTION_EDGES_IN_DRAWINGS to TRUE in the initial-
ization files. The variable is set to FALSE by default.
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL
Use to define the arrow symbol Tekla Structures uses in section symbols at the left end of
sections.
By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 145 in the sections.sym file (located
See also XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL
Section view label and symbol.
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE
Sets the reference text for symbols that show a section in another drawing. Enter the text in the
Value field. The text can include:
• free text

www.cadfamily.com
• user-defined attributes
• template attributes
If you set the variable in the Advanced options dialog box, use single % characters around the
user-defined and template attributes. For example, %DRAWING_TITLE%.
If you set the variable in the initialization files, use double % characters around the user-defined
and template attributes. For example, %%DRAWING_TITLE%%.
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL
Use to define the arrow symbol Tekla Structures uses in section symbols at the right end of
sections.
By default Tekla Structures uses the symbol no 144 in the sections.sym file (located
See also XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL
Section view label and symbol.
XS_SECTION_VIEW_REFERENCE
Sets the reference text for section view labels. See also
XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE.
XS_SEMI_ORTHO_ANGLE
Sets the range for the semi-orthogonal snap as an angle. If you pick within the range, Tekla
Structures snaps to the orthogonal position (0, 45, 90, 135, 180, etc. degrees).
Example XS_SEMI_ORTHO_ANGLE=15
See also XS_USE_SEMI_ORTHO (p. 406).
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Use to define the contents of the Size element in bolt marks (workshop).
For switches available to define mark contents, see Size element in bolt marks.
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA

Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks for workshop bolts in general
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386)
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386)
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Use to define the contents of the Size element in hole marks (workshop).
For switches to define mark contents, see Size element in bolt marks.
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Use to define the contents of the size element in hole marks for workshop bolts in general
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 385)
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386)
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Use to define the contents of the Size element in slotted hole marks (workshop).
For switches to define mark contents, see Size element in bolt marks.
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Use to define the contents of the size element in longhole marks for workshop bolts in general
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 385)
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 386)
XS_SHOW_PERFORM_NUMBERING_MESSAGE
Use to show or hide the Perform numbering button in the warning message Tekla Structures
displays if you try to create a drawing without numbering or when numbering is not up to date.
• By default, this variable is set to TRUE and the numbering button is shown.
• To hide the button, set this variable to FALSE.
Consider hiding the numbering button in the multi-user mode, because unnecessary or
unplanned numbering may take a while in large models or break project numbering. This can

www.cadfamily.com
occur if Synchronize with master model (save-numbering-save) checkbox is not selected in
the Numbering setup dialog box.
See also When to use multi-user mode (p. 58)
Numbering setup (p. 71)
Numbering – specific cases (p. 72)
XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES
Use to display or hide the hidden lines of reference models in drawings. When you set the
variable to TRUE, reference model lines are never hidden by other objects. To hide hidden lines,
enter FALSE.
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures include the Revision mark field in the Tekla Structures
drawing list in the modeling environment, rather than the Revision number field (default).
XS_SHOW_SITE_STUDS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
Use to show site studs in assembly drawings.
XS_SHOW_STUDS_IN_WORKSHOP_DRAWINGS
Set to TRUE to show workshop studs in single-part drawings.
XS_SHOW_TEMPLATE_LOG_MESSAGES
Use to show or hide the error messages related to template attributes in the log file. By default
this variable is set to FALSE.
XS_SINGLE_CENTERED_SCREW
Use to control the dimensioning of centrally-located bolts in single-part views included in

assembly drawings. See also Centered parts and bolts.
XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS
Use to close dimensions in single-part views included in an assembly drawing. See also Closing
dimensions.

XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_SHORT_DIMENSIONS
Use to close short dimensions in single-part views included in assembly drawings. See also
Closing dimensions.
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_DISTANCE
Use to set a distance for combining dimensions in single-part views included in assembly
drawings. Enter a decimal value. See also Combining distances.
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_MIN_DISTANCE
Use to set a minimum distance for combining dimensions in single-part views included in
assembly drawings. Enter a decimal value. See also Combining distances.
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_WAY
Use to combine dimensions in single-part views included in assembly drawings. The five
options (1,2,3,4,5) correspond to the combining order in the dimensioning properties dialog box.
See also Combining distances.
XS_SINGLE_DIMENSION_TYPE
Use to set a dimension type for single-part views included in assembly drawings. The options
are:
• 1 relative
• 2 absolute
• 3 both
XS_SINGLE_DRAW_PART_AS
Use to define how parts appear (their representation type) in single-part views included in
assembly drawings. The options are:
• 1 solid
• 4 workshop solid (round tubes open)
• 2 symbol form

www.cadfamily.com
XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE
Category Single Part View in Assembly Drawing
Use to exclude single-part views from assembly drawings. The options are:
• NONE includes all single part views.
• MAIN_SHAFT includes single part views of all parts, except assembly main parts.
• ALL_SHAFTS includes single part views of all parts, except those with another object
welded to them (i.e. primary parts).
• AUTOMATIC includes single part views of all parts, except the longest main part in the
assembly.
• ALL_BUT_MAIN_PART includes single part views of assembly main parts only.
• STANDARD includes single-part views of all parts, except standard parts. You can add
STANDARD after any of the existing values, for example MAIN_SHAFT_AND_STANDARD
creates single-part drawing from all but main part or standard parts.
See also Standard part model.
XS_SINGLE_FORWARD_OFFSET
Use to set a forward offset for dimensions in single-part views included in an assembly drawing.
Enter the value as a decimal. The forward offset defines how positions dimension lines. See also
Forward offset.
XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
Forces shape dimensions to be the same as the dimension type you select.
See also XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
XS_SINGLE_NO_SHORTEN
Use to display single-part views in drawings without shortening parts.
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK
You can create orientation marks for included single-part views in assembly drawings. To show
the orientation marks in single-part views:
• Enter TRUE in the Value field for this variable.
• Set the option Single-part attributes to Current attributes (in Assembly - layout
properties > Other). Tekla Structures takes the orientation mark settings from the current
single-part drawing properties.

XS_SINGLE_PART_DRAWING_VIEW_TITLE
Use to define a title for single-part drawing views in a multi-drawings. You can use any of the
following to define the title:
• PART_NAME
• PART_MATERIAL
• PART_POS
• ASSEMBLY_POS
• MODEL_NUMBER
• LENGTH, PROFILE
• LENGTH
• BASE_NAME
• NAME
XS_SINGLE_PART_EXTREMA
Use to display overall dimensions in single-part views included in assembly drawings.
XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE
Use to show or hide shape dimensions in single part views.

Set to 1 to show shape dimensions in single-part views.
Set to 0 to hide shape dimensions in single-part views.
XS_SINGLE_SCALE
Use to set the scale of single-part views included in assembly drawings. Enter a decimal value.
Example To have Tekla Structures use the scale 1/10, enter 10.0 in the Value field.
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_INTERNAL
Use to show or hide internal bolt dimensions in assembly drawings.

Set to 1 to show internal bolt dimensions.
Set to 0 to hide internal bolt dimensions.
See also Bolt internal dimensions.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_POSITIONS
Use to include position dimensions for bolts in single-part views included in assembly drawings.
See also Main part bolt positions.
XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS
Use to include dimensions from work points in single-part views included in assembly drawings.
XS_SINGLE_X_DIMENSION_TYPE
Use to set the dimension type for single-part views included in assembly drawings. The options
are:
• 1 relative
• 2 absolute
• 3 both
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Use to define the contents of the Size element in bolt marks (site).
For switches you can use to define the contents, see Size element in bolt marks.
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Use to define the contents of the size element in bolt marks for site bolts in general arrangement
drawings.
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391)
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 392)
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Use to define the contents of the Size element in hole marks (site).
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA

Use to define the contents of the size element in hole marks for site bolts in general arrangement
drawings.
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391)
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 392)
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Use to define the contents of the Size element in slotted hole marks (site).
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Use to define the contents of the size element in longhole marks for site bolts in general
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391)
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA (p. 391)
XS_SNAPSHOT_DIRECTORY
Points to the folder where Tekla Structures stores screenshots. If the variable is disabled, Tekla
Structures stores screenshots in the current model folder.
If the defined folder does not exist, Tekla Structuresautomatically creates it when you take a
screenshot.
Example XS_SNAPSHOT_DIRECTORY=c:\temp\
XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE
Use to define the size of the solids buffer. The default value is 5000 solids.
Tekla Structures creates a buffer in system RAM to store the solid representation of parts it
creates during certain processes. For example, Tekla Structures creates solids when numbering
a model. When this buffer fills up, Tekla Structures erases the contents in order to continue using
the buffer.
Increasing this value also increases the memory used by Tekla Structures processes. Decreasing
this value decreases the memory requirements, but also decreases performance as Tekla
Structures has to recreate solids more often.
Testing various settings is the best way to optimize solid buffer size. Remember opening Tekla
Structures windows uses some RAM, and that other programs also use RAM for various
processes.

www.cadfamily.com
Here are approximate recommendations for the solid buffer size, based on the amount of RAM
your system has:
• 128 Mb memory - 10000
• 256 Mb memory - 20000
• 512 Mb memory - 40000
XS_SOLID_USE_HIGHER_ACCURACY
Use to model profiles more accurately in model views and drawings using profile roundings and
sloping flanges. Using this variable also makes the weight value more accurate.
By default this variable is not used. To use this variable, add it to the user.ini file and set to
TRUE.
This variable increases the number of faces in solids, which slows down
Tekla Structures. We recommend using this variable only when needed.
Limitations • In components, some stiffeners might bite into flanges of columns or beams.
• Some bolt edge distances are not correctly calculated.
XS_STACKED_FRACTION_TYPE
Use to define the appearance of fractions. You can use stacked fractions in drawings, text, marks
etc., but not in templates. The options are (from left to right in the illustration):
• NOT_STACKED
• DASH
• SLASH
• WITHOUT_SLASH
If you do not want to use stacked fractions, set this variable to NOT_STACKED, or use a backslash
character ( \ ) before the slash character ( / ) in the text (e.g. 1\ /16).
XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE
Category Components
Use to define the tolerance between the actual and standard widths of gusset plates created using
modeling tools or connections. Tekla Structures uses a standard plate file to define the default
plate width including the tolerance value. Enter the value in millimeters.
Components that use this variable are:
• Welded gusset (10)

• Bolted gusset (11)
• Tube gusset (20)
• Corner tube gusset (56)
• Corner bolted gusset (57)
• Wraparound gusset (58),
• Hollow brace wraparound gusset (59)
• Wraparound gusset cross (60)
• Gusseted cross (62)
• Corner wrapped gusset (63)
XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE
Category Components
Use to define the tolerance between the actual and standard widths of stiffener plates created by
Haunch (40). Enter the value in millimeters. The variable is set to 10 by default.
XS_STD_PART_MODEL
Category Numbering
Use to indicate the location of the standard part model.

Enter the folder path.
Example XS_STD_PART_MODEL=C:\TeklaStructures\Models\Stand
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_HEIGHT_FACTOR
Use the variable to set the scale factor for the text height in superscripts used in dimensions. The
default is 0.7.
Examples

www.cadfamily.com
Example number The variable is set to
0.7
1.5
0.5
XS_SWITCH_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR
Category Numbering
Use to define the order in which multi-drawing numbers, and part or assembly numbers appear
in multi-numbers. The options are: NONE, ASSEMBLIES, PARTS and ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.
Example If this variable is set to PARTS, the presentation of multinumbers for parts is 101a, not a101.
XS_SWITCH_POS_NUMBERS_FOR
Category Numbering
Changes the prefix you define for Tekla Structures assembly and/or part marks to a suffix (for
example, A1 becomes 1A). The options are NONE, PARTS, ASSEMBLIES,
ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS.
SYMEDHOME
Points to the location of the symbol editor message file.
XS_SYSTEM
Points to the location of the Tekla Structures system folder.

Specifying more You can specify more than one system folder. To do this, enter the file paths of the folders,
than one system separated by semicolons (for example,
directory C:\TeklaStructures\14.0\usimp\system_steel;
C:\TeklaStructures\14.0\usimp\system_common), as the value for the variable.
Tekla Structures searches the folders in the order that you have entered them. If files with
identical names exist in both folders, the one that is found first will be used. In the example
above, the files found from system_steel will be used instead of the files with identical names
in system_common.
See also Folder search order (p. 94)

8.20 T
TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE
Points to the location of the template font conversion file (template_fonts.cnv).
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Points to the location of the folder containing template (*.tpl) and report (*.rpt) files.
See also Folder search order.
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM
Use to set the path to the default environment-specific templates delivered with Tekla
Structures.
See also Folder search order.
XS_TEXT_FONT
No help available.
XS_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR
Use to fine-tune Tekla Structures font heights when you are using the "Custom %" setting in
Windows 2000 font size setup
Example set XS_TEXT_HEIGHT_FACTOR=1.0
XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON
Use to define the point where text that is positioned almost vertically is turned so that it is faced
the other way around. The default is 0.1.

www.cadfamily.com
TEXT_X_SIZE
Use to change font size in the Template Editor
Example set TEXT_X_SIZE=3
TEXT_Y_SIZE
Use to change font size in the Template Editor
Example TEXT_Y_SIZE=5
XS_THUMBNAIL_FONT
Category Model view
Use to set the font used in the component catalog.
XS_TPLED_INI
Defines the location of the tpled.ini file.

Example XS_TPLED_INI=%XS_DIR%\environments\%2\template\settings\
XS_TRY_TO_KEEP_LOCATION_IN_FREEPLACING
Use to fine-tune the functionality of the Arrange Drawing Objects command in the Drawing
Editor.
This variable is set to TRUE by default, meaning that the Arrange Drawing Objects command
tries to find a new location for the selected object as close to the current location as possible. If
the current location is free, the object is not moved at all.
When this variable is set to FALSE, the Arrange Drawing Objects command works the same
way as Ignore Current Locations.

XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS
Use to define how Tekla Structures draws tubes.

Set to a decimal value. Tekla Structures individually draws the inner and outer surfaces of tubes
thicker than this value
Example XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS=16.0
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS
Lengthens unfolded tubes by the following multiplication factor:

factor = 1.0+2*XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS/diameter
Example Tube d=219
When you set the variable to 0, the unwrapped length of the tube (1.0*PI*diameter) = 688.
When the variable is set to 10, the length of the unfolded tube = factor * diameter* PI = (1.0 +
2*10/219) * 219 * 3.14 = 751
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC
Category CNC
To use the plate profile type B in the NC file header data for unwrapped round tubes, set to TRUE.
To use RO for round tubes, enter FALSE.
Use this variable only when you have set the variable
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES to TRUE.
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_WITH_CUT_HOLES
Set to TRUE to include cut holes in workshop drawings or NC files of unwrapped CHS (circular
hollow section) profiles.
This variable is set to TRUE by default. If you set it to FALSE, then the previously existing
unwrapping method is applied.

www.cadfamily.com
If you set this variable to TRUE, the variables
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_LIMIT_THICKNESS and
XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_PAPER_THICKNESS have no effect.
Note also that using this variable does not affect conical tube profiles.
8.21 U
XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER
You can collect all the *.uel files of your custom components and sketched cross sections in
one folder, and then automatically import them to new models. Use this variable to point to the
folder containing the *.uel files.
When this variable is set (preferably in the user.ini file), and you create a new model, Tekla
Structures automatically imports the *.uel files to the model.
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT
Use to define the format of angle text. Use the same integer values that appear in the option menu
of the dimension property dialog box (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7). The default value is 1.

XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECISION
Use to define the precision of angle text. Use the same integer values that appear in the option
menu of the dimension property dialog box (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 16, 32, 10, 100, 1000). The default
value is 10.
XS_UNFOLDING_DONT_USE_NEUTRAL_AXIS_FOR_RADIUS
By default, Tekla Structures uses the neutral axis of the part to calculate the bending radius in
unfolded views. Set this variable to TRUE to have Tekla Structures calculate the bending radius
from the inner surface of the part.
XS_UNFOLDING_PLANE_EPSILON
Category Dimensioning: Unfolding
Use to specify the epsilon when checking if all section points are on the same plane. The default
value is 0.01 mm.
XS_UNIQUE_NUMBERS
Category Numbering
Set this variable to have Tekla Structures create unique position numbers for all parts when
numbering, even if they are equal.
See also XS_UNIQUE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS (p. 400)
XS_UNIQUE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS
Category Numbering
Set to TRUE if you want Tekla Structures to create unique position numbers for all assemblies
when numbering, even if they are identical.
Parts are still numbered the same way as before.
The default value is FALSE.
See also XS_UNIQUE_NUMBERS (p. 400)
XS_UPDATE_MARK_PLACING_IN_DRAWING
Updates the position of updated marks in specific drawing types. Use the letters in the following
table to specify the drawing types. By default, this variable applies to single-part, assembly, and
multi-drawings.

www.cadfamily.com
Letter Drawing type
W Single-part drawings
A Assembly drawings
M Multi-drawings
G General arrangement drawings
C Cast-unit drawings
Example To update the position of updated part marks in single-part, assembly, multi-, and general
arrangement drawings:
XS_UPDATE_MARK_PLACING_IN_DRAWING=WAMG
XS_UPDATE_MARKS_IN_FROZEN_DRAWINGS
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures to update marks in frozen drawings and also create new
marks if new parts have been added. If disabled Tekla Structures only updates parts and bolts.
XS_UPSIDE_DOWN_TEXT_ALLOWED
Set toTRUE to place part marks or other text upside down to illustrate that identical parts have a
different orientation. If you do not set this variable, Tekla Structures automatically changes all
marks or text that are rotated more than 90 degrees.
XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT
Use to affect the distance within which the first and last US Absolute dimension lines appear as
relative.
Example XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT=1000
In this example, Tekla Structures will change first and last dimension lines shorter than 1000
mm to Relative dimensions. Dimension lines greater or equal to 1000 mm will remain US
Absolute dimensions.
XS_USABSOLUTE2_TO_RELATIVE_LENGTH_FACTOR
Tekla Structures multiplies the space required by US Absolute2 dimension text by this value. If
the result is larger than the actual dimension, Tekla Structures changes the dimension type to
Relative. The default value is 1.5.
XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR
Category Numbering

Makes the assembly or cast unit number the part number of main parts in assemblies or cast
units.
• Set to MAIN_PART to assign the assembly or cast unit number to the main parts of an
assembly or cast unit. All other parts use part number.
• Set to LOOSE_PART to assign the assembly or cast unit number to the assemblies or cast
units that only contain one part.
Do not use the same prefix for parts and assemblies.
XS_USE_BOLT_DISTANCE_IN_NOTCH_CALCULATIONS
Set to TRUE to use automatic notch height calculation according to bolt distance. This affects
connections 129 and 184.
XS_USE_COLOR_DRAWINGS
Changes the default color mode in drawings when the Tekla Structures is started. By default,
drawings are black and white. Set to TRUE to use colors in drawings.
XS_USE_CONVEX_PROTECT_AREA
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures calculate the protection area more accurately along the
faces of parts so that part marks can be placed inside the profile also for curved hollow sections.
The variable is set to TRUE by default.
XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_FILE_NAME
Use to prevent Tekla Structures converting the dot in the drawing name (e.g. B.1) to an
underscore in the plot file name when printing.
XS_USE_DRAWING_NAME_AS_PLOT_TITLE
Category Printing
Set to TRUE when you want Tekla Structures to use the drawing name as the print title, for
example, when printing to a .pdf file or to a Windows printer.
As a result, the Windows printer dialog box, for example, will show the drawing plot file name
you define with variables and not the general Tekla Structures print title, such as "Tekla
Structures drawing - A [T.100]".
See also XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME.

www.cadfamily.com
XS_USE_EIGHT_COLORS_IN_MODELING_VIEWS
Set to TRUE to disable additional colors in modeling views.
Example XS_USE_EIGHT_COLORS_IN_MODELING_VIEWS=TRUE
XS_USE_FILE_COMPRESSION
Set to automatically compress model files. The compression ratio of the model is approximately
70 to 80%. This means you can open and save models more quickly, particularly when working
on a network.
XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION
Category Plate work
Set to any value to use flat bar designation. For more information on flat bars, see Using flat
bars.
XS_USE_LINECLIP
Category Printing
Set to FALSE to display continuous lines in printed drawings, for example, to run the line through
text or drawing marks.
XS_USE_LINECLIP = TRUE XS_USE_LINECLIP = FALSE
For DWG/ DXF export use the variable XS_USE_LINECLIP_IN_EXPORT.
XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR
Category Numbering
Use to allow the prefixes used in part and assembly numbering to be used in multi-drawing
numbers.
Example If you set this variable to PARTS, the multinumbers for parts appear as 101Pa.
Category Numbering
Use to define if multinumbering affects assemblies, parts, or both. Part and assembly numbering
must be based on drawing numbers to use multinumbering.

The options are:
• NONE
• ASSEMBLIES
• PARTS
• ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS
XS_USE_MULTI_NUMBERING_WHEN_COPYING_DRAWING_VIEWS
Category Numbering
To use multinumbering when copying drawing views, enter TRUE in the Value field. To not use
multinumbering, clear the Value field.
XS_USE_NEW_CLASH_CHECK
If you are working on a large model, running the clash check may sometimes be slow. In that
case you can use the old clash checking functionality, which does not recognize clashes with
reference models.
To revert to the old functionality, set the variable to FALSE. The default value is TRUE.
XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION
Category Plate work
Set to TRUE to switch the width and length values, if the width is greater than the length.
Exampole A beam with profile BL15*240 and the distance between beam endpoints is 215 mm.
• If XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION is set, the length of the beam is fixed at 240, and
the beam profile changes to BL15*215.
• If XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION is not set, the length of the beam is to 215 and the
profile remains BL15*240
XS_USE_NEW_WELD_PLACING
If you have set welds visible in the drawing, this variable affects in which drawing view (front,
back, top, or bottom) Tekla Structures draws the welds.
• When the variable is set to TRUE, Tekla Structures draws welds to the view in which has
best visibility to the secondary part.
• When the variable is not set, Tekla Structures selects the view according to the primary
part.
XS_USE_NEW_USNOTCH
Use to indicate whether to locate the horizontal cut of a notch above or below the flange of the
main beam.
Used with the following notching options:

www.cadfamily.com
XS_USE_NUMERIC_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR
Category Numbering
Use to define which objects have numeric multi-numbers.The options are:

• ASSEMBLIES
• PARTS
• ASSEMBLIES_AND_PARTS
Example If you set this variable to PARTS, Tekla Structures displays the multinumber as e.g. 101/1. If
you also set the variable XS_USE_MODEL_PREFIX_IN_MULTI_NUMBERS_FOR to PARTS, Tekla
Structures replaces the slash character with the part prefix, e.g. 101P1.
XS_USE_OLD_FILTERING
Use to change the appearance of the Object Group - Select Filter dialog box.
The default value is FALSE.
See also Select filter dialog box
XS_USE_OLD_HQ_PROFILE_DEFINITION
Category Profiles
Set to use the old HQ profile definition. In the old HQ profile definition, profile height is the
total height from the lower surface of the lower flange to the top of the upper flange.
The new HQ profile definition omits the lower flange thickness and the profile height is equal
to the web height.
XS_USE_OLD_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_CALCULATION
No help available.
XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_SHEET_SIZES
Set to 1 to have sheet sizes in layouts and drawing lists in inches.
XS_USE_ONLY_INCHES_IN_WELD_LENGTH
Set to TRUE to only display inches in weld length symbols.

XS_USE_ONLY_NOMINAL_REBAR_DIAMETER
Nominal diameter defines the cross section area of the reinforcing bar. To use nominal diameter
for reinforcing bars, enter TRUE in the Value field. To use actual diameter, clear the Value field.
(Actual diameter takes into account the "embosses" and tells the smallest hole diameter where
the bar fits.)
XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING
Use to make the position dimension of plates dependent on the position of plates in the model.
Example Where a plate is positioned behind the reference points, Tekla Structures will place the position
dimension on the top face of the plate.
XS_USE_POINT_AS_SEPARATOR_IN_PROFILE_NAME
Set to use the period character (.) as the separator in parametric profile names, instead using it
as a decimal separator. This increases the number of separators available in the US imperial
environment.
XS_USE_SEMI_ORTHO
Set to FALSE when you want to use full orthogonal snapping. With full orthogonal snapping,
Tekla Structures can only to snap to positions in orthogonal directions (0, 45, 90, 135, 180, etc.
degrees) on the work plane.
When set to TRUE (default), Tekla Structures uses semi-orthogonal snapping, which enables you
to pick orthogonal positions within a tolerance which you set with
XS_SEMI_ORTHO_ANGLE. Outside the tolerance you can pick any position.
XS_USE_SMALLER_GUSSET_PLATE
Category Components
Set to TRUE to minimize the size of rectangular gusset plates created by gusset connections. You
can create smaller gusset plates by using a single bracing and secondary bolts dimensioned to
the middle of the secondary part. Tekla Structures generates a triangular gusset plate when the
primary part is located between diagonals.
XS_USE_SMOOTH_LINES
Category Model view
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures use anti-aliasing to minimize jagged edges in rendered
views. Before using this variable, check that your display adapter supports anti-aliasing.
XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING
Category Model view

www.cadfamily.com
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures bypass your graphic adapter in rendered views. Use this
variable if you have problems with your display (e.g. lines not correctly drawn.
XS_USE_SPECIAL_FILLER_PLATE_THICKNESS
Set to TRUE to have filler plate thicknesses comply with Japanese standards.
XS_USE_TUBE_INNER_LENGTH_IN_DIMENSIONING
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures dimension the overall length of tube profiles along the inner
surface instead of outer surface.
XS_USE_VERTICAL_PLACING_FOR_COLUMNS_IN
Use to place columns vertically in drawings. Use the following options to specify the types of
columns to place vertically:
• ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
• SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS
• ASSEMBLY_AND_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS
XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE
Defines the location of the user-defined bolt symbol table file.
XS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS
Category Profiles
Use to define additional separators to separate dimensions in the names of parametric profiles.
The separators can consist of multiple characters.
Separate the values with commas, for example GA,ABC.
Follow these rules in naming:

• Use upper case letters in separator names.
• Do not enter digits, commas, or special characters in separator
names.
• Do not start separator names with a dash (-) or full stop (.).
• Do not start separator names with an inch separator (", ', /) when
using imperial units.
In addition to these characters, Tekla Structures always recognizes the standard separator
characters X, *, -, and /, and also the character defined by the variable
XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR.

8.22 V
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBERS
Category Numbering
Specifies valid characters for assembly family position numbers. You must specify all the valid
characters in this variable.
See also XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER
Category Numbering
Specifies valid characters for the assembly family number qualifier. You must specify all the
valid characters in this variable.
Example XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_QUALIFIER=GHJKL
See also XS_ASSEMBLY_FAMILY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS
Category Numbering
Use to specify the valid characters for assembly multinumbers. You must specify all the valid
Example XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_MULTI_NUMBERS=abeg
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBERS
Category Numbering
Specifies valid characters for assembly position numbers. See also
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING.
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS
Category Numbering
Use to specify the valid characters for part multinumbers. You must specify all the valid
Example XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_MULTI_NUMBERS=ABEG
XS_VALID_CHARS_FOR_PART_POSITION_NUMBERS
Category Numbering
Use to specify the valid characters for part position numbers. See also
XS_PART_POSITION_NUMBER_FORMAT_STRING (p. 368).

www.cadfamily.com
XS_VIEW_DIM_LINE_COLOR
Category Model View
Use to change the dimension line color in rendered views. Define the color using RGB values:
XS_VIEW_DIM_LINE_COLOR=<value for red> <value for green> <value for
blue>.
Separate the values with spaces. Define the values on a scale of 0 to 1. Restart Tekla Structures
Example
RGB value Color

1.0 1.0 1.0 White
1.0 0.0 0.0 Red
0.0 1.0 0.0 Green
0.0 0.0 1.0 Blue
1.0 1.0 0.0 Yellow
XS_VIEW_DIM_TEXT_COLOR
Category Model View
Use to change the dimension text color in rendered views. Define the color using RGB values:
XS_VIEW_DIM_TEXT_COLOR=<value for red> <value for green> <value for
blue>.
Example
RGB value Color

1.0 1.0 1.0 White
1.0 0.0 0.0 Red
0.0 1.0 0.0 Green
0.0 0.0 1.0 Blue
1.0 1.0 0.0 Yellow
XS_VIEW_FAST_BOLT_COLOR
Category Model View
Use to define the color of bolts in rendered views when you are using the bolt representation
option Fast. Define the color using the RGB (Red Green Blue) values. The scale is from 0 to 1.
Example For example, use 0.0 0.0 0.0 for black and 1.0 1.0 1.0 for white.
XS_VIEW_FREE_MEASURE_PLANE
Category Model View

Use to define the plane where the results of free measure are shown. You can have the distances
displayed in the local and/or global coordinate system.
The possible values are VIEW, WORK and BOTH. The default value is VIEW.
If you set the variable to BOTH, only one value is shown if the values are
identical.
Example In the following example, the variable has been set to BOTH:
XS_VIEW_HEIGHT
Category Model view
Use to define the default window size of views and their initial position on the screen. Similar
to XS_BASICVIEW... variables.
XS_VIEW_PART_LABEL_COLOR
Category Model View
Use to change the part label color in rendered views. Define the color using RGB values:
XS_VIEW_PART_LABEL_COLOR=<value for red> <value for green> <value for
blue>.
Example
RGB value Color

1.0 1.0 1.0 White
1.0 0.0 0.0 Red
0.0 1.0 0.0 Green

www.cadfamily.com
RGB value Color
0.0 0.0 1.0 Blue
1.0 1.0 0.0 Yellow
XS_VIEW_POSITION_X
Category Model view
XS_VIEW_POSITION_Y
Category Model view
XS_VIEW_TITLE_FONT
Category Model view
Use to specify the font for drawing view titles. If this variable is disabled, Tekla Structures uses
the font specified by XS_DEFAULT_FONT.
XS_VIEW_WIDTH
Category Model view
8.23 W
XS_WARP_MAX_ANGLE_BETWEEN_CS
Use to define the maximum angle between adjacent polygonal parts of the warped shape.
Enter the value in degrees. You get best results if you use values between 0.5 - 10.0. For example
3.0.
XS_WARP_MAX_DEVIATION
Use to define the taximum difference between real warped shape and the polygonal warped
shape in the model.
Enter the value in millimeters. You get best results if you use values between 5.0-100.0. For
example, 50.0.

XS_WEB_PUBLISHING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Set in the user.ini file to define the location of the folder containing WebViewer templates.
When you set this variable, Tekla Structures searches for Web Viewer
templates only in the folder defined with this variable.
XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE
Category Welds
Use to define how Tekla Structures filters weld types.

• EXACT Tekla Structures filters the welds equal to the default size in the Welding properties
dialog box
• MIN Tekla Structures filters all welds equal to the default size or smaller n the Welding
XS_WELD_FONT
Use to specify the font for weld text. If this variable is blank, Tekla Structures uses the default
font.
XS_WELDING_LENGTH_TOLERANCE
Category Welds
Use to specify the minimum edge length Tekla Structures should take into account when
searching for weld locations. The default value is 30 mm.
XS_WELDING_TOUCH_TOLERANCE
Category Welds
Use to define the maximum possible gap between two parts welded together. The default value
is 30 mm.
XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR
Category Welds
Set as follows to define the weld CC/length separator character according the AISC (3@12) or
AISC (100-300) standard:
XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR=@
XS_WELD_NUMBER_FORMAT

www.cadfamily.com
Use to define weld number format. For more information, see
XS_JOINT_NUMBER_FORMAT.
XS_WORKING_POINTS_VALID_ALSO_OUTSIDE_PART
Set to TRUE to have Tekla Structures also draw reference dimensions for points outside part end
points.
8.24 Z
XS_ZERO_POINT_SYMBOL_OLD_WAY
Set to TRUE to use RD marks containing a circle rather than the text RD. These marks indicate
the zero point of dimensions when you use US Absolute dimension types. By default RD marks
contain the text RD.
XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO
Category Model view
Use to configure the Zoom in and Zoom out commands. The default value is 0.25. Increase this
value to zoom more with a single mouse click.
XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE
Category Model view
See XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE.
XS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE
Category Model view
Use to configure zooming when you use wheel mouse mode.

www.cadfamily.com
9 File extensions
Introduction This appendix contains the filename extensions of the files you save in dialog boxes using the
Save as button, or the Save defaults command on the Setup menu.
Filename extension Dialog box name

4d Project Status Visualization
ad Assembly drawing properties
adc Assembly - section view properties
adcd Assembly - dimensioning properties
adcs Assembly - section symbol properties
add Assembly - dimension properties
adl Assembly - layout properties
adp Assembly - part properties
adr Assembly - protection properties
ads Assembly - bolt properties
adv Assembly - view properties
adw Assembly - weld properties
ajm Assembly - connection mark properties
apm Assembly - part mark properties
asm Assembly - bolt mark properties
cbm Concrete beam properties
ccl Concrete column properties
clm Column properties
cpf Pad footing properties
cpl Contour plate properties
cpn Concrete panel properties
crs Orthogonal beam properties
csl Concrete slab properties

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com File extensions
cudc Cast unit - section view properties
cudcd Cast unit - dimensioning properties
cudcomp Cast unit - component properties
cudcs Cast unit - section symbol properties
cudd Cast unit - dimension properties
cudgr Cast unit - grid properties
cudl Cast unit - layout properties
cudnp Cast unit - neighbor part properties
cudp Cast unit - part properties
cudr Cast unit - reinforcement properties
cudrm Cast unit - reinforcement mark properties
cudrp Cast unit - protection properties
cudv Cast unit - view properties
cunpm Cast unit - neighbor part mark properties
cupm Cast unit - part mark properties
dia Twin profile properties
dim Dimension properties
fas Text file properties
fdg DWG/DXF properties
fhl Hyperlink properties
fms Drawing frame properties
gar Arc properties
gci Circle properties
gd General arrangement drawing properties
gdcom General - component properties
gdcm Cast unit - component mark properties
gdl General - layout properties
gdr General - reinforcement properties
gdrp General - protection properties
gjm General - connection mark properties
gpg Polygon properties
gln Line properties
gpl Polyline properties
grt Rectangle properties
ldb Drawing export layers
ler Layer properties
lev Level mark properties
md Multi-drawing properties
mvi View properties (modeling)
ncp Pop-mark properties
num Numbering setup

www.cadfamily.com
File extensions EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
pm Part mark properties
PObjGrp Object group - representation
prf Project properties
prt Beam properties
rbg Reinforcing bar group properties
rbr Reinforcing bar properties
rbm Reinforcement mesh properties
rep Object representation
rev Revision mark properties
rop Reference object properties
sbl Symbol properties
scr Bolt properties
sm Bolt mark properties
SObjGrp Object Group - Selection Filter
stp Preferences
txt Text properties
vf View filter properties
vg View grid properties
vi View properties (drawing)
vjm View connection mark properties
vnp View neighbour part properties
vp View part properties
vpm View part mark properties
vs View bolt properties
vsm View bolt mark properties
vw View weld properties
wd Single part drawing properties
wdcd Single - dimensioning properties
wdr Single - protection properties
wjm Single - connection mark properties
wld Weld properties
wls Weld symbol properties

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com File extensions
www.cadfamily.com
File extensions EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
10 Reserved shortcuts
Introduction This appendix lists the shortcut keys Tekla Structures installs by default. You should not assign
these shortcuts to other commands.
You can use upper or lower case for shortcuts containing characters (e.g. a or A). You need to
use a combination of keystrokes in some shortcuts. The keystrokes are linked with the +
character.
Example To use the shortcut for Redo, Ctrl+Z, hold down the Ctrl key and press Z on the keyboard.
10.1 Common shortcuts
Command Shortcut
Help F1
Open Ctrl + O
Save Ctrl + S
Delete Del
Properties Alt+Enter
Undo Ctrl+Z
Redo Ctrl+Y
Interrupt Esc
Repeat last command Enter

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com Reserved shortcuts
10.2 Modeling commands
Command Shortcut
Pan P
Move right x
Move left z
Move down y
Move up w
Rotate using mouse Ctrl+R
Rotate using keyboard Ctrl + arrow keys,Shift +
arrow keys
Disable view rotation F8
Set view rotation point V
Auto rotate Shift + R, Shift + T
3D/Plane Ctrl+P
Open component catalog Ctrl+F
Fly (in perspective views) Shift+F
Zoom original Home
Zoom previous End
Zoom in PgUp
Zoom out PgDn
Center by cursor Ins
Update window Ctrl+U
Snapshots F9, F10, F11, F12
Xsnap (Tolerate cursor) T
Smart Select S
Drag and drop D
Middle button pan Shift+M
Copy Ctrl + C
Move Ctrl + M
Ortho O
Relative snap R
Relative coordinate input @, R

Absolute coordinate input $, A
Next position Tab
Previous position Shift + Tab
Select filter Ctrl + G
Add to selection Shift
Toggle selection Ctrl

www.cadfamily.com
Reserved shortcuts EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
Command Shortcut
Lock X, Y or Z coordi- X, Y or Z
nates
Select all select switch F2
Select parts select switch F3
Select all Ctrl + A
Select assembly Alt + object
Snap to reference lines/ F4
points
Snap to geometry lines/ F5
points
Snap to nearest points F6
Snap to any position F7
Advanced options Ctrl + E
Inquire object Shift + I
Free measure F
Create new model Ctrl + N
Open the Views list Ctrl + I
Create clip plane Shift + X
Rollover highlight H
Hide object Shift + H
Undo last polygon pick Backspace
Finish polygon input Space bar
Create AutoConnection Ctrl + J
Phase manager Ctrl + H
Clash check Shift + C
AutoDrawing Ctrl + W
Drawing list Ctrl + L
Clone drawing Ctrl + D
Print drawings Shift + P
Create report Ctrl + B
10.3 Drawing commands
Command Shortcut
Associative symbol Shift + A
Black and white drawing B
Ghost outline Shift + G
Open drawing list Ctrl + O
Open next drawing Ctrl + Pg Dn

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com Reserved shortcuts
Command Shortcut
Open previous drawing Ctrl + Pg Up
Add an orthogonal G
dimension
10.4 UCS
Command Shortcut
Set UCS origin U
Set UCS by two points Shift+U
Toggle orientation Ctrl+T
Reset current Ctrl+1
Reset all Ctrl+0
10.5 Representation for parts
Command Shortcut
Wireframe Ctrl+1
Shaded Wireframe Ctrl+2
Hidden Lines Ctrl+3
Rendered Ctrl+4
Rendered (Dark Colors) Ctrl+5
10.6 Representation for component parts
Command Shortcut
Wireframe Shift+1
Shaded Wireframe Shift+2
Hidden Lines Shift+3
Rendered Shift+4
Rendered (Dark Colors) Shift+5
See also Defining shortcuts (p. 53)

www.cadfamily.com
Reserved shortcuts EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
11 Template attributes
Introduction You can use template fields in drawing and report templates. When you open a drawing or create
a report, Tekla Structures uses the attributes or formulas the fields contain to calculate and
display information from the model database. This could, for example, include assembly weight
or cover area.
Audience Anyone who needs to modify report or drawing templates will find this information useful.
Organization Descriptions of template attributes are listed in alphabetical order:
A B C D E F G H I L
(p. (p. (p. (p. (p. (p. (p. (p. (p. (p.
43 43 43 44 44 44 44 44 44 44
0) 7) 8) 1) 4) 6) 7) 8) 9) 9)
M N O P R S T U V W
(p. (p. (p. (p. (p. (p. (p. (p. (p. (p.
45 45 45 45 45 45 46 46 46 46
1) 2) 3) 4) 8) 9) 2) 4) 4) 5)
Topics Content type (p. 423)

Attributes (p. 425)
User-defined attributes in templates (p. 426)
11.1 Content type

Use content type in the ROW section to select the parts to display in reports or drawing tables.
Reports can include an entire model or selected objects. You can include parts and bolts,
drawings, reinforcements, surface treatment, components, studs, and holes in reports, Tekla
Structures automatically selects related assemblies and other objects.
Tekla Structures always selects all the parts in drawings for inclusion in drawing tables.
For more information on content type, see Content types in the Template Editor help.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com Template attributes
The content types are:
Type Description
ASSEMBLY Use to create lists of assemblies and single parts.
Includes all assemblies containing the selected
parts and bolts.
BOLT Use to create screw and bolt lists. Includes all bolts
connected to selected parts.
CAST_UNIT Use to create lists of cast units.
COMMENT Use to create empty rows or rows that only have
textual data or lines anywhere on a template.
CONNECTION Use to create lists of connections.
DRAWING Use to create drawing lists without revision history
information. Use for reports and included draw-
ings.
HOLE Use to create lists of holes.
MESH Use to create lists of meshes.
NUT Use to create lists of nuts. Contains all nuts for
bolts associated with the selected parts.
PART
REBAR Use to create lists of reinforcing bars.
REVISION Use to create lists of revision marks.
SIMILAR_ASSEMBLY Use to create lists of similar parts.
SIMILAR_CAST_UNIT To use this content type, you need to have an
SIMILAR_PART empty (hidden in output ASSEMBLY, PART or
CAST_UNIT row in row hierarchy above the row
with SIMILAR_* content type:
You cannot have any rows below SIMILAR_* row

content type in the row hierarchy.
STRAND Use to create lists of prestressed strands.
STUD Use to create lists of studs.
SURFACING
SUMMARY
WASHER Use to create lists of washers. Contains all washers
for all bolts associated with the selected parts.
WELD

www.cadfamily.com
Template attributes EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
11.2 Attributes
Templates and reports contain value fields, which contain attributes or formulas. The content
type you choose affects which attributes you can use.
Attribute displays data from model object when the template or report is output. The available
attributes are defined with following files, located in ..\environments\*your
environment*\template\settings folder:
File Description
contentattributes.lst This is a container file, including all
the file names which contain the
actual attribute definitions.
contentattributes_global.l This file includes attributes which
st are hard-coded into the program. Do
not edit this file.
contentattributes_userdefi File includes user-defined
ned.lst attributes, which are defined in
objects.inp file.
Do not edit the contentattributes_global.lst file.

To use your own attributes in templates and reports, add them to the
contentattributes_userdefined.lst file. See more in User-
defined attributes in templates (p. 426).
Use any attribute in the ROW section of drawings and reports.

You can use the following attributes in headers, footers, page footers, and page headers:
Heade Page Page

Attribute r Footer footer header
ADDRESS X X X X
BUILDER X X X X
CURRENT_PHASE X X
DATE X X X X
DATE_CREATE X X X X
DATE_END X X X X
DATE_ISSUE X X X X
DATE_LAST X X X X
DATE_MODIFY X X X X
DATE_PLOT X X X X
DATE_START X X X X
DESIGNER X X X X
DR_PART_POS X X X X
HEIGHT X X X X

Heade Page Page
Attribute r Footer footer header
ID X X X X
INFO1, INFO2 X X X X
LAST X X X X
LAST_MARK X X X X
LAST_TEXT1...3 X X X X
MARK X X X X
MODEL X X X X
NAME X X X X
NAME_BASE X X X X
NUMBER#1, NUMBER X X X X
#2
OBJECT X X X X
PAGE X X
PHASE X X
PLOTFILE X X X X
ROW_IN_PAGE X X
SCALE1...5 X X X X
SIZE X X X X
TEXT1...3 X X X X
TIME X X
TITLE X X X X
TITLE1...3 X X
TYPE X X X X
USERFIELD_1 ... _8 X X X X
WIDTH X X X
11.3 User-defined attributes in templates

The user-defined attributes used in templates and reports are defined in the
contentattributes_userdefined.lst file (located in
..\environments\*your environment*\template\settings folder).
By default, this file includes most of the user-defined attributes in the part properties dialog
boxes. To use other attributes in templates and reports, you must add them to the
contentattributes_userdefined.lst file.
The contentattributes_userdefined.lst file is divided into two sections:
1. A list of attribute names and the default settings:

www.cadfamily.com
2. A list of attributes assigned to content types:
Row content type
The attribute hierarchy in the Template Editor

Customizable comments. In this example, the tab name in the user-defined
attributes dialog box.
User-defined attribute names, same as in the objects.inp file.
See also Adding attributes to contentattributes_userdefined.lst (p. 428)

Adding attributes to contentattributes_userdefined.lst
In the following example a user-defined attribute named MY_ATTRIBUTE is added to the
attribute tree in Template Editor:
The attribute has been added to the user-defined properties for drawings:
1. Open the contentattributes_userdefined.lst file in a text editor.

• File is located in ..\environments\*your
environment*\template\settings folder.
2. Add MY_ATTRIBUTE to the list of attribute names and define the settings:
3. Add MY_ATTRIBUTE to the list of attributes assigned to content types:

• Select the content type according to which object the attribute is associated to in the
objects.inp file. In this example: DRAWING content type.
• Add the attribute is in format USERDEFINED.*ATTRIBUTE_NAME*
4. Save the changes.

5. Attribute is shown in the attribute tree in Template Editor, under USERDEFINED:

www.cadfamily.com
Modify the way attributes are displayed in the attribute tree
Add comments and modify the way the attributes are displayed in the Template Editor attribute
tree.
Add comment You can add your own comment text to the attribute in the
text contentattributes_userdefined.lst file:
1. Open the file and go to the list of attributes assigned to content types.
2. Add your comment inside quotation marks, after the attribute name:
3. Save the changes.

4. The comment you added is displayed in the attribute tree in Template Editor:
Add hierarchy You can add your own hierarchy, which is shown in the attribute tree in Template Editor:
1. Open the contentattributes_userdefined.lst and go to the list of attributes
assigned to content types.
2. Define the hierarchy in square brackets, between USERDEFINED. and the attribute name:
• Notice the full stops after the brackets, and between the hierarchies.
3. The new hierarchy is shown in the attribute tree:

User-defined attributes are case sensitive. Ensure that you type in the field
name using the correct case for all characters.
See also Interpreting objects.inp (p. 101)

Adding properties (p. 98)
11.4 A
ACN
Shows control numbers.
For more information on control numbers, see Assigning control numbers to parts and Tools
> Numbering > Create control numbers... .
ACTIVE_DESIGN_CODE
Shows the active design code of material.
ADDRESS
Shows the address entered in the Project properties dialog box.
ALIAS_NAME1 ... 3
Alias name of the material.
Use for part and main part material attributes in ASSEMBLY and PART content types.

www.cadfamily.com
ANG_S, ANG_T, ANG_U, ANG_V
Show bending angles of reinforcing bars based on the mappings in the
rebar_schedule_config.inp file, located in the
..\environments\*your_environment*\system folder. These mappings are
environment-specific by default. You can modify them to suit your company or project needs.
See also Reinforcement in templates (p. 490)
Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 469)
ANG_U_MAX, ANG_U_MIN, ANG_V_MAX, ANG_V_MIN (p. 431)
DIM_A ... DIM_G, DIM_H1, DIM_H2, DIM_I, DIM_J, DIM_K1, DIM_K2, DIM_O,
DIM_R, DIM_TD, DIM_X, DIM_Y (p. 443)
ANG_U_MAX, ANG_U_MIN, ANG_V_MAX, ANG_V_MIN

Shows the minimum and maximum bending angles of reinforcing bars or meshes in tapered
cross sections. See the example below:
AREA
Shows the gross surface area and net area of plates for parts with a profile cross section. It does
not take into account cuts and fittings. Tekla Structures calculates area using the extreme length
and profile cover area per meter (value defined in the profile catalog). AREA only takes into
account the cover area, not the cross area on profile ends.
For polygon plates, the value is the actual area of the fabricated part; for all other objects it is
zero.
See also AREA_GROSS
AREA_NET
AREA_FORM_TOP, AREA_FORM_BOTTOM, AREA_FORM_SIDE

Shows the area of faces whose normal vector points to the following directions:
• top of form (AREA_FORM_TOP)
• bottom of form (AREA_FORM_BOTTOM)
• form sides (AREA_FORM_SIDE)

For assemblies, the main part local up direction dictates the form up/bottom/sides directions.
Faces which are inclined less than 5 degrees are counted in the top and bottom areas. Faces
which are skew => 85 degrees are counted in the side areas. Overlapping faces may be counted

twice. Faces which are exactly 45 degrees against main global or local axes, are not counted to
any direction.
AREA_FORM_TOP = 42
sq.ft.
AREA_FORM_BOTTOM =
42 sq.ft.
AREA_FORM_SIDE =
2*(2*7 + 3*5) +
2*(2*6 + 2*5) = 58 +
44 = 102 sq.ft.
AREA_GROSS
For profiles this field shows the same result as AREA. For plates it shows the square area
(extreme length multiplied by extreme width) needed to include the entire plate. For other
objects it shows a zero.
AREA_NET
For parts this field shows the net surface area that forms the actual area of the fabricated part.
For other objects it shows a zero.
AREA_PER_TONS
Shows AREA/WEIGHT x 1000.
AREA_PGX, AREA_NGX, AREA_PGY, AREA_NGY, AREA_PGZ, AREA_NGZ

Shows the area of faces whose normal vector points to the positive or negative direction of the
following global axes:
Attribute Direction
AREA_PGX Positive direction of global X-axis
AREA_NGX Negative direction of global X-axis
AREA_PGY Positive direction of global Y-axis
AREA_NGY Negative direction of global Y-axis
AREA_PGZ Positive direction of global Z-axis
AREA_NGZ Negative direction of global Z-axis

www.cadfamily.com
Also faces whose normal vector is located in less than 45 degree angle to global axis are also
included in the area. Faces exactly in 45 degree angle are not included in any global direction.
AREA_PLAN
For parts this field shows the total upper surface area (perpendicular to the global Z-axis).
ASSEMBLY content type
• Shows the total upper surface area (perpendicular to the global Z-axis) of the parts included
in an assembly.
AREA_PROJECTION_GXY_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_GXZ_GROSS,
AREA_PROJECTION_GYZ_GROSS
Shows the area of the "shadow" of a part, assembly, or cast unit at the following global planes:
• XY-plane
• XZ-plane
• YZ-plane
Restrictions
• Areas are calculated always in net areas (holes are taken into account) even when gross is
requested.
• Overlapping faces are counted twice.
AREA_PROJECTION_GXY_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_GXZ_NET,
AREA_PROJECTION_GYZ_NET
Shows the net area of the "shadow" of a part, assembly, or cast unit at the following global
planes:
• XY-plane
• XZ-plane
• YZ-plane
AREA_PROJECTION_XY_GROSS, AREA_PROJECTION_XZ_GROSS,
AREA_PROJECTION_YZ_GROSS
Shows the area of the "shadow" of a part, assembly, or cast unit at its local planes:
• XY-plane
• XZ-plane
• YZ-plane

AREA_PROJECTION_XY_NET, AREA_PROJECTION_XZ_NET,
AREA_PROJECTION_YZ_NET
Shows the net area of the "shadow" of a part, assembly, or cast unit at its local planes:
• XY-plane
• XZ-plane
• YZ-plane
AREA_PX, AREA_NX, AREA_PY, AREA_NY, AREA_PZ, AREA_NZ

Shows the area of faces whose normal vector points to the positive or negative direction of the
following local axes:
Attribute Direction
AREA_PX Positive direction of local X-axis
AREA_NX Negative direction of local X-axis
AREA_PY Positive direction of local Y-axis
AREA_NY Negative direction of local Y-axis
AREA_PZ Positive direction of local Z-axis
AREA_NZ Negative direction of local Z-axis
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL
Shows the bottom level of the main part of an assembly.
You can use this attribute as a user-defined attribute also in part marks and associative notes.
This attribute returns the value as text, so you cannot use formulae with
this attribute. Use
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED (p. 434)
instead.
See also XS_DRAWING_IGNORE_ZERO_LEVELS_IN_PART_MARKS (p. 330)
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED
Shows the unformatted bottom level of the main part of an assembly. Unformatted level returns
the bottom levels as a length in mm so you can format them.
ASSEMBLY_PLWEIGHT
Shows the weight of plates attached to an assembly. For other objects it shows a zero.

www.cadfamily.com
ASSEMBLY_POS
Shows the assembly position number. For parts it shows the assembly position number of the
assembly that contains the part. For bolts the field is blank.
ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE
Shows the assembly position code. The code identifies the grid position.
Assembl
y Code
A/1 <A/2
A/2 A-B/1
A/3 <A-B/1-2
A/4 A/2
A/6 A-B/1-2
A/7 B/2
TOLERANCE LINE
The position code consists of gridline labels in the x and y directions (alternatively in the z
direction). If an assembly begins or ends outside the first or last grid line, a < or > character is

included in the position code. For example, if an assembly begins outside the A grid line, this
field shows:
<A/2
If an assembly is completely within a tolerance distance (by default 500 mm) of grid line A, the
position code is the label of that grid line: A.
If the assembly is partially or entirely outside the tolerance distance, the code is a combination
of grid labels: A-B.
To change the default tolerance distance, set the variable
XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_TOLERANCE=750 (for example).
To include the Z orientation in the code, set the variable XS_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_3D
to TRUE. The code would be similar to: <A-B/1-2/1-+1000
Tekla Structures selects the grid to use as follows:
1. Tekla Structures checks the location of the assembly.
2. If it is located inside several grids, Tekla Structures checks whether the assembly is parallel
to grid lines or the plane.
3. If there are several parallel grids, Tekla Structures selects the smallest.
To use the calculation algorithm from versions prior to 6.0, set the variable
XS_USE_OLD_ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE_ALGORITHM.
ASSEMBLY_PREFIX
Shows the assembly prefix, defined in the part properties dialog box.
ASSEMBLY_SERIAL_NUMBER
Shows the assembly number without prefix and separator.
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
Shows the top level of the main part of an assembly.
this attribute. Use ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED (p.
436) instead.
See also XS_DRAWING_IGNORE_ZERO_LEVELS_IN_PART_MARKS (p. 330)
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED
Shows the unformatted top level of the main part of an assembly. Unformatted level returns the
top levels as a length in mm so you can format them.

www.cadfamily.com
11.5 B
BOLT_EDGE_DISTANCE
Shows the edge distance of a bolt.
BOLT_EDGE_DISTANCE_MIN
Shows the edge distance multiplied by the coefficient set in the Modeling Editor preferences
using the command Tools > Options > Options... > Components.
BOLT_MATERIAL_LENGTH
For bolts this field shows the total thickness of the connected material.
BOLT_NPARTS
For bolts this field shows the number of connected parts.
BOLT_STANDARD
As for TYPE.
BOTTOM_LEVEL
Shows the bottom level of a single part, or a cast unit, or an assembly, or a part of a connection.
this attribute. Use BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED instead.
BOTTOM_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED
Shows the unformatted bottom level of a single part, or a cast unit, or an assembly, or a part of
a connection. Unformatted level returns the bottom levels as a length in mm so you can format
them.
BUILDER
Shows the builder’s name from in the Project properties dialog box.

11.6 C
CANTILEVER
Shows the length of a protruding part of a profile. Below is an example of a welded box profile:
CAST_UNIT_POS
Shows the position of a cast unit. The position consists of a prefix and a number.
CAST_UNIT_POSITION_CODE
Shows the position code of a cast unit. The code identifies the grid position. For more
information, see ASSEMBLY_POSITION_CODE.
CAST_UNIT_PREFIX
Shows the cast unit prefix, defined in the part properties dialog box.
CAST_UNIT_SERIAL_NUMBER
Shows the cast unit number without prefix and separator.
CATALOG_NAME
Shows the name of a mesh catalog.
CC
Shows the center-to-center spacing of evenly-distributed reinforcing bars or a mesh.
CC_CROSS
Shows the center-to-center spacing of crossing bars in a reinforcement mesh.
CC_EXACT
Shows the center-to-center spacing of a reinforcing bar group or a mesh.

www.cadfamily.com
CC_EXACT_CROSS
Shows all center-to-center spacings of crossing bars in a reinforcement mesh.
CC_EXACT_LONG
Shows all center-to-center spacings of longitudinal bars in a reinforcement mesh.
CC_LONG
Shows the center-to-center spacing of longitudinal bars in a reinforcement mesh.
CC_MAX
Shows the largest center-to-center spacing in reinforcing bar groups or meshes with varied
spacing.
CC_MAX_CROSS
Shows the largest center-to-center spacing of crossing bars in reinforcement meshes with varied
spacing.
CC_MAX_LONG
Shows the largest center-to-center spacing of longitudinal bars in reinforcement meshes with
varied spacing.
CC_MIN
Shows the smallest center-to-center spacing in reinforcing bar groups or meshes with varied
spacing.
CC_MIN_CROSS
Shows the smallest center-to-center spacing of crossing bars in reinforcement meshes with
varied spacing.
CC_MIN_LONG
Shows the smallest center-to-center spacing of longitudinal bars in reinforcement meshes with
varied spacing.
CLASS
Only use to set rules in the Template Editor. It shows the string ASSEMBLY for assemblies, PART
for parts, and BOLT for bolts, holes, nuts etc. For drawings it shows DRAWING, and for revisions
it shows REVISION.

CLASS_ATTR
Shows the attribute class of parts and bolts. For assemblies it shows the attribute class of the
assembly main part.
CODE
Code for the surface treatment defined in the product_finishes.dat file. For example,
TS1
COG_X, COG_Y, COG_Z

Shows the coordinates of the center of gravity of assemblies and parts. Cannot be used in headers
or footers.
comment
User-defined attribute Comment, defined in the object’s user-defined attributes dialog box. For
more information on the user-defined attributes in templates and reports, see User-defined
attributes in templates (p. 426).
CONNECTED_ASSEMBLIES
For bolts this field shows a string containing the position numbers of assemblies of connected
parts (e.g. A17 A18 A23). In ASSEMBLY_BOLT lists Tekla Structures does not show the position
number of the current assembly. Only use this field as an inquiry command for single bolts. For
objects other than bolts the field is blank.
CONNECTED_PARTS
Shows a string containing the position numbers of connected parts (e.g. P102 -> P17 P18 P23)
for bolts. If the list type is ASSEMBLY_BOLT, the first position number is a member of the current
assembly. Only use as an inquiry command for single bolts. For objects other than bolts the field
is blank.
CONNECTION_CODE
Shows the connection code defined in the connection properties dialog box. Only for use in
connection lists.
CONNECTION_DSTV
Shows the DSTV code of the connection in connection lists. This field blank if the connection
is not a DSTV connection. Only for use in connection lists.
CONNECTION_ERROR
Shows the error flag of a connection in connection lists. Only for use in connection lists.
The values returned are:

www.cadfamily.com
• 1=green connection symbol
• 2=yellow connection symbol
• 3=red connection symbol
• 4=connection did not pass design check
CONNECTION_GROUP
Shows the class of the component, available on the General tab in the component dialog box.
Only for use in connection lists.
CONNECTION_NUMBER
Shows the number of a connection.
CONNECTION_RUNNING_NUMBER
Shows the running number of a connection. All connections are automatically numbered with
a running number.
CONTENTTYPE
Shows the content type of the current row. For more informaton, see Content type (p. 423).
COVER_AREA
Shows the total cover area of the part profile, or of the main part profile in the assembly or cast
unit.
CROSS_SECTION_AREA
Shows the area (mm2) of a cross section.
CURRENT_PHASE
Shows the current active phase. Used for filtering parts. You can also use selection filters.
11.7 D
DATE
Shows the current date. If the variable XS_IMPERIAL_DATE (p. 316) is set, the date format is
mm/dd/yyyy. Otherwise the format is dd.mm.yyyy.
REVISION content type:

In drawing templates this field shows the last revision date. In DRAWING_REV lists it also shows
the revision history.
DATE_CREATE
Shows the creation date of the drawing. If the variable XS_IMPERIAL_DATE (p. 316) is set,
the format of the date is mm/dd/yyyy. Otherwise the format is dd.mm.yyyy.
Use this field in part, cast unit, and assembly lists, for the DRAWING content type.
DATE_END
Shows the completion date of a project from the Project properties dialog box.
DATE_ISSUE
Shows the issue date of the drawing. Use with DRAWING content type.
DATE_LAST
In drawing templates this field shows the date of the last revision. In DRAWING_REV lists it also
shows the entire revision history.
DATE_MODIFY
Shows the date of the last changes to the drawing. If the variable XS_IMPERIAL_DATE
(p. 316) is set, the date format is mm/dd/yyyy. Otherwise the format is dd.mm.yyyy.
Use in part, cast unit and assembly lists.
DATE_PLOT
Shows the date the drawing was last printed. If the variable XS_IMPERIAL_DATE (p. 316) is
set, the date format is mm/dd/yyyy. Otherwise the format is dd.mm.yyyy. Only for use in
drawing tables and drawing reports.
Use in part, assembly and cast unit lists.
DATE_START
Shows the starting date of the project entered in the Project properties dialog box.
DESIGNER
Shows the name of the designer in the Project properties dialog box.
DIAMETER
Shows the bolt, nut, screw, washer, stud shank, hole or part profile diameter, depending on the
content type you use.

www.cadfamily.com
WASHER content type:
• The inner diameter of the washer.
NUT content type:
• The inner diameter of the nut.
SCREW content type:
• The screw diameter.
STUD content type:
• The diameter of the stud shank.
DIAMETER_1, DIAMETER_2
Shows the diameters of a tapered profile. Below diameters of parametric profile PD:
DIAMETER_X
Shows the length of a slotted hole in the x direction (round hole diameter + LONG_HOLE_X).
Use with BOLT, HOLE, NUT and WASHER content types.
DIAMETER_Y
Shows the length of a slotted hole in the y direction (round hole diameter + LONG_HOLE_Y).
Use with BOLT, HOLE, NUT and WASHER content types.
DIM_A ... DIM_G, DIM_H1, DIM_H2, DIM_I, DIM_J, DIM_K1, DIM_K2, DIM_O,
DIM_R, DIM_TD, DIM_X, DIM_Y
Show dimensions of bent reinforcing bars based on the mappings in the
rebar_schedule_config.inp file, located in the
..\environments\*your_environment*\system folder. These mappings are
environment-specific by default. You can modify them to suit your company or project needs.
DIM_TD shows the diameter of the bending cylinder, DIM_R shows the radius.
See also Reinforcement in templates (p. 490)
ANG_S, ANG_T, ANG_U, ANG_V (p. 431)

DIM_A_MAX ... DIM_G_MAX, DIM_H1_MAX, DIM_H2_MAX, DIM_I_MAX,
DIM_J_MAX, DIM_K1_MAX, DIM_K2_MAX, DIM_O_MAX, DIM_R_MAX,
DIM_TD_MAX, DIM_X_MAX, DIM_Y_MAX
Shows the maximum dimensions of bent reinforcing bars in tapered cross sections. For more
information, see the Appendix Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 469).
DIM_A_MIN ... DIM_G_MIN, DIM_H1_MIN, DIM_H2_MIN, DIM_I_MIN,

DIM_J_MIN, DIM_K1_MIN, DIM_K2_MIN, DIM_O_MIN, DIM_R_MIN,
DIM_TD_MIN, DIM_X_MIN, DIM_Y_MIN
Shows the minimum dimensions of bent reinforcing bars in tapered cross sections. For more
information, see the Appendix Reinforcing bar bending types (p. 469).
DR_DEFAULT_HOLE_SIZE
Shows the default hole size.
The default bolt hole size in the bolt mark properties defines the default size of bolt holes.
Default sized bolt holes do not have bolt marks in drawings.
DR_DEFAULT_WELD_SIZE
Shows the default weld size in the drawing properties.
The default weld size in weld properties defines the minimum size of welds to show in drawings.
DR_PART_POS
Shows the position number of the drawing main part. Can be used in drawing templates and
drawing reports.
DR_PART_POS returns attribute PART_POS in all other drawing types, except for the assembly
and cast-unit drawings, where it returns ASSEMBLY_POS attribute value.
11.8 E
ECCENTRICITY_X, ECCENTRICITY_Y
Shows the eccentricity dimensions of a profile. Below the eccentricity x dimension of the RCXX
profile:

www.cadfamily.com
EDGE_FOLD, EDGE_FOLD_1, EDGE_FOLD_2
Shows the edge fold dimensions of a profile. Edge fold dimension 1 and 2 concern
unsymmetrical profiles. See the example of a CC profile below:
EDGE_FOLD_1
EDGE_FOLD_2
END_X, END_Y, END_Z

Shows the coordinates of the end points used to create a part.
END1_ANGLE_Z
Shows the end angle of the first end of a profile in the local z-direction, for parts with cross-
section profiles.
END1_ANGLE_Y
Shows the end angle of the first end of a profile in the local y-direction, for parts with cross-
section profiles.
END2_ANGLE_Z
Shows the end angle of the second end of a profile in the local z-direction, for parts with cross-
section profiles.
END2_ANGLE_Y
Shows the end angle of the second end of the profile in the local y-direction, for parts with cross-
section profiles.
END1_CODE, END2_CODE
Shows the shape information of the first and second ends of a profile, for parts with cross-section
profiles. The options are:
• 0 = no operation
• 1 = fitting
• 2 = cut

• 3 = fitting and cut
END1_SKEW, END2_SKEW
Shows 1 (INTEGER) if the corresponding end of a part has a skewed cut or fitting and 0 if the
end is straight.
11.9 F
FATHER_ID
Shows the ID of the part that a reinforcement mesh belongs to.
FINISH
Shows the final properties of a part defined in the properties dialog box (for example, in the
beam properties dialog box). For all other objects the field is blank.
FLANGE_LENGTH_B
Shows the total length of the lower flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded
profiles as plates.
FLANGE_LENGTH_U
Shows the total length of the upper flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded
profiles as plates.
FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO
Shows the slope ratio of a flange.
FLANGE_THICKNESS
Shows the thickness of a flange.
FLANGE_THICKNESS_1, FLANGE_THICKNESS_2
Shows the flange thicknesses of unsymmetrical profiles, such as in unsymmetrical RCDL
profile:

www.cadfamily.com
FLANGE_THICKNESS_B
Shows the thickness of the lower flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded
profiles as plates.
FLANGE_THICKNESS_U
Shows the thickness of the upper flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded
profiles as plates.
FLANGE_WIDTH
Shows the width of a flange.
FLANGE_WIDTH_1, FLANGE_WIDTH_2
Shows the flange widths of unsymmetrical profiles.
FLANGE_WIDTH_B
Shows the width of the lower flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded profiles
as plates.
FLANGE_WIDTH_U
Shows the width of the upper flange of an I profile. Use when you need to show welded profiles
as plates.
FOLD_ANGLE
Shows the fold angle of a profile.
11.10G
GRADE
Shows the grade of the object. Use with BOLT, NUT, MESH, REBAR, and STUD content types.
GROUP_TYPE
Shows the group type of a reinforcing bar:
• Normal = 0
• Tapered = 1
• Tapered 2 = 2

• Tapered curved = 3
• Tapered N = 4
• Spiral = 5
GUID
Shows GUID, which is a globally unique identifier. For more information, see GUID.
11.11 H
HEAD_DIAMETER
Shows the diameter of the stud head.
HEAD_THICKNESS
Shows the thickness (height) of the stud head.
HEIGHT
Shows the height of an object.
DRAWING content type:
• The height of the drawing.

ASSEMBLY content type:
• The height of the assembly main part for assemblies, parts, and bolts.
PART content type:
• The height of single-part or assembly drawings. Use in part and assembly lists.
HEIGHT_1 ... 4
Shows the height dimensions of unsymmetrical profiles, such as in RCDX profile below:
HOLE_TOLERANCE
Only use in bolt lists. Shows the bolt tolerance. Shows a zero in all other lists.

www.cadfamily.com
HOOK_START, HOOK_END
Shows 1 if there is a hook at the start or end of a reinforcing bar, and 0 if there is no hook.
HOOK_START_ANGLE, HOOK_END_ANGLE
Shows the angle of the hook at the start or end of a reinforcing bar.
HOOK_START_LENGTH, HOOK_END_LENGTH
Shows the length of the straight part of the hook at the start or end of a reinforcing bar.
HOOK_START_RADIUS, HOOK_END_RADIUS
Shows the internal bending radius of the hook at the start or end of a reinforcing bar.
11.12I
INNER_DIAMETER
Shows the inner diameter of an object in the bolt catalog, for example, washers or nuts.
Use with BOLT, HOLE, NUT, and WASHER content types.
ID
Shows the identification number of an object. Use with all content types.
INFO1, INFO2
Shows the corresponding values in the Project properties dialog box.
IS_POLYBEAM
Use to check whether a part is a polybeam. The attribute returns 1 if the part is a polybeam,
otherwise it returns 0.
11.13L
LAST
The last revision number of a drawing (as an integer).

LAST_MARK
In drawing templates this field shows the last revision mark. In DRAWING_REV lists, it also shows
the entire revision history.
LAST_TEXT1...3
In drawing templates this field shows the text for the last revision. In DRAWING_REV lists it also
shows the revision history.
LENGTH
Shows the length of assemblies, parts, and bolts including cuts and fittings.
LENGTH_GROSS
Shows the length of assemblies, parts, and bolts before cuts are made.
LENGTH_MAX
Shows the maximum length of a reinforcing bar in a tapered bar group.
LENGTH_MIN
Shows the minimum length of a reinforcing bar in a tapered bar group.
LONG_HOLE_X
Shows the value from the Slotted hole X field in the Bolt properties dialog box. See also
DIAMETER_X.
LONG_HOLE_Y
Shows the value from the Slotted hole Y field in the Bolt properties dialog box. See also
DIAMETER_Y.
LOT_NUMBER
Shows the lot number to which the assembly belongs.
LOT_NAME
Shows the name of the lot to which the assembly belongs.

www.cadfamily.com
11.14M
MAJOR_AXIS_LENGTH_1 ... 2
Shows the major axis length dimensions of a tapered profile. Below d1 is the major axis length
1and d2 is the major axis length 2 in parametric profile EPD.
MARK
In drawing templates this field shows the last revision mark. In DRAWING_REV lists it also shows
the revision history.
MATERIAL
Shows the material name for parts. Shows the material of the assembly main part for assemblies.
Shows the grade entered in the Bolt assembly catalog dialog box for bolts.
MATERIAL_TYPE
Shows the material type (STEEL, CONCRETE, etc) of assemblies or parts.
MESH_POS
Shows the position (prefix and running number) of a mesh.
MINOR_AXIS_LENGTH_1 ... 2
Shows the minor axis length dimensions of a tapered profile. Below r1 is the minor axis length
1and r2 is the minor axis length 2 in parametric profile EPD.
MODEL
Shows the name of the model.
MODEL_TOTAL
Shows the number of similar objects in a model (i.e. those with the same position number).

MODULUS_OF_ELASTICITY
Shows the modulus of elasticity of a material from the material catalog.
MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_X
Shows the moment of inertia around the x-x reference axis of a cross section. Moment of inertia
is also known as the second moment of area.
MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_Y
Shows the moment of inertia around the y-y reference axis of a cross section. Moment of inertia
is also known as the second moment of area.
MORTAR_VOLUME
Shows the mortar volume used in surface treatment.
11.15N
NAME_BASE
Shows the drawing name.
NAME_FULL
Shows the name of a bolt defined in the bolt catalog, without the standard.

www.cadfamily.com
For example, in the case of the bolt highlighted in the above dialog box, the NAME_FULL field
will show “BOLT20x130-2063”.
For objects other than bolts, the field shows a blank.
NAME_SHORT
Shows the name of the washer, bolt, nut or screw in a short format. See also NAME_FULL.
NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_ELASTIC_X
Shows the location of elastic neutral axis.
NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_ELASTIC_Y
Shows the location of elastic neutral axis.
NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_PLASTIC_X
Shows the location of plastic neutral axis.
NEUTRAL_AXIS_LOCATION_PLASTIC_Y
Shows the location of plastic neutral axis.
NORMALIZED_WARPING_CONSTANT
Shows the warping constant of a profile.
NUMBER#1, NUMBER #2
NUMBER#1 shows the total number of objects on a list. Shows the total number of parts and
bolts for one assembly for list types ASSEMBLY, ASSEMBLY_BOLT, ASSEMBLY_PART and
ASSEMBLY_ALL, if the object is part of an assembly on the list.
NUMBER#2 shows the project number as text.
11.16O
OBJECT
The object field in the Project properties dialog box.
OBJECT_DESCRIPTION
Shows the object type and ID. Below examples:

• PART 780*380 Id: 227
• ASSEMBLY Id: 144
• MESH Id: 946
OBJECT_LOCKED
Shows the status of the user-defined attribute Locked.
For more information on this attribute, see Locking objects (p. 76).
OBJECT_TYPE
The type of object. The message files contain the translations of these strings (numbers 576 -
587).
The object types are:
• POINT
• PART
• JOINT
• FITTING
• SCREW
• ANTI-MATERIAL
• CUT
• WELDING
• ASSEMBLY
• DRAWING
• PROJECT
• OBJECT
OWNER
Shows the object owner in format domain/user.
11.17P
PAGE
The current page number.
PART_POS
The position number of parts. Shows a blank cell for all other objects.

www.cadfamily.com
Shows the mark of assembly main part for assemblies, parts, and bolts. For all other objects the
field is blank.
PART_PREFIX
Shows the part prefix, defined in the part properties dialog box.
For more information on numbering series, see Defining numbers to be used for parts.
PART_SERIAL_NUMBER
Shows the part number without the prefix and separator.
PCS
Shows the number of bars in a reinforcing bar group.
PHASE
The number of the phase to which the object belongs.
To show the phase name, use the PHASE.NAME field.
PLASTIC_MODULUS_X
Shows the plastic modulus of x-x reference axis of a cross section. Also known as the first
moment of area.
PLASTIC_MODULUS_Y
Shows the plastic modulus of y-y reference axis of a cross section. Also known as the first
moment of area.
PLATE_DENSITY
Shows the material density of a plate (kg/m3).
PLATE_THICKNESS
Shows the thickness of a plate (mm).
PLOTFILE
Shows the name of the drawing plot file. Only for use in drawing tables and drawing reports.
See also XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME (p. 331)

POISSONS_RATIO
Shows the Poisson’s ratio (analysis property) of material.
POLAR_RADIUS_OF_GYRATION
Shows the polar radius of gyration (analysis property) of a profile.
PRELIM_MARK
Shows the user-defined attribute Prelim mark.
For more information on preliminary marks, see Tools > Numbering > Preliminary marks.
PROFILE
Shows the part profile name, or the main part profile name in an assembly or cast unit. You can
also show profile attributes in templates and reports:
In the Template editor, open the Select attribute dialog box and select PROFILE.* attributes
for the selected content type:
For example, MAINPART.PROFILE.HEIGHT with ASSEMBLY content type, shows the

height of the main part profile in the assembly.

www.cadfamily.com
PROFILE_DENSITY
Shows the profile density of material (kg/m3).
PROFILE_TYPE
The profile type of the part. The default types in Tekla Structures conform to DSTV-NC
documentation. They are defined (message numbers 588 - 599) in the message file
by_number.ail in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\messages. The
table below shows the relationship between messages, profiles in Tekla Structures, and the
DSTV-NC profile types defined in messages.
Tekla Structures Shows DSTV-NC

profiles Message number profile type
I-profiles 589 I
L-profiles 589 L
U-profiles 591 U
Plates 592 B
Round tubes 593 RU
Round bars 594 RO
Square tubes 595 M
CC-profiles 596 C
T-profiles 597 T
Polygon plates 598 B
Folded plates 599 B
Z-profiles and all the 590 Z
other types of profile
PROFILE_WEIGHT
The weight of a part. For profiles Tekla Structures calculates the weight using the length and
weight/m values in the profile catalog. If the weight/m is not defined in the profile catalog, this
field works in the same way as WEIGHT_NET, but uses the plate density value (Property
weight for plates) from the material catalog instead of profile density.
PROFILE_WEIGHT_NET
The net weight of a part. For profiles Tekla Structures calculates the weight using the length and
weight/m values in the profile catalog. Line cuts do not affect the length value, which is
calculated using the fitted centerline. For all other objects this field works in the same way as
WEIGHT_NET.

11.18R
RADIUS_OF_GYRATION_X
Shows the radius of gyration x (analysis property) of a profile.
RADIUS_OF_GYRATION_Y
Shows the radius of gyration y (analysis property) of a profile.
REBAR_POS
Shows the position (prefix and the running number) of reinforcing bars.
REFERENCE_MODEL
Lists reference models in reports.
See also Reference models (p. 271)
REFERENCE_MODEL_OBJECT
Lists reference models objects in reports.
See also Reference model objects (p. 276)
ROUNDING_RADIUS, ROUNDING_RADIUS_1 ... 2

Shows different rounding radii of profiles. Below as an example rounding radius 1 and 2 for a
specific I profile:
ROW_IN_PAGE
Produces an incremental number starting from 1 at the beginning of each new page. Use in
reports and templates.
Example Can be used together with the PAGE field to include page or row information in the drawing
template. Set Type to Text and enter the following field definition in the Text field properties:
=%PAGE% %/% %ROW_IN_PAGE%

www.cadfamily.com
11.19S
SCALE1...5
Use these fields to show the different scales of drawing views. Decimal values are rounded to
the nearest integer. Only for use in drawing tables.
SECTION_MODULUS_X, SECTION_MODULUS_Y
Shows section modulus (analysis property) of a profile.
SHAPE
Shows the environment-specific bending type of a reinforcing bar.
SHAPE_INTERNAL
Shows the internal bending type of Tekla Structures for a reinforcing bar, for example, 2_1.
SHEAR_CENTER_LOCATION
Shows the shear center location (analysis property) of a profile.
SIMILAR_TO_MAIN_PART
Returns 1 if the position number of the given part is the same as the position number of the main
part in the assembly.
To show a main part of an assembly on top of part lists:
1. In the Template Editor, add value field SIMILAR_TO_MAIN_PART to PART row.
2. Set the Order to Descending and (if needed) hide the field in output, in the Value Field
Properties dialog box.
3. Drag the SIMILAR_TO_MAIN_PART field to be first in sort order in the Content

browser.
SITE_WORKSHOP
For bolts this field shows the assembly type information in a string (Site or Shop). The message
files (466 and 467) contain translations of these strings.
For studs this field shows the assembly type information in a string (Site or Shop).
SIZE
Shows the size of the drawing (e.g. 210x297). Only for use in drawing templates and drawing
reports.

SORT_OF_E_x_Cw_PER_G_x_J
Shows sqrt(ECw/GJ) analysis property of a profile.
SUPPLEMENT_PART_WEIGHT
Shows the weight of supplementary parts. SUPPLEMENT_PART_WEIGHT = the weight of
the whole assembly less the weight of the main part.
See also WEIGHT.
START_X
Shows the coordinates of the creation points of parts.
START_Y
See START_X.
START_Z
See START_X.
STATICAL_MOMENT_Qf
Shows the statical moment of the flange.
STATICAL_MOMENT_Qw
Shows the statical moment of the web.
STIFFENER_DIMENSION
Shows the stiffener dimension of a profile. See also STIFFENER_DIMENSION_1 ... 3.
STIFFENER_DIMENSION_1 ... 3
Shows the stiffener dimensions of a profile. Below f1 is stiffener dimension 1, f2 is stiffener
dimension 2, and f3 is stiffener dimension 3 in parametric profile EZ.

www.cadfamily.com
STRAND_DEBONDED_STRANDS_1...5
Shows a list of debonded strands. Strand numbers are separated by spaces.
STRAND_DEBONDED_STRANDS_1 corresponds to row 1 on the Debonding tab in the Strand
Pattern Properties dialog box, STRAND_DEBONDED_STRANDS_2 to row 2, and so on.
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_END_1...5
Shows the debonding length from the end of the strands.
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_END_1 corresponds to row 1 on the Debonding tab in the Strand
Pattern Properties dialog box, STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_END_2 to row 2, and so on.
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_START_1...5
Shows the debonding length from the start of the strands.
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_START_1 corresponds to row 1 on the Debonding tab in the
Strand Pattern Properties dialog box, STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_FROM_START_2 to row 2, and
so on.
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_END_1...5
Shows the debonding length from the middle to the end of the strands.
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_END_1 corresponds to row 1 on the Debonding tab in the
Strand Pattern Properties dialog box, STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_END_2 to row 2,
and so on.
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_START_1...5
Shows the debonding length from the middle to the start of the strands.
STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_START_1 corresponds to row 1 on the Debonding tab in
the Strand Pattern Properties dialog box, STRAND_DEBOND_LEN_MIDDLE_TO_START_2 to
row 2, and so on.
STRAND_N_PATTERN
Shows the number of different cross-sections in a strand pattern.
STRAND_N_STRAND
Shows the number of strands.
STRAND_POS
Shows the position (prefix and running number) of a strand.

STRAND_PULL_FORCE
Shows the pull force of a strand.
STRAND_UNBONDED
Shows the sequence numbers of debonded strands, seprated by spaces or commas.
SUBTYPE
Shows the subtype of a profile.
SURFACING_NAME
Shows the name of a sufrace treatment.
11.20T
TANGENT_OF_PRINCIPAL_AXIS_ANGLE
Shows the tangent of principal axis angle (analysis property) of a profile.
TEXT1...3
In drawing templates this field shows the text for the last revision. In DRAWING_REV lists it also
shows the revision history.
THERMAL_DILATATION
Shows the thermal dilatation coefficient of material.
THREAD_IN_MATERIAL
Shows 1 if the thread of the screw can be inside the material to be connected and 0 if not.
TILE_NUMBER
Shows the number of tiles used in surface treatment (approximate value).
TILE_VOLUME
Shows the volume of tiles used in surface treatment, without the mortar volume. See also
MORTAR_VOLUME.

www.cadfamily.com
TIME
Shows the current time (hh:mm:ss).
TITLE
Shows the user-defined drawing name. Can also be used for parts and assemblies. For example,
you could create a report of assemblies listing which assembly drawings had been created.
TITLE1...3
In reports this field shows the user-defined titles entered in the Report dialog box. In drawing
templates this field shows the drawing attributes.
TOP_LEVEL
this attribute. Use TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED instead.
TOP_LEVEL_UNFORMATTED
TORSIONAL_CONSTANT
Shows the torsional constant (analysis property) of a profile.
TYPE
Shows the object type or standard:
Content type Description

BOLT Shows the bolts standard as it appears in the Bolt
assembly catalog dialog box (for example,
7968). For all other objects the field is blank.
DRAWING Shows the drawing type: A, W, C, G or M.
MESH Shows the mesh standard.
NUT Shows the nut standard.

Content type Description
SURFACING Surface treatment type in the Surface Treatment
Properties dialog box.
WASHER Shows the standard of the washer.
TYPE1
For bolts this field shows the bolt type as the type of each possible bolt part that appears in the
Bolt assembly catalog dialog box (e.g. 7968/2041/2041/2041/2067/2067). For objects other
than bolts the field is blank.
TYPE2
For bolts this field shows the bolt type as the numbers of existing bolt parts (e.g. 10021). For
objects other than bolts the field is blank.
TYPE3
The same as BOLT_TYPE2, but shows X for existing and o for nonexistent bolt parts (for
example, XooXX). For objects other than bolts the field shows a blank.
TYPE4
The same as BOLT_TYPE1 but only the existing components are shown in the string.
11.21U
USERFIELD_1 ... _8
Shows the value of the user-defined attribute User field 1, User field 2 etc.
See also For more information on the user-defined attributes in templates and reports, see User-defined
attributes in templates (p. 426).
For more information on user-defined attributes, see User-defined attributes and User-defined
attributes in drawings.
11.22V
Topics VOLUME
VOLUME_GROSS
VOLUME_NET

www.cadfamily.com
VOLUME
Shows the object volume, for example, the volume of an assembly or of a cast unit. Takes holes
and cuts into account.
VOLUME_GROSS
Shows the object gross volume. Does not take into account holes and cuts.
VOLUME_NET
Shows the object volume taking into account holes and cuts.
11.23W
WARPING_CONSTANT
Shows the warping constant (analysis property) of a profile.
WARPING_STATICAL_MOMENT
Shows the warping statical moment (analysis property) of a profile.
WEB_HEIGHT
See WEB_WIDTH.
WEB_LENGTH
The gross length of the web of an I profile. Use to show welded profiles as plates.
WEB_THICKNESS
The thickness of the web of an I profile. Use to show welded profiles as plates.
WEB_THICKNESS_1, WEB_THICKNESS_2
The additional thickness values of the web of a profile.
WEB_WIDTH
The width of the web of an I profile. Use to show welded profiles as plates.

WEIGHT
Shows the weight of the object. The calculation formula depends on the object type:
• For parts with cross-sections defined in the profile catalog, the weight is calculated from the
cross section area in the profile catalog), length (LENGTH) and density of material (property
weight for profiles in the material catalog). The result is the same as calculating
WEIGHT_GROSS.
• For other profiles with no cross sections defined (typically parametric profiles), shows the
net weight calculated using the profile volume and density of material. Fittings, cuts, weld
preparations, and part adds affect volume calculation.
• For assemblies, shows the sum of the part weights for each assembly.
• For bolts, shows the weight of the entire bolt assembly (including washers and nut) in
grams.
WEIGHT_GROSS
Shows the gross weight, which is the total weight of material needed to fabricate the part. The
calculation formula depends on the part:
• If the part has cross-sections defined in the profile catalog, the weight is calculated from part
length (LENGTH), the cross section area in the profile catalog, and the density of material.
• If the part is a folded or contour plate without a cross section area, the weight is calculated
from plate overall height, overall length and density of material (property weight for plates
in the material catalog).
• For other profiles without cross sections (typically parametric profiles), the gross weight is
calculated the same way as the WEIGHT_NET, but cuts are not taken into account and the
plate density value is used instead of profile density.
• For assemblies, shows the combined gross weight of parts included in an assembly. For
bolts it shows the bolt weight.
WEIGHT_M
Shows the property weight of a profile (defined in the material catalog). For parametric profiles,
shows the weight of the profile divided by the length. For standard profiles, shows the Weight
per unit length from the Analysis properties in the profile catalog.
WEIGHT_MAX
Shows the maximum weight of a single reinforcing bar or strand in a tapered bar group.
WEIGHT_MIN
Shows the minimum weight of a single reinforcing bar or strand in a tapered bar group.
WEIGHT_NET
Shows the weight of the fabricated part, assembly or cast unit. The calculation formula depends
on the object:

www.cadfamily.com
• For parts, returns the net weight, which is the actual weight of the fabricated part.
• For bolts, returns the bolt weight, and for other objects a zero.
• For assemblies, returns the sum of part weights.

The calculation is based on part volume and density of material. The density value used in the
calculation depends on the profile cross-sections:
• If cross-section are defined in the profile catalog, density is the Property weight of profiles
in the material catalog.
• If there are no cross-sections, density is the Property weight of plates in the material catalog.
WEIGHT_PER_UNIT_LENGTH
Shows the weight per unit length (analysis property) of a profile.
WEIGHT_TOTAL
Shows the total weight of all reinforcing bars or of all strands in a reinforcing bar group.
WELD_ANGLE1, WELD_ANGLE2
Shows weld angle for welds above and below line.
WELD_ASSEMBLYTYPE
Shows the assembly type of a weld (Site or Shop). Only use in welding lists.
WELD_DEFAULT
Shows the default weld size according to the drawing attributes. Only use in drawing tables.
WELD_FATHER_CODE
Shows the connection running number of the connection where the weld is located. The field is
blank if the weld is not next to a connection. Use only in welding lists.
WELD_FATHER_NUMBER
Shows the connection number of the connection where the weld is located. The field is blank if
the weld is not next to a connection. Use only in welding lists.
WELD_FILLTYPE1, WELD_FILLTYPE2
Shows the weld contour (None, Flush, Convex, Concave) for welds above and below line.
WELD_FINISH1, WELD_FINISH2
Shows the weld finish for welds above and below line.

WELD_ROOT_FACE_THICKNESS
Shows the root thickness of a weld and is used only in welding lists.
WELD_SIZE1, WELD_SIZE2
Shows weld size for welds above and below line.
WELD_TEXT
Shows the reference text of a weld.
WELD_TYPE1, WELD_TYPE2
Shows weld type for above and below line. See the Weld types.
WIDTH
The width of a part or assembly.
For drawings, shows the width of the drawing.
WIDTH_1, WIDTH_2
Shows special width values of some profiles. Below parametric profile rectangular hollow
section with subtype h1*b1-h2*b2*t, where b1 is width 1 and b2 is width 2.

www.cadfamily.com
12 Reinforcing bar bending
types
Tekla Structures recognizes different reinforcing bar bending shapes and assigns bending type
identifiers to them. The table below lists these reinforcing bar bending types.
If Tekla Structures does not recognize the shape of a reinforcing bar, it assigns the UNKNOWN
bending type to it.
The bending type identifiers in the table below are internal, hard-coded types of Tekla
Structures. The leg dimensions (D1, D2, etc.) and bending angles (A1, A2, etc.) of reinforcing
bars are internal dimensions and angles. You can map internal types, for example, to country-
or project-specific types, and internal dimensions and angles to specific template attributes. You
do this in the rebar_schedule_config.inp file. See Reinforcement in templates (p.
490).
The magenta points in the images represent the points you pick in the model when you create
reinforcing bars.
Type Image
1
2_1
Requires standard bending radius.

2_2
Non-standard bending radius.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com Reinforcing bar bending types
Type Image
3_1
3_2
4_2
4_3
4_4
5_1
5_2

www.cadfamily.com
Reinforcing bar bending EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
types
Type Image
5_3
6_1
6_2
8_2
9
Requires 180 degree hook.

10

Type Image
11
12
13
Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends (i.e. model D1 and D5
using 90 degree hooks).
14
Requires hooks at both ends.

14_2

www.cadfamily.com
types
Type Image
14_3
14_4
Requires 90 degree hooks at both ends.

14_5
Recognized if XS_REBAR_RECOGNITION_HOOKS_CONSIDERATION
is set to FALSE.
15

16_1

Type Image
16_2
17
18
19
20_1
20_2

www.cadfamily.com
types
Type Image
21
22
23
24
25
26

27

Type Image
28

29

29_2
29_3
29_4
29_5

www.cadfamily.com
types
Type Image
30

31

32

33

34
35

Type Image
36

36_2
Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends.

36_3
Can also be modeled using hooks at both ends.

37

38
Requires 180 degree hook at one end and 90 degree hook at the other
end.
38_2

www.cadfamily.com
types
Type Image
39
40

41

42

43
43_2

Type Image
44

44_2

45

45_2
Requires 180 hooks at both ends.

46

www.cadfamily.com
types
Type Image
47

48

48_2

48_3
49

Type Image
49_2
50

51

52

53

54

www.cadfamily.com
types
Type Image
55
56
57
58
59
60
61

Type Image
61_2
is set to FALSE.
61_3

62
Requires hook.
63
Requires hook.
64

www.cadfamily.com
types
Type Image
64_2
is set to FALSE.
65

65_2
is set to FALSE.
66

Type Image
67
67_2
68
69_1
69_2
70_1

www.cadfamily.com
types
Type Image
70_2
71
72
73_1
73_2
73_3

Type Image
74
75_1
75_2
76
77

www.cadfamily.com
types
Type Image
78
79_1
79_2
80
UNKNOWN For example:

12.1 Reinforcement in templates
Audience This topic is aimed at Tekla Structures users who need to localize reinforcing bar bending types
or to create templates for reinforcing bar bending schedules.
Reinforcement You can show dimensions, bending angles, and bending types of reinforcing bars in drawings
templates and reports by including reinforcement-specific attributes, such as DIM_A, ANG_S, SHAPE, and
SHAPE_INTERNAL, in template fields. For more information on creating templates, see the
Template Editor (TplEd) online help.
Mapping Use the rebar_schedule_config.inp file in the
dimensions ..\environments\*your_environment*\system folder to map:
• Tekla Structures internal reinforcing bar dimensions and angles with specific template
attributes
• Tekla Structures internal reinforcing bar bending types with specific bending types
These mappings are environment-specific by default. You can modify them to suit your
company or project needs.
You can use equations, functions, and if statements to calculate the dimensions and angles you
need to show.
Use any standard text editor (for example, Notepad) to edit the
rebar_schedule_config.inp file.
Examples The following example of the rebar_schedule_config.inp file maps the internal
bending type 5_1 to the bending type identifier E, and the leg dimensions and bending angles to
specific template attributes:
rebar_schedule_config.inp (Example 1)
BEND_TYPE_5_1[1]="E"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[3]="DIM_B=D5"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[4]="DIM_C=D2"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[5]="DIM_TD=TD"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[6]="ANG_U=A1"
BEND_TYPE_5_1[7]="ANG_V=A2"
With this mapping, the internal bending type 6_2 becomes XY, and the template attributes
DIM_B and DIM_C will show the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the second leg D2, and
DIM_E and DIM_F the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the fourth leg D4:
BEND_TYPE_6_2[1]="XY"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[3]="DIM_B=D2*COS(A2*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[4]="DIM_C=D2*SIN(A2*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[5]="DIM_D=D3"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[6]="DIM_E=D4*COS(A1*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[7]="DIM_F=D4*SIN(A1*PI/
180)"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[8]="DIM_G=D5"
BEND_TYPE_6_2[9]="DIM_TD=TD"

www.cadfamily.com
types
The following example maps the internal bending type 4 to the bending type identifier A if the
dimensions D1 and D3 are the same. Otherwise it maps 4 to B:
BEND_TYPE_4[1]=if (D1==D3) then ("A")
else ("B") endif
BEND_TYPE_4[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_4[3]="DIM_B=D2"
BEND_TYPE_4[4]="DIM_C=D3"
BEND_TYPE_4[5]="DIM_TD=TD"
If Tekla Structures does not recognize a reinforcing bar bending shape, it uses the internal
bending type UNKNOWN for it. In the rebar_schedule_config.inp file you can also
define how unknown bending types appear in drawings and reports. For example, you may just
want to use the bending type identifier ???, and list all leg dimensions and bending angles:
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[1]="???"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[2]="DIM_A=D1"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[3]="DIM_B=D2"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[4]="DIM_C=D3"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[5]="DIM_D=D4"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[6]="DIM_E=D5"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[7]="DIM_F=D6"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[8]="ANG_S=A1"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[9]="ANG_T=A2"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[10]="ANG_U=A3"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[11]="ANG_V=A4"
BEND_TYPE_UNKNOWN[12]="DIM_TD=TD"
See also DIM_A ... DIM_G, DIM_H1, DIM_H2, DIM_I, DIM_J, DIM_K1, DIM_K2, DIM_O,
DIM_R, DIM_TD, DIM_X, DIM_Y (p. 443)
ANG_S, ANG_T, ANG_U, ANG_V (p. 431)
SHAPE (p. 459)
SHAPE_INTERNAL (p. 459)

Index
a b
access rights ................................................................ 75 background color ........................................................301
adding properties.......................................................... 98 bak files ........................................................................95
adding user-defined attributes...................................... 98 basic view
advanced line type and layer conversion ................... 268 height...................................................................303
defining your own line type mappings horizontal position ...............................................303
line ............................................................... 268 vertical position....................................................303
advanced options ....................................................... 285 width ....................................................................303
ail files .......................................................................... 89 batch file .......................................................................79
analysis models (CIS) ........................................199, 224 beam length................................................................174
anti-spyware ................................................................. 45 bin files .........................................................................90
applications ................................................................ 296 bolt assemblies...........................................................134
ASCII bolt assembly catalog .................................................134
exporting ............................................................. 234 viewing or modifying............................................137
importing .....................................................206, 211 bolt catalog .................................................................134
assdb.db....................................................................... 91 exporting..............................................................141
asterisk ....................................................................... 308 importing..............................................................141
AutoConnection.......................................................... 151 importing part of ..................................................144
changing a connection ........................................ 155 merging ...............................................................141
connecting built-in members ............................... 313 modifying .............................................................135
restrictions........................................................... 153 saving ..................................................................137
rules .................................................................... 159 upgrading to new version ....................................141
setup ................................................................... 152 viewing ................................................................135
tolerance ............................................................. 300 bolt length calculation .................................................146
UDL ..................................................................... 300 bolt length rounding ....................................................304
when to use........................................................... 47 bolt mark contents
AutoDefaults............................................................... 151 size ..................................................... 305, 385, 391
rules .................................................................... 159 bolts
setup ................................................................... 156 catalog.................................................................134
when to use........................................................... 47 importing catalog .................................................141
AutoDrawings ............................................................. 113 importing part of catalog......................................144
AutoDrawings wizard files length...................................................................146
creating ............................................................... 106 upgrading catalog to new version........................141
automating detailing ..................................................... 45 Bus
Autosave ...................................................................... 48 importing..............................................................205
error....................................................................... 50 BVBS export ...............................................................240
file location ............................................................ 49 by_number.ail .............................................................102
folder ................................................................... 301
keeping files .......................................................... 50
setting interval ....................................................... 49
usernames ............................................................ 50

c color
background..........................................................301
column
c/c format.................................................................... 307 vertically in drawings ...........................................407
CAD Combining properties .................................................162
exporting models................................................. 229 component description files ..........................................86
import file types ................................................... 200 connecting side symbol ..............................................313
importing ............................................................. 200 Connection Browser ...................................................155
Calma .................................................................201, 229 connection properties files..........................................157
catalog export files ..................................................... 143 accessing ............................................................157
editing.................................................................. 144 saving ..................................................................157
catalogs ........................................................................ 42 content type ................................................................423
a closer look at the export file ............................. 143 conversion files
bolt and assembly introduction............................ 134 CIS examples ......................................................227
common features and processes ........................ 115 creating................................................................192
difference between Update and OK .................... 117 in..........................................................................192
editing export files ............................................... 144 locating ................................................................193
for advanced users.............................................. 143 samples ...............................................................193
material introduction............................................ 130 troubleshooting....................................................193
overview .............................................................. 115 where to save ......................................................193
profile introduction............................................... 117 copying
reinforcing bar introduction.................................. 142 multi-user models ..................................................64
rules in profile catalog ......................................... 118 creating
saving a modified catalog.................................... 116 conversion files....................................................192
units used in import and export ........................... 145 cross sections......................................................123
which catalog am I using?................................... 116 customer-specific initializarion...............................83
chamfer NC files................................................................174
accuracy......................................................307, 315 Peddimat files......................................................176
length accuracy ................................................... 307 shortcuts................................................................83
change symbol ........................................................... 346 standard files .......................................................106
changing the language of the user interface .............. 103 cross sections
changing the NC folder............................................... 173 creating................................................................123
changing user-defined attributes .................................. 99 deleting from catalog ...........................................125
checking multi-user databases..................................... 75 modifying .............................................................124
CIMsteel customizing...................................................................98
database name ................................................... 310 AutoDrawings wizard files ...................................106
database path ..................................................... 310 connections ...........................................................46
exporting analysis models................................... 224 creating standard files .........................................106
exporting manufacturing models ......................... 226 interface.................................................................51
express file .......................................................... 310 message files ......................................................102
password.....................................................310, 338 modeling................................................................46
CIS other properties files............................................106
exporting analysis models................................... 224 parametric profiles...............................................104
exporting manufacturing models ......................... 226 properties ..............................................................98
importing ............................................................. 199 toolbars..................................................................51
clash check user-defined fields in templates...........................100
color .................................................................... 311
cloud
arc width.............................................................. 296
CNC............................................................................ 167
cnv files ................................................................90, 192

d editing
catalog export files...............................................144
connection properties ..........................................158
dat files .........................................................................86 drawings in multi-user mode..................................73
data files and modeling tools ........................................87 EJE .............................................................................234
db1................................................................................95 ELiPLAN
db2................................................................................95 overview...................................................... 216, 263
defaults.zxt......................................................... 156, 158 env_global_default.ini ...................................................81
deleting environment variables
cross sections from catalog .................................125 see variables..........................................................80
material grades from catalog ...............................133 error messages
unnecessary ..........................................................75 in multi-user mode .................................................65
detailing Eureka LPM
automating.............................................................45 importing ..............................................................216
dg files ..........................................................................96 executable.....................................................................91
DGN............................................................................271 export
exporting 3D ........................................................221 basics...................................................................187
supported objects ................................................277 overview...............................................................187
diameter prefix ............................................................304 export files
dimension point change symbol .................................346 from catalog .........................................................143
dimensions Export rebar BVBS (78) ..................................... 240, 242
extension origin offset..........................................319 Export Unitechnik (79)
disabling variables ........................................................81 Data .....................................................................263
display adaptor Main .....................................................................248
optimizing performance .........................................54 Reinforcement .....................................................259
dproc files .....................................................................92 TS ........................................................................257
drawing files..................................................................73 Unitechnik configuration ......................................253
deleting unnecessary.............................................75 exporting
drawing position on screen.........................................333 3D ............................................................... 219, 221
drawings ASCII files ............................................................234
exporting..............................................................266 bolt catalog ..........................................................141
in multi-user mode .................................................73 BVBS ...................................................................238
DSTV ................................................................. 174, 202 CAD models.........................................................229
converting to DXF................................................176 CIMsteel analysis models ....................................224
exporting..............................................................223 CIMsteel manufacturing models ..........................226
importing..............................................................203 different................................................................219
DSTV connection properties.........................................89 different formats...................................................190
DSTV.bat ....................................................................176 drawings ..............................................................266
dstv.lis...........................................................................89 DSTV ...................................................................223
DWG ...........................................................................271 ELiPLAN ..............................................................264
DWG/DXF files FEM models.........................................................222
importing..............................................................199 IFC .......................................................................234
DXF.............................................................................271 materials ..............................................................134
exporting 3D ........................................................219 MIS ......................................................................233
file size.................................................................346 model dump .........................................................237
DXF (NC) ....................................................................175 part of profile catalog ...........................................128
profile catalog ......................................................128
SDNF ...................................................................230
e STAAD.................................................................222
to..........................................................................219
to other sofware ...................................................190
ECP ............................................................................234 Unitechnik ............................................................243
edge distance ...............................................................43

f h
FabTrol/KISS.............................................................. 233 hard ............................................................................181
FEM hidden.........................................................................268
exporting ............................................................. 222 HLI ..................................................................... 201, 229
import file types ................................................... 202 hole marks
importing ............................................................. 202 size ..................................................... 347, 386, 391
yield stress in import ........................................... 205 size of slotted holes............................ 353, 386, 392
file types and function................................................... 85 holes
filter slotted hole dimension.........................................335
in catalogs ........................................................... 116
filtering
separator ............................................................. 341 i
filtering out parts in tables .......................................... 423
firm folder ...............................................................42, 96 IFC
fittings affect NC ......................................................... 174 exporting..............................................................234
flat bars...............................................................108, 308 import
designation.......................................................... 403 basics ..................................................................187
setting the prefix.................................................. 341 overview ..............................................................187
thickness tolerance ............................................. 342 import tools .................................................................194
tolerance ............................................................. 342 importing
fltprops.inp.................................................................. 108 ASCII .......................................................... 206, 211
folders........................................................................... 92 bolt catalog ..........................................................141
firm ........................................................................ 97 Bus ......................................................................205
model .................................................................... 95 CAD models ........................................................200
project ................................................................... 97 changed objects ..................................................197
search order .......................................................... 94 CIS ......................................................................199
structure ................................................................ 93 different formats ......................................... 188, 194
system................................................................... 96 DSTV...................................................................203
template ................................................................ 97 DWG/DXF files ....................................................199
font ELiPLAN..............................................................217
default ................................................................. 316 Eureka LPM.........................................................216
default font size ................................................... 316 FEM models ........................................................202
font height ........................................................... 396 from other software .................................... 188, 194
for cut symbol...................................................... 315 materials..............................................................134
for dimension....................................................... 319 MicasPlus ............................................................216
for DXF................................................................ 338 model dump.........................................................206
for grid text .......................................................... 344 models, overview.................................................195
for reports............................................................ 373 part of bolt catalog...............................................144
size in .................................................................. 397 profile catalog ......................................................129
fonts.............................................................................. 91 profiles from previous versions............................129
framing conditions ...................................................... 152 re-importing models.............................................197
SDNF...................................................................201
g S-Frame ..............................................................216
STAAD ................................................................204
Stan 3d ................................................................204
gage format ................................................................ 306 Steelfab ...............................................................215
GOL format................................................................. 342 inches
grade .......................................................................... 132 disabling ..............................................................381
grids symbol in dimensions ..........................................294
overall dimension ................................................ 343 symbol in welds ...................................................294

initialization ............................................................ 80, 81 material types
initialization file..............................................................79 adding to material catalog....................................132
customer-specific initializarion...............................83 materials
including other initialization files ............................83 adding material grades ........................................132
inp .................................................................................85 adding material types...........................................132
interface adding user-defined attributes .............................131
customizing............................................................51 catalog .................................................................130
Iteration.......................................................................163 deleting material grades ......................................133
exporting and importing .......................................134
l of profiles .............................................................119
user-defined symbols...........................................133
matexp_cis.cnv ...........................................................227
lay .................................................................................92 menus
layers creating user-defined menu ...................................53
in drawings ..........................................................266 merging
legend_text.fields........................................................100 bolt catalog ..........................................................141
line type mapping........................................................268 profile catalog ......................................................128
line width............................................................ 302, 353 messages......................................................................89
lis files ...........................................................................90 MicasPlus
lock attribute .................................................................76 importing ..............................................................216
log ...............................................................................113 MicroSAS ....................................................................222
log files........................................................................110 MIS
access part pop-up menu ....................................114 export file types....................................................233
direct access to parts from log.............................114 exporting ..............................................................233
drawing history ....................................................113 list file extensions.................................................234
list of ....................................................................110 model dump
numbering history ....................................... 111, 113 exporting ..............................................................237
of CAD import ......................................................200 importing ..............................................................206
of SDNF import........................................... 200, 201 modeling
viewing.................................................................114 in multi-user mode .................................................67
modeling tools
when ......................................................................46
m modifying
bolt assemblies ....................................................137
bolt catalog ..........................................................135
machine ......................................................................167 cross sections ......................................................124
macro............................................................................44 material catalog ...................................................130
maintenance procedures profile catalog ............................................. 117, 122
in multi-user mode .................................................74 Monorail ......................................................................202
manufacturing .............................................................167 moving
manufacturing models (CIS) .......................................226 views on screen ...................................................360
map to...........................................................................91 multi-drawings
marks view title ...................................................... 297, 342
line space ............................................................357 multinumbers ..............................................................403
space between elements.....................................355 available characters.............................................408
master models ..............................................................60 model prefix .........................................................361
saving ....................................................................67 number of characters...........................................360
matdb.bin ......................................................................91 numeric ................................................................405
material catalog ..........................................................130 order ....................................................................395
viewing or modifying ............................................130 prefix ....................................................................403
material grades view title ...............................................................362
adding to material catalog ...................................132
deleting ................................................................133

multi-user mode............................................................ 57 optimizing performance
active multi-users .................................................. 64 display adaptor ......................................................54
autosave................................................................ 62 solid buffer size .....................................................55
checking databases .............................................. 75 solids .....................................................................55
clearing locks ........................................................ 65 virtual memory.......................................................54
error messages ..................................................... 65 options ..........................................................................43
locking models ...................................................... 60 overlapping series ......................................................113
locks for drawings ................................................. 74
maintenance procedures....................................... 74
numbering .......................................................71, 72 p
overview ................................................................ 57
recommendations.................................................. 66 parametric profiles ......................................................117
saving in ..........................................................62, 67 part properties
saving model revision comments .......................... 63 predefining.............................................................46
system setup ......................................................... 61 PDMS .........................................................................232
when to use........................................................... 58 Peddimat ....................................................................176
multi-user models Peddimat for DOS ......................................................177
copying.................................................................. 64 Peddimat for Windows................................................177
shutting down ........................................................ 64 Peddimat standard tooling..........................................177
multi-user system ......................................................... 59 performance .................................................................54
compressing model files......................................403
n solid buffer size .....................................................55
permissions ..................................................................75
phases ..........................................................................42
NC .............................................................................. 167 plan...............................................................................60
DSTV................................................................... 168 Plantview ....................................................................201
formats ................................................................ 167 plate............................................................................183
NC file classifier.......................................................... 168 plotdev.bin ....................................................................92
NC files PML ............................................................................230
creating ............................................................... 174 polybeam length calculation .......................................306
nc1 files ........................................................................ 96 pop_mark_parts.inp....................................................179
nesting tasks .............................................................. 186 pop-mark settings .......................................................179
creating ............................................................... 183 pop-marks...................................................................178
editing.................................................................. 183 Pos1...4 ........................................................................43
nesting................................................................. 185 position number
north mark symbol...................................................... 364 in SDNF import....................................................201
hidden ................................................................. 346 preferences...................................................................43
in GA drawings.................................................... 343 prfexp_cis.cnv.............................................................227
scale.................................................................... 364 printer files ....................................................................92
scale in GA drawings .......................................... 343 printing
numbering to .........................................................................331
controlling access to numbering setup.................. 78 to file....................................................................331
in multi-user mode...........................................71, 72 privileges ......................................................................75
numbering history....................................................... 111 privileges.inp.................................................................76
numbering series.......................................................... 42 profdb.bin......................................................................91
profile............................................................................90
o profile catalog .............................................................117

exporting..............................................................128
exporting part of ..................................................128
objects.inp .................................................................. 101 importing..............................................................129
fields.................................................................... 102 merging ...............................................................128
viewing or modifying............................................122

profiles reference points
adding to catalog ........................................ 122, 125 size ......................................................................332
adding user-defined attributes to .........................127 reinforcement
catalog .................................................................117 in templates .........................................................490
cross section.......................................123, 124, 125 reinforcing bar
defining material ..................................................119 bending ................................................................469
exporting catalog .................................................128 reports
exporting part of catalog ......................................128 of import...............................................................198
importing catalog .................................................129 on reinforcement..................................................490
importing from previous versions.........................129 revision
merging catalogs .................................................128 saving model revision comments...........................63
parametric............................................................117 revision control
standard...............................................................117 in import ...............................................................197
types of chamfer ..................................................124 rpt files ..........................................................................92
user-defined.........................................................117 rule groups ..................................................................152
viewing or modifying ............................................117 creating ................................................................153
profitab.inp ........................................................... 90, 104 rule sets ......................................................................153
project folder .......................................................... 42, 96 creating ................................................................153
project setup editing ..................................................................154
catalogs .................................................................42 priority ..................................................................158
drawing properties .................................................48 rules ............................................................................159
firm and project folders ..........................................42 adding to catalog .................................................121
layouts and templates............................................48 deleting ................................................................121
numbering series ...................................................42 editing catalog rules.............................................121
options ...................................................................43 working with catalogs...........................................118
phases ...................................................................42 rules.zxt.......................................................................155
print devices ..........................................................48 running macros .............................................................44
reports and symbols ..............................................48
wizards ..................................................................48
properties s
adding....................................................................98
SACS ..........................................................................202
r save defaults...............................................................105
saved attributes.............................................................95
saving
reaction forces ............................................................165 bolt catalog ..........................................................137
rebar in multi-user mode .......................................... 62, 67
bending types ......................................................469 master models .......................................................67
recording macros ..........................................................44 modified catalogs.................................................116
reference line SCIA................................................................... 215, 229
in drawings ..........................................................330 screwdb.db....................................................................91
reference model objects SDNF ..........................................................................383
selecting ..................................................... 276, 277 exporting ..............................................................230
reference models ........................................................271 importing ..............................................................201
detecting changes ...............................................273 log files of import..................................................201
reference .............................................................377 position number in import ....................................201
reference model objects ......................................276 SDNF (PDMS) ................................................... 201, 230
selecting ..................................................... 276, 277 section.........................................................................380
updating...............................................................273 select filter
using one model ..................................................271 uses
using several models...........................................272 selection filter..................................................48
reference objects ........................................................271

selecting objects
reference model objects u
reference models .................................276, 277
S-Frame ..................................................................... 202 UDL ............................................................................165
importing ............................................................. 216 unfold_corner_ratios.inp .............................................107
shear force calculation ............................................... 165 unfolding parameters..................................................107
shortcuts Unitechnik export........................................................244
creating ................................................................. 83 Unitechnik export refenence.......................................247
defining keys units
reserved ......................................................... 53 converting............................................................313
reserved .............................................................. 419 in catalog import and export ................................145
shutting down multi-user models.................................. 64 updating
single-user vs multi-user .............................................. 58 reference models.................................................273
slotted hole mark contents User Field 1 ..................................................................99
size..............................................................386, 392 user.ini ................................................................... 80, 81
solid buffer size .......................................................... 392 user-defined attributes
optimizing performance......................................... 55 adding....................................................................98
STAAD adding to material grade......................................131
exporting ............................................................. 222 user-defined profiles ...................................................117
importing ............................................................. 204 user-defined symbols
Staad .......................................................................... 202 for materials.........................................................133
stacked fractions ........................................................ 393 usernames....................................................................50
Stan 3d ....................................................................... 202 using Tekla Structures effectively.................................41
importing ............................................................. 204
standard files .............................................................. 105
standard profiles......................................................... 117 v
Steel 2000 .................................................................. 234
Steelfab
importing ............................................................. 215 variables .....................................................................285
stock sheet specification ............................................ 184 disabling ................................................................81
studs........................................................................... 139 setting....................................................................80
sym............................................................................... 91 viewing
system folder ................................................................ 96 bolt assemblies....................................................137
bolt catalog ..........................................................135
log files ................................................................114
t material catalog ...................................................130
profile catalog ............................................. 117, 122
viewing nesting results ...............................................186
table attributes....................................................423, 425 virtual memory
tables optimizing performance .........................................54
attributes ............................................................. 425
filtering parts........................................................ 423
Tekla Structures server ................................................ 59 w
TeklaStructures.ini........................................................ 81
TeklaStructuresNest................................................... 183
template attributes...................................................... 423 warning messages........................................................45
toolbars weld preparation .........................................................323
creating user-defined toolbar ................................ 52 weld symbols ..............................................................293
customizing ........................................................... 51 wizard files....................................................................92
tooling......................................................................... 177 interpreting ..........................................................106
tpl files .......................................................................... 92 working models.............................................................60
twin profile
conversion in import ............................................ 192

x y
XML ................................................................... 201, 232 yield stress
xsdb.xs..........................................................................95 in FEM import ......................................................205
xslib.db1........................................................................95
xslib.db2........................................................................95
xsr files..........................................................................96 z
zooming
original .................................................................339
tolerance ..............................................................370
zxt files ............................................................... 155, 158


Tekla Structure System - Tutorial

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tekla Structure System - Tutorial

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tekla Structures

Product version 14.0

© 2008 Tekla Corporation

1 Using Tekla Structures effectively......................................................... 41

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 3

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

3 Files and Folders ..................................................................................... 79

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 5

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

4 Catalogs ................................................................................................. 115

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 7

5 AutoConnection .................................................................................... 151

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 9

7 Import and export.................................................................................. 187

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 11

8 Variables ................................................................................................ 285

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 13

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 15

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 17

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 19

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 21

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 23

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 25

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 27

9 File extensions ...................................................................................... 415

10 Reserved shortcuts............................................................................... 419

11 Template attributes ............................................................................... 423

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 29

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 31

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 33

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

12 Reinforcing bar bending types............................................................. 469

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 35

• Conventions used in this guide (p. 38)

• Related guides (p. 39)

Additional help resources

Area office E-mail address

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 37

Please send any comments or suggestions about Tekla Structures documentation to

Conventions used in this guide

Filenames and folder paths appear in monospace.

38 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that is

TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0 39

40 TEKLA STRUCTURES 14.0

• Drawings and printers (p. 47)

• Autosave (p. 48)

• Customizing the interface (p. 51)

• Optimizing system performance (p. 54)